JP7087785B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game medium such as a ball enters the starting ball entry means while a symbol or the like is dynamically displayed (variable effect) by a display means such as a liquid crystal display device, a predetermined value is obtained. There is a case where the dynamic display related to the entry is suspended up to the number. Then, when the running dynamic display ends, the execution of the held unexecuted dynamic display starts.

In this dynamic display, when a special result other than the specific display result that can cause a big hit appears as part of the interest of the game, the symbol is changed again in the dynamic display, and the dynamic display is executed again. There is one that executes a pseudo-effect (so-called "pseudo-ream" effect) as if it was done, and at the same time, performs an effect of whether or not a specific display result appears again (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2015-134027

However, in the conventional gaming machine, the content of the dynamic display becomes monotonous, and the content of the production cannot be unexpected. Therefore, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game from the conventional gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the interest of gaming.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 is provided with a launching means for launching a game ball, a first ball entry means into which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter, and the launching means. A second ball entry means that allows the launched game ball to enter and is different from the first ball entry means, and an acquisition means that can acquire lottery information at least by entering the first ball entry means. A determination means that can be determined based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means, and a dynamic display that can execute dynamic display of identification information performed by the first display means based on the determination result by the determination means. A gaming machine comprising an execution means and capable of imparting a predetermined game value to a player when specific identification information appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means. A storage means capable of storing the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means and a first effect number information corresponding to the number of the lottery information stored in the storage means can be displayed up to a predetermined number. The two display means and the second effect number information display means capable of displaying the second effect number information different from the first effect number information in the second display means by entering the ball into the second ball entry means. In the dynamic display executing means, the specific identification information appears or the specific identification information appears by stopping all the identification information changed with the start of the dynamic display in the first display means . The first effect number information and the second effect determine whether or not the non-specific identification information, which is different from the specific identification information and cannot be given the predetermined game value and whose mode may change after the appearance, appears. The gaming machine can be executed as many times as the total number of numerical information, and the gaming machine can select the execution time of the dynamic display based on the lottery information stored in the storage means. After the lapse of the execution time selected by the execution time selection means, the mode of the non-specific identification information appearing can be changed in a situation where the lottery information is not stored in the storage means. It has a means of change.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, a launching means for launching a game ball, a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball launched by the launching means, and a gaming ball launched by the launching means. Is possible to enter a second ball, which is different from the first entry means, and at least the acquisition means capable of acquiring lottery information by entering the first entry means, and the acquisition means. A determination means capable of making a determination based on the lottery information and a dynamic display execution means capable of executing dynamic display of identification information performed in the first display means based on the determination result by the determination means. A gaming machine capable of imparting a predetermined gaming value to a player when specific identification information appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means, and the upper limit is a predetermined number. As a storage means capable of storing the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means, and a second display means capable of displaying the first effect number information corresponding to the number of the lottery information stored in the storage means. The second display means is provided with a second effect number information display means capable of displaying a second effect number information different from the first effect number information by entering the second ball entry means, and the dynamic. In the display executing means, the specific identification information appears or is different from the specific identification information by stopping all the identification information changed with the start of the dynamic display in the first display means . The total number of the first effect number information and the second effect number information is determined as to whether or not the non-specific identification information whose mode can be changed after the appearance cannot be given the predetermined game value. The game machine can execute the number of times corresponding to the above, and the gaming machine has an execution time selection means capable of selecting the execution time of the dynamic display based on the lottery information stored in the storage means, and the execution time selection. A post-lapse changing means capable of changing the mode of the non-specific identification information appearing in a situation where the lottery information is not stored in the storage means after the lapse of the execution time selected by the means is provided. ing. This has the effect of being able to suitably improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a schematic sectional drawing in the front view of the alternating distribution unit and a holding device. It is a schematic cross-sectional view in the side view of the alternating distribution unit and the holding device of line AA of FIG. 4, and (a) is the figure which showed the state which the sphere is holding in the holding device, ( In b), the holding state of the ball held in the holding device is released by the holding device solenoid being driven from the state of (a), and the ball flows down from the board return opening to the dummy winning opening. It is a figure which showed the state, (c) is the state which the tip part of the holding device opening / closing plate is tilted toward the passage side of the distribution ball opening, and the ball can be accepted into the holding device from the state of (b). It is a figure shown, and (d) is a figure which showed the state which the ball which flowed into the distribution ball opening from the state of (c) is guided into the holding device by the holding device opening / closing body. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which showed the structure of various counters, the holding ball storage area, and the holding ball execution area schematically. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot random number table, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot type table. It is a figure which showed the example of the hold number table schematically. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the A table of the stop pattern table, (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the B table of the stop pattern table, and (c) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the B table of the stop pattern table. , Is a figure schematically showing an example of the C table of the stop pattern table. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the D table of the stop pattern table, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the E table of the stop pattern table. It is a figure which showed the example of the variation pattern table for loss schematically. It is a figure which showed the example of the variation pattern table for a big hit schematically. It is a figure which showed an example of the effect time of each effect element of the variable effect or "slump effect" executed in each game situation. It is a timing chart showing the relationship between the fluctuation time and the extension time and the "slump effect", (a) shows the "slump effect" at the time of loss, and (b) shows the "slump effect" at the time of reach. It shows the "slump effect". It is a block diagram which mainly shows the electric structure of a voice lamp control device and a display control device. It is a figure which showed the example of the pending change table schematically. It is a figure which showed schematically the structure of the hold display information storage area. It is a figure which showed the structure of the slump effect storage area schematically. It is a figure which showed the example of the slump effect table schematically. In (a), the variation time of the variation effect and the effect time of the "slump effect" when the variation effect of the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is acquired based on the start winning in the "slump state" are set. It is a timing chart shown, and (b) shows the variation time of the variation effect and the effect time of the "slump effect" when the variation effect of various reach is acquired based on the start winning in the "slump state". It is a timing chart shown. (A) is the variation time of the variation effect and the "slump effect" when the variation effect of the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is acquired based on the start winning prize during the "slump effect" other than the extended time. It is a timing chart showing the effect time of, and (b) is the variation time of the variation effect when various reach variation effects are acquired based on the start winning prize during the "slump effect" other than the extension time. It is a timing chart showing the effect time of "slump effect" and the effect time of "slump effect". (A) is the variation time of the variation effect and the "slump effect" when the variation effect of the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is acquired based on the start winning prize in the "slump effect" based on the extension time. It is a timing chart showing the effect time of, and (b) is the variation time of the variation effect when various reach variation effects are acquired based on the start winning prize in the "slump effect" based on the extension time. It is a timing chart showing the effect time of "slump effect" and the effect time of "slump effect". It is a figure which showed schematically the structure of the hold information storage area and the execution information storage area. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the holding device control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which showed the dummy winning process which is executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the hold display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the symbol setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the confirmation setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. (A) is a diagram showing a state in which the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation" is executed in the "slump effect" in the third symbol display device, and the state just before the chance eye development symbol appears. Yes, (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the Gase chance symbol is stopped in the staging element of "pseudo-variation" in "Gase pseudo-ream 1" from the state of (a), and (c) is a diagram showing (b). It is a figure showing the state in which the reserved symbol is shifted from the state of)) and the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation" which is "Gase pseudo-ream 2" is executed, and (d) is a state in which "Gase" is executed from the state of (c). It is a figure which showed the state which the Gase chance eye symbol stopped in the staging element of "pseudo-variation" in "pseudo-ream 2", and (e) is the figure which shifts the reserved symbol from the state of (d), and "Gase pseudo-ream 3". It is a figure showing the state in which the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation" is executed, and (f) shows the effect element of "pseudo-variation" in "pseudo-variation 3" from the state of (e). It is a figure which showed the state which the eye design stopped, and a series of "slump effect" was completed. (A) is a state in which the "high-speed fluctuation (long)" effect element or the "high-speed variation (short)" effect element is executed in the variation effect or the "slump effect" in the third symbol display device. It is a figure showing the state just before the chance eye development symbol appears, and (b) shows the state where the first chance eye symbol appears in the staging element of "pseudo-variation" from the state of (a). It is a figure shown, (c) is a figure which showed the state which the staging element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" that all symbols fluctuate again from the state of (b) is executed, and (d) is a figure which showed. , (C) is a diagram showing a state in which the second chance symbol appears after the effect element of "pseudo-variation" is executed from the state of (c), and (e) is a diagram showing the entire state again from the state of (d). It is a figure which showed the state which the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" that the symbol fluctuates is executed, and (f) shows the reach formation symbol in the effect element of "pseudo-variation" from the state of (e). It is a figure which showed the state just before appearing. (A) is a diagram showing a state in which the "first development possibility effect" is executed in the "slump effect" in the third symbol display device, and (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the "first development possibility effect" is executed, and (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the "second development possibility effect" is executed from the state of (a). It is a figure which showed the state which "development possibility production" is executed, and (c) is the figure which showed the state which "third development possibility effect" is executed from the state of (b). (A) is a state in which the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" is executed in the "slump effect" in the third symbol display device, and shows a state just before the chance eye development symbol appears. (B) is a diagram showing whether or not the chance symbol is stopped in the staging element of "pseudo-variation" from the state of (a), and (c) is a diagram showing (b). It is a figure which showed the state which the Gasechance eye symbol appeared in the effect element of "pseudo-variation" from the state of (d), and (d) is the state where the effect element of "pseudo-variation" is completed from the state of (c). It is a figure which showed the state which suggested that the fluctuation effect ends by the appearance of the Gasechance pattern, and (e) is the state which "third development possibility effect" is executed from the state of (d). (F) is a diagram showing a state in which the "third development possibility / failure effect" has succeeded in developing from the state of (e) and a chance symbol has appeared. (A) shows a state in which the effect element of "pseudo-variation" is executed in the "slump effect" in the third symbol display device, and the chance eye development symbol is stopped in the main display area. It is a figure, (b) is a figure which showed the state which the chance eye symbol appeared in the staging element of "pseudo-variation" from the state of (a), (c) is a figure which showed the state again from the state of (b). It is a figure which shows the state which the effect element of "pseudo-variation" is executed after all the symbols have changed, and is just before the reach formation symbol appears, and (d) is the figure of (c). It is a figure showing the state in which the reach forming symbol appears from the state, the sub display area and the cockpit display area are erased, and the reach forming symbol is enlarged. FIG. It is a figure which showed the state which the effect element of "Which da reach" is executed, and (f) is the figure which showed the state which "big hit symbol" appeared from the state of (e).

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 47, a first embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a front view of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 3) having a large number of nails and winning openings (entrance openings) 63, 65a, 77a, 78a and the like is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 7) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached. The details of the game board 13 will be described later in FIG.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as the opening / closing axis of the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 7) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the left side of the upper surface of the upper plate 17 when viewed from the front.

The frame button 22 is a button that is pressed and operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3) described later. Further, the frame button 22 is an operation button for allowing the player to select the effect content in the notice display executed in the variation display of the third symbol (hereinafter, the variation display of the third symbol is referred to as “variation effect”). Also used as.

Further, the variable effect is an effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3) described later, and as described later, a ball fired in the front area of the game board 13 is a specific winning opening (see FIG. 3). For example, it is executed when a prize is won in the left special figure winning opening 77a or the right special drawing winning opening 78a described later. See FIGS. 3 and 4), and the symbol (the third symbol described later) is changed for a predetermined time. After that, it is an effect of presenting the result (whether or not it is a big hit) of the lottery performed for the prize to the player by the combination of the symbols displayed as stopped.

Further, the stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3), which will be described later, are unified. In this pachinko machine 10, the “city stage” and “sky” are used. There are three stages, "Stage" and "Island Stage". The above-mentioned variable effects and various effects such as "reach display" executed during the variable effects are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage.

Further, the "reach display" refers to a display one step before the "big hit display" indicating that a big hit occurs in the variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3) described later. .. Specifically, the third symbol of the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 (see FIG. 6), which will be described later, stops at the same symbol, and the middle symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 6) does not stop yet and continues to fluctuate. It means the state of being.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the "reach display" is roughly classified into one unit element constituting the "normal reach" effect (hereinafter, one unit element constituting the effect is referred to as "effect element"). It is developed and executed from the "normal reach" production element, and is developed and executed from the "super reach" production element, which has a higher expectation of a big hit than the "normal reach" production element, and the "normal reach" production element. "Which is it?" Which is developed from the "special reach" production element, which has a higher expectation of big hit than the "super reach" production element, and the "pseudo-variation" production element or the "development possibility production" production element, which will be described later. The production element of "reach" is prepared.

The stage change is made during the period when the fluctuation effect is not performed (that is, during the demo display), or during the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation" in which the third symbol is changed at high speed invisible to the player in the variation effect. This is performed when the frame button 22 is pressed by the player. Then, each time the frame button 22 is operated, the change is repeated in the order of "city stage"-> "empty stage"-> "island stage"-> "city stage"->. Immediately after the power is turned on, the "city stage" is set as the initial stage.

Further, when the effect element of "normal reach" is started in the variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3) described later, the effect element of "normal reach" is changed to the effect element of "super reach". When developing into a "special reach" effect element, the selection screen of the "super reach" effect element or the "special reach" effect element is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the "normal reach" effect element. It may be configured as follows.

Specifically, on the selection screen, a plurality of candidates that can be selected as the effect element of "super reach" or the effect element of "special reach" are displayed, and while the selection screen is displayed, the frame button 22 is displayed. It is configured so that the selected candidate is changed when the player presses it. Then, based on the production candidate selected when developing into the production element of "super reach" or the production element of "special reach", the production element of "super reach" or the production element of "special reach" is determined. According to the decision, the effect element of "super reach" is executed by the third symbol display device 81 as the effect element of "special reach".

In the first embodiment, the frame button 22 is configured as a button to be pressed, but instead of the frame button 22, the player can use the pachinko machine 10 in a predetermined direction (for example, with respect to the pachinko machine 10). It may be configured by an operation lever that can be tilted forward, backward, right and left). Then, the effect stage may be selected and changed, or the effect element of "super reach" or the effect element of "special reach" may be determined based on the direction in which the operation lever is tilted.

Further, although the frame button 22 is configured to be arranged on the front side side view of the upper plate 17, the arrangement position of the frame button 22 may be any arrangement position as long as it can be pressed by the player. It may be arranged, for example, on the upper surface side of the upper plate 17, or may be arranged in the vicinity (upper surface or side surface) of the lower plate 50 described later.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined "reach display", and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, lighting portions 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as a light emitting diode (Light Emitting Diode; hereinafter abbreviated as “LED”) are provided. ..

In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and at the time of jackpot or "reach display", the built-in LEDs are lit or blinked to cause each illumination portion 29 to 33. Lights up or flashes to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the "reach display" just before the jackpot is in progress. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 in front view, a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying the time when the prize ball is being paid out and the time when an error occurs is provided.

A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (see FIG. 3). ) Is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, acrylonitrile butadiene styrene (Acrylonitrile Butadiene Style) in which the region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33 is chrome-plated in order to bring out more brilliance, hereinafter abbreviated as “ABS”. .) A resin plating member 36 is attached.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit, not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball lending unit 40 is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area where the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit.

A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 7). The touch sensor 51a for permitting the drive of the operation handle 51, the push button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 by the change of the electric resistance. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) to detect.

When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor, which changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening thereof is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "dollar box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

Next, as shown in FIG. 2, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board has a micro-processing unit (hereinafter abbreviated as "MPU") as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, and various lottery. A random number generator used for the above, a clock pulse generation circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. are installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the emission control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. It is equipped with a case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and dispenses balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 7). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 7). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, a specific configuration of the game board 13 and a detailed configuration of the alternating distribution unit 71 and the holding device 73 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 to 5. First, as shown in FIG. 3, in the game board 13, a large number of nails, windmills, rails 61, 62, and balls for ball guidance are awarded to a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view. General winning opening 63 that can obtain a predetermined prize ball, variable winning device 65 that is opened when a big hit of the third symbol occurs, left special drawing winning opening 77a and right special that triggers the lottery of the third symbol. Alternate distribution unit 71 having a winning opening 78a and a holding device 73 (see FIGS. 4 and 5) described later, a second entry opening 67 that triggers a lottery for a second symbol, a third symbol display device 81, and a third symbol display device 81. It is configured by assembling a variable display device unit 80 or the like having a second symbol display device 83 or the like, and its peripheral edge portion is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12.

The general winning opening 63, the variable winning device 65, the alternating distribution unit 71, the second entry opening 67, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the game board 13 It is fixed with wood screws from the front side of the. Further, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and the fired ball is arranged) formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by being divided by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70. The area where it flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 7) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 3) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage again. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 3) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center (hereinafter, the act of firing a ball with the force of hitting the return rubber 69 and passing the ball through the right side of the front view of the variable display device unit 80 is referred to as "right-handed". , The act of passing the fired ball through the left side of the front view of the variable display device unit 80 is referred to as "left-handed"). In the first embodiment, in the left-handed game, the ball can enter the alternate distribution unit 71, while it is difficult for the ball to enter the second entrance 67 and the variable winning device 65. .. Further, in the right-handed game, the ball can enter the second entrance 67 and the variable winning device 65, while it is difficult for the ball to enter the alternate distribution unit 71. The specific configuration of the alternating distribution unit 71 will be described later.

Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is a base between the lower right tip portion of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip portion of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

A first symbol display device 37 provided with a plurality of LEDs 37a as light emitting means and a 7-segment display 37b is arranged on the upper right side of the front view (upper right side of FIG. 3) of the game area. The first symbol display device 37 is a variable display of the first symbol according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 7) described later (hereinafter, the variable display of the first symbol is referred to as “dynamic display”). At the same time, the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed.

The plurality of LEDs 37a are reserved balls, which are the number of balls (reserved balls) whose dynamic display has not been executed among the balls that have won (winned) in the left special figure winning opening 77a and the right special drawing winning opening 78a, which will be described later. The number is indicated by the lighting state. Further, the number of rounds of the jackpot and the error display are also indicated by the lighting state of the LED 37a corresponding to the state. The LED 37a is configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. ..

The 7-segment display 37b is composed of two 7-segment LEDs on the left and right, and a dynamic display showing the determination result of the first symbol is executed. Specifically, the two 7-segment LEDs have a variable time (movement) determined based on the winning of the left special figure winning opening 77a or the right special drawing winning opening 78a provided in the alternate distribution unit 71 described later. After the dynamic display (in the first embodiment, one segment in the center of the 7-segment LED blinks alternately) until the target display time elapses, the stop display is performed with a symbol indicating the determination result. Then, when the judgment result is a loss, a "-" symbol is displayed in which only the central one segment is lit and displayed, and when the judgment result is a big hit, "3" and "7" corresponding to the big hit are displayed. ] And other symbols are displayed.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, whether or not a ball is hit into the left special figure winning opening 77a or the right special drawing winning opening 78a is determined to be a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, that is the case. It also determines the type of jackpot. As the jackpot type determined here, "15R probability variation jackpot", "15R normal jackpot", or "2R probability variation jackpot" is prepared.

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the "probability fluctuation state" after the jackpot of 15 rounds. In the first embodiment, when the "15R probability variation jackpot" is won, the same odd-numbered symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 6) of the third symbol display device 81.

The "2R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the "probability fluctuation state" after the jackpot of 2 rounds. In the first embodiment, when the "2R probability variation jackpot" is won, the predetermined third symbol combination (for example, "341") is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and then the jackpot shifts to the "time shortened state" and becomes the "time shortened state" during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). That is. In the first embodiment, when the "15R normal jackpot" is won, the same even-numbered symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 6) of the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, the "probability fluctuation state" refers to a high probability state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during a so-called probability change, in other words, a gaming state in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. That is. In the high probability state (during probabilistic change, probabilistic change state) in the first embodiment, the hit probability of the variation display of the second symbol described later (hereinafter, the variation display of the second symbol is referred to as "variable display") is increased, which will be described later. The electric accessory 79 provided on the right side side of the alternate distribution unit 71 tends to be in an open state, and as a result, the ball easily enters the right side special drawing winning opening 78a in the alternate distribution unit 71. Including state.

On the other hand, the "normal game state" refers to a time of a low probability state that is not a "probability fluctuation state" or a "time reduction state", and the jackpot probability is higher than that of a normal state, that is, a "probability fluctuation state". Is low. In addition, the "time reduction state (so-called time reduction state)" is a low probability state in which the jackpot probability is the same as in the "normal game state", and only the hit probability of the variable display of the second symbol is increased, so that " Similar to the "probability fluctuation state", this refers to a game state in which the electric accessory 79, which will be described later, is in an open state and the ball can easily enter the right side special figure winning opening 78a.

In addition, instead of changing the hit probability of the variable display of the second symbol, the time for the electric accessory 79 attached to the right special figure winning opening 78a to open or one hit according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The number of times the electric accessory 79 is opened may be changed. Specifically, in the "time shortened state", the opening time of the electric accessory 79 attached to the right side special figure winning opening 78a may be longer than in the cases other than the "time shortened state", or the motor may be operated once. The number of times that the accessory 79 is opened may be increased more than in the case other than the "time reduction state". Further, in the "time shortened state", at least two of increasing the hit probability of the variable display of the second symbol, lengthening the opening time of the electric accessory 79, and increasing the number of times of opening the electric accessory 79 are increased. You may try to do one at the same time.

At the lower center of the game area, an alternating distribution unit 71 is arranged so that a ball flowing down the game area can enter. The alternate distribution unit 71 mainly includes a distribution ball opening 72 in which a ball flowing down the left side of the variable display device unit 80 in the game area (that is, a ball in a left-handed game) can enter. A holding device 73 (see FIG. 4) in which a ball that has entered the distribution slot 72 (see FIG. 4) enters and is held, and a board return in which the ball held by the holding device 73 is discharged. Alternate distribution of the opening 74, the dummy winning opening 75 into which the ball discharged from the board return opening 74 can flow in, and the ball that entered the distribution entry port 72 and did not enter the holding device 73. A distribution device 76 (see FIG. 4) that alternately distributes to the left side route 77 or the right side route 78 (both see FIG. 4) in the unit 71, and a ball distributed to the left side route 77 by the distribution device 76 can enter. It is composed of a left side special figure winning opening 77a, a right side special drawing winning opening 78a in which balls distributed to the right path 78 by the distribution device 76 can enter, and the above-mentioned electric accessory 79.

When a ball wins in the left special drawing winning opening 77a or the right special drawing winning opening 78a provided in the alternating distribution unit 71, the special drawing winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on. , The special figure winning opening switch is turned on, so that the big hit of the first symbol is drawn by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 7), and the dynamic display of the first symbol according to the lottery result is the first symbol. It is shown by the 7-segment display 37b of the display device 37, and the variation effect of the third symbol is executed by the third symbol display device 81. The left side special figure winning opening 77a and the right side special drawing winning opening 78a are also one of the winning openings in which three balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins.

Here, with reference to FIG. 4, the configuration of the alternate distribution unit 71 and the holding device 73 of the first embodiment will be specifically described. FIG. 4 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the alternating distribution unit 71 and the holding device 73 in a front view. Note that, in FIG. 4, for convenience of explanation, the composition excludes the parts on the front side of the alternating distribution unit 71 and the holding device 73, and is a schematic representation of the internal structure of the alternating distribution unit 71 and the holding device 73. The alternating distribution unit 71 and the holding device 73 are represented by a cross-sectional view, and each member (part) constituting them will be described.

As described above, in the alternate distribution unit 71, the holding device 73 for holding the ball that has entered the sorting ball opening 72 and the ball that has flowed down without being held by the holding device 73 can be sorted. A device 76 is provided. The ball held in the holding device 73 is configured to be able to enter the dummy winning opening 75, and the ball distributed by the sorting device 76 can be entered into the left special drawing winning opening 77a or the right special drawing winning opening 78a. It is configured.

The distribution ball opening 72 of the alternate distribution unit 71 is a path through which a ball launched by left-handedness and flowing down the game area can pass when flowing into the alternate distribution unit 71. The ball that has flowed into the mouth 72 is configured to be guided to the holding device 73 or the sorting device 76 provided on the downstream side (lower direction of the alternating sorting unit 71). It should be noted that the distribution ball opening 72 is configured so that a ball that is shot right-handed and has passed through the game area does not flow into the ball.

The holding device 73 is a device for holding (storing) only one ball that has flowed into the sorting ball opening 72, is a downstream side of the sorting ball opening 72, and is an upstream side of the sorting device 76. Is located in. The ball that has flowed into the distribution slot 72 is configured to be held by the holding device 73 before reaching the sorting device 76 if the ball is not held by the holding device 73. When the ball is held by the holding device 73, it passes through the front side of the holding device 73 and flows down to the sorting device 76, and the flowing direction is sorted by the sorting device 76. When a predetermined condition is satisfied (in the first embodiment, when the "slump effect" is executed), the ball held by the holding device 73 is discharged from the holding device 73, and is discharged from the board surface return port 74. , It is configured to flow (win) into the dummy winning opening 75 provided directly below the board surface returning opening 74.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is used so as not to fall into a situation where the third symbol display device 81 does not execute the variation effect of the third symbol (hereinafter referred to as “slump”) as much as possible. The left side special figure winning opening 77a or the left side special drawing winning opening 77a for the first time from the situation where the variation effect is not performed (in the first embodiment, after "5 seconds" or more have elapsed after the variation effect is stopped. Hereinafter, the situation is referred to as "slump state"). When the variation effect of the third symbol is executed based on the winning of the right special figure winning opening 78a, the effect is longer (period) than the execution time of the acquired variation effect, and the acquired variation effect. The effect element (hereinafter, referred to as “slump effect”) having a number of executions larger than the number of executions of the above is configured to be executed by the third symbol display device 81. With this configuration, the effect time performed by the third symbol display device 81 can be lengthened, and the number of effects can be increased to reduce the situation where the effect is not performed by the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to prevent the player from awakening.

In this case, the number of times the variation effect corresponding to the acquired start prize is executed is larger than the number of times the effect is executed (hereinafter, the effect constitutes the "slump effect", and the variation is stopped from the start of the variation of the third symbol (pseudo stop). The unit of the production composed of the combination of multiple production elements up to (including) may be referred to as the "production unit"), so that the number of production units of the "slump production" is executed. It is necessary to display a dummy hold display in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6), which will be described later, to make the player think that the variable staging is being executed. Therefore, in order to create the above situation, the ball held in the holding device 73 at the timing before the execution of the "slump effect" is an alternating distribution unit having a left special figure winning opening 77a and a right special drawing winning opening 78a. In some cases, the dummy winning opening 75 provided in the 71 is made to win a prize, and the dummy hold display is referred to as the hold display of the actual variable effect (hereinafter, the hold display of the actual variable effect is referred to as the "main hold display") based on the winning. It is displayed in the cockpit display area Db with the same display as (there is). Then, by digesting the dummy hold display when the "slump effect" that is additionally executed is executed, it is possible to make the player feel as if the variable effect is being executed.

It should be noted that a method of executing a plurality of effects in the variable effect corresponding to one hold display, such as the effect element of "pseudo-variation" described later, is also conceivable, but in that case, the player who is accustomed to the game may ask. When looking at the production element of "pseudo fluctuation" that is executed when the number of this hold display is small, it is inferred that "the time of the fluctuation production is only forcibly lengthened", and rather it is a factor that arouses the game. It has become. Therefore, by executing the "slump effect" with the appearance and digestion of the dummy hold display as in the first embodiment, the effect as if the variable effect is being executed is simply changed. It is difficult to infer that the production time is extended, and it is possible to prevent the player from awakening.

Here, with reference to FIG. 5, the operation mode of the holding device 73 and the behavior of the ball when the ball flows in, is held (stored), and is discharged from the holding device 73 will be described. 5A and 5B are schematic cross-sectional views of the alternating distribution unit 71 and the holding device 73 of FIG. 4 in a side view, and FIG. 5A shows a ball held in the holding device 73. 5 (b) is a diagram showing a state, in which the ball held in the holding device 73 is brought into the excited state from the state of FIG. It is a figure which showed the state which was discharged and flowed down to a dummy winning opening 75, and FIG. FIG. 5 (d) is a diagram showing a state in which a ball can be received into the holding device 73 by tilting to the side (front side of the pachinko machine 10), and FIG. 5 (d) shows a distribution ball from the state of FIG. 5 (c). It is a figure which showed the state which the ball which flowed into the mouth 72 is guided into the holding device 73 by the holding device opening / closing plate 73a. In addition, when the state of FIG. 5 (d) is reached, the state of FIG. 5 (a) is resumed, so that the states of FIGS. 5 (a) to 5 (d) are configured to loop. ..

First, as shown in FIG. 5A, the holding device 73 mainly includes a holding device opening / closing plate 73a, a holding ball holding portion 73b, a rotating shaft portion 73c, a rear wall 73d, and a lock piece 73e. It is composed of a holding device solenoid 73f and a holding ball detection switch 73g. Hereinafter, each of the above configurations will be described with reference to the movement of each configuration shown in FIGS. 5 (a) to 5 (d).

The holding device opening / closing plate 73a, the holding ball holding portion 73b, and the rotating shaft portion 73c are integrally formed thereof, so that the holding device opening / closing plate 73a and the holding ball holding portion 73b are perpendicular to each other in an L shape. In addition to being formed, the rotation shaft portion 73c is arranged at the connection portion (L-shaped corner position) between the holding device opening / closing plate 73a and the holding ball holding portion 73b. The rotating shaft portion 73c is configured to allow the holding device opening / closing plate 73a and the holding ball holding portion 73b to rotate in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10.

FIG. 5A shows a state in which one ball is held in the holding device 73. In this state, the holding device solenoid 73f is in a non-excited state (that is, off), and the holding portion lock portion 73e1 and the opening / closing plate extrusion portion 73e2 provided on the lock piece 73e connected to the holding device solenoid 73f are both rearward. The state of protruding from the wall 73d (hereinafter, the state in which the lock piece 73e (holding portion lock portion 73e1 and opening / closing plate extrusion portion 73e2) protrudes from the rear wall 73d is referred to as an “initial position”). When the lock piece 73e is in the initial position, the movement of the lock piece 73e is restricted by the holding device solenoid 73f.

The holding ball holding unit 73b is a portion for storing the ball in the holding device 73 when the ball flows into the holding device 73. When the ball flows into the holding device 73 while the tip end side of the holding device opening / closing plate 73a is tilted toward the passage side of the distribution ball opening 72 (that is, the holding device 73 is open), the holding device 73 is held. When the device solenoid 73f is in the non-driving state and the holding portion lock portion 73e1 is in the initial position, the ball is held on the upper surface of the holding ball holding portion 73b, and the holding state is maintained by the holding device solenoid 73f.

Specifically, when a ball is placed on the holding ball holding portion 73b, the holding ball holding portion 73b rotates due to the weight of the ball, and then the lower surface of the holding ball holding portion 73b locks the holding portion 73e of the lock piece 73e. It comes into contact with the upper surface of the portion 73e1, and the rotation of the holding ball holding portion 73b downward is restricted by the holding portion locking portion 73e1. That is, the holding ball holding portion 73b is pressed downward by the weight of the ball placed on the upper surface of the holding ball holding portion 73b in a state where the downward rotation is restricted by the holding portion locking portion 73e1. The holding ball holding portion 73b is maintained in a horizontal state, and the holding device opening / closing plate 73a integrally formed with the holding ball holding portion 73b is maintained in an upright state. As a result, the state in which the ball is housed in the space formed by the holding device opening / closing plate 73a, the upper surface of the holding ball holding portion 73b, the rear wall 73d, and the opening / closing plate extrusion portion 73e2 of the lock piece 73e is maintained. At the same time, the standing state of the holding device opening / closing plate 73a is maintained, and the ball flowing into the sorting ball opening 72 flows into the sorting device 76 provided on the downstream side.

At this time, it is detected that the ball is held in the holding device 73 by the holding ball detection switch 73g arranged in the holding device 73. The holding ball detection switch 73g detects the presence of a sphere between the light receiving element and the light emitting element by blocking the space between the light emitting element and the light receiving element (both not shown), while detecting the light emitting element and the light receiving element. It is composed of an optical detection switch that detects the absence of a sphere between the light receiving element and the light emitting element by not blocking between the light receiving elements, and is electrically connected to the holding ball detection switch 73g as a main control described later. The detection information of the holding ball detection switch 73g is output to the device 110. The holding ball detection switch 73g is not limited to the optical type, and other well-known sensors such as a micro switch can be used.

The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is shipped from the factory in a state where one ball is held at the manufacturing stage of the pachinko machine 10. The lock piece 73e is configured such that the holding portion lock portion 73e1 is positioned at a position that restricts the downward rotation of the holding ball holding portion 73b when the holding device solenoid 73f is in a non-excited state (that is, off). ing. Further, even when the pachinko machine 10 is turned sideways or upside down, the ball is maintained in a state of being held by the holding ball holding portion 73b by the lock piece 73e. With this configuration, the ball is held in the holding device 73 regardless of the orientation of the pachinko machine 10 during transportation of the pachinko machine 10 from the time of factory shipment to the time of hall installation. can do. Then, when the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the hall, the first ball that has entered the alternate distribution unit 71 is not held by the holding device 73, and the left special figure winning opening 77a or the right special drawing winning opening 78a is won. Can be made to. Therefore, when playing a game for the first time with the pachinko machine 10, when the ball is flowed into the alternating distribution unit 71, it is possible to surely make the player receive the lottery of the third symbol (first symbol). ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 5 (b), 6 seconds have passed since the first effect unit (hereinafter referred to as "first effect" in the "slump effect" in the first embodiment) was executed under a predetermined condition. After a lapse of time), the holding device solenoid 73f is excited (that is, turned on) for a predetermined time (“2000 ms” in the first embodiment), the lock piece 73e moves to the holding device solenoid 73f side, and the holding portion lock portion is used. Both the 73e1 and the opening / closing plate extrusion portion 73e2 are immersed in the rear wall 73d. In this way, when the holding device solenoid 73f is excited, the holding portion lock portion 73e1 that has previously restricted the downward rotation of the holding ball holding portion 73b is immersed in the rear wall 73d, so that the holding ball is held. The holding portion 73b rotates downward due to the weight of the ball. Then, the ball held in the holding ball holding portion 73b flows downward, is discharged from the board surface return opening 74 to the front side of the game board 13, and flows into the dummy winning opening 75 as it is. That is, the ball held in the holding device 73 is configured to win a prize in the dummy winning opening 75 by exciting (driving) the holding device solenoid 73f.

With this configuration, the ball held in the holding device 73 can be reliably won in the dummy winning opening 75, and the player who does not understand the details of the dummy winning opening 75 can win the special figure on the left side. By winning a ball in the dummy winning opening 75 arranged between the opening 77a and the right side special drawing winning opening 78a, it is possible to make the illusion that the starting prize of the third symbol (first symbol) has been won.

Next, as shown in FIG. 5C, when the holding device solenoid 73f changes from the excited state to the non-excited state, the holding portion lock portion 73e1 and the opening / closing plate extrusion portion 73e2 of the lock piece 73e are both from the rear wall 73d. It will be in a protruding state again. At this time, the opening / closing plate extrusion portion 73e2 of the lock piece 73e collides with the tip portion of the holding device opening / closing plate 73a, and the holding device opening / closing plate 73a moves toward the front passage wall 72a of the distribution ball opening 72 due to the momentum of the collision. It is rotated.

Next, as shown in FIG. 5 (d), the holding device opening / closing plate 73a that collided with the opening / closing plate extrusion portion 73e2 in the state of FIG. Collisions with the front passage wall 72a of the above and the tip portion (inclined surface of the tip) of the holding device opening / closing plate 73a. Since the holding device opening / closing plate 73a is configured to be heavier than the holding ball holding portion 73b, the holding device opening / closing plate 73a is configured to be heavier than the holding ball holding portion 73b. The state of being tilted toward the front passage wall 72a side of the ball mouth 72) is maintained. Therefore, when the ball is not placed on the holding ball holding portion 73b, the tilting state of the holding device opening / closing plate 73a is maintained, and the ball flowing into the distribution ball opening 72 can be received in the holding device 73. It becomes a state (hereinafter, may be referred to as an "acceptable state").

Here, the tip portion of the holding device opening / closing plate 73a is formed so as to have an inclined surface in a sharp shape, and when the holding device opening / closing plate 73a is tilted toward the front passage wall 72a, the inclined surface shakes. It is configured to come into surface contact with the front passage wall 72a of the inlet ball port 72. With this configuration, when the holding device opening / closing plate 73a is tilted, the holding device opening / closing plate 73a can be tilted toward the front passage wall 72a of the sorting ball opening 72, and the sorting ball opening 72 can be tilted. The ball that has flowed into the holding device 73 can be reliably guided into the holding device 73.

Further, it is difficult for the ball flowing into the distribution ball opening 72 to collide with the upper surface side of the tip end portion of the holding device opening / closing plate 73a (the portion that comes into contact with the wall surface of the distribution ball opening 72), so that the holding device opening / closing plate 73a is prevented. By configuring it to collide with the inclined surface on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 (that is, the upper surface on the right side of the tilted holding device opening / closing plate 73a), the impact due to the weight of the ball can be passed by the inclined surface. It is possible to alleviate the impact when the ball collides with the holding device opening / closing plate 73a and prevent the holding device opening / closing plate 73a from being damaged.

Then, when a ball flows into the distribution ball opening 72 while the holding device opening / closing plate 73a is in an acceptable state, the ball collides with the holding device opening / closing plate 73a and flows down to the holding device 73 side. .. Then, the ball collides with the upper surface of the holding ball holding portion 73b, and the holding ball holding portion 73b is rotated downward about the rotation shaft portion 73c by the weight of the ball. At this time, since the holding device solenoid 73f is in a non-excited state and the lock piece 73e is in the initial position, the lower surface of the holding ball holding portion 73b and the upper surface of the holding portion locking portion 73e1 come into contact with each other, and the holding portion lock portion 73e1 This limits the downward rotation of the holding ball holding portion 73b. Then, by being pressed downward by the weight of the ball placed on the upper surface of the holding ball holding portion 73b, the holding ball holding portion 73b is maintained in a horizontal state and is integrally formed with the holding ball holding portion 73b. The upright state of the holding device opening / closing plate 73a is also maintained. As a result, the state in which the ball is housed in the space formed by the upper surface of the holding ball holding portion 73b, the rear wall 73d, and the opening / closing plate extrusion portion 73e2 of the lock piece 73e is maintained (FIG. 5A). reference).

In this way, when only one ball that has flowed into the distribution slot 72 is held by the holding device 73 and a predetermined condition is satisfied (in the first embodiment, when the “slump effect” is executed). , The ball held by the holding device 73 is discharged, and the dummy winning opening 75 is made to win a prize. Then, based on the winning, the dummy hold display is displayed in the same display as the main hold display, and the second effect unit in the "slump effect" to be additionally executed (hereinafter, n (n is a natural number in the "slump effect"). ) The second effect unit is held as a dummy at the time of execution (referred to as "nth effect") (at the start of execution of the effect element of 1. However, "pseudo-ream" effect and "development possibility" effect are excluded). By digesting the display, it is possible to make the player feel as if a variable effect is being executed.

In the state where the holding device opening / closing plate 73a is tilted (that is, in an acceptable state), when a plurality of balls continuously flow into the distribution inlet ball port 72 and flow into the holding device 73, first. A discharge path may be provided in which only one ball of 1 is reserved and the subsequent balls are discharged. With this configuration, only one ball can be held in the holding device 73 without fail, and one ball can be made to flow into the dummy winning opening 75 at the time of "slump effect". It is possible to prevent inconsistencies.

Further, the member constituting the alternating distribution unit 71 may be formed of a transparent or translucent material (for example, polycarbonate resin or the like), and the member constituting the holding device 73 may also be formed of a transparent or translucent material. .. With this configuration, the player can visually recognize the flow mode of the ball flowing into the alternating distribution unit 71, grasp the inflowing winning openings 77a and 78a, and hold the ball in the holding device 73. It is possible to visually check whether or not it has been done.

Further, the holding device 73 is arranged on the upstream side (that is, between the distribution input ball opening 72 and the distribution device 76) of the left special figure winning opening 77a and the right special drawing winning opening 78a in the alternate distribution unit 71. However, instead of this, it may be arranged on the downstream side of the left side special drawing winning opening 77a and the right side special drawing winning opening 78a. Then, by holding the balls that have won in the left special figure winning opening 77a and the right special drawing winning opening 78a in the holding device 73, the balls that have entered the alternate distribution unit 71 are placed in any of the special drawing winning openings 77a, 78a. It is possible to hold the ball in the holding device 73 while making sure that the lottery opportunity of the first symbol is acquired. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent an event that the lottery of the first symbol cannot be received even though the ball has entered the alternating distribution unit 71. In this case, since the ball held by the holding device 73 is a so-called out ball, even if the ball flowing down from the holding device 73 wins the dummy winning opening 75, the prize ball or the like is not paid out. Suitable.

Returning to FIG. 4, the explanation will be continued. As described above, the distribution device 76 of the alternate distribution unit 71 alternately distributes the balls that have flowed down from the distribution input ball port 72 and have not flowed into the holding device 73 to the left side path 77 or the right side path 78. 76a, a central plate portion 76b extending upward from the outer periphery of the rotating shaft portion 76a, and a left side receiver extending left and right from the outer periphery of the rotating shaft portion 76a. It is composed of a plate 76c, a right side receiving plate 76d, and a distribution side magnet (not shown) built in the central plate portion 76b. Further, on the wall portion on the back side of the game board 13 of the alternating distribution unit 71, a unit-side magnet (for example, S-pole if the distribution-side magnet is N-pole) repels the distribution-side magnet (for example, S-pole). (Not shown) is built-in.

The distribution device 76 is configured to be rotatable about 30 degrees to the left and right with the rotation shaft portion 76a as the center of rotation. In the state of FIG. 4, the tip end side of the left receiving plate 76c is the wall of the alternating distribution unit 71. The entire left side receiving plate 76c is in contact with the portion and is on the right side guide position where the right side receiving plate 76d is on the lower side of the rotating shaft portion 76a and the right side receiving plate 76d is on the upper side of the rotating shaft portion 76a. It is in a state of guiding the flowed ball to the right route 78. Then, the right side guide position is maintained by the repulsive action between the distribution side magnet and the unit side magnet.

Here, an embodiment in which the balls entering the alternate distribution unit 71 are alternately distributed to the left side path 77 or the right side path 78 by the distribution device 76 will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 4, the tip end side of the left side receiving plate 76c abuts on the wall portion of the alternating distribution unit 71, and the entire left side receiving plate 76c is below the rotating shaft portion 76a and the right side receiving plate 76d. When is located above the rotation shaft portion 76a, the balls that have entered the alternating distribution unit 71 and flowed down from the distribution inlet ball port 72 are the central plate portion 76b and the right receiving plate 76d of the distribution device 76. Fits in the space formed by. Then, by pushing down the right side receiving plate 76d by the weight of the ball, the entire distribution device 76 rotates, and the tip end side of the right side receiving plate 76d comes into contact with the wall portion of the alternating distribution unit 71, and the entire right side receiving plate 76d becomes abutted. The left side receiving plate 76c is on the lower side of the rotating shaft portion 76a and is on the upper side of the rotating shaft portion 76a. Therefore, the distribution device 76 is in a state where the ball can flow down to the right side path 78, and in that state, the ball rolls on the upper surface of the right side receiving plate 76d and is guided to the right side path 78.

At this time, the force that pushes down the right side receiving plate 76d (rotates the entire distribution device 76) by the weight of the sphere rather than the repulsive force between the distribution side magnet (not shown) and the unit side magnet (not shown). Since the size is larger, the distribution device 76 is rotated against the repulsive force of the magnet. Then, again, due to the repulsive force of the magnet, the left receiving plate 76c is on the upper side of the rotating shaft portion 76a and the right receiving plate 76d is on the lower side of the rotating shaft portion 76a, that is, the state of the left guide position is changed. Be maintained.

Then, the ball that enters the alternate distribution unit 71 and flows down from the distribution input ball port 72 fits in the space formed by the central plate portion 76b and the left side receiving plate 76c of the distribution device 76. Then, by pushing down the left side receiving plate 76c by the weight of the ball, the distribution device 76 rotates, the tip end side of the left side receiving plate 76c comes into contact with the wall portion of the alternating distribution unit 71, and the entire left side receiving plate 76c rotates. The right side receiving plate 76d is on the lower side of the shaft portion 76a and is on the upper side of the rotating shaft portion 76a. Therefore, the distribution device 76 is in a state where the ball can flow down to the left side path 77 side, and in that state, the ball rolls on the upper surface of the left side receiving plate 76c and is guided to the left side path 77.

Also at this time, the left side receiving plate 76c is pushed down by the weight of the sphere rather than the repulsive force between the distribution side magnet (not shown) and the unit side magnet (not shown) (rotating the entire distribution device 76). Since the force is larger, the distribution device 76 is rotated against the repulsive force of the magnet. Then, again, due to the repulsive force of the magnet, the left receiving plate 76c is on the lower side of the rotating shaft portion 76a and the right receiving plate 76d is on the upper side of the rotating shaft portion 76a, that is, the state of the right guide position. Be maintained. By alternately repeating these movements, the balls entering the alternate distribution unit 71 are alternately distributed to the left side path 77 and the right side path 78.

The left side path 77 of the alternate distribution unit 71 is a path through which the ball guided to the left side in the alternate distribution unit 71 by the distribution device 76 flows down. At the lower left side of the left side route 77, a left side exit through which a ball flowing down the left side route 77 flows out is provided, and at a position below the left side exit, a left side special drawing winning opening 77a is arranged. Therefore, the ball guided to the left side route 77 is configured to flow down in the left side route 77, then be discharged from the left side exit, and win a prize in the left side special figure winning opening 77a.

The right side path 78 of the alternate distribution unit 71 is a path through which the ball guided to the right side in the alternate distribution unit 71 by the distribution device 76 flows down. A right exit through which a ball flowing down the right path 78 flows out is provided below the right side of the right path 78, and a right special drawing winning opening 78a is provided below the right exit. Therefore, the ball guided to the right side route 78 is configured to flow down in the right side route 78, then be discharged from the right side exit, and win a prize in the right side special figure winning opening 78a.

By configuring the alternate distribution unit 71 in this way, the balls that have entered the alternate distribution unit 71 can be alternately distributed to the left special figure winning opening 77a and the right special drawing winning opening 78a. It is possible to avoid a state in which winning is fixedly continued in the winning opening, and it is possible to diversify the winning patterns of the winning openings 77a and 78a.

Returning to FIG. 3, the explanation will be continued. A variable winning device 65 is arranged on the upper right side of the alternating distribution unit 71 in front view, and a horizontally long rectangular large winning opening 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the lottery of the first symbol in the main control device 110 (see FIG. 7) is a big hit, the big hit is stopped after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed. As described above, the 7-segment display 37b of the first symbol display device 37 is lit and displayed, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the opening / closing plate (not shown) provided in the variable winning device 65 is opened, and the gaming state shifts to a special gaming state (big hit) in which the ball can easily win a prize in the big winning opening 65a. As this special gaming state, the large winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until "30 seconds" elapses or until 10 balls are won).

The large winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the large winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the large winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state (big hit state) that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) in a larger amount than usual. The prize ball will be paid out.

A second ball entry port 67 is provided above the front view of the variable winning device 65 and on the right side of the front view of the variable display device unit 80 described later. The second entry port 67 is provided with a through hole (not shown) for the ball to pass through in the vertical direction. When the ball passes through the second entry port 67, the second symbol switch (not shown) provided in the through hole is turned on, and due to the on, the main control device 110 displays the second symbol in a variable manner. A winning lottery will be held. It should be noted that the second ball entry port 67 only serves as a lottery opportunity for the variable display of the normal symbol, and is configured so that the prize ball or the like is not paid out even when the ball passes through.

An electric accessory 79 is arranged on the downstream side of the variable winning device 65 and on the right side of the alternating distribution unit 71. The electric accessory 79 is mainly composed of a rotating plate and a rotating solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing the rotating plate.

The main control device 110 of the first embodiment normally keeps the rotating plate of the electric accessory 79 in an upright state and closes the right side special drawing winning opening 78a, but in the variable display of the second symbol. When a hit is won, the rotary solenoid (not shown) is driven for a predetermined time, and the rotary plate of the electric accessory 79 is moved to the right angle (for example, from the upright state) to the right for the predetermined time. , 45 degrees) Driven to the tilted open state (tilted state), the right side special drawing winning opening 78a is opened, and the ball is configured to be in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the right side special drawing winning opening 78a. ..

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured so that the probability of winning in the variable display of the second symbol changes according to the gaming state. Specifically, in the "normal game state", the winning probability of the second symbol is set to a low probability state (for example, 1/10), and the variable display of the second symbol makes it difficult to win the electric accessory. The rotating plate 79 is made difficult to be in an open state (tilted state) so that it is difficult to win a prize in the right side special drawing winning opening 78a. On the other hand, in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state", the winning probability of the second symbol is set to the high probability state (for example, 9/10), and it is easy to win in the variable display of the second symbol. The rotating plate of the electric accessory 79 is easily set to an open state (tilted state) so that the right side special drawing winning opening 78a can be easily won.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, as described above, the variable display device unit 80 is arranged from the central portion of the game area to the right side area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by a ball entering the left special figure winning opening 77a or the right special drawing winning opening 78a (starting winning), and is synchronized with the dynamic display in the first symbol display device 37 to form a third. The second symbol is variably displayed by using the passage of the ball of the third symbol display device 81 and the second entry port 67, which is composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as "display device") for fluctuating the symbol. A second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 17-inch size liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 7) described later, for example, left, middle, and right. Three symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 6) are displayed.

Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 6) is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row Z1 to Z3 to display the third symbol on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is designed to be displayed variably. In the third symbol display device 81 of the first embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 by the first symbol display device 37, whereas the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. The decorative display according to the above is performed using the third symbol of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 6A is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 6B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is composed of a rear symbol consisting of a wooden box with numbers from "0" to "9", of which odd numbers ("1", "3", "5", "7", The main design with "9") has a large number added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main design with even numbers ("0", "2", "4", "6", "8") is a character such as a furoshiki, a helmet, etc. that almost fills the front of the wooden box. An attached symbol that imitates is added, and an even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the lottery result of the first symbol by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 7) described later is a big hit, a variable effect in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , It is configured so that a big hit occurs after the fluctuation production is finished. When the jackpot shifts to the "probability fluctuation state (probability variation state)" and a maximum of 15 rounds of jackpot is given, a variation effect is performed in which the main symbols with odd numbers (corresponding to the "probability variation symbol") are aligned. Will be. On the other hand, in the case of shifting to the "time reduction state" after the end of the big hit, a variable effect is performed in which the main symbols with even numbers added (corresponding to the "time reduction symbol") are aligned.

As shown in FIG. 6A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is largely divided into three in the vertical direction, and the lower two-thirds are reserved with the main display area Dm that fluctuates the third symbol. It is composed of a cockpit display area Db that displays the number of balls and the like, and the other upper 1/3 is a sub-display area Ds that displays a notice effect, a character, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right. The left symbol column Z1 is displayed in the display area Dm1, and the middle symbol column Z2 is displayed in the display area Dm2. The right symbol column Z3 is displayed in the display area Dm3.

In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending order (or descending order) of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variation effect is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3, the arrangement of numbers may be different from each other. For example, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols may be arranged so as to appear in descending order, while in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols may be arranged so as to appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol is placed on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each variation effect. Stop is displayed. If the combination of jackpot symbols (combination of the same main symbols; hereinafter referred to as "big hit display") is arranged on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

On the other hand, the sphere is on the left side while the variation effect (dynamic display) or "slump effect" of the third symbol (first symbol) is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37). When a ball is entered into the special figure winning opening 77a or the right special drawing winning opening 78a, the number of times the ball is entered (the number of reserved balls) is displayed up to four times. Also, if a ball enters the dummy winning opening 75 while the third symbol display device 81 is performing the variation effect or the "slump effect" of the third symbol, the number of times the ball is entered (dummy hold ball). Number) is displayed up to once. That is, if the ball enters the left special figure winning opening 77a, the right special drawing winning opening 78a, or the dummy winning opening 75 while the variation effect or the "slump effect" of the third symbol is being performed, the ball enters. The maximum number of balls (number of reserved balls) is displayed as the main hold display and the dummy hold display. In this case, it becomes possible for the player to recognize that the dummy hold display exists.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the number of balls entered into the left special figure winning opening 77a or the right special drawing winning opening 78a, which triggers the lottery of the third symbol (first symbol), is set in the cockpit display area Db. It is configured to be displayed as the main hold display, and the number of times the ball has entered the dummy winning opening 75 is displayed in the cockpit display area Db as the dummy hold display together with or independently of the main hold display. .. Further, by displaying the main hold display based on the entry into the left special figure winning opening 77a or the right special drawing winning opening 78a and the dummy hold display based on the entry into the dummy winning opening 75 in the same manner, It is configured so that they cannot be distinguished from each other. Then, based on the main hold display and the dummy hold display displayed in the cockpit display area Db, the conventional variation effect or the "slump effect" executed when the variation effect is interrupted in the third symbol display device 81. Or is configured to run.

Conventionally, if a ball does not win a prize in the left special figure winning opening 77a or the right special drawing winning opening 78a for a long time, a "slump state" in which the variation effect is not executed in the third symbol display device 81 occurs. The player can obtain the interest related to the jackpot lottery that the player wants because the variable effect is not performed on the third symbol display device 81 even though the player is playing the game by firing the ball. I couldn't do it, and I got excited about the game. Further, the player recognizes that the pachinko machine 10 is difficult for the ball to enter the left special figure winning opening 77a or the right special drawing winning opening 78a because the variation effect is not performed in the third symbol display device 81. However, it is determined that it is difficult to obtain the game value, and the game on the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, which may reduce the operation of the pachinko machine 10.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, once the "slump state" is reached, a ball wins in the left special figure winning opening 77a or the right special drawing winning opening 78a, and the variable effect is executed for the first time. At that time, instead of the regular variation effect, the third symbol display device 81 performs a "slump effect" that is executed for a longer time than the acquired variation effect execution time, and the third symbol display device 81 performs the "slump effect". The effect time is configured to be longer than the execution time of the regular variable effect. In addition, as the "slump effect" is executed, the dummy hold display is displayed in the same manner as the actual hold display based on the winning of the dummy winning opening 75, and one effect of the "slump effect" is displayed. When the unit is executed, the dummy hold display is digested (erased).

With this configuration, is the effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 by entering the left special figure winning opening 77a or the right special figure winning opening 78a a regular variable effect? While making it difficult to distinguish whether it is an "effect", the "slump effect" executed by the third symbol display device 81 can make the effect time performed by the third symbol display device 81 longer than the actual variable effect time. can. Therefore, it is possible to lengthen the effect time of the effect on the third symbol display device 81, prevent the player from being awakened, and improve the interest of the game.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the number of reserved balls for the variation effect of the third symbol (first symbol) is accurately indicated by the first symbol display device 37, while the variation effect of the third symbol and ". The number of reserved balls with "slump effect" is shown in the first to fifth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db5 provided in the cockpit display area Db. In the 1st to 5th reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db5, one main reserved display and a dummy reserved display (“○” symbol (white circle symbol) in the normal display mode) for each reserved ball (1 reserved ball). Hereinafter, the present hold display and the dummy hold display may be collectively referred to as “holding symbol”), and the holding symbols displayed in the first to fifth holding symbol display areas Db1 to Db5 are displayed. Depending on the number, the number of reserved balls for the variable effect and the "slump effect" is displayed.

That is, in the first to fifth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db5, when one reserved symbol is displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Db1, the number of reserved balls in the variable effect and the "slump effect" is once. When a total of two reserved symbols are displayed, one in each of the first and second reserved symbol display areas Db1 and Db2, the number of reserved balls in the variable effect and the "slump effect" is twice. When a total of three reserved symbols are displayed, one in each of the first to third reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db3, the number of reserved balls in the variable effect and the "slump effect" is three times. When a total of four reserved symbols are displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4, the number of reserved balls in the variable effect and the "slump effect" is four times. When a total of 5 reserved symbols are displayed in the 1st to 5th reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db5, the number of reserved balls in the variable effect and the "slump effect" is 5 times. Indicates that. Further, when the reserved symbols are not displayed in the 1st to 5th reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db5, the variable effect and the "slump effect" have the number of reserved balls being 0 and are reserved. Indicates that "slump staging" does not exist.

Further, on the left side portion of the cockpit display area Db, a symbol indicating that the variation effect or the "slump effect" is executed in the main display area Dm (hereinafter referred to as "execution symbol") is displayed. Region Db0 is provided. The execution symbol display area Db0 is provided on the left side of the first reserved symbol display area Db1, and is configured to display execution symbols larger than the reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db5. Further, in the execution symbol display area Db0, the reserved symbol displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Db1 is moved (shift. Hereinafter, the movement display of the reserved symbol may be referred to as "shift display"). And it is displayed as an execution symbol.

The execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 is deleted when one effect unit of the variation effect or the "slump effect" is completed, and the displayed reserved symbol is on the lower side (as the execution symbol is deleted). It is moved and displayed as a reserved symbol on the left side). Specifically, when the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 is erased with the end of one effect unit of the variation effect or the "slump effect", it is displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Db1. The reserved symbol is moved (shifted) and displayed as an execution symbol in the execution symbol display area Db0. Further, the reserved symbol displayed in the second reserved symbol display area Db2 is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved symbol in the first reserved symbol display area Db1. Further, the reserved symbol displayed in the third reserved symbol display area Db3 is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved symbol in the second reserved symbol display area Db2. Further, the reserved symbol displayed in the 4th reserved symbol display area Db4 is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved symbol in the 3rd reserved symbol display area Db3. Further, the reserved symbol displayed in the 5th reserved symbol display area Db5 is moved (shifted) and displayed as a reserved symbol in the 4th reserved symbol display area Db4.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the execution symbol is continuously displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 while the effect unit of 1 of the variation effect or the “slump effect” is executed in the main display area Dm (“super reach”). ", Except in the production element of" Special Reach "or the production element of" Which Da Reach "). On the other hand, when one effect unit of the variable effect or the "slump effect" is completed, or the effect element of "super reach", the effect element of "special reach", or the effect element of "whichever reach" is being executed. In some cases, the execution symbol is configured to be erased. That is, when the execution symbol is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0, it indicates that one effect unit of the variation effect or the "slump effect" is executed (continued) in the main display area Dm. If the execution symbol is not displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0, the variation effect or one effect unit of "slump effect" is not executed (not continued) in the main display area Dm, or "super reach". Indicates that the staging element of, the staging element of "special reach", or the staging element of "whichever reach" is executed.

Further, in the cockpit display area Db, the "hold change notice" can be executed by using the hold symbol and the execution symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db. This "pending change notice" is the variable effect executed in the main display area Dm, or the jackpot expectation of one effect unit of the "slump effect", and the variable effect or one of the "slump effect". It is a notice suggesting by changing the display color of the reserved symbol and the executed symbol in a plurality of stages from before the execution of the effect unit to during the execution.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as a "holding change notice", the display colors of the holding symbol and the execution symbol are displayed from "white", which is a normal display mode, to "blue", which is a blue display mode, and green. It is configured to be changeable to "green" in the aspect or "red" in the display aspect of red. In this pachinko machine 10, when "big hit display" occurs in one effect unit of variable effect or "slump effect", or when "reach display" occurs, the display color of the reserved symbol and the execution symbol is displayed. Since the selection ratio is configured to be different, the display color of the reserved symbol and the executed symbol changes from the normal display mode (“white”) to another display mode (for example, “blue”). It is possible to suggest to the player for each display color the possibility that "reach display" or "big hit display" may occur in one effect unit of the hold symbol and the execution symbol, or the variable effect of the "slump effect". can.

Specifically, in the "holding change notice", when the holding symbol and the execution symbol are in the "blue" display mode rather than the normal display mode ("white"), the variation indicated by the hold symbol and the execution symbol. A high ratio of "reach display" and "big hit display" is set in one effect unit of the effect or "slump effect". In addition, when the reserved symbol and the executed symbol have a display mode of "green" rather than "blue", "reach display" or "big hit display" in the variable effect or "slump effect" indicated by the reserved symbol and the executed symbol. Is set high. Further, when the reserved symbol and the executed symbol have a display mode of "red" rather than "green", the "reach display" is performed in one effect unit of the variable effect or the "slump effect" indicated by the reserved symbol and the executed symbol. Or "big hit display" is set high.

In addition, when the display mode of the reserved symbol and the executed symbol is "green" or "red", the "normal reach" in the variable effect or the "slump effect" indicated by the reserved symbol or the executed symbol of the "green" or "red". (The mode of the main effect is referred to as the "effect mode"), the execution of the "super reach" effect mode or the "special reach" effect mode is set to be confirmed.

It should be noted that, in the state where the display mode of the reserved symbol is changed by this "pending change notice", when the reserved symbol shifts with the execution (digestion) of one effect unit of the variable effect or the "slump effect", the pending symbol is changed. The display mode of the changed reserved symbol is configured to be inherited (inherited) and reflected in the reserved symbol or the executed symbol of the shift destination. That is, when the display mode of the reserved symbol changes, the changed reserved symbol changes or the other reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db4 or the execution symbol display area Db0 accompanies the execution of one effect unit of the "slump effect". Even when shifting to, the display mode before the shift is configured to be maintained as it is as the display mode of the reserved symbol or the executed symbol after the shift.

Therefore, for example, when the display color of the reserved symbol changes to "red" in the 5th reserved symbol display area Db5, the reserved symbol changes from the 4th reserved symbol display area Db4 to the 3rd reserved symbol display area Db3 to the 2nd reserved symbol. When shifting from the display area Db2 to the first reserved symbol display area Db1 to the execution symbol display area Db0, the “red” reserved symbol or the execution symbol is continuously displayed.

In the first embodiment, the number of reserved balls for the variable effect based on the entry into the left special figure winning opening 77a or the right special drawing winning opening 78a is configured to be reserved up to four times. The number of reserved balls is not limited to four, and may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). Further, the number of reserved balls corresponding to one effect unit of the "slump effect" based on the entry into the dummy winning opening 75 is configured to be reserved up to once, but the maximum number of reserved balls is one. The number of times is not limited, and may be set to two or more times (for example, four times). Further, instead of displaying the reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db, the number of reserved balls is different by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into five is different by the number of reserved balls ( For example, it may be displayed in a color or lighting pattern). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, it is not necessary to display the number of reserved balls on the third symbol display device 81. If the third symbol display device 81 does not display the information regarding the number of reserved balls (reserved symbols, etc.), the "reserved change notice" by the reserved symbols cannot be executed, so other character symbols, etc. are additionally added. It may be configured to execute a look-ahead notice similar to the "pending change notice" by making it appear.

Further, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with five hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold lamps for the variable effect and the "slump effect", and displays the number of hold balls according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state. It may be something to do. Further, one of the executed symbol or the reserved symbol may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the other of the executed symbol or the reserved symbol may be displayed by a reserved lamp other than the third symbol display device 81. In addition, when the hold lamp is configured to display the number of hold balls, it is natural that the same look-ahead notice as the "hold change notice" of the first embodiment is executed by providing a plurality of display colors of the hold lamp. Is possible.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. The small areas Ds1 to Ds3 are areas for displaying characters and preview effect images, respectively. The images displayed in each of the small areas Ds1 to Ds3 give the player a feeling of expectation that will be a big hit as a result of the variation effect performed in the main display area Dm.

As described above, the cockpit display area Db is one of the staging units of the variable effect and the “slump effect” among the balls entered in the left special figure winning opening 77a, the right special drawing winning opening 78a, or the dummy winning opening 75. Is an area for displaying a reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved balls, which is the number of unexecuted balls (reserved balls), and an executed symbol related to one effect unit of the running variable effect or the "slump effect".

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 6B, a total of three main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, in the left small area Ds1, a moving image such as the appearance of a notice symbol is displayed, and one effect unit of the variable effect or the "slump effect" performed in the main display area Dm is more than usual. It is suggested to the player that it is easy to make a transition to a big hit.

Further, in the sub-display area Ds, in the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a bee in the first embodiment) normally performs a predetermined operation, and a variable effect or a variation effect performed in the main display area Dm. Based on the "slump effect", a special action other than the predetermined action is performed, the color of the boy's hair, which is usually black, or the color of the bee, which is usually white, changes, or another character appears. A notice production will be performed.

Further, in the sub-display area Ds, in the right small area Ds3, a level that gradually suggests whether or not a big hit occurs in one effect unit of the variation effect or the "slump effect" performed in the main display area Dm. A meter (not shown) appears and is displayed. This level meter is a "reach display" in one staging unit of the fluctuating staging or "slump staging" that is being executed based on the appearance of a notice symbol or the like in one staging unit of the fluctuating staging or "slump staging". It is configured to increase (add) each time the occurrence expectation degree and the jackpot expectation degree increase (addition), and to suggest that the jackpot is confirmed when the display limit (MAX display) of the level meter is reached. Therefore, the sub-display area Ds has a function of suggesting the occurrence of "reach display" in the main display area Dm.

Returning to FIG. 3, the explanation will be continued. The second symbol display device 83 alternately lights the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (ordinary symbol)) each time the ball passes through the second entry port 67. It is a variable display to be made. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in the first embodiment), the electric accessory 79 is in the operating state for a time corresponding to the gaming state. (The rotating plate is rotated (tilted)).

The number of reserved balls in the second entry port 67 is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is lit and displayed on the second symbol holding lamp 84 provided in the center frame 86. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged below the third symbol display device 81. Then, the number of holds is displayed according to the number of lights of the second symbol hold lamp 84.

The variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the first embodiment, as well as the first symbol display device 37 or the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to 4 times, and the maximum number of reserved balls is 3 times or less, or 3 times or less, as in the case of the left special figure winning opening 77a or the right special drawing winning opening 78a. It may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, when the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol hold lamp 84.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged on the right side of the front view of the alternating distribution unit 71 (lower side of the front view of the second entry port 67), and a horizontally long rectangular large winning opening (large opening opening) is arranged in a substantially central portion thereof. ) 65a is provided.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the lottery of the first symbol (third symbol) in the main control device 110 (see FIG. 6) becomes a big hit, the big hit is made after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed. The 7-segment display 37b of the first symbol display device 37 is lit and displayed so as to be a stop symbol, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special game state, when a big hit occurs as a result of the lottery in the first symbol, the big winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is closed until a predetermined time (for example, "30 seconds" elapses, or the ball is It will be released (until 10 prizes are won).

The large winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and after the closing, the large winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the large winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state (big hit state) that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) in a larger amount than usual. The prize ball will be paid out.

The variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate that covers the large winning opening 65a, and a large winning opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening / closing forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. .. The large winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. Then, in the case of a big hit based on the lottery game of the first symbol, the big winning opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side, and the ball fired by hitting right is easy to win the big winning opening 65a. It temporarily forms a state and operates to alternate between the open state and the normally closed state.

That is, when hitting right in the "probability fluctuation state" or when hitting right in the "time shortened state", the ball is entered into the right side special figure winning opening 78a, which is easy to enter by the electric accessory 79, and the entry is made. When a big hit is won in the lottery game of the first symbol based on the ball, the opening and closing of this big winning opening 65a is controlled, and then the player enters the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state" again, so that the player is on the right. It is configured so that the subsequent games can be performed while the hitting game is continued.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the large winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the 7-segment display 37b corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, the large winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. , While the large winning opening 65a is open, the large opening provided separately from the large winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the large winning opening 65a. It may be formed as a special gaming state.

Attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided in the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 are the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. A ball that does not enter any of the winning openings (entrance openings) 63, 65a, 75, 77a, 78a is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 66. A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a read-only memory (Read Only Memory; hereinafter abbreviated as “ROM”) 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and controls stored in the ROM 202. Random Access Memory (hereinafter abbreviated as "RAM") 203, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing a program, and other interrupt circuits and timer circuits. Various circuits such as a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in.

In order to instruct the operation to the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

In the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery, the dynamic display and variable effect or "slump effect" setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the display result of the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 are displayed. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a lottery is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer 203b for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

Further, the ROM 202 stores at least a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a hold number table 202c, a stop pattern table 202d, and a variation pattern table 202e. The main control device 110 executes the above-mentioned main control by the various counters stored in the RAM 203 and the various tables stored in the ROM 202.

Here, with reference to FIG. 8, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like can be used for big hit lottery, dynamic display setting of the first symbol display device 37, variable effect or "slump effect" setting of the third symbol display device 81, and variable display in the second symbol display device 83. It is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to draw a lottery of the display result of. Further, in the description of the various counters, various tables stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 will also be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 15.

The jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery is used for the jackpot lottery, the setting of the dynamic display of the first symbol display device 37, and the setting of the variable effect or the "slump effect" of the third symbol display device 81. The jackpot type counter C2 used for selecting the stop type of the jackpot symbol, the stop pattern selection counter C3 used for selecting the effect mode of the variable effect or the "slump effect", and the first value used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. 1 Initial value random number counter CINI1 and variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used.

Further, the winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to "0".

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 4 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 34). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203b set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 is provided with a hold ball storage area 203c composed of four hold areas (hold 1st to 4th areas) related to the first symbol, and each of these areas has a left side feature. Entering the figure winning opening 77a or the right special drawing winning opening 78a (hereinafter, the left special drawing winning opening 77a and the right special drawing winning opening 78a may be collectively referred to as "special figure winning opening 77a, 78a"). Each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 is stored according to the ball timing.

Each counter will be described in detail. The jackpot random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, "0 to 899") and becomes the maximum value (for example, "899" in the case of a counter that can take a value of "0 to 899"). After reaching "0", it returns to "0". In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated once, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated from the initial value. It will be done.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the jackpot random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the jackpot random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of "0 to 899", the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of "0 to 899". The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 34).

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically (in the first embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26)). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a (starting winning), the jackpot random number counter of any of the holding areas 1 to 4 provided in the holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203 is stored. It is stored in the area 203c1.

The value of the random number for which the jackpot random number counter C1 is a jackpot is set by the jackpot random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the jackpot random number counter stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203c1 in the holding area. When the value of C1 matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by the jackpot random number table 202a, it is determined to be a jackpot.

Here, the details of the jackpot random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 9A. FIG. 9A is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202. The jackpot random number table 202a is used when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability state (a period other than the “probability fluctuation state”) of the first symbol, which is a “normal gaming state” or a “time shortening state”. High probability used for the low probability state and when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the "probability fluctuation state (during probability change)" which is the high probability state of the first symbol with a higher probability of becoming a big hit than the low probability state. It can be divided into two types, one for the state and the other for the state. Then, the number of big hit random numbers included in each of the low-probability state and the high-probability state is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers that become big hits different, the probability of becoming a big hit is changed between the low probability state and the high probability state.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the number of values (big hit random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in the low probability state is three, and the value "7,307,582" is the jackpot random number. It is stored in the table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability of the first symbol in the low probability state (that is, the "normal game state" or the "time reduction state") is set to be 3/900 = 1/300.

On the other hand, the number of random numbers (big hit random numbers) that become big hits in the high probability state is 9, and the values "28,122,298,390,486,567,656,750,866" are It is stored in the jackpot random number table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability of the first symbol in the high probability state (that is, the "probability fluctuation state") is set to be 9/900 = 1/100.

In the first embodiment, the jackpot random number value for the low probability state and the jackpot random number value for the high probability state stored in the jackpot random number table 202a are each jackpot random number value so as not to be duplicated. Is set. Here, if there is a value that becomes a jackpot random number regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the value is likely to be predicted from the outside, so that there is a high possibility that the jackpot will be illegally assigned. On the other hand, as in the first embodiment, by changing the value of the random number that becomes the big hit according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state or the low probability state), the big hit. Since it is possible to make it difficult to predict the value of the random number, it is possible to suppress fraud.

Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. The jackpot type counter C2 determines the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, and is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, "0 to 99"), and the maximum value (for example, "0 to 99") is added. In the case of a counter that can take the value of "", it is configured to return to "0" after reaching "99").

The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically (in the first embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26)). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a (starting winning), it is the same as the holding area in which the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the holding 1st to 4th areas of the holding ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. It is stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203c2 of the hold area.

Here, for example, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the holding area 1 in the holding ball storage area 203c is not a random number that is a jackpot, that is, if it is a random number that is lost, the fluctuation pattern in the variation effect. Also, the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") is the one at the time of loss. On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the holding area 1 in the holding ball storage area 203c is a random number that is a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type in the fluctuation effect are those at the time of the jackpot. In this case, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type at the time of the jackpot are determined according to the jackpot type indicated by the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the same holding area.

The value of the jackpot type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of "0 to 99". The jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b stored in the ROM 202.

Here, the jackpot type table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 9B. FIG. 9B is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot type table 202b corresponding to the first symbol stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 9B, the jackpot type table 202b is a table in which the jackpot type and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 are associated with each other.

As the jackpot type, as described above, "15R probability variation jackpot" that shifts to the "probability fluctuation state" in which the jackpot probability becomes a high probability state after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds. Later, the jackpot probability becomes a low probability state, and the "15R normal jackpot" shifts to the "time shortened state" for 100 fluctuations, and the maximum number of rounds shifts to the "probability fluctuation state" after the jackpot of 2 rounds. There is a "2R probability change jackpot". In the following description, the 15-round jackpot of "15R probability variable jackpot" and "15R normal jackpot" may be described as "common to 15R jackpot".

In the jackpot type table 202b, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type is associated with each jackpot type. In the example of FIG. 9B, the value “0 to 39” of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with the “15R probability variation jackpot”, and the value “40 ～” of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with the “2R probability variation jackpot”. "59" is associated with "15R normal jackpot", and the value "60 to 99" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with "15R normal jackpot".

When the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value that becomes a jackpot, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the same holding area is determined from the jackpot type table 202b. For example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "20", "15R probability variation jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "50", the jackpot type is "2R probability variation jackpot". Is determined, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "90", "15R normal jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type.

As described above, in the first embodiment, in the case of a big hit, "15R probability variable jackpot" is selected with a 40% probability, "2R probability variable jackpot" is selected with a 20% probability, and "15R" is selected with a 40% probability. "Normal jackpot" is selected.

The probability that each jackpot type will be selected in the event of a jackpot is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type is defined in the jackpot type table 202b according to the set probability.

Further, the probability that the jackpot type is selected may be changed according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, the jackpot type table 202b corresponding to each game state may be prepared, and the number of values of the jackpot type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type may be changed in each jackpot type table 202b.

Returning to FIG. 8, the description of various counters will be continued. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to, for example, add "1" in order within the range of "0 to 99", reach the maximum value (that is, "99"), and then return to "0".

In the first embodiment, the rough effect mode of the variation effect at the time of big hit and loss displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined by the number of pending variation effects and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. Be selected. Specifically, a "non-reach (long)" production mode in which "reach display" does not occur, a "non-reach (middle)" production mode or a "non-reach (short)" production mode, and a "normal reach" production mode as "reach display". "Normal reach" effect mode in which only the effect element of "" is executed, and "super reach" effect mode in which the effect element of "super reach" is executed by developing from the effect element of "normal reach", and "normal reach" as well. A "special reach" production mode in which the production element of "special reach" is executed, and a "special variation" production mode in which the production element of "movie" dedicated to "2R probability change jackpot" is executed. Seven production modes are selected.

Among the production modes, a "non-reach (long)" production mode, a "non-reach (middle)" production mode, and a "non-reach (short)" production mode (hereinafter, "non-reach (long)" production mode, The "non-reach (middle)" effect mode and the "non-reach (short)" effect mode may be collectively referred to simply as the "non-reach" effect mode). After the "high-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element is performed in the regions Dm1 to Dm3 (see FIG. 6A), the "low-speed fluctuation" staging element or "pseudo-variation" is performed except for the "non-reach (short)" staging mode. This is an effect mode in which the same third symbol does not stop in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm3, and the “reach display” is not generated. The details of the "high-speed fluctuation" effect element, the "low-speed variation" effect element, and the "pseudo-variation" effect element will be described later.

Among the effect modes, the "normal reach" effect mode is the same as the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm3 in the variable effect of each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 6A) in the main display area Dm. Immediately after the third symbol stops, the "normal reach" effect element is executed, and the "reach display" does not develop into other "reach display" (that is, "super reach" effect element or "special reach" effect element). It is one of the production modes of. The details of the "normal reach" production element, the "super reach" production element, and the "special reach" production element will be described later.

Among the staging modes, the "super reach" staging mode is one of the "reach display" staging modes in which the staging element of "super reach" is executed by developing from the staging element of "normal reach".

Among the staging modes, the "special reach" staging mode is one of the "reach display" staging modes in which the "special reach" staging element is executed by developing from the "normal reach" staging element.

Among the staging modes, the "special variation" staging mode is a staging mode that is executed without exception when the "2R probability variation jackpot" is won, and is a staging mode in which the staging element of the "movie" is executed. The details of the production elements of the "movie" will be described later.

The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated periodically (in the first embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26)). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a (starting winning), the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the reserved first to fourth areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. It is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3 of the area.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is referred to according to the propriety of the variation effect, the current gaming state, and the number of currently pending variation effects (number of reserved balls). The stop pattern table 202d is configured to be different. That is, a plurality of types of stop pattern tables 202d are provided, and are configured to be selected according to the number of fluctuation effects during standby (number of reserved balls) and the like.

Specifically, when determining the detailed variation pattern of the variation effect, first, based on the hold number table 202c provided in the ROM 202, the appropriateness of the variation effect, the current game state, and the current variation effect. Any stop pattern table 202d corresponding to the number (number of reserved balls) is selected. Then, a rough effect mode of the variation effect is selected based on the selected stop pattern table 202d and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. After that, a detailed variation pattern (variation time) of the variation effect is determined based on the selected effect mode and the value of the variation type counter CS1 described later.

The stop pattern table 202d provided with a plurality of types is set so that the range of random values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 in which the effect mode is selected for each stop pattern table 202d is different. The reason why a plurality of the stop pattern tables 202d are prepared is to change the selection ratio of the effect mode of the variation effect according to the propriety of the variation effect, the game state, and the number of reserved balls. That is, (1) a big hit occurs in the fluctuation effect of the acquired third symbol, or (2) the current gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "probability fluctuation state", "time reduction state", or "normal gaming state". This is because the selection ratio of the effect mode is changed according to whether or not there is (3) how many balls are reserved for the variable effect.

This is because, as the first reason, the degree of expectation that becomes a big hit is changed for each production mode. That is, depending on whether the jackpot lottery is won or lost, the stop pattern, that is, the "non-reach" production mode, the "normal reach" production mode, the "super reach" production mode, and the "special reach" production mode. By configuring the mode (excluding the "special variation" effect mode, which is selected without exception when the "2R probability variation jackpot" is won), the selection ratio is different, the expectation level of the jackpot can be obtained for each effect mode. Change.

Specifically, for example, if the jackpot lottery is won, the "super reach" effect mode or the "special reach" effect mode can be easily selected, and if the jackpot lottery is not won, the "non-reach" effect is produced. It is easy to select the mode and the "normal reach" production mode. With this configuration, the "super reach" production mode and the "special reach" production mode can be easily hit, and the "normal reach" production mode and the "non-reach" production mode are difficult to hit. It can be a production or a production that does not make a big hit, and the degree of expectation of a big hit can be differentiated for each production mode. Therefore, when a production that is easy to hit the jackpot appears in the variable production, it is suggested to the player that the jackpot is likely to occur while the production that is easy to hit the jackpot is performed, and the interest of the game is enhanced. There is.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the acquired lottery result is a big hit, it is easy to select an effect that is easy to make a big hit, and it is difficult to select an effect that is hard to make a big hit based on the stop pattern table 202d. It is configured to select an effect mode (stop pattern) which is a rough content of the variable effect. On the other hand, when the acquired lottery result is a loss, the effect mode (stop pattern) of the variable effect is determined based on the stop pattern table 202d, which makes it difficult to select the effect that is easy to hit the jackpot and makes it easy to select the effect that is difficult to hit the jackpot. Configure to select.

As a result, when the player is notified of the lottery result of the third symbol in the variable effect, if an effect that is easy to hit is executed, a big hit is likely to occur in the variable effect, and an effect that is difficult to hit is executed. If this is the case, it is difficult for a big hit to occur in the variable effect, and by providing a difference in the expected value of the big hit for each effect mode (stop pattern), it is possible to enhance the interest of the game during the execution of the variable effect.

The second reason is that the ball enters the special symbol winning openings 77a and 78a when the number of waiting times of the third symbol variation effect (dynamic display of the first symbol; the same applies hereinafter) has reached the upper limit. This is to reduce the number of wasted balls based on the ball (so-called no lottery due to overflow winning) as much as possible.

Specifically, the number of times of waiting for the variation effect of the third symbol is set to a maximum of 4 times, and the variation effect is executed for at least a certain period of time. In the gaming state in which the ball easily enters the right special figure winning opening 78a in the "state", it is easy to reach the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol. In these gaming states, if a fluctuation effect with a long fluctuation time is selected, balls are frequently entered into the right special figure winning opening 78a when the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol is reached, and the right special figure winning is won. Despite entering the mouth 78a, the lottery opportunity for the third symbol cannot be obtained.

In addition, even in the "normal game state", if a variation effect with a long fluctuation time is selected while the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol has been reached, the number of reserved balls of the third symbol is being executed during the execution of the variation effect. Is not digested, so even if a ball is entered into the special drawing winning openings 77a and 78a during that time, the lottery opportunity for the third symbol cannot be obtained.

In the above-mentioned state, the player determines that the game value cannot be obtained even if the ball is inserted into the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a, and the variable effect is digested and the number of reserved balls can be acquired again. The ball will stop firing until it is in a state, and the game will be interrupted. As a result, the interruption of the game reduces the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10, which affects the management of the game field.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a short fluctuation time is selected in a gaming state in which it is easy to reach the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol or in a number of reserved balls close to (or match with) the maximum number of reserved balls. It is configured to select the effect mode of the variation effect based on the easy stop pattern table 202d. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the left special figure winning opening 77a or the right special drawing winning opening 78a when the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol has been reached.

Further, the third reason is to maintain the state in which the variable effect is being executed for a long time by setting the execution time to be long and delaying the end of the variable effect.

Specifically, when the number of reserved balls in the variable effect is small (not present), a new ball must be inserted into either of the special drawing winning openings 77a or 78a within the variable time of the variable effect being executed. The next variation effect cannot be started, and the demo screen or the like must be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the player does not perform the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 even though the ball is fired and the game is played, the player can obtain the interest related to the jackpot lottery that the player wants. Instead, I am awakened to the game. Further, the player recognizes that the pachinko machine 10 is difficult for the ball to enter the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a because the variation effect is not performed on the third symbol display device 81, and it is difficult to obtain the game value. There is a risk that the pachinko machine 10 will stop playing on the pachinko machine 10 because it is judged to be a platform.

Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to select the effect mode of the variation effect based on the stop pattern table 202d in which a long variation time is easily selected when the number of reserved balls for the variation effect is small. There is. As a result, the situation in which the variation effect is not performed in the third symbol display device 81 is unlikely to occur, and the execution state of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained for a long time.

Here, the details of the hold number table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing a hold number table 202c. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the variation effect is performed based on the ball entering the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a, the success or failure of the variation effect and the game at that time. It is configured to refer to the hold number table 202c based on the state and the hold number of the variation effect at that time, and select one of the stop pattern tables 202d1 to 202d5. Then, a rough effect mode of the variable effect is determined based on any one of the selected stop pattern tables 202d1 to 202d5 and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3.

Specifically, as shown in the reserved number table 202c of FIG. 10, when the number of reserved balls is "1" at the time of extracting the loss in the "normal game state", the A table 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d (FIG. 10). 11 (a)) is selected.

In addition, when the number of reserved balls is "2 or 3" at the time of extracting the loss in the "normal game state", or when the number of reserved balls is extracted at the time of extracting the loss in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time shortening state". When is "1", B table 202d2 (see FIG. 11B) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected.

Further, when the number of reserved balls is "4" at the time of extracting the loss in the "normal game state", or when the number of reserved balls is "4" at the time of extracting the loss in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state", the number of reserved balls is " In the case of "2 to 4", the C table 202d3 (see FIG. 11C) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected.

Further, at the time of extracting the "15R jackpot (" 15R probability variation jackpot "or" 15R normal jackpot ")", the D table 202d4 of the stop pattern table 202d (FIG. 12A) regardless of the gaming state or the number of reserved balls. See) is selected.

Further, at the time of extracting the "2R probability variation jackpot", the E table 202d5 (see FIG. 12B) of the stop pattern table 202d is selected regardless of the game state or the number of reserved balls.

That is, if any of the jackpots is won, the stop pattern table 202d (D table 202d4 or E table 202d5) is selected based only on the type of jackpot, regardless of the number of reserved balls and the gaming state at that time. Only when the jackpot is not won (that is, when the game is lost), the stop pattern table 202d (A table 202d1, B table 202d2 or C table 202d3) is selected based on the number of reserved balls and the game state at that time. ..

Even when a big hit is won, the stop pattern table 202d may be configured to be different depending on the number of reserved balls. For example, when the number of reserved balls is large when a big hit is won, the stop pattern table 202d (for example, the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation" is a "super reach" effect mode for 5 seconds or " It may be configured so that the "special reach" effect mode, etc.) can be selected.

In this case, in each effect mode in which the "reach display" is executed, it is configured to select an effect mode in which only the time of the effect element portion of the "high-speed fluctuation" is changed from 10 seconds to 5 seconds. With this configuration, for example, when the fluctuation effect is started with the number of reserved balls four times, even if the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation" is performed in 5 seconds, the "high-speed" for 5 seconds is performed. At the time when the effect element of "fluctuation" is completed (when it is recognized as the effect element of "high speed fluctuation" for 5 seconds), whether "missing display" appears after the effect element of "low speed fluctuation" in the variation effect. It becomes unrecognizable whether it develops into "reach display". Therefore, even if the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation" for 5 seconds is performed, either "reach display" that is not the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode or the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is performed. By configuring the effect mode in which the above is executed can be executed, it is possible to make it impossible to know whether the variation effect is a big hit or a loss at the time of executing the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation" for 5 seconds.

Further, in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state", when the jackpot is not won and the number of reserved balls is small, the stop pattern table 202d (for example, the A table) in which a relatively long fluctuation pattern is easily selected is easy to be selected. It may be configured to select 202d1). With this configuration, it is possible to easily maintain the state in which the fluctuation effect is executed by the third symbol display device 81 even in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state", and the third symbol display device 81 can be used. It is possible to configure the situation in which the variation effect is not performed to be unlikely to occur, and to maintain the execution state of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 for a long time.

Next, each stop pattern table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a stop pattern table 202d that can be selected at the time of loss, and FIG. 11A is a diagram schematically showing an example of A table 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d, FIG. 11 (a). b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d, and FIG. 11C is a diagram schematically showing an example of C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d. .. Further, FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing the stop pattern table 202d selected at the time of a big hit, and FIG. 12A is a diagram schematically showing an example of the D table 202d4 of the stop pattern table 202d. FIG. 12B is a diagram schematically showing an example of the E table 202d5 of the stop pattern table 202d.

As shown in FIG. 11A, in the A table 202d1 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each “non-reach (long)” effect mode is set to “0” to “74”. , The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" effect mode is set to "75" to "94", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" effect mode is "95" to "95". It is set to "97", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is set to "98" and "99". In the A table 202d1, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode and the "non-reach (short)" effect, and the "non-reach (middle)" effect is produced. Aspects and "non-reach (short)" staging modes are set not to be selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11B, in the B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “non-reach (middle)” effect mode is “0” to “74”. The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" effect mode is set to "75" to "94", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" effect mode is "95". The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is set to "98,99". In the B table 202d2, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "non-reach (long)" effect mode and the "non-reach (short)" effect mode, and the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is not assigned. The "effect mode" and the "non-reach (short)" effect mode are set not to be selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11C, in the C table 202d3 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “non-reach (short)” effect mode is “0” to “74”. The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" effect mode is set to "75" to "94", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" effect mode is "95". The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is set to "98,99". In the C table 202d3, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode and the "non-reach (short)" effect mode, and the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode is not assigned. The "effect mode" and the "non-reach (short)" effect mode are set not to be selected.

That is, in the A table 202d1, the "non-reach (long)" production mode is 75%, the "normal reach" production mode is 20%, the "super reach" production mode is 3%, and the "special reach" production mode is 2%. It is set to be a selection ratio. Further, in the B table 202d2, the "non-reach (middle)" production mode is 75%, the "normal reach" production mode is 20%, the "super reach" production mode is 3%, and the "special reach" production mode is 2%. It is set to be a selection ratio. Further, in the C table 202d3, the "non-reach (short)" production mode is 75%, the "normal reach" production mode is 20%, the "super reach" production mode is 3%, and the "special reach" production mode is 2%. It is set to be a selection ratio.

Therefore, in the A table 202d1, the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is selected, and in the B table 202d2, the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode is selected instead of the "non-reach (long)" effect mode. In the C table 202d3, the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is selected instead of the "non-reach (long)" effect mode and the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode. There is.

Therefore, it can be said that the A table 202d1 tends to have a relatively long variation time of the variation effect selected as compared with the B table 202d2 or the C table 202d3, and the B table 202d2 is selected as compared with the C table 202d3. It can be said that the fluctuation time of the fluctuation production tends to be relatively long. In other words, the variation time of the variation effect selected in the B table 202d2 tends to be shorter than that of the A table 202d1, and the variation of the variation effect selected in the C table 202d3 as compared with the A table 202d1 or the B table 202d2. It can be said that the time tends to be short.

The selection ratios of the "normal reach" effect mode, the "super reach" effect mode, and the "special reach" effect mode with the A table 202d1, the B table 202d2, and the C table 202d3 are set to be the same.

In this way, when the lottery result of the loss is extracted, it is configured to select the effect mode of the variable effect based on the number of reserved balls of the pending variable effect. For example, when the number of reserved balls for the variable effect is large, it is easy to select the "non-reach (short)" effect mode or the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode in which the variable effect time is short. As a result, when the number of reserved balls for the variable effect is large, the execution time of the variable effect to be executed is shortened and the number of times the variable effect is executed is increased, so that the execution efficiency of the variable effect can be improved.

Further, for example, when the number of reserved balls for the variable effect is small, the variable effect time is set according to the “non-reach (short)” effect mode in order to secure the ball entry time for the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a. It facilitates the selection of a long "non-reach (long)" effect mode or a "non-reach (middle)" effect mode. As a result, it is possible to perform a "non-reach (long)" effect mode or a "non-reach (middle)" effect mode in which the variable effect time is longer than when the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is selected. By making it easier to secure the ball entry time to the drawing winning openings 77a and 78a and increasing the possibility that a new start winning will occur during the execution time of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81, the variation effect Can be maintained in a running situation.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the effect mode of the variation effect acquired by the start winning in the "slump state" is the "non-reach" effect mode, it is added to the variation time of the acquired variation effect. A series of "slump effects" is obtained by lottery for the effect extension time (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "extension time") for performing the effect, and during the total time of the acquired fluctuation time and extension time. Is configured to run. With this configuration, the dynamic effect time of the third symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81 is lengthened longer than the variation time of the acquired variation effect, and the third symbol is displayed by the third symbol display device 81. By reducing the situation where the dynamic production of is not performed, it is possible to prevent the player from awakening.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12A, in the D table 202d4 of the stop pattern table 202d, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “normal reach” effect mode is set to “0” to “4”. The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" effect mode is set to "5" to "39", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is "40" to "40". It is set to "99". In the D table 202d4, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "special variation" effect mode, and the "special variation" effect mode is set not to be selected. Further, since the D table 202d4 is the stop pattern table 202d selected at the time of a big hit and the "reach display" always occurs, the "non-reach" effect mode is not selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12B, in the E table 202d5 of the stop pattern table 202d, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is assigned only to the “special variation” effect mode (“0” to “99”). , The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the effect mode in which the other "reach display" is executed. Therefore, the stop type selected when the "2R probability variation jackpot" is won is always set to be the "special variation" effect mode. Since the E table 202d5 is a stop pattern table 202d selected at the time of a big hit, the "non-reach" effect mode is not selected.

That is, in the D table 202d4, the selection ratio is set so that the "normal reach" effect mode is 5%, the "super reach" effect mode is 35%, and the "special reach" effect mode is 60%. Further, in the E table 202d5, the "special variation" effect mode is set so that the selection ratio is 100%.

Therefore, in the variable production at the time of winning the jackpot, the selection ratio is high in the order of "special reach" production mode> "super reach" production mode> "normal reach" production mode, and in the variable production at the time of loss, the "normal reach" production mode> The selection ratio is set to be higher in the order of "super reach" effect mode> "special reach" effect mode. Therefore, as for the jackpot expectation at the time of appearance of each "reach display", there is a high possibility that the jackpot display result will appear in the order of "special reach" production mode> "super reach" production mode> "normal reach" production mode. It is configured to be. As a result, it is possible to show the player the degree of expectation for the jackpot by the effect mode of the variable effect, and the player can enjoy the uplifting feeling to the jackpot according to the effect mode of the variable effect executed by the player.

In the first embodiment, the stop pattern table 202d selected based on the number of reserved balls in the variable effect is configured to be different in the effect mode selected in the variable effect of the loss, but the special figure winning opening 77a is configured. , The determination of the variation effect based on the ball entering the ball into 78a and the determination of the variation effect based on the start of the variation effect based on the entry of the ball are configured so that substantially the same effect mode is selected. There is. Specifically, in the case of a variable effect of loss, one of A table 202d1, B table 202d2, and C table 202d3 is selected based on the number of reserved balls in the variable effect. In the A table 202d1, the B table 202d2, and the C table 202d3, the stop pattern counter assigned to the "non-reach (long)" effect mode, the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode, or the "non-reach (short)" effect mode. The values of C3 are the same, and the values of the stop pattern counters C3 assigned to other production modes are also set to be the same.

That is, based on the number of reserved balls in the variable effect, the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is selected, the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode is selected, or the "non-reach (short)" effect is selected. Since only different aspects are selected, the same effect mode is selected for the "reach display" effect mode regardless of the number of reserved balls. Therefore, the effect mode selected at the start winning and the effect mode selected at the start of the fluctuation are substantially the same even when the gaming state changes (for example, the number of reserved balls increases). Is selected. As a result, even if a pre-reading notice such as "pending change notice" is given based on the staging mode selected at the time of the start winning, the content of the pre-reading notice is included in the variable staging that is the target of the pre-reading notice. On the other hand, it is possible to perform an effect that does not cause a discrepancy.

From the above, the situation in which the game is performed by determining the effect mode of the variable effect to be executed based on the success or failure of the variable effect, the game state at that time, and the number of reserved balls of the variable effect at that time. By shortening the execution time of the variation effect and increasing the number of executions of the variation effect based on the above, it is possible to select an effect mode that enhances the execution efficiency of the variation effect.

When "reach display" is selected when the number of reserved balls for variable effect is large (for example, "4"), the stop pattern in which the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation" of each "reach display" is shortened. A table 202d may be provided. Further, when the number of reserved balls for the variation effect is large, the stop pattern table 202d may be provided in which the effect element of "low speed variation" is omitted in each effect mode. Further, a stop pattern table 202d may be provided in which the selection rate of each effect mode is completely different depending on the number of reserved balls in the variable effect. However, if the selection rate of each effect mode differs depending on the number of reserved balls in the variable effect, the number of reserved balls at the time of the pre-reading notice execution decision and the number of reserved balls in the pre-reading notice such as "hold change notice" are given. The number of reserved balls may differ from the number of reserved balls at the time of executing the variable effect that is the target of the look-ahead notice. In such a case, a process for maintaining consistency between the content of the pre-reading notice and the content of the variable staging is required, which makes the process complicated.

Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. The variation type counter CS1 is configured to, for example, add "1" in order within the range of "0 to 9", reach the maximum value (that is, "9"), and then return to "0". The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once every time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 26) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main processing (see FIG. 34). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a (starting winning), the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the reserved first to fourth areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. It is stored in the area variation type counter storage area 203c4.

This variation type counter CS1 is used to determine a detailed variation pattern of the variation effect. That is, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is detailed by the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern table 202e stored in the ROM 202 in the effect mode selected by the stop pattern table 202d and the stop pattern selection counter C3. Determine the variation pattern. The determination of the variation pattern is specifically the determination of the variation time of the variation effect. The voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 have a reach type and detailed symbols of the third symbol displayed by the third symbol display device 81 based on the fluctuation pattern (variation time) determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. The variation mode is determined, and the presence / absence of the advance notice effect execution and the execution mode of the advance notice effect are determined.

In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a rough fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect and determines only the fluctuation time. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to control the detailed advance notice lottery or the like necessary for executing the variation effect in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, so that the processing of the MPU 201 related to the variation effect can be reduced. can. Further, it is not necessary to prepare a command for all fluctuation patterns of the fluctuation effect in the main control device 110, and the ROM capacity of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

Further, in the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the variation effect is performed by determining the detailed variation pattern in the variation effect based on the variation time (rough variation pattern) determined by the main control device 110. You can increase the degree of freedom in choosing. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in which the gaming state changes from moment to moment, it is possible to select or change the effect content of the variable effect at any time in response to the change, and it is possible to execute an appropriate effect according to the game state. can.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 determines whether or not a series of "slump effects" can be executed. Even when only one variation pattern is provided, the variation pattern of a plurality of "pseudo-ream" effects can be executed as the "slump effect". Therefore, while reducing the ROM capacity, it is possible to increase the variation of the production and improve the fun of the game.

Here, the details of the variation pattern table 202e will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14. In the pachinko machine 10, as the fluctuation pattern table 202e, a loss fluctuation pattern table 202e1 used at the time of loss and a jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e2 used at the time of big hit are prepared. FIG. 13 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the variation pattern table 202e1 for loss stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIG. 13, the loss variation pattern table 202e1 is grouped based on the selected staging mode.

Specifically, as the production mode, the "E0: non-reach (long)" production mode and the "non-reach (middle)" production mode, which are referred to when the "non-reach (long)" production mode is determined, are determined. "E1: Non-reach (middle)" referred to when it is done, "E2: Non-reach (short)" referred to when the "non-reach (short)" production mode is determined, and " "E3: Normal reach" that is referred to when the "normal reach" effect mode is determined, "E4: super reach" that is referred to when the "super reach" effect mode is determined, and "special reach" effect It is classified as "E5: Special Reach" which is referred to when the aspect is determined. Then, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups.

In the first embodiment, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in a certain hold area is not a value that becomes a jackpot (big hit random number value), that is, a value that causes a loss, refer to the hold number table 202c. Then, the stop pattern table 202d is selected based on the game state at that time and the number of reserved balls at that time, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same hold area and the above stop pattern table. The production mode is selected based on 202d. Then, a group (group) to be referred to in the loss variation pattern table 202e1 is determined based on the selected staging mode. In the group (group) of the fluctuation pattern table 202e1 for loss, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the holding area is held in the holding area in the fluctuation effect. Determined as a variation pattern.

In the fluctuation pattern table 202e1 for loss, "E0: non-reach (long)" includes "high-speed fluctuation (long)" production element + "low-speed fluctuation" production element with a total fluctuation time of "15 seconds". One fluctuation pattern (variation time. Hereinafter, it is naturally possible to replace "variation pattern" with "variation time").

In the example shown in FIG. 13, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E0: non-reach (long)" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + the effect of "low-speed fluctuation". It is set to "0 to 9" for "element", and only "the effect element of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ the effect mode of" low-speed fluctuation "" can be selected.

That is, when the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is selected in the loss pattern table 202e1, "high-speed fluctuation (long)" is applied to all the values ("0 to 9") that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take. ) ”And“ low-speed fluctuation ”effect mode” are associated with each other. That is, in the case of the "non-reach (long)" effect mode, only the "high-speed variation (long)" effect mode + the "low-speed variation" effect mode is always selected as the variation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 13, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the effect mode of "low speed fluctuation" is the first half part of the effect element of "pseudo-ream", and the chance eye development symbol appears. Furthermore, it is configured to be the same as the fluctuation time of the "pseudo-variation" effect mode indicating whether or not the chance symbol appears, and the "pseudo-variation" effect mode is set on the voice lamp control device 113 side. It is configured so that it can be replaced with the effect mode of ".

Specifically, for example, in the case where the main control device 110 selects "the effect mode of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ the effect mode of" low-speed fluctuation "", and that fact is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, in the variation effect of the third symbol display device 81, the voice lamp control device 113 has "high-speed variation (long)" effect mode + "low-speed variation" effect mode as transmitted, or "high-speed variation". It is possible to select and execute "variation (long)" effect mode + "pseudo-variation" effect mode. With this configuration, it is possible to execute an effect that is greater than or equal to the type of variation time selected by the main control device 110, and while increasing the variation of the effect, the number of variation hours stored in the main control device 110 is reduced. However, the storage capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16, each effect mode will be described in detail with reference to each effect element constituting each effect mode. FIG. 15 is a diagram showing an example of the effect time of each effect unit of the variable effect or the “slump effect” executed in each game situation. Further, FIG. 16 is a timing chart showing an example of the relationship between the fluctuation time and the extension time and the “slump effect”, and FIG. 16 (a) illustrates the “slump effect” at the time of loss. Yes, FIG. 16B exemplifies the “slump effect” at the time of reach.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as described above, in a state where "slump effect" can occur so as not to fall into a slump situation in which the variation effect of the third symbol is not executed by the third symbol display device 81. (That is, when the variation effect of the third symbol is executed based on the winning of the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a in the "slump state"), a series of "slump effect" is executed by the third symbol display device 81. On the other hand, in a situation other than the "slump state" (that is, the "normal state"), it is configured to perform a variable effect composed of predetermined effect elements. With this configuration, the effect time performed by the third symbol display device 81 is lengthened, and the possibility that the next start winning prize will occur during the execution of a series of "slump effects" is increased, and the third symbol display is performed. By reducing the situation where the effect is not performed by the device 81, it is possible to prevent the player from awakening.

First, as the "normal state" effect, the "high-speed fluctuation (long)" effect element performed for "10 seconds", the "high-speed fluctuation (short)" effect element performed for "5 seconds", and the "5 seconds" "Slow fluctuation" effect element performed, "pseudo fluctuation" effect element performed for "5 seconds", "normal reach" effect element performed for "5 seconds", and "super reach" performed for "15 seconds" The staging element of "25 seconds", the staging element of "special reach", the staging element of "re-variation" performed for "5 seconds", and the staging element of "movie" performed for "50 seconds". It is prepared. In addition, as the "slump effect" of the "slump state", the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" performed for "5 seconds", the effect element of "pseudo fluctuation" performed for "5 seconds", and "0 seconds". There are two types of staging elements: a "development availability effect" that is performed for a longer period than "10 seconds" and a "whichever reach" effect that is performed for "10 seconds". The "high-speed fluctuation (short)" effect element performed in the "normal state" and the "slump state" and the "pseudo-variation" effect element are equivalent effect elements.

"High-speed fluctuation (long)" or "high-speed fluctuation (short)" (hereinafter, "high-speed fluctuation (long)" and "high-speed fluctuation (short)" are collectively referred to as "high-speed fluctuation". The staging element of (may be referred to as) is a variable staging or "slump staging" performed in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 6) of the third symbol display device 81, and the staging elements Z1 to Z3 (FIG. 6 (FIG. 6). The third symbol displayed in a)) refers to an effect element that is scrolled vertically downward on the display screen at high speed.

In this "high-speed fluctuation", the third symbol is changed so that the player cannot clearly recognize the display content of the third symbol, and the stop result of the previously stopped and displayed fluctuation effect or the "slump effect" is irregularly mixed. Performed as a (shuffle) production. In the first embodiment, the difference between the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" and the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" is the length of the effect time ("10 seconds" and "5 seconds") for shuffling at high speed. ) Only (see FIG. 15).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the "high-speed fluctuation (long)" effect element or the "high-speed variation (short)" effect element is performed, a specific effect mode ("non-reach (short)" effect is performed. Except for the mode or the “special variation” effect mode), the effect element of “slow speed variation” or the effect element of “pseudo variation” is configured to be performed.

The "low speed fluctuation" effect element is visually recognized by the player after the "high speed variation" effect element in the variation effect performed in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 6A) of the third symbol display device 81. An effect element that scrolls the third symbol at a low speed at a possible speed. This "low-speed fluctuation" staging element is a staging mode other than the "non-reach (short)" staging mode, and the "high-speed fluctuating" staging element is followed by "" except when the "pseudo-variation" described later is executed. It is performed for "5 seconds" (see FIG. 15).

In this "low-speed fluctuation" effect element, the player is made to recognize the display content of the third symbol, and the third symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 6A). Stop and display the design. When the same third symbol stops in the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3, it develops into an effect element of "normal reach" as "reach display" occurs, while the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3. When a different third symbol is stopped (excluding the chance eye development symbol described later), the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed, and the variation effect is terminated (“pseudo-ream” described later). Except when it develops into). In the effect element of this "low speed fluctuation", the time when the "reach display" is established and the middle symbol row Z2 fluctuates by several frames and the time when the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped without the "reach display" being established. Is configured to be at the same time.

Therefore, in the "non-reach (long)" production mode, the "high-speed fluctuation (long)" production element is performed for "10 seconds" at the beginning of the fluctuation production, and then the "low-speed fluctuation" production element is performed for "5 seconds". Will be. Also, in the "non-reach (middle)" production mode, the "high-speed fluctuation (short)" production element is performed for "5 seconds" at the beginning of the fluctuation production, and then the "low-speed fluctuation" production element is performed for "5 seconds". Will be. Then, in the effect element of the "low speed variation", the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 6A) are stopped in order, the "loss display" appears, and the variation effect of 1 is completed.

On the other hand, in the "non-reach (short)" production mode, the effect element of "low speed fluctuation" is not performed after the "high speed fluctuation (short)" is performed for "5 seconds", and the production of the "high speed fluctuation (short)" is performed. After the end of the elements, the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 6A) are stopped at the same time, the "missing display" appears, and the variation effect of 1 is completed. That is, in the "non-reach (short)" effect mode, after the "high-speed fluctuation (short)" effect element is performed, the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 rapidly move rapidly without going through the "low-speed fluctuation" effect element. It is configured to stop (so-called bitter stop).

When the "loss display" is stopped and displayed in the "low-speed fluctuation" effect element, the variation effect ends and is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 (see FIG. 6B) of the cockpit display area Db. The executed symbol is deleted.

The effect element of "pseudo-variation" is, first, when the right symbol column Z3 is stopped, the third symbol having a number "+1" larger than the third symbol stopped and displayed in the left symbol column Z1 (see FIG. 6A). When the symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, the third symbol of "7" is stopped and displayed in the left symbol column Z1 and the third symbol of "8" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol column Z3 (see FIG. 6A) (for example. That is, "7 ○ 8 (○ is changing)") is applicable. Hereinafter, the combination is referred to as "chance eye development symbol"), and then the above chance eye development symbol appears. When it is put out, when the middle symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 6A) is stopped, the same third symbol as the third symbol stopped and displayed in the left symbol row Z1 is stopped and displayed (for example, the left symbol row Z1). And the case where the third symbol of "7" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol column Z2 and the third symbol of "8" is stopped and displayed in the right symbol column Z3 (that is, "778") corresponds to the following. Is referred to as a "chance eye symbol"), or the third symbol having a number "+1" larger than the third symbol stopped and displayed in the left symbol row Z1 in the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed (for example, in the left symbol row Z1). The case where the third symbol of "7" is stopped and displayed and the third symbol of "8" is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 (that is, "788") corresponds to the following. It is a production element in which the production of whether or not to perform is performed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the above chance symbol appears in each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 6A) in the effect element of "pseudo fluctuation", "high speed fluctuation" is performed again. (Short) ”is executed, but when the above-mentioned gassechance pattern appears, the variable effect ends as it is.

This "pseudo-variation" effect element may be performed for "5 seconds" instead of the "low-speed variation" effect element after the "high-speed variation" effect element (see FIG. 15). Further, in the effect element of "pseudo-variation", when the right symbol column Z3 (see FIG. 6 (a)) is stopped, it is the same as the third symbol stopped and displayed in the left symbol column Z1 (see FIG. 6 (a)). When the third symbol (that is, the reach forming symbol) is stopped and displayed, it is configured to develop into the "reach display" (the effect element of "normal reach" or the effect element of "whichever reach") as it is.

Therefore, in the effect element of this "pseudo-variation", when the chance symbol is stopped and displayed, the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" and the effect element of "pseudo-variation" are started again from the chance symbol. The "pseudo-ren" is a combination of the "high-speed fluctuation (short)" production element and the "pseudo-variation" production element, as if the fluctuation production had started once more (so-called "pseudo-ren". "Sometimes referred to as staging.) Is executed.

In the first embodiment, a maximum of one "pseudo-ream" effect is executed (selected) in the "normal state" variable effect, and a maximum of five "pseudo-ream" effects can be executed in a series of "slump effects". It is configured in (can be selected).

Specifically, for example, when executing one "pseudo-ream" effect in the "normal state", after executing the "high-speed fluctuation (long)" effect element or the "high-speed fluctuation (short)" effect element. The "pseudo-variation" effect element is executed, the chance symbol is displayed as a pseudo stop (hereinafter referred to as "pseudo-stop"), and the "high-speed fluctuation (short)" effect element and the "pseudo-variation" effect element are displayed again. Is executed, a reach forming symbol appears in the "pseudo-variation" effect element, and develops into a "normal reach" effect element described later.

On the other hand, when the "pseudo-ream" effect is executed five times in the "slump effect", the "pseudo-variation" effect element is executed after the "high-speed fluctuation (short)" effect element is executed, and the chance symbol is simulated. After stopping, the second "high-speed fluctuation (short)" effect element and the "pseudo-variation" effect element are executed again to pseudo-stop the chance symbol, and then the third "high-speed fluctuation (short)" effect. The element and the "pseudo-variation" effect element are executed to pseudo-stop the chance symbol, and the fourth "high-speed fluctuation (short)" effect element and the "pseudo-variation" effect element are executed. Pseudo-stops, and the fifth "high-speed fluctuation (short)" effect element and "pseudo-variation" effect element are executed, and a reach formation symbol appears in the "pseudo-variation" effect element, and then. It develops into a directing element of "Which da reach" described later.

In addition, when executing the "Gase pseudo-ream" effect three times in the "slump effect", the effect element of "pseudo-variation" is executed after the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" is executed, and the chance symbol is displayed. The Gase Chance symbol appears without stopping, and the second "high-speed fluctuation (short)" effect element and "pseudo fluctuation" effect element are executed again, and the chance symbol does not stop. Appears, and then the chance symbol does not stop in the third "high-speed fluctuation (short)" staging element and the "pseudo-variation" staging element, and the gasechance symbol appears in the "pseudo-variation" staging element. After appearing, a series of "slump production" ends.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, even if the variation pattern managed by the main control device 110 is prepared as a variation pattern in which the number of “pseudo-ream” effects is executed only once, the variation pattern is prepared. In the "slump effect" in the "slump state", the "pseudo-ream" effect can be performed twice or more (five times or less). Therefore, even when the fluctuation pattern related to the "pseudo-ream" effect stored in the main control device 110 is reduced, the "pseudo-ream" effect of a plurality of patterns can be executed, so that the storage capacity of the ROM 202 can be reduced. , You can have a lot of variations in the production.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, if a chance symbol appears in this "pseudo-ream" effect in the "normal state" and the "slump state", at least some "reach display" ("normal state") Then, it is configured to surely develop into the production element of "normal reach" described later, and the production element of "whichever reach" described later in "slump state".

Therefore, in the "pseudo-variation" effect element, after the end of the "pseudo-variation" effect element, does the reach forming symbol appear (the middle symbol row Z2 is changing) and develop into the "normal reach" effect element? , It is possible to give the playability of whether the chance pattern appears and develops into the "pseudo-ream" effect again, or the gase chance pattern appears and the variable effect ends as it is.

In the effect element of "pseudo-variation", when the gassechance pattern is stopped and displayed, the variation effect or "slump effect" ends, and the execution symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db (FIG. 6 (b)). The execution symbol displayed in (see) is erased (hereinafter, the case where the Gase chance symbol is stopped and the variation effect or the "slump effect" ends is referred to as the "Gase pseudo-ren" effect). On the other hand, when the chance item symbol or the reach forming symbol (the middle symbol row Z2 is changing) is stopped and displayed, the variation effect or the "slump effect" continues, so that the execution symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db is displayed. The displayed execution symbol is also continuously displayed until the variation effect or the "slump effect" is completed.

Further, in the first embodiment, in the "pseudo-ream" effect in the "normal state", the number of pseudo-stops is set to one at the maximum, but the "pseudo-ream" effect in which the number of pseudo-stops is two or more is executed. It may be configured as follows. Further, in the "pseudo-ream" effect in the "slump effect", the maximum number of pseudo-stops is 5, but even if the "pseudo-ream" effect in which the number of pseudo-stops is 6 or more is executed. good.

As for the effect element of "normal reach", the reach formation symbol is stopped and displayed in the left symbol column Z1 and the right symbol column Z3 (see FIG. 6A) in the effect element of "low speed fluctuation" or the effect element of "pseudo fluctuation". In this case, it is an effect element that shows whether or not a big hit occurs depending on the fluctuation result of the middle symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 6A). This "normal reach" staging element is performed for "5 seconds" after the "slow fluctuating" staging element or the "pseudo fluctuating" staging element (see FIG. 15).

In this "normal reach" effect element, the third symbol that is stopped and displayed in the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 (see FIG. 6A) in the main display area Dm is enlarged and displayed. (Not shown). Further, the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 6A) scrolls downward in the vertical direction of the display screen at a low speed, and the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 is displayed in a visible state by the player. Will be done. Further, in the effect element of this "normal reach", the sub display area Ds (see FIG. 6A) is erased (not shown) with the enlarged display of the main display area Dm (see FIG. 6A). ).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after executing the effect element of "normal reach", a pattern that directly displays "missing display", a pattern that directly displays "big hit display", and a pattern of "super reach". There are a pattern that develops into a staging element, a pattern that develops into a staging element of "special reach", and a pattern that once the "missing display" appears and then executes the staging element of "re-variation".

When the "missing display" or the "big hit display" is stopped and displayed in the "normal reach" effect element, the variable effect ends and the execution symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6B). ) Is deleted.

The effect element of "super reach" is developed and executed when the change of the middle symbol column Z2 (see FIG. 6A) is continued without stopping the "loss display" in the effect element of "normal reach". , Is an effect element that shows whether or not a big hit occurs by performing a "battle effect" in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 6A). This "super reach" effect element is performed for "15 seconds" after the execution of the "normal reach" effect element (see FIG. 15).

In this "super reach" effect mode, while the "super reach" effect element is being executed, the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6A) is deleted from the display state of the "normal reach" effect element, and this "super reach" effect element is deleted. The reach formation symbol of the third symbol, which was the cause of the "reach display", is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area of the display screen. Then, the background display of the main display area Dm (see FIG. 6A) changes from the effect element of "normal reach", and a plurality of character symbols are displayed to perform "battle effect" (not shown).

In the first embodiment, it is configured to suggest the propriety of the variable effect based on the result (win or lose) of the "battle effect". Specifically, for example, in the above "battle effect", when the character symbol on the player side wins over the character symbol on the enemy side, it is suggested that the variable effect becomes "big hit display", and the player. When the character symbol on the side loses to the character symbol on the enemy side, it is configured to suggest that the variation effect is "missing display".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the effect element of "super reach" is executed, a pattern that directly displays "loss display", a pattern that directly displays "big hit display", and a pattern that temporarily displays "loss display" are displayed. There is a pattern that executes the effect element of "re-variation" after making "" appear.

When the "missing display" or the "big hit display" is stopped and displayed in the effect element of the "super reach", the variation effect ends and the execution symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db (FIG. 6 (b)). The execution symbol displayed in (see) is deleted.

The effect element of "special reach" is developed and executed when the change of the middle symbol column Z2 (see FIG. 6A) is continued without stopping the "loss display" in the effect element of "normal reach". , Is a staging element that shows whether or not a big hit occurs by performing a "competitive staging" in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 6A). This "special reach" staging element is performed for "25 seconds" after the "normal reach" staging element is executed (see FIG. 15).

In the effect element of this "special reach", during the execution of the effect element of "special reach", the cockpit display area Db (Fig. 6 (a)) is deleted, and the reach-forming symbol of the third symbol, which was the cause of this “reach display”, is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area of the display screen. Then, the background display of the main display area Dm (see FIG. 6A) changes from the effect element of "normal reach", and a plurality of characters different from the effect element of "super reach" are made to appear to "competition effect". (Not shown).

In the first embodiment, it is configured to suggest the propriety of the variable staging based on the result (win / loss) of the “competitive staging”. Specifically, for example, in the above-mentioned "competition effect", when the character symbol on the player side wins over the character symbol on the enemy side, it is suggested that the variable effect is "big hit display", while the game. When the character symbol on the person side loses to the character symbol on the enemy side, it is configured to suggest that the variation effect is "missing display".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the execution of the "special reach" effect element, the pattern that directly displays the "loss display" and the direct "big hit display" are displayed as in the "super reach" effect element. A pattern that appears and a pattern that executes the effect element of "re-variation" after the "loss display" appears once are prepared.

When the "missing display" or the "big hit display" is stopped and displayed in the effect element of the "special reach", the variation effect ends and the execution symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db (FIG. 6 (b)). The execution symbol displayed in (see) is deleted.

In addition, after the execution of the "normal reach" effect element, it is configured to develop into a "super reach" effect element or a "special reach" effect element. When the reach formation symbol is stopped later, it may be configured to suddenly develop into a "super reach" effect element or a "special reach" effect element without going through the "normal reach" effect element. Further, the effect element of "special reach" may be configured to be performed after the effect element of "super reach" is executed.

The effect element of "re-variation" is an effect element that develops and is executed after the "loss display" appears once in any of the "reach display", and the "big hit display" appears. This "re-variation" effect element is performed for "5 seconds" after any "reach display" is executed (see FIG. 15).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, only the pattern in which the "big hit display" appears after the execution of the effect element of "re-variation" is prepared. That is, when the effect element of "re-variation" is executed, the "big hit display" always appears after that. In other words, in the case of "missing display", the effect element of "revariation" is not executed. This is because the staging element of "re-variation" is a staging element that changes the temporarily stopped "lost display" to one of the "big hit displays", so the "lost display" that has not won the jackpot If you go in the case of, there will be a discrepancy in the production. Therefore, the effect element of this "re-variation" is configured so as to be selected only in the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 and not selected in the loss variation pattern table 202e1.

When the "big hit display" is stopped and displayed in the effect element of "re-variation", the variation effect ends and is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 (see FIG. 6B) of the cockpit display area Db. The executed symbol is deleted.

The effect element of the "movie" is an effect element that is executed when the "2R probability variation jackpot" is won, and the "jacket display" corresponding to the "2R probability variation jackpot" is displayed. The staging element of this "movie" is performed for "50 seconds" as a whole (see FIG. 15), and a specific character symbol (for example, for example) is used in the entire main display area Dm (see FIG. 6A) from the start of the variable staging. A production is performed in which the premier character) speaks a predetermined message (not shown).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, only the pattern in which the "big hit display" corresponding to the "2R probability variation big hit" appears after the execution of the effect element of the "movie" is prepared. That is, when the effect element of the "movie" is executed, the "big hit display" of the "2R probability variation big hit" always appears after that. In the first embodiment, the effect element of the "movie" is configured to be executed (selected) not only in the "normal state" but also in the "slump state".

When the "big hit display" is stopped and displayed in the effect element of the "movie", the variation effect ends and is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 (see FIG. 6B) of the cockpit display area Db. The executed symbol is deleted.

Next, the production of the "slump state" will be described. In the "slump state", when a ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a, the third symbol display device 81 has a "high-speed fluctuation (short)" effect element and a "pseudo-variation" effect element. The "pseudo-ream" effect (including the "gase pseudo-ream" effect; the same applies hereinafter) composed of the above is configured to be executed at least twice or more.

Conventionally, when there is no reserved ball for the variable effect, the next variable effect is started unless a new ball is inserted into any of the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a within the variable time of the variable effect being executed. This is not possible, and the demo screen or the like is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the player does not perform the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 even though the ball is fired and the game is played, the player can obtain the interest related to the jackpot lottery that the player wants. Instead, I am awakened to the game. Further, the player recognizes that the pachinko machine 10 is difficult for the ball to enter the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a because the variation effect is not performed on the third symbol display device 81, and it is difficult to obtain the game value. There is a risk that the pachinko machine 10 will stop playing on the pachinko machine 10 because it is judged to be a platform.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a ball starts and wins a prize in the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a during the "slump state", the "slump effect" is executed and the variation time of the acquired variable effect is changed. It is configured so that the dynamic effect of the third symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81 can be performed for a long time. As a result, the situation in which the dynamic effect of the third symbol (variable effect and "slump effect") is not performed in the third symbol display device 81 is unlikely to occur, and the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is configured. It is possible to maintain the execution state of the dynamic effect for a long time.

In particular, when the variation effect acquired by the above start winning is a "non-reach" effect mode, a plurality of "Gase pseudo-ren" effects, which are "slump effects", are performed for a longer time than the acquired variation time of the variation effect. It is configured to run once. With this configuration, the dynamic effect time of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is made longer than the variation time of the acquired variation effect, and the movement of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. By reducing the number of situations in which a typical effect is not performed, it is possible to prevent the player from awakening.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the effect mode of the variable effect acquired by the start winning in the "slump state" is the "non-reach" effect mode (that is, since the number of reserved balls is 0, "15 seconds". In the case of the "non-reach (long)" production mode), the time for performing an additional production (hereinafter referred to as "extended time") for the fluctuation time of the acquired fluctuation production is acquired by lottery. The "slump effect" is configured to be performed during the total time of the acquired variable time and extended time. Specifically, when the extension time of "5 seconds" is acquired, the extension time of "10 seconds" is acquired by executing the "Gase pseudo-ream" effect twice as the "slump effect". As a "slump effect", in addition to the two "gase pseudo-ream" effects, the effect mode of the "development possibility effect" described later is executed for "5 seconds".

In addition, the effect mode of the variable effect acquired by the start winning in the "slump state" executes the "reach display" (that is, the "normal reach" effect mode, the "super reach" effect mode, or the "special reach" effect mode. ), The extension time is not drawn, and one or more "pseudo-ream" effects are executed according to the acquired fluctuation time, and the effect element of "whichever reach" described later is executed. .. The details of the various effects performed in the "slump effect" will be described later.

Furthermore, if the effect mode of the variable effect acquired by the start prize during the "slump effect" is the "non-reach (long)" effect mode, the extension time is not drawn, and " "Slump effect" is configured to be additionally set. This is because the extension time has already been acquired in the already executed "slump effect", and if an additional extension time is acquired in that state, the effect time of the "slump effect" becomes longer than necessary. At the same time, the management of the production time becomes complicated. Therefore, if a variable effect (all variable effects of the "non-reach" effect mode and the "reach display" effect mode) is acquired during the "slump effect", the additional extension time should not be extracted. By configuring it, the processing load related to the extraction of the extended time is reduced, and the production time of the "slump effect" can be easily managed.

In particular, when a new start prize is generated during the "slump effect", the running "slump effect" is not executing one effect unit of the "slump effect" based on the extension time, that is, based on the extension time. If the staging element in the previous stage of the staging element is being executed, an additional staging is performed in order to align the series of "slump staging" in performing the additional "slump staging" based on the above start winning prize. In order to perform the above, the initially set extension time is temporarily reset (that is, cleared to 0), and the production contents of a series of "slump effects" are newly set again. This means that if the staging element other than the staging element during the extension time, that is, the staging element at the stage before the staging element based on the extension time is being executed, the staging element of the portion corresponding to the acquired extension time is executed. This is because even if the extension time is reset once and the production content of a series of "slump effects" is set again, there is no discrepancy in the production content.

In addition, in the "pseudo-ream" effect in the "slump state", when the Gase chance symbol symbol is stopped and displayed, that is, when the "Gase pseudo-ream" effect is performed, one of a series of "slump effects" The effect unit ends, and the execution symbol (main hold display or dummy hold display) displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db is deleted at the same time. Therefore, as one effect unit of the "slump effect", a "pseudo-ream" effect equivalent to the variable effect of the "normal state" is performed, and as a result of the display, the gassechance symbol is stopped and displayed, and the execution symbol display area is displayed. By erasing the execution symbol displayed on Db0, the player can be made to have the illusion that the variation effect of 1 is completed.

The effect element of the "development possibility effect" is one of the effect elements executed in the "slump effect" in the "slump state", and is (pseudo) stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is a production of whether or not the design of the Gase chance is changed. In addition, the production element of "development possibility production" is a production element dedicated to "slump production". In the effect element of this "development possibility effect", an effect is executed as if the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 is pseudo-cracked and the liquid crystal screen is cracked (see FIG. 45).

In the effect element of this "development possibility effect", if a pseudo crack is formed in the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81, and as a result, the liquid crystal screen is cracked, the Gase chance eye symbol is a chance. The next "pseudo-ream" effect is performed instead of the eye symbol, or the gasechance eye symbol is replaced with the reach formation symbol and the effect element of "Which da reach" is executed. On the other hand, in the effect element of "development possibility effect", if the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 has a pseudo crack, but the effect that the liquid crystal screen is pseudo cracked is not performed, the chance is It is configured to end a series of "slump effects" with the pattern as it is.

The effect element of this "development possibility effect" is executed during the "slump effect" for a period longer than "0 seconds" and shorter than "10 seconds" after the execution of the effect element of "pseudo-variation" (see FIG. 15). The longer the number of seconds executed, the more the amount of pseudo-cracks that enter the liquid crystal screen is configured to gradually increase. Specifically, from "0 seconds" to "3 seconds", the "first development possibility production" with a small amount of cracks is executed, and from "3 seconds" to "7 seconds", the "first development possibility or not" is executed. The "second development possibility production" with more cracks than the "production" is executed, and from "7 seconds" to "10 seconds", the "third development possibility production" with more cracks than the "second development possibility production" Is executed. The detailed contents of the "development possibility production" will be described later.

It should be noted that, in the effect element of "development possibility effect" in "slump effect", when the effect that the display screen is quasily cracked is not executed, that is, when the effect element of "development possibility effect" is not developed. One effect unit of "slump effect" ends, and the execution symbol (main hold display or dummy hold display) displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 (see FIG. 6B) of the cockpit display area Db is erased. To. Therefore, the "development possibility / non-development effect" is performed as the "slump effect", and as a result of the display, the Gase chance eye symbol is stopped and displayed, and the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 is erased. It is possible to make a person feel as if the variation effect of 1 is completed.

The staging element of "Which da reach" is one of the staging performed in the "slump staging", and is the "reach display" just before whether or not the "big hit display" appears. In addition, the staging element of "Which da reach" is a staging element dedicated to "slump staging". In the effect element of this "Which da reach", the third symbol which is the same as the reach forming symbol in the third symbol display device 81 and the third symbol different from the third symbol are placed in the central portion of the third symbol display device 81. An effect of competing for display (hereinafter referred to as "which effect") is executed (see FIG. 47 (e)).

This "Which da Reach" effect element is performed for "10 seconds" after the execution of the "pseudo-variation" effect element or the "development possibility effect" effect element in the "slump effect" (see FIG. 15).

In the effect element of "Whichda Reach", the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6A) is erased during the execution of the effect element of "Whichda Reach" as in the above-mentioned effect element of "Super Reach". The reach-forming symbol of the third symbol, which was the cause of this "reach display", is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area of the display screen. Then, the background display of the main display area Dm (see FIG. 6A) is changed to the background display dedicated to the effect element of “Whichda reach”, and the above “Whichda effect” is performed (see FIG. 47 (e)). ).

In the first embodiment, it is configured to suggest the propriety of the "slump effect" (variable effect) based on the result (win or lose) of the "either effect". Specifically, for example, in the above-mentioned "Which da effect", the third symbol, which is the same as the reach forming symbol, is stopped and displayed in the central portion of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (that is, the position of the middle symbol row Z2). In this case, it is suggested that the "slump effect" becomes the "big hit display", while the third symbol different from the reach forming symbol is stopped and displayed in the central portion of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. It is configured to suggest that the "slump effect" becomes a "missing display".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the effect element of "Which da reach" is executed, the pattern that directly displays the "loss display" and the direct "big hit display" are displayed, as in the case of the effect element of "super reach". "Is displayed, and a pattern is prepared in which the effect element of" re-variation "is executed after the" loss display "is displayed once.

If the "missing display" or "big hit display" is stopped and displayed in the effect element of "Which da reach", the series of "slump effect" ends and the execution symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db (Fig. The execution symbol displayed in 6 (b)) is deleted.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the effect time (variation time) of all the effect elements of the variable effect that can be executed in the "normal state" is an integral multiple of the effect time in units of "5 seconds" ( That is, it is composed of "5 seconds", "10 seconds", "15 seconds", "20 seconds", "25 seconds" or "50 seconds"). Further, in the "slump state", the effect time of all the effect elements except the effect element of "development possibility effect" is also composed of an integral multiple of the effect time in units of "5 seconds". The extension time selected in the "slump state" is also composed of an integral multiple of the production time in "5 seconds" units. With this configuration, when performing a series of "slump effects" in which a plurality of effect elements are executed in relation to the acquired 1 variation effect, the variation time (and extension time) and "extension time" of the variation effect are performed. It is possible to easily match the production time of the "slump production".

Here, with reference to FIG. 16, the relationship between the execution time of the variable effect (dynamic display), the extension time acquired at the time of the “slump effect”, and the effect time of the executed “slump effect” will be described. do.

As shown in FIG. 16A, when the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is selected and "5 seconds" is selected as the extension time in the "slump state", the total effect time is "5 seconds". "20 seconds", and as a "slump effect", the first "Gase pseudo-ren" production (hereinafter, the first "Gase pseudo-ren" production, "Gase pseudo-ren 1", the second "Gase pseudo-ren" production The "Gase pseudo-ren" effect is set to "Gase pseudo-ren 2", ..., The nth (n is a natural number) "Gase pseudo-ren" effect is called "Gase pseudo-ren n"), and the "first" is set. "Gase pseudo-ren 2" is set in "2 production".

Further, as shown in FIG. 16A, when the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is selected and "10 seconds" is selected as the extension time in the "slump state", the total effect time is selected. Is set to "25 seconds", and as "slump effect", "Gase pseudo-ren 1" is set in "1st effect", "Gase pseudo-ren 2" is set in "2nd effect", and "3rd effect". A "development possibility effect" corresponding to the remaining "slump effect" effect time (that is, "5 seconds") is set.

Then, each of the above "slump effects" is performed, and the acquired variable effect stop symbol ("non-reach (long)" effect mode, so "missing display") is the symbol corresponding to the gasechance pattern. The stop symbol is finally displayed as a stop, and a series of "slump effects" ends. If a new start prize is generated in the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a while this "slump effect" is being performed, the transition to the "normal state" is made, but no new start prize is generated. If so, it will be in the "slump state" again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 16B, when the "normal reach" effect mode is selected in the "slump state", the total effect time is "20 seconds", and the "first effect" is set as the "slump effect". "Pseudo-ren" production (hereinafter, the first "pseudo-ren" production, "pseudo-ren 1", the second "pseudo-ren" production, "pseudo-ren 2", ..., n The "pseudo-ren" effect of the second time (n is a natural number) is referred to as "pseudo-ren n"), and the effect element of "whichever reach" is set in the "second effect".

Further, as shown in FIG. 16B, when the "super reach" effect mode is selected in the "slump state", the total effect time is "30 seconds", and the "slump effect" is the "first". "Pseudo-ren 1" is set in "Direction", "Pseudo-ren 2" is set in "Second production", and "Which da reach" is set in "Third production".

Further, as shown in FIG. 16B, when the "special reach" effect mode is selected in the "slump state", the total effect time is "40 seconds", and the "slump effect" is the "first". "Pseudo-ren 1" is set in "Direction", "Pseudo-ren 2" is set in "Second production", "Pseudo-ren 3" is set in "Third production", and "Which one" is set in "Fourth production". The staging element of "Da Reach" is set.

Then, each of the above "slump effects" is performed, the "loss display" or "big hit display" corresponding to the acquired stop symbol of the variation effect is finally stopped and displayed, and the series of "slump effects" ends.

With this configuration, the "slump effect" is performed longer than the fluctuation time of the acquired variation effect, the effect time performed by the third symbol display device 81 is lengthened, and the effect is produced by the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to reduce the situation that is not done and prevent the player from awakening.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. In the fluctuation pattern table 202e1 for loss, "E1: non-reach (middle)" includes "high-speed fluctuation (short)" production element + "low-speed fluctuation" production element with a total fluctuation time of "10 seconds". One variation pattern of is prepared. Hereinafter, in the description of each effect element relating to the fluctuation pattern of FIGS. 13 and 14, the term “effect element” will be omitted for convenience of explanation.

In the example shown in FIG. 13, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E1: non-reach (middle)" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + "low-speed fluctuation". It is set to "0 to 9", and only "" high-speed fluctuation (short) "+" low-speed fluctuation "" can be selected.

That is, when the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode is selected in the loss pattern table 202e1, "high-speed fluctuation (short)" is applied to all the values ("0 to 9") that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take. ) ”+“ Low speed fluctuation ”” is associated. That is, in the case of the "non-reach (middle)" staging mode, only "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + "low-speed fluctuation" is always selected as the fluctuation pattern.

In the fluctuation pattern table 202e1 for loss, one fluctuation pattern of "only" high-speed fluctuation (short) "with a total fluctuation time of 5 seconds" is prepared for "E2: non-reach (short)".

In the example shown in FIG. 13, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in “E2: non-reach (short)” and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is “0 to 9” with respect to “only“ high-speed fluctuation (short) ””. It is set so that only "high-speed fluctuation (short)" can be selected.

That is, when the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is selected in the loss pattern table 202e1, "high-speed fluctuation (short)" is applied to all the values ("0 to 9") that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can take. ) "Only" is associated. That is, in the case of the "non-reach (short)" effect mode, "only" high-speed fluctuation (short) "is always selected as the fluctuation pattern".

In the fluctuation pattern table 202e1 for loss, "E3: normal reach" includes "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "low-speed fluctuation" + "normal reach" with a total fluctuation time of "20 seconds", and the total fluctuation time. Two fluctuation patterns of "30 seconds" "" High-speed fluctuation (long) "+" Pseudo-variation "+" High-speed fluctuation (short) "+" Pseudo-variation "+" Normal reach "" are available for selection. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each variation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 13, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E3: normal reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" + "normal reach". It is "7-9" for "0-6", "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "pseudo-variation" + "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + "pseudo-variation" + "normal reach".

That is, in the "normal reach" production mode at the time of loss, the fluctuation pattern of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" + "normal reach" is 70%, and "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "pseudo fluctuation". The fluctuation pattern of + "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "normal reach" is set to be selected at a ratio of 30%. Therefore, in the variation effect including the effect element of "normal reach" selected at the time of loss, the variation pattern of "" high speed variation (long) "+" low speed variation "+" normal reach "" is easily selected (70%). There is.

In the fluctuation pattern table 202e1 for loss, "E4: Super Reach" includes "" High-speed fluctuation (long) "+" Low-speed fluctuation "+" Super reach "" with a total fluctuation time of "30 seconds". Two fluctuation patterns of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "high speed fluctuation (short)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "super reach" with a fluctuation time of "40 seconds" can be selected. It is prepared, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 13, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 in the “E4: super reach” effect mode is ““ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”+“ low-speed fluctuation ”+“ super reach ””. "0-7", "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "pseudo-variation" + "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + "pseudo-variation" + "super reach" "8,9", It has become.

That is, in the "super reach" production mode at the time of loss, the fluctuation pattern of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" + "super reach" is 80%, and "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "pseudo". The fluctuation pattern of "variation" + "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "super reach" is set to be selected at a ratio of 20%. Therefore, in the "super reach" staging mode selected at the time of loss, the fluctuation pattern of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" + "super reach" is easily selected.

In the fluctuation pattern table 202e1 for loss, "E5: special reach" includes "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" + "special reach" with a total fluctuation time of "40 seconds". Two fluctuation patterns of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "pseudo-variation" + "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + "pseudo-variation" + "special reach" with a fluctuation time of "50 seconds" can be selected. It is prepared, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 13, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E5: special reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is for "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "low-speed fluctuation" + "special reach". "0-8", "9" for "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "pseudo-variation" + "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + "pseudo-variation" + "special reach" ..

That is, in the "special reach" production mode at the time of loss, the fluctuation pattern of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "low-speed fluctuation" + "special reach" is 90%, and "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "pseudo". The fluctuation pattern of "variation" + "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "special reach" is set to be selected at a ratio of 10%. Therefore, in the "special reach" staging mode selected at the time of loss, the fluctuation pattern of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" + "special reach" is easily selected.

The fluctuation pattern at the time of loss is selected by using only the fluctuation type counter CS1, but it may be selected by using a plurality of fluctuation type counters in combination (selecting whether or not to display a notice, etc.).

Next, the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 stored in the ROM 202.

The jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 is divided into groups based on the selected staging mode. Specifically, as the effect mode, "E6: normal reach" referred to when the "normal reach" effect mode is determined, and "E7: super" referred to when the "super reach" effect mode is determined. "E8: Special Reach", which is referred to when the "reach" and "special reach" production modes are determined, and "E9: special variation", which is referred to when the "special variation" production mode is determined. It is divided into those for use. Then, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups.

When the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value that becomes a jackpot (big hit random number value), the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the same holding area and the game state at the time of the start winning. The stop pattern table 202d is selected based on the above, and the effect mode is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same holding area and the stop pattern table 202d. Then, the group (group) to be referred to in the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 is determined based on the effect mode. In the group (group) of the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e2, the fluctuation pattern associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the holding area is determined as the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation effect held in the holding area. Will be done.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e2, "E6: normal reach" includes "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" + "normal reach" with a total fluctuation time of "20 seconds", and the total fluctuation time. Is "25 seconds" "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "low-speed fluctuation" + "normal reach" + "re-variation", and the total fluctuation time is "30 seconds" "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "High speed fluctuation (short)" + "Pseudo fluctuation" + "Normal reach" "and" High speed fluctuation (long) "+" Pseudo fluctuation "+" High speed "with total fluctuation time of" 35 seconds " Four fluctuation patterns of "variation (short)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "normal reach" + "revariation" are prepared so that they can be selected, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern. There is.

In the example shown in FIG. 14, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E6: normal reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" + "normal reach". "1,2", "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Pseudo-variation" + "0", "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Low-speed fluctuation" + "Normal reach" + "Re-variation" "High-speed fluctuation (short)" + "pseudo-variation" + "normal reach" "" 3-5 "," high-speed fluctuation (long) "+" pseudo-variation "+" high-speed fluctuation (short) "+" pseudo-variation "+" Normal reach "+" Re-variation "" is "6-9".

That is, in the "normal reach" production mode at the time of a big hit, the fluctuation pattern of "" high speed fluctuation (long) "+" low speed fluctuation "+" normal reach "" is 10%, and "" high speed fluctuation (long) "+" low speed fluctuation ". + 20% fluctuation pattern of "normal reach" + "re-variation", "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "pseudo-variation" + "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + "pseudo-variation" + "normal reach" The ratio of the pattern is 30%, and the fluctuation pattern of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "pseudo-variation" + "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + "pseudo-variation" + "normal reach" + "re-variation" is 40%. It is set to be selected by.

Therefore, in the "normal reach" production mode selected at the time of a big hit, "" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+" pseudo-variation "+" high-speed fluctuation (short) "+" pseudo-variation "+" normal reach "+" re-variation "" Fluctuation pattern is easy to select (40% of the total). However, "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "low-speed fluctuation" + "normal reach", "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "low-speed fluctuation" + "normal reach" + "re-variation", "high-speed fluctuation" By configuring so that "(long)" + "pseudo-variation" + "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + "pseudo-variation" + "normal reach" are also selected, you can expect a big hit from any fluctuation pattern. Can be provided.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e2, "E7: Super Reach" includes "" High-speed fluctuation (long) "+" Low-speed fluctuation "+" Super reach "" with a total fluctuation time of "30 seconds". "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "low-speed fluctuation" + "super reach" + "re-variation" with a fluctuation time of "35 seconds" and "high-speed fluctuation (long)" with an overall fluctuation time of "40 seconds" ) ”+“ Pseudo-variation ”+“ High-speed fluctuation (short) ”+“ Pseudo-variation ”+“ Super reach ”” and “High-speed fluctuation (long)” + “Pseudo-variation” with an overall fluctuation time of “45 seconds” ”+“ High-speed fluctuation (short) ”+“ Pseudo fluctuation ”+“ Super reach ”+“ Re-variation ”” can be selected and prepared, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for each fluctuation pattern. Are associated with each other.

In the example shown in FIG. 14, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E7: Super Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is for "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "low-speed fluctuation" + "super reach". For "0,1", "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "low-speed fluctuation" + "super reach" + "re-variation", "2-4", "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + " "Pseudo-variation" + "High-speed fluctuation (short)" + "Pseudo-variation" + "Super reach" "" 5,6 "," High-speed fluctuation (long) "+" Pseudo-variation "+" High-speed fluctuation (short) ) ”+“ Pseudo-variation ”+“ Super reach ”+“ Re-variation ”” is “7-9”.

That is, in the "super reach" production mode at the time of a big hit, the fluctuation pattern of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" + "super reach" is 20%, and "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed". The fluctuation pattern of "variation" + "super reach" + "re-variation" is 30%, "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "pseudo-variation" + "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + "pseudo-variation" + "super reach" The fluctuation pattern of "" is 20%, and the fluctuation pattern of "" High-speed fluctuation (long) "+" Pseudo-variation "+" High-speed fluctuation (short) "+" Pseudo-variation "+" Super reach "+" Re-variation "" It is set to be selected at a rate of 30%.

Therefore, in the "super reach" effect mode selected at the time of a big hit, a variation pattern including the effect element of "re-variation" (that is, "" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+" low-speed fluctuation "+" super reach "+" re-variation " "Fluctuation" ”or“ High-speed fluctuation (long) ”+“ Pseudo-variation ”+“ High-speed fluctuation (short) ”+“ Pseudo-variation ”+“ Super reach ”+“ Re-variation ””) is easy to select (overall) 60%). However, fluctuation patterns that do not include the effect element of "re-variation" (that is, "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "low-speed fluctuation" + "super reach" "or" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+" pseudo-variation " By configuring so that + "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "super reach") is also selected, it is possible to provide playability in which a big hit can be expected from any fluctuation pattern.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e2, "E8: Special Reach" includes "" High-speed fluctuation (long) "+" Low-speed fluctuation "+" Special reach "" with a total fluctuation time of "40 seconds". "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "low-speed fluctuation" + "special reach" + "re-variation" with a fluctuation time of "45 seconds" and "high-speed fluctuation (long)" with an overall fluctuation time of "50 seconds" ) ”+“ Pseudo-variation ”+“ High-speed fluctuation (short) ”+“ Pseudo-variation ”+“ Special reach ”” and “High-speed fluctuation (long)” + “Pseudo-variation” with an overall fluctuation time of “55 seconds” ”+“ High-speed fluctuation (short) ”+“ Pseudo fluctuation ”+“ Special reach ”+“ Re-variation ”” can be selected and prepared, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 for each fluctuation pattern. Are associated with each other.

In the example shown in FIG. 14, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E8: special reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is for "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "low-speed fluctuation" + "special reach". "0-2", "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "Low-speed fluctuation" + "Special reach" + "Re-variation" "3, 4", "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + " "Pseudo-variation" + "High-speed fluctuation (short)" + "Pseudo-variation" + "Special reach" "" 5-7 "," High-speed fluctuation (long) "+" Pseudo-variation "+" High-speed fluctuation (short) ) ”+“ Pseudo-variation ”+“ Special reach ”+“ Re-variation ”” is “8,9”.

That is, in the "special reach" production mode at the time of a big hit, the fluctuation pattern of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" + "special reach" is 30%, and "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed". The fluctuation pattern of "variation" + "special reach" + "re-variation" is 20%, "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "pseudo-variation" + "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + "pseudo-variation" + "special reach" The fluctuation pattern of "" is 30%, and the fluctuation pattern of "" High-speed fluctuation (long) "+" Pseudo-variation "+" High-speed fluctuation (short) "+" Pseudo-variation "+" Special reach "+" Re-variation "" It is set to be selected at a rate of 20%.

Therefore, in the "super reach" effect mode selected at the time of a big hit, a variation pattern that does not include the effect element of "re-variation" (that is, "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "low-speed fluctuation" + "super reach" "or , "" High-speed fluctuation (long) "+" Pseudo-variation "+" High-speed fluctuation (short) "+" Pseudo-variation "+" Super reach "") is easy to select (60% of the total). However, a fluctuation pattern that includes the effect element of "re-variation" (that is, "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "low-speed fluctuation" + "super reach" + "re-variation" "or" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ By configuring so that "pseudo-variation" + "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + "pseudo-variation" + "super reach" + "re-variation") are also selected, a game in which a big hit can be expected from any fluctuation pattern. Can provide sex.

In the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e2, only one fluctuation pattern of the "movie" whose total fluctuation time is "50 seconds" is prepared for "E9: special fluctuation". In the example shown in FIG. 14, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E9: special fluctuation" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 9" with respect to "movie", and only "movie" is used. It is set to be selectable. That is, when the stop type of the jackpot is "2R probability variation jackpot", "movie" is always selected as the fluctuation pattern.

When the "movie" is selected in the main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine a detailed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the "movie". In the pachinko machine 10, as detailed fluctuation patterns corresponding to the “movie”, for example, “chicken” or “girl” or the like is displayed in the small areas Ds1 and Ds3 (see FIG. 6A) of the third symbol display device 81. While displaying the character, the third symbol is finally specified due to the fluctuation pattern in which the third symbol finally stops at a specific symbol (for example, "341"), or the lighting or blinking of a specific lamp. Fluctuation patterns that stop at the symbol of are included.

In this way, when a big hit is won, by configuring it so that a relatively long fluctuation pattern can be easily selected, the entertainment of the game is improved by enhancing the production content of the fluctuation production in which the big hit occurs. be able to. In addition, if the jackpot is not won, that is, if there is a loss, by configuring the configuration so that a relatively short fluctuation pattern can be easily selected, the effect content of the variation effect at the time of loss can be shortened and the variation effect can be achieved. It can be digested efficiently.

The fluctuation pattern at the time of a big hit is determined by using only the fluctuation type counter CS1, but it may be configured to be determined by using a plurality of other fluctuation type counters. For example, whether or not to add a notice effect for notifying the start of a jackpot or "reach display" before or during the fluctuation effect may be determined by another fluctuation type counter, or when the reach is established. , The number of symbols to be shifted and stopped (for example, front-rear loss by one symbol) may be determined by another variable type counter.

Further, in the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, a group dedicated to "2R probability variation jackpot" was provided, but a group dedicated to "2R probability variation jackpot" was not provided, and the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 provided "15R probability variation jackpot" or "15R". Only the correspondence between the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation pattern in the case of "normal jackpot" may be specified. In this case, when the jackpot type is "2R probability variation jackpot", the "movie" may be determined as the fluctuation pattern without referring to the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202e2.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, only the "movie" is selected when the "2R probability variation jackpot" is obtained, but when the "2R probability variation jackpot" is reached, one variation pattern is selected from the plurality of variation patterns. It may be selected. In this case, even in a group dedicated to "2R probability variation jackpot" such as the group of "15R probability variation jackpot", the variation type counter CS1 is supported for the variation pattern selected when "2R probability variation jackpot" is obtained. The variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in a certain hold area may be determined as the variation pattern in the variation effect reserved in the hold area.

Further, among the effect modes selected by the main control device 110, an effect mode may be provided in which the effect element of "pseudo variation" in which the number of pseudo stops (number of chance symbol symbol stops) is performed twice or more is executed. .. Further, the effect element of "pseudo-variation" may not be executed, and the chance symbol may appear in the effect element of "slow-speed fluctuation" to develop into a "pseudo-ream" effect.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. The winning random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, "0 to 99", reaches the maximum value (that is, "99"), and then returns to "0". Further, when the hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the hit random number counter C4.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the hit random number counter C4 (value = "0 to 99"), and is once for each timer interruption process (see FIG. 26). At the same time as being updated, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 34).

In the first embodiment, the value of the hit random number counter C4 is updated for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26), and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through the second entry port (through gate) 67. To. The number of random numbers to be won is 50, and the range is "5 to 54". That is, when the value of the acquired random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 54", it is determined to be a hit, and the symbol "○" is lit and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 as the stop symbol (second symbol). At the same time, the electric accessory 79 of the right side special drawing winning opening 78a is activated, and the right side special drawing winning opening 78a is opened for a predetermined time.

On the other hand, if the acquired value of the hit counter C4 is not in the range of "5 to 54", that is, if it is in the range of "0 to 4" or "55 to 99", it is determined to be a loss and the second The symbol "x" is lit and displayed on the symbol display device 83 as a stop symbol (second symbol), and the electric accessory 79 does not operate.

As described above, the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 is provided with various counters and the like, and the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 is provided with various tables. In the main control device 110, the values of the counters and the like are provided. The jackpot lottery, the setting of the dynamic display in the first symbol display device 37, the setting of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81, and the display in the second symbol display device 83 according to the above-mentioned tables 202a to 202e. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as the lottery of the result can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 7, the explanation will be continued. In addition to the counter buffer 203b shown in FIG. 8, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, and inputs / outputs. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as outputs (Input / Output; hereinafter abbreviated as "I / O") are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 34) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 33) at the time of turning on the power. It should be noted that the non-maskable interrupt (hereinafter abbreviated as "NMI") terminal of the MPU201 is input with the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 32) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The RAM 203 further has at least a hold ball number counter 203a, a hold ball storage area 203c, a hold ball execution area 203d, a main slump counter 203e, a hold device drive flag 203f, and a hold device drive timer 203g.

The reserved ball number counter 203a is used to enter the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a (hereinafter, special figure winning) detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26) that is periodically executed every 4 milliseconds. Based on the fact that the ball enters the mouths 77a and 78a is sometimes referred to as a "starting prize"), the dynamic display of the first symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (performed by the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the third symbol (variation effect of the third symbol corresponding to the first symbol) up to four times.

The reserved ball number counter 203a is set to "0" as an initial value by the initial setting process (S813 in FIG. 33) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, every time the start winning to any of the special drawing winning openings 77a and 78a is detected and the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display (variable effect) related to the first symbol increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value "4". (See S204 in FIG. 27). On the other hand, the reserved ball number counter 203a is decremented by 1 each time the dynamic display of the first symbol (variation effect of the third symbol) is executed (see S305 in FIG. 28).

The value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (that is, the reserved ball number of the first symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 27). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the start winning is detected and the hold ball number counter 203a is incremented by 1.

The voice lamp control device 113 can acquire the value of the number of reserved balls itself of the first symbol dynamic display (variation effect) held by the main control device 110 by the reserved ball number command. Thereby, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of hold times of the dynamic display (variation effect) of the first symbol can be managed without accessing the main control device 110. Further, every time a start winning is detected, the main control device 110 sends a hold ball number command to the voice lamp control device 113 to dynamically display (variate) the first symbol managed by the voice lamp control device 113. Even if the number of reserved balls in the effect) deviates from the actual number of reserved balls in the dynamic display (variable effect) held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the next hold to be received is received. The deviation can be corrected by the ball number command.

The voice lamp control device 113 transmits a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 each time the hold ball number managed internally changes. The display control device 114 displays the reserved symbol in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6B) of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the display reserved ball number command.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the main control device 110 transmits a hold ball number command to the voice lamp control device 113, only the value of the hold ball number counter 203a added by 1 in the hold ball number command is used. The jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3, which are acquired from the counter buffer 203b (see FIG. 8) in accordance with the start winning that triggered the addition of the reserved ball number counter 203a. Each value of the variation type counter CS1 is also included.

That is, when there is a start prize, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203b by the main control device 110 is a reserved ball. It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by several commands.

In the voice lamp control device 113, the fluctuation effect of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 transmitted by the hold ball number command is executed. Before the execution of the variable effect, it is determined what will happen to the variable effect (whether it will be a big hit, what will happen to the variable time, etc.). Then, based on the determination result by the look-ahead, it is possible to determine the execution of various effects, and to determine the effect contents and the execution time (timing) of the "pending change notice".

It should be noted that the reserved ball number command indicating the number of reserved balls in the variable effect and the command indicating the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the like may be configured to be transmitted separately. As a command indicating the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the like, which is different from the reserved ball number command, the reserved ball number command is generated at the timing of the ball entering the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a, and the command is based on the ball entry. A command similar to the variation pattern command and the stop type command (pre-variation pattern command and pre-stop type command) may be generated and transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In this case, with respect to the program for generating the pre-variation pattern command and the pre-stop type command, the program can be easily created by diverting the program of the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

As described above, the reserved ball storage area 203c has a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, and a stop pattern acquired from the counter buffer 203b in connection with the detection of the start winning prize in any of the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a. It is a memory for storing each value of the selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in any of the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 26), the counter buffers 203b to the counters C1 to C3. , The value of CS1 is acquired and stored in the reserved ball storage area 203c. The hold ball storage area 203c has four hold areas (hold) so that the data corresponding to the start winning of one of the first symbols (counters C1 to C3, each value of CS1) can be stored (held) up to four times. It has 1st to 4th areas) (see FIG. 8).

As described above, the reserved ball execution area 203d is the jackpot lottery of the first symbol that has started or is being executed, the setting of the dynamic display of the first symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display device 81. It is a memory for storing data (counters C1 to C3, each value of CS1) to be referred to in processing such as setting of variation effect.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation effect, it executes processing such as a big hit lottery, setting of dynamic display of the first symbol display device 37, setting of variation effect of the third symbol display device 81, and the like. Therefore, among the data corresponding to each start winning prize (counters C1 to C3, each value of CS1) stored in the above-mentioned reserved ball storage area 203c, the data corresponding to one start winning prize is executed. Shift to area 203d. The shift in the first embodiment means moving the data stored in one area to another area.

Here, with reference to FIG. 8 again, the details of the reserved ball storage area 203c and the reserved ball execution area 203d will be described. The reserved ball storage area 203c and the reserved ball execution area 203d are used to set the jackpot lottery of the first symbol, the dynamic display of the first symbol display device 37, the variable effect of the third symbol display device 81, and the like. Used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110.

As described above, the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery is used to set the jackpot lottery of the first symbol, the dynamic display of the first symbol display device 37, and the variable effect of the third symbol display device 81. A jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used for determining the effect mode of the variation effect, and a variation type counter CS1 used for determining the variation pattern are used. The reserved ball storage area 203c stores the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203b by the MPU 201 when the ball wins the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a (starting winning).

The holding ball storage area 203c is composed of four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas). In each of the four hold areas (hold 1st to 4th areas), a jackpot random number counter storage area 203c1 for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a jackpot type counter storage area 203c2 for storing the value of the jackpot type counter C2. , A stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and a variation type counter storage area 203c4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided.

In the first embodiment, the jackpot random number counter storage area 203c1, the jackpot type counter storage area 203c2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3, and the variation type counter storage area 203c4 are contained in one reserved ball storage area 203c. However, a plurality of reserved ball storage areas may be provided for each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1.

As described above, in the reserved ball storage area 203c, data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) acquired at the timing when the ball wins (starting winning) in any of the special figure winning openings 77a, 78a is stored. Up to 4 times are stored, but in that case, data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 holding areas (1st to 4th holding areas). Is remembered. That is, the smaller the area number, the more the data corresponding to the start winning to the old special figure winning openings 77a and 78a are stored, and the oldest special drawing winning opening 77a in time is stored in the reserved first area. The data corresponding to the starting prize for 78a will be stored.

On the other hand, the reserved ball execution area 203d is composed of only one area. Similar to the hold ball storage area 203c, the hold ball execution area 203d includes a jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 for storing the value of the jackpot type counter C2. A stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and a variation type counter storage area 203d4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided.

When the MPU 201 determines that the execution start timing of the variation effect has come, the data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) stored in the hold first area of the hold ball storage area 203c is used as the hold ball. It shifts to each area 203d1 to 203d4 of the execution area 203d. Then, the data shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203d is referred to in the fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 29), the jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data, and the fluctuation pattern and the stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. decide. In the first symbol display device 37, dynamic display is performed based on the determined fluctuation pattern and stop type under the control of the main control device 110.

Further, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variation effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The details of the data shift will be described. When the MPU 201 determines that the execution start timing of the variation effect has been reached, the MPU 201 shifts the random number value of the jackpot random number counter storage area 203c1 in the reserved first area to the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of the reserved ball execution area 203d. Similarly, the random value of the jackpot type counter storage area 203c2 is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2, and the random value of the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3 is shifted to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3. The random value of the storage area 203c4 is shifted to the variation type counter storage area 203d4.

Then, when the data shift to the reserved ball execution area 203d is completed, the reserved ball first area becomes empty, so that the data is stored (held) in each area (second to fourth) of the reserved ball storage area 203c. A shift process is performed in which the data is packed in an area (first to third) that is one smaller than the area number. In the first embodiment, the data is shifted only in the holding area (first to fourth) in which the data is stored (held) in the holding ball storage area 203c.

Here, the data shift performed for each holding area in the holding ball storage area 203c will be described. For example, it is assumed that the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a when the start determination of the variable effect is made is "4", and the data is stored in all the areas (first to fourth) of the reserved ball storage area 203c. do. In this state, when the data in the hold 1st area is shifted to the hold ball execution area 203d and the hold 1st area becomes empty, the MPU 201 sets the data in the other areas (2nd to 4th) to each area. Shift to the area with the smaller number (1st to 3rd). That is, the data in the reserved second area is shifted to the reserved first area, the data in the reserved third area is shifted to the reserved second area, and the data in the reserved fourth area is shifted to the reserved third area.

Further, for example, if the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a when the start determination of the variation effect is made is "2", the MPU 201 shifts only the data in the reserved second area to the reserved first area. , End the data shift. As described above, in the first embodiment, the data shift processing is not performed for the hold areas (third to fourth) in which the data is not stored (held), so that the number of data shifts can be reduced. It can reduce the control burden.

Regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the hold area (second to fourth) may be configured to shift to an area having an area number smaller by one. In that case, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the data is stored (held) in the holding area (second to fourth), so that the program can be easily created.

Returning to FIG. 7, the explanation will be continued. The main slump counter 203e is a counter that is updatable within a predetermined range (“0 to 2” in the first embodiment) and is referred to in the MPU 201 for determining whether or not it is in the “slump state”. That is, when the value of the main slump counter 203e is larger than "0", the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 recognizes that it is a "slump state" for executing the "slump effect", and enters the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a. Based on the start winning prize, the "slump effect" is executed in the third symbol display device 81.

In the first embodiment, a predetermined time (a time equivalent to an extension time) is being performed during the demonstration effect in which the variable effect or the "slump effect" is not performed on the third symbol display device 81, and the demo effect is started. In one embodiment, after "10 seconds") has elapsed, the value of the main slump counter 203e is set to a predetermined value (that is, "2"), and the above-mentioned "slump state" is entered. Then, in the "slump state", when the ball starts and wins the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a, the "slump effect" is executed on the third symbol display device 81 instead of the variation effect based on the start winning. It is configured to do.

The value of the main slump counter 203e is set to "0" as an initial value when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Then, when the "slump state" is entered, "2" is set in the value of the main slump counter 203e. On the other hand, the value of the main slump counter 203e is set by 1 in the "slump state" (that is, when the value of the main slump counter 203e is larger than "0") based on the starting winnings to the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a. It is subtracted. That is, when the value larger than "0" is set in the main slump counter 203e, the MPU 201 is equal to the value of the main slump counter 203e (that is, based on the start winning of the ball to the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a). (2), the third symbol display device 81 is configured to execute the “slump effect”.

When the MPU 201 is an effect mode in which "reach display" is performed as the variation pattern of the acquired variation effect in the "slump state", the value of the main slump counter 203e is cleared to "0", and the "slump state" is temporarily set. Is resolved so that the "slump effect" is not performed based on the subsequent start-up prize. This is because the fluctuation pattern including the "reach display" has a relatively long fluctuation time, so that a new prize may occur during the fluctuation time. Therefore, since it is not necessary to continuously perform the "slump effect" based on the start winnings to the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a after such a case, the fluctuation pattern including the "reach display" is executed. In this case, until the effect of the third symbol display device 81 is completed and the "slump state" is entered again, the subsequent effect is performed as a "normal state" instead of the "slump state".

Here, after setting an additional "slump effect", if a new start prize is generated during the execution of the "slump effect", if an additional "slump effect" is set, "slump effect" is set. Complicated processing is required to grasp the execution time of the production and to ensure the consistency of the production, which may increase the processing load. Further, when the number of pending variable effects is "2" or more, the effect can be continuously executed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the "slump effect" is longer than the acquired effect time of the variable effect. The effect of executing "" is diminished.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when an additional start prize is generated during the execution of the "slump effect" and the number of pending variable effects is "2" or more, the following It is configured to execute a variable effect without executing a "slump effect" in the effect. With this configuration, in a situation where the effect of executing the "slump effect" is poor (that is, the number of pending variable effects is accumulated to a certain extent), the variable effect is executed without executing the "slump effect". Since it is not necessary to perform complicated processing for maintaining the consistency of the "slump effect", the program can be simplified and the processing load can be reduced.

The holding device drive flag 203f is a flag indicating that the holding device solenoid 73f of the holding device 73 is driven in the on state. In the first embodiment, when the condition for releasing the ball held by the holding device 73 and winning the dummy winning opening 75 is satisfied, the holding device drive flag 203f is set to ON, and the holding device drive described later is described. The value of the timer 203g is set (“1250” in the first embodiment). After that, the value of the holding device drive timer 203 g is subtracted each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26) of the main control device 110 is performed, and when the value reaches a predetermined value (that is, “0”). The holding device solenoid 73f is turned on for a predetermined time (“2000 milliseconds” in the first embodiment). When the holding device solenoid 73f is turned on, the ball held by the holding device 73 is released and is configured to flow into the dummy winning opening 75 provided on the downstream side.

The holding device drive flag 203f is set to off as an initial value when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. In the first embodiment, the player enters the “slump state”, the value of the main slump counter 203e is larger than “0” (for example, “2”), and the ball is inserted into the holding device 73 by the holding ball detection switch 73g. If the ball starts and wins the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a in the state where it is detected that is on hold, and the effect mode of the variable effect based on the starting winning does not generate "reach display", "reach display" is not generated. In the "slump effect", a plurality of effect elements (for example, "Gase pseudo-ream" effect) in which the main hold display or the dummy hold display is digested are executed. Therefore, in order to match the effect content with the main hold display or the dummy hold display, the hold device drive flag 203f is turned on in order to make the dummy winning opening 75 win the ball held by the hold device 73. It is set (see S211 in FIG. 27).

In the first embodiment, in the "slump state", the ball is not detected by the holding ball detection switch 73g, and when the ball is not held by the holding device 73, there is a ball to be won in the dummy winning opening 75. do not have. Therefore, even when the ball wins in the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a in the "slump state", when the ball is not held in the holding device 73, the holding device solenoid 73f is not driven. Leave the drive flag 203f off.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the variation effect acquired based on the start winning of the ball to the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a in the "slump state" is the "reach display", the "slump effect" is executed. However, since it is configured to execute the "pseudo-ream" effect that does not erase the execution symbol without executing the "gase pseudo-ream" effect that erases one execution symbol, it is a hold that is a dummy hold display in the first place. There is no need to display the design. Therefore, even when the ball starts and wins the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a in the "slump state", when the "reach display" is included in the acquired fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect, the holding device solenoid 73f is used. The holding device drive flag 203f is left set to off so as not to be driven.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the holding device drive flag 203f is turned on, a value (“1250” in the first embodiment) is set in the holding device drive timer 203g described later. Then, in the hold device control process (see FIG. 30) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26) of the main control device 110 executed every 4 milliseconds, the hold device drive flag 203f is turned on. If so, the value of the holding device drive timer 203g, which will be described later, is subtracted. Then, at the timing when the value of the holding device drive timer 203g becomes "0", the holding device solenoid 73f is turned on for a predetermined period ("2000 milliseconds" in the first embodiment) (see S504 in FIG. 30). , The ball held in the holding device 73 by turning on for the predetermined period is surely released, the ball is allowed to flow into the dummy winning opening 75, and the holding device drive flag 203f is set to off. (See S505 in FIG. 30).

The holding device drive timer 203g is a timer for measuring the time from when the holding device drive flag 203f is turned on until the holding device solenoid 73f is turned on. The MPU 201 determines that when the value of the holding device drive timer 203g becomes "0" while the holding device drive flag 203f is turned on, it is the release timing of the ball held in the holding device 73. Therefore, the holding device solenoid 73f is configured to be driven (that is, turned on) for a predetermined time.

The holding device drive timer 203g is set to "0" as an initial value when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Then, when the ball enters the "slump state" and the ball is held in the holding device 73 and the ball starts and wins the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a, the effect mode of the variation effect based on the starting prize is ". If it is not a fluctuation pattern that causes "reach display", the holding device drive flag 203f described above is set to ON in order to make the held ball win the dummy winning opening 75 (see S211 in FIG. 27), and this holding is performed. "1250" is set in the device drive timer 203g.

After that, in the hold device control process (see FIG. 30) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26) of the main control device 110 executed every 4 milliseconds, the hold device drive flag 203f is turned on. In this case, the value of the holding device drive timer 203g is subtracted by "1". Then, at the timing when the value of the holding device drive timer 203g becomes "0" (that is, "5 seconds" after the start of the "slump effect"), the holding device solenoid 73f is set for a predetermined period (in the first embodiment). Turn on (see S504 in FIG. 30) to release the ball held in the holding device 73, and about "1 second" after that, that is, the "first effect" in the "slump effect". "6 seconds after the start of", the ball released from the holding device 73 is flowed into the dummy winning opening 75.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a series of "slump effect" is performed, the displayed execution symbol and the reserved symbol and the execution of the "slump effect" in which a plurality of effect elements are executed are executed. In order to match the number of times, when a predetermined time (“6 seconds” in the first embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the special drawing winning openings 77a and 78a and the start of the “slump effect”. The ball held by the holding device 73 is made to win a prize in the dummy winning opening 75, and the holding symbol as the dummy holding display is displayed. Then, every time one of the series of "slump effects" ("Gase pseudo-ream" effect) ends, the execution symbol is deleted, and the hold symbol, which is a dummy hold display, is moved to the execution symbol and moved. By starting one effect unit in the next "slump effect" based on the executed symbol, one effect unit in the "slump effect" is completed, as if the variable effect was completed once. Perform the production. With this configuration, the dynamic effect time of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is made longer than the variation time of the acquired variation effect, and the movement of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81. By reducing the number of situations in which a typical production is not performed, it is possible to prevent the player from awakening and improve the interest of the game.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured so that the number of prize balls in the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a and the dummy winning opening 75 is the same three. With this configuration, the player cannot determine whether the prizes have been won in the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a or the dummy winning openings 75 based only on the number of prize balls paid out. Therefore, the player decides whether the effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 is a variable effect in the "normal state" based only on the number of prize balls paid out, or the "slump effect" in the "slump state". Because it is not possible to determine whether it is, even if the "slump effect" that is performed longer than the fluctuation time of the actual variation effect is performed, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable and awakening to the game. can do.

The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol hold lamp 84, and the opening / closing plate of the large winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 including a large winning opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing to the front side, a solenoid for the electric accessory 79 for driving the electric accessory 79, and a holding device solenoid 73f provided in the above-mentioned holding device 73 are connected. Then, the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

As described above, the holding device solenoid 73f provided in the holding device 73 moves the lock piece 73e from the rear wall 73d (see FIG. 5) into the passage of the holding device 73 (front side of the pachinko machine 10) in the off state. It is a drive mechanism for making the lock piece 73e immerse in the rear wall 73d in the on state while making it in the protruding state.

When the lock piece 73e driven by the holding device solenoid 73f protrudes from the rear wall 73d (that is, when the holding device solenoid 73f is off), the holding ball holding portion 73b by the holding portion locking portion 73e1 of the lock piece 73e. The downward rotation of (see FIG. 5) is prevented, and the state in which the ball is held in the holding device 73 is maintained. On the other hand, when the lock piece 73e driven by the holding device solenoid 73f is immersed in the rear wall 73d (that is, when the holding device solenoid 73f is on), the holding ball holding portion by the holding portion lock portion 73e1 of the lock piece 73e. Since the lower support of the 73b is lost, the holding ball holding portion 73b is allowed to rotate downward, and the ball held by the holding ball holding portion 73b flows down to the downstream side of the holding device 73. , Flows into the dummy winning opening 75.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, and a hold ball detection switch provided in the hold device 73. 73g is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253.

As described above, the holding ball detection switch 73g is an optical detection switch that detects whether or not a sphere exists between the light receiving element and the light emitting element, and the sphere exists between the light receiving element and the light emitting element. When this is detected, an on signal is output to the MPU 201. On the other hand, when it is detected that the sphere does not exist between the light receiving element and the light emitting element, an off signal is output to the MPU 201. Therefore, the MPU 201 can recognize whether or not the ball is held in the holding device 73 based on the detection output of the holding ball detection switch 73g.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interruption process (see FIG. 32) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, a prize ball detection switch 217 for detecting the paid out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. The prize ball detection switch 217 is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, an indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, a variable staging or continuous operation. It controls the setting of the display mode of the effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 such as the advance notice effect.

The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. In the first embodiment, the command is configured to be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 in only one direction, and the command cannot be transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the main control device 110. ing. On the other hand, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are configured to be capable of transmitting and receiving commands to each other.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be changed. The voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the rear image such as the "super reach" effect mode, and the display control device 114 is displayed on the display control device 114 based on the pressing of the frame button 22. Instruct the display device 81 to display.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 and " It controls the "slump effect" and the continuous notice effect.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 2). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the NMI terminals of the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 32). The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a period sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process.

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 2) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

Here, with reference to FIG. 17, a detailed electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 17 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configurations of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. In addition to various control programs executed by MPU221, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a jackpot random number table 222a, a jackpot type table 222b, a stop pattern table 222c, a variation pattern table 222d, and a pending change table as fixed value data. 222e, at least the slump effect table 222f is stored. Of these tables 222a to 222f, the tables 222a to 222d are all the same as the jackpot random number table 202a, the jackpot type table 202b, the stop pattern table 202d, and the variation pattern table 202e provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. be.

The voice lamp control device 113 is a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type, which are acquired from the counter buffer 203b in the main control device 110 and transmitted by the hold ball number command. Based on each value of the counter CS1, the jackpot random number table 222a, the jackpot type table 222b, the stop pattern table 222c, and the variation pattern table 222d, the hold display setting process (see FIG. 38), which is a look-ahead process, is executed. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the hold display setting process, which is also a look-ahead process, based on the dummy hold command transmitted in the main control device 110 in association with the winning of the ball to the dummy winning opening 75.

Then, what kind of effect (whether or not it will be a big hit) will be the result of the pending variable effect or "slump effect" that is the target of the look-ahead processing by this hold display setting process (see FIG. 38). , Whether or not it becomes "reach display", etc.) is determined before the variable effect or "slump effect" is executed, and the execution of various effects is decided. Controls such as determining the effect content (and execution time (timing)) of the "notice" are executed.

Further, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives a slump command, which will be described later, indicating that the "slump state" has been started from the main control device 110, and then receives a variation pattern command thereafter, the slump effect table 222f. Refer to and execute the control related to "slump effect".

The details of the pending change table 222e and the slump effect table 222f will be described later.

The RAM 223 has a fluctuation start flag 223a, a sub-holding ball number counter 223b, a dummy hold ball number counter 223c, a hold change counter 223d, a hold display information storage area 223e, a sub-slump flag 223f, a slump effect timer 223g, and a slump effect storage area 223h. , The hold information storage area 223i and the execution information storage area 223j are provided at least.

The variation start flag 223a is a flag indicating that the variation effect should be started in the ON state. This fluctuation start flag 223a is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when a stop type command output from the main control unit 110 is received (see S1507 in FIG. 40). Then, it is turned off when the variation effect or the "slump effect" is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S1602 in FIG. 42).

The MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 triggers that the fluctuation start flag 223a is turned on, and when the standby fluctuation effect or the “slump effect” exists, the standby fluctuation effect or the “slump effect” is present. The variation effect processing (see FIG. 42) for executing the above is performed.

The sub-holding ball number counter 223b is a variation effect (dynamic display) performed by the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), similarly to the hold ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the variable effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times. That is, the sub-holding ball number counter 223b is configured to count only the number of holdings of the variable effect actually performed, and not to count the number of executions of the effect unit of the "slump effect" 1.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 stores and updates the number of reserved balls based on the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the sub-held ball number counter 223b manages the number of reserved balls. There is.

Specifically, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of reserved balls for the variable effect is added by entering the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a, and the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a is added in the main control device 110. In this case, when the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received, the value after addition of the hold ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 included in the hold ball number command (that is, to the main control device 110). The number of reserved balls in the reserved variable effect) is stored in the sub-held ball number counter 223b (see S1210 in FIG. 37).

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 when the value of the reserved ball count counter 203a is subtracted in the main control device 110, and receives them. When the mode of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 is set accordingly, the value of the sub-held ball number counter 223b is subtracted by 1 (see S1613 in FIG. 42). In this way, according to the command transmitted from the main control device 110 in accordance with the update of the hold ball number counter 203a, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the sub hold ball number counter 223b, so that the hold of the main control device 110 is held. The value of the sub-held ball number counter 223b can be updated while synchronizing with the ball number counter 203a.

The value of the sub-held ball number counter 223b is used for displaying the reserved symbol and the executed symbol in the third symbol display device 81 together with the value of the dummy reserved ball number counter 223c described later. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the sub-held ball counter 223b in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command (see S1210 in FIG. 37), or receives the dummy hold command. The value of the dummy hold ball number counter 223c is updated based on the value of the slump effect timer 223g, which will be described later (see S1207 in FIG. 37 or S1113 in FIG. At the timing of updating the value of the reserved ball number counter 223b (see S1613 in FIG. 42), the value of the sub-reserved ball number counter 223b after storage or updating and the value of the dummy reserved ball number counter 223c described later are displayed. In order to notify the control device 114, a display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114 (see S1304 in FIG. 38 or S1615 in FIG. 42).

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the sub hold ball number counter 223b and the dummy hold ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113. The reserved symbol for the value and the execution symbol indicating one effect unit of the variable effect or "slump effect" being executed are displayed in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6B) of the third symbol display device 81. To control the drawing of the image.

As described above, the value of the sub-holding ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the holding ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, in the gaming state other than the "slump state", that is, in the "normal state", the number of reserved symbols displayed in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6B) of the third symbol display device 81 is also the main control. It can be changed while synchronizing with the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variation effect is reserved.

The dummy reserved ball number counter 223c is a counter for counting the number of times a ball has won a prize in the dummy winning opening 75 in the “slump state”. That is, the dummy reserved ball number counter 223c is configured to count only the number of reserved balls in one effect unit of the "slump effect" and not to count the number of reserved balls in the variable effect.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6B) is based on the total value of the value of the dummy reserved ball number counter 223c and the value of the sub-held ball number counter 223b. In, the reserved symbol and the executed symbol are displayed, and when it is not in the "slump state", the execution of the variable effect and the number of remaining executions are shown, while when the "slump effect" in the "slump state" is executed, a series of series. It is configured to indicate the execution and the remaining number of executions of a plurality of effect units in the "slump effect".

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the dummy hold command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 adds 1 to the value of the dummy hold ball number counter 223c (see S1207 in FIG. 37). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 ends the "first effect" (that is, the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + the effect element of "pseudo-variation"), which is the first effect unit of the "slump effect". At the timing, when the value of the dummy reserved ball number counter 223c is larger than "0", the value of the dummy reserved ball number counter 223c is subtracted by 1 (see S1113 in FIG. 36).

That is, when the "slump effect" is started based on the start winning of the ball to the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a in the "slump state", "6" from the start of the "first effect" in the "slump effect". After "seconds", the ball held in the holding device 73 is released toward the dummy winning opening 75 to win a prize in the dummy winning opening 75. Then, when the main control device 110 detects that the ball has won the dummy winning opening 75, the main control device 110 transmits a dummy hold command to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 receives a dummy hold command from the main control device 110 when about "6 seconds" have elapsed from the start of the "first effect" in the "slump effect", and the number of dummy hold balls based on the reception. The value of the counter 223c is added by 1. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a display hold ball number command based on the total value of the added dummy hold ball number counter 223c value and the sub hold ball number counter 223b value, and the display control device 114. Send to.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 measures the timing at which one effect unit ends from the start of the "slump effect", that is, the timing at which the "Gase pseudo-ream" effect ends with the slump effect timer 223 g, which will be described later. At the timing when the "Gase pseudo-ream" effect of 1 ends (according to the value of the slump effect timer 223 g described later), the value of the dummy reserved ball number counter 223c is subtracted by 1. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a display hold ball number command based on the total value of the subtracted value of the dummy hold ball number counter 223c and the value of the sub hold ball number counter 223b, and the display control device 114. Send to.

As described above, when the display control device 114 receives the display hold ball number command, the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the sub-hold ball number counter 223b and the dummy hold of the voice lamp control device 113. The reserved symbol corresponding to the value of the ball count counter 223c and the executed symbol indicating the fluctuation effect or "slump effect" being executed are displayed in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6B) of the third symbol display device 81. To control the drawing of the image.

With this configuration, a larger number of reserved symbols than the actual number of reserved balls in the variable effect can be displayed in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6B), and the actual variable effect is executed. Even when the "slump effect" is performed a larger number of times, the consistency between each effect unit of the "slump effect" and the reserved symbol can be obtained. As a result, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the production in which the winning / failing lottery is performed is performed more than the actual number of variable productions without causing a discrepancy in the production.

The value of the dummy reserved ball number counter 223c is configured so that only 1 is added in a series of "slump effects", and 1 is subtracted with the execution of 1 effect unit in the "slump effect". It is configured in. That is, the value of the dummy reserved ball number counter 223c becomes "1" at the maximum with a series of "slump effects", and is configured so as not to be a value of "2" or more.

The hold change counter 223d is a counter that draws lots for whether or not to execute the "hold change notice" in the hold symbol and the execution symbol in the cockpit display area Db. In the first embodiment, as described above, as the "holding change notice", the display color of the holding symbol and the execution symbol is changed from white, which is a normal display mode, to "blue", which is a blue display mode, and green display mode. It is configured to be changeable to "green" or "red" in the red display mode.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 includes the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 by the hold ball number command received from the main control device 110, and the jackpot. The look-ahead process can be executed based on the random number table 222a, the jackpot type table 222b, the stop pattern table 222c, and the variation pattern table 222d. In the look-ahead process based on the hold ball number command, the effect mode of the variable effect corresponding to the hold ball number command is grasped, and the "hold change notice" is performed by the hold change counter 223d and the hold change table 222e based on the effect mode. Whether or not it is drawn.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 can execute the look-ahead process based on the dummy hold command received from the main control device 110, as in the case of receiving the hold ball number command. In the look-ahead processing based on the dummy hold command, whether or not the "slump effect" to be executed is confirmed is grasped, and whether or not the "hold change notice" is performed with reference to the hold change counter 223d and the hold change table 222e based on the success or failure. Is drawn. With this configuration, it is possible to execute the "holding change notice" even for the reserved symbol related to the "slump effect", and to enrich the variation of the effect.

The pending change counter 223d is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, “0 to 99”) in the counter update process (see S1118 in FIG. 36) of the main process of the voice lamp control device 113, and the maximum value is reached. (For example, in the case of a counter that can take a value of "0 to 99", it returns to "0" after reaching "99"). The value of the hold change counter 223d is updated (for example, 1 addition) once for each loop of the main process (see S1117 in FIG. 36).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a hold ball number command or a dummy hold command is received from the main control device 110, a hold display setting process (see FIG. 38) described later is executed, and the hold ball number command is executed. The effect mode of the variable effect shown or the propriety of the "slump effect" indicated by the dummy hold command is grasped, and the value of the hold change counter 223d and the hold change table 222e are referred to based on the grasped contents, and "hold" is given. Whether or not to execute the "change notice" and the display mode are determined. Then, whether or not the determined "hold change notice" can be executed and the display mode are stored in the hold display information storage area 223e indicated by the total value of the value of the sub-hold ball number counter 223b and the value of the dummy hold ball number counter 223c. To. The details of the hold display information storage area 223e will be described later.

Here, the pending change table 222e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the pending change table 222e. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command or the dummy hold command from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 refers to the hold change table 222e based on the value of the hold change counter 223d at that time, and “hold change”. Whether or not to give a "notice" and the change color (display mode) of the "pending change notice" are determined. As shown in FIG. 18, the pending change table 222e is grouped based on the propriety of the effect to be executed and the selected effect mode.

Specifically, for the "slump effect" at the time of loss, for the "non-reach" effect mode at the time of loss, for the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of loss, and for the "super reach" effect mode at the time of loss. For "special reach" production mode at the time of loss, for "slump production" at the time of big hit, for "normal reach" production mode at the time of big hit, for "super reach" production mode at the time of big hit, and "special" at the time of big hit It is divided into a "reach" effect mode and a "special variation" effect mode at the time of a big hit. Then, the possible values of the pending change counter 223d are associated with each of the divided groups.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the display mode of "green" in the "pending change notice" is an effect mode including any "reach display" (that is, a "normal reach" effect mode, "super reach". In the case of a staging mode, a "special reach" staging mode, or a staging element of "whichever reach" as a "slump staging"), or a staging mode in which a "big hit display" occurs (for example, a "special variation" staging mode). It is configured to be selected for. In other words, when the hold symbol or the execution symbol in the display mode of "green" is displayed as the "hold change notice", at least one of the variable effect or the "slump effect" corresponding to the hold symbol or the execution symbol. It is configured to confirm that the effect mode including the "reach display" of the above is executed. With this configuration, if a reserved symbol in the "green" display mode appears as a "pending change notice", the player is convinced that at least a "reach display" in which a big hit can occur is executed. , The mood of the player can be raised based on the expectation until the variable effect or the "slump effect" corresponding to the reserved symbol is started, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the display mode of "red" in the "pending change notice" is only in the case of the "super reach" production mode, the "special reach" production mode, or the "special variation" production mode. It is configured to be selected. In other words, when the hold symbol or the execution symbol in the display mode of "red" is displayed as the "hold change notice", the variable effect or the "slump effect" corresponding to the hold symbol or the execution symbol is "super reach". It is configured to determine that a "special reach" effect mode or a "special variation" effect mode is executed. With this configuration, when the reserved symbol of the "red" display mode appears as the "pending change notice", the player is convinced that the effect mode in which the jackpot is likely to occur is executed. Until the variable effect or "slump effect" corresponding to the reserved symbol is started, the player's mood can be raised based on the expectation, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the hold change table 222e, for the "slump effect" at the time of loss, the color of the hold symbol or the execution symbol as the "hold change notice" does not change from the normal display mode ("white"). Only one display mode is prepared so as to be selectable, and the value of the pending change counter 223d is associated with the display mode. That is, in the case of "slump effect" at the time of loss, the display mode of "none" is configured to be selected without omission. In the first embodiment, when "None" is selected in which the color of the reserved symbol or the executed symbol does not change, the display mode of the reserved symbol or the executed symbol remains "white", and the reserved symbol or the executed symbol is "held". "Change notice" is not executed.

That is, in the "slump effect" at the time of loss, the display mode is "blue" in which the color of the reserved symbol or the executed symbol changes to blue, "green" in which the color changes to green, and "red" in which the color changes to red. Is not associated with the value of the pending change counter 223d so that is not selected.

This is because, as the first reason, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, if the color of the reserved symbol or the executed symbol is "green" or "red" in the "pending change notice", the reserved symbol is used. Alternatively, it is a specification that confirms that any "reach display" is executed in the variable effect indicated by the execution symbol. For this reason, even though the reserved symbol or the executed symbol in the display mode of "green" or "red" is displayed in the "slump effect" at the time of loss, the "reach display" is not always executed. If the "reach display" is not executed in the "slump effect" corresponding to the reserved symbol or the executed symbol, the effect contents may be inconsistent and the player may be confused.

Therefore, in the reserved symbol or the executed symbol corresponding to the "slump effect" at the time of loss, the reserved symbol or the executed symbol in the display mode of "none (white)" that does not cause a discrepancy even if the "reach display" is not executed is displayed. By doing so, it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand effect without causing unnecessary confusion to the player.

Further, as a second reason, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the variation effect acquired based on the start winning of the ball to the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a in the "slump state" displays "reach display". In the case of the effect mode including, since the ball held by the holding device 73 is not allowed to flow into the dummy winning opening 75, the holding symbol or the execution symbol as the dummy holding display is not displayed, and instead (dummy winning opening). It is configured to raise the display mode of "pending change notice" by one rank (for example, change from the display mode of "none" to the display mode of "blue") (at the timing when the ball will enter 75). There is. Therefore, if the highest display mode (that is, the display mode of "red") is selected as the display mode of the reserved symbol or the executed symbol, the display mode cannot be upgraded by one rank, and the effect is produced. There is a risk of discrepancies in the content. In addition, when the display mode of "blue" is changed to the display mode of "green", or when the display mode of "green" is changed to the display mode of "red", the jackpot expectation of the reserved symbol or the executed symbol is expected. The degree becomes high, and even though it is a "reach display" of loss, there is a risk that the player will be expected to have a big hit excessively.

Therefore, in the reserved symbol or the executed symbol corresponding to the "slump effect" at the time of loss, even if the display mode is upgraded by one rank, the "blue" display mode is not fixed to "reach display", and the display mode is not fixed. It does not overly fuel expectations for big hits. For this reason, by displaying the reserved symbol or the executed symbol in the display mode of "none (white)" that does not cause a discrepancy in the effect content, the player is not caused unnecessary confusion and an easy-to-understand effect is provided. Can be done.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a plurality of effect units are executed in the "slump effect", and the "hold change notice" of the "slump effect" is a hold symbol corresponding to the plurality of effect units. It is configured to collectively determine the display mode of the execution symbol. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to draw a lottery for the "hold change notice" for each production unit of the "slump effect", and the control regarding the "hold change notice" at the time of the "slump effect" is simplified. This makes it easier to create a program and reduces the processing load.

In the example shown in FIG. 18, the correspondence between the value of the hold change counter 223d in the “slump effect” at the time of loss and the “hold change notice” is “0 to 99” with respect to the display mode of “none”. There is. Since no value is assigned to the display modes of "blue", "green", and "red", it is expressed as "-".

That is, when the "slump effect" at the time of loss is selected, the display mode of "hold change notice" is 100%, the display mode of "blue", "green" and "red" is 0%. It is set to be selected at the rate of.

Therefore, in the "hold change notice" selected at the time of "slump effect" at the time of loss, only the display mode of "none" is selected, and only when the display mode of the hold symbol or the execution symbol is upgraded by one rank, the "hold change" is selected. The setting is such that "notice" is generated and "pending change notice" itself is unlikely to occur.

In the hold change table 222e, the "non-reach" effect mode at the time of loss is "none" in which the color of the hold symbol or the execution symbol as the "hold change notice" does not change from the normal display mode ("white"). , Two display modes of "blue" that change to blue are prepared so as to be selectable, and the value of the hold change counter 223d is associated with each display mode.

It should be noted that the value of the hold change counter 223d is not associated with the "non-reach" effect mode at the time of loss so that the "green" and "red" display modes are not selected. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, if the color of the reserved symbol or the executed symbol is "green" or "red" in the "pending change notice", the reserved symbol or the reserved symbol or the execution symbol is used. This is because it is a specification that determines that the effect mode including any "reach display" is executed in the variable effect indicated by the execution symbol. Therefore, in the "non-reach" effect mode in which none of the "reach display" is executed, the "green" or "red" display mode of the "pending change notice" is set not to be selected.

In the example shown in FIG. 18, the correspondence between the value of the hold change counter 223d and the “hold change notice” in the “non-reach” effect mode at the time of loss is “0 to 98” with respect to the display mode of “none”. It is "99" for the display mode of "blue". Since no value is assigned to the display modes of "green" and "red", it is expressed as "-".

That is, when the "non-reach" effect mode at the time of loss is selected, the display mode of "no hold change notice" is 99%, the display mode of "blue" is 1%, and "green" and "red". Is set to be selected at a rate of 0%.

Therefore, in the "hold change notice" selected in the "non-reach" effect mode at the time of loss, the display mode of "none" is easily selected (99%), and the "hold change notice" itself is unlikely to occur. It is set.

In the hold change table 222e, three display modes of "none", "blue", and "green" of "hold change notice" are prepared for the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of loss, and each display mode can be selected. The value of the pending change counter 223d is associated with this. In addition, in the "normal reach" production mode at the time of loss, the "super reach" production mode or the "special reach" production mode does not appear. Therefore, the value of the pending change counter 223d is not associated so that the display mode of "red" is not selected.

In the example shown in FIG. 18, the correspondence between the value of the hold change counter 223d and the “hold change notice” in the “normal reach” effect mode at the time of loss is “0 to 79” and “0 to 79” for the display mode of “none”. It is "80 to 89" for the display mode of "blue" and "90 to 99" for the display mode of "green". Since no value is assigned to "red", it is expressed as "-".

That is, when the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of loss is selected, the display mode of "hold change notice" is "none" in 80%, the display mode of "blue" is 10%, and the display mode of "green" is. The display modes of "10%" and "red" are set to be selected at a ratio of 0%.

Therefore, in the "pending change notice" selected in the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of loss, the display mode of "none" is more likely to be selected (80%), but it is "blue" than in the "non-reach" effect mode at the time of loss. The display mode is set so that it is easy to select (1% → 20%). Further, in the "pending change notice" selected in the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of loss, the display mode of "green" which is not selected in the "non-reach" effect mode at the time of loss is selected. Therefore, it can be said that when the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of loss is performed, the "pending change notice" is more easily executed than when the "non-reach" effect mode at the time of loss is performed.

In the hold change table 222e, four display modes of "none", "blue", "green", and "red" of "hold change notice" can be selected as the "super reach" effect mode at the time of loss. The value of the pending change counter 223d is associated with each display mode.

In the example shown in FIG. 18, the correspondence between the value of the hold change counter 223d and the “hold change notice” in the “super reach” effect mode at the time of loss is “0 to 19” with respect to the display mode of “none”. The display mode of "blue" is "20 to 79", the display mode of "green" is "80 to 89", and the display mode of "red" is "90 to 99".

That is, when the "super reach" effect mode at the time of loss is selected, the display mode of "no hold change notice" is 20%, the display mode of "blue" is 60%, and the display mode of "green". Is set to be selected at a ratio of 10% and the display mode of "red" is selected at a ratio of 10%.

Therefore, in the "pending change notice" selected in the "super reach" effect mode at the time of loss, the "blue" display mode is more easily selected than in the "non-reach" effect mode at the time of loss (20% → 60%). ). Further, in the "pending change notice" selected in the "super reach" effect mode at the time of loss, the "non-reach" effect mode and the "red" display mode not selected in the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of loss are selected. It is set. On the other hand, in the "pending change notice" selected at the time of the "super reach" effect mode at the time of loss, the display mode of "none" is selected rather than the "non-reach" effect mode at the time of loss or the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of loss. It is a setting that is difficult to set (99% or 80% → 20%). Therefore, when the "super reach" effect mode at the time of loss is performed, the "pending change notice" is more likely to be executed than when the "non-reach" effect mode or the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of loss is performed. It can be said that there is.

In addition, in the "pending change notice" selected at the time of the "super reach" effect mode at the time of loss, "green" or "green" or "normal reach" effect mode is performed as compared with the case where the "non-reach" effect mode or the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of loss is performed. The display mode of "red" is easily selected. As described above, the "super reach" effect mode is an effect mode in which the "big hit display" is more likely to appear than the "normal reach" effect mode, so "green" or "red" is used as the "pending change notice". At the stage when the display mode of "Big hit display" appears, it is possible to predict that a "super reach" production mode in which "big hit display" can be expected will occur, and to give the player a sense of expectation for "big hit display". Can improve the interest of.

In the hold change table 222e, four display modes of "none", "blue", "green", and "red" of "hold change notice" can be selected as the "special reach" effect mode at the time of loss. The value of the pending change counter 223d is associated with each display mode.

In the example shown in FIG. 18, the correspondence between the value of the hold change counter 223d and the “hold change notice” in the “special reach” effect mode at the time of loss is “0 to 9” with respect to the display mode of “none”. The display mode of "blue" is "10 to 59", the display mode of "green" is "60 to 79", and the display mode of "red" is "80 to 99".

That is, when the "special reach" effect mode at the time of loss is selected, the display mode of "no hold change notice" is 10%, the display mode of "blue" is 50%, and the display mode of "green". Is set to be selected at a ratio of 20% and the display mode of "red" is selected at a ratio of 20%.

Therefore, in the "pending change notice" selected at the time of the "special reach" effect mode at the time of loss, the display mode of "green" or "red" is more easily selected than the "super reach" effect mode at the time of loss (each). 10% → 20%). In addition, in the "pending change notice" selected in the "special reach" production mode at the time of loss, as in the "super reach" production mode, it is not selected in the "non-reach" production mode and the "normal reach" production mode at the time of loss. The display mode of "red" is selected. On the other hand, in the "pending change notice" selected at the time of the "special reach" production mode at the time of loss, the "non-reach" production mode at the time of loss, the "normal reach" production mode at the time of loss, or the "super reach" production mode is more "". The display mode of "None" is difficult to select (99%, 80% or 20% → 10%). Therefore, when the "special reach" effect mode at the time of loss is performed, the "pending change notice" is performed as compared with the case where the "non-reach" effect mode, "normal reach" effect mode or "super reach" effect mode at the time of loss is performed. It can be said that the configuration is easy to execute.

In addition, in the "pending change notice" selected at the time of the "special reach" production mode at the time of loss, compared with the case where the "non-reach" production mode, the "normal reach" production mode, and the "super reach" production mode at the time of loss are performed. Therefore, the display mode of "green" or "red" is easily selected. As described above, the "special reach" production mode is a production mode in which the "big hit display" is more likely to appear than the "normal reach" production mode and the "super reach" production mode. At the stage when the display mode of "green" or "red" appears, it is predicted that the "special reach" production mode, which is the "reach display" that can be expected to be the most "big hit display", will occur, and then the "big hit display" is displayed. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and improve the interest of the game.

In the hold change table 222e, three display modes of "none", "blue", and "green" of "hold change notice" are prepared for the "slump effect" at the time of a big hit, and each display mode can be selected. On the other hand, the value of the pending change counter 223d is associated with it. Since no value is assigned to the display mode of "red", it is expressed as "-".

That is, when the "slump effect" at the time of a big hit is selected, the display mode of "hold change notice" is "none" in 10%, the display mode of "blue" is 80%, and the display mode of "green" is 10. %, The display mode of "red" is set to be selected at a ratio of 0%, and the value of the pending change counter 223d is not associated so that the display mode of "red" is not selected.

This is obtained based on the start winning of the ball to the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a in the "slump state" in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as in the case where the "slump effect" at the time of loss is selected. When the variable effect performed is an effect mode including "reach display", the reserved symbol or the executed symbol as the dummy hold display is displayed because the ball held by the holding device 73 is not allowed to flow into the dummy winning opening 75. Instead, it is configured to raise the display mode of the "pending change notice" by one rank (for example, change from the display mode of "none" to the display mode of "blue"). Therefore, if the highest display mode (that is, the display mode of "red") is selected as the display mode of the reserved symbol or the executed symbol, the display mode cannot be upgraded by one rank, and the effect is produced. There is a risk of discrepancies in the content. Therefore, in the reserved symbol or the executed symbol corresponding to the "slump effect" at the time of loss, the display mode other than the top-level display mode (that is, "none (white)" does not cause a discrepancy in the effect content even if the display mode is upgraded by one rank. , "Blue" or "green" display mode) is configured so as not to cause unnecessary confusion to the player by displaying the reserved symbol or the executed symbol.

In the example shown in FIG. 18, the correspondence between the value of the hold change counter 223d in the “slump effect” at the time of a big hit and the “hold change notice” is “0 to 9” and “blue” with respect to the display mode of “none”. "10 to 89" for the display mode of "green" and "90 to 99" for the display mode of "green". Since no value is assigned to the display mode of "red", it is expressed as "-".

That is, when the "slump effect" at the time of a big hit is selected, the display mode of "hold change notice" is "none" in 10%, the display mode of "blue" is 80%, and the display mode of "green" is 10. %, The display mode of "red" is set to be selected at a ratio of 0%.

Therefore, in the "pending change notice" selected at the time of the "slump effect" at the time of a big hit, the display mode of "blue" or "green" which is not selected at the "slump effect" at the time of loss is selected. On the other hand, in the "pending change notice" selected at the time of "slump effect" at the time of big hit, it is difficult to select the display mode of "none" than the "slump effect" at the time of loss (100% → 10%). There is. Therefore, it can be said that when the "slump effect" at the time of a big hit is performed, the "pending change notice" is more easily executed than when the "slump effect" at the time of loss is performed.

In addition, the "pending change notice" selected at the time of "slump effect" at the time of a big hit is configured to select the display mode of "blue" or "green" which is not selected at the time of "slump effect" at the time of loss. .. Therefore, by executing the "slump effect" after the display mode of "blue" or "green" appears as the "pending change notice", it is predicted that the "big hit display" will occur, and the "big hit display" is displayed. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the game and improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as described above, the "holding change notice" of the "slump effect" collectively determines the display mode of the hold symbol or the execution symbol corresponding to each of the plurality of effect units. It is configured to do. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to draw a lottery for "holding change notice" for each of multiple production units in a series of "slump production", and control regarding "holding change notice" at the time of "slump production" is simple. It is possible to make it easy to create a program and reduce the processing load. In addition, when a big hit "slump effect" is performed, and if the execution lottery of the "hold change notice" is won, the "hold change notice" may be continuously generated in a plurality of hold symbols or execution symbols. Therefore, if the "hold change notice" is generated in a plurality of reserved symbols or the "reach display" or the like does not occur in the effect element corresponding to the previous reserved symbol, the "big hit" is performed in the next effect element. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for "display" and improve the interest of the game.

In the pending change table 222e, four display modes of "none", "blue", "green", and "red" are selectively prepared for the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of a big hit, and for each display mode. The value of the pending change counter 223d is associated with it.

In the example shown in FIG. 18, the correspondence between the value of the hold change counter 223d and the “hold change notice” in the “normal reach” effect mode at the time of a big hit is “0 to 9” and “0 to 9” for the display mode of “none”. It is "10 to 19" for the display mode of "blue", "20 to 49" for the display mode of "green", and "50 to 99" for the display mode of "red".

That is, when the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of a big hit is selected, the display mode of "hold change notice" is 10%, the display mode of "blue" is 10%, and the display mode of "green" is. The display mode of 30% and "red" is set to be selected at a ratio of 50%.

Therefore, in the "pending change notice" selected in the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of a big hit, the "red" display mode, which is not selected in the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of loss, is selected. On the other hand, in the "pending change notice" selected in the "normal reach" production mode at the time of a big hit, it is more difficult to select the "none" display mode than in the "normal reach" production mode at the time of loss (80% → 10%). It has become. Therefore, it can be said that when the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of a big hit is performed, the "pending change notice" is more easily executed than when the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of loss is performed.

In addition, in the "pending change notice" selected at the time of the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of a big hit, the display mode of "green" or "red" is selected as compared with the case where the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of loss is performed. It is easily configured, and in particular, it is set to select the "red" display mode, which is not selected in the "normal reach" effect mode at the time of loss. Therefore, after the display mode of "red" appears as the "pending change notice", the variable staging that is the target does not develop into the "super reach" staging mode, and the variable staging ends only in the "normal reach" staging mode. In that case, the "big hit display" is confirmed at that point. Since the display mode of "red" in the "hold change notice" is easily selected in the "super reach" effect mode and the "special reach" effect mode, the player can select the "red" in the "hold change notice". When the display mode is recognized, the occurrence of the "super reach" staging mode or the like in which the "super reach" staging element is generated after the "normal reach" staging element is performed is foreseen. However, contrary to that prediction, by making the "big hit display" appear in the effect element of "normal reach", it is possible to perform an unexpected effect, so that the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, when the "normal reach" effect element is executed while the "red" display mode is displayed, the variable effect ends with the "normal reach" effect element, resulting in "big hit display". Therefore, during the execution of the "normal reach" effect element, the player creates a playability of whether or not the variable effect ends as it is without developing into the "super reach" effect element, etc., and the game is played. Can improve the interest of.

In the pending change table 222e, four display modes of "none", "blue", "green", and "red" are selectably prepared for the "super reach" effect mode at the time of a big hit, and each display mode can be selected. On the other hand, the value of the pending change counter 223d is associated with it.

In the example shown in FIG. 18, the correspondence between the value of the hold change counter 223d and the “hold change notice” in the “super reach” effect mode at the time of a big hit is “0 to 9” with respect to the display mode of “none”. The display mode of "blue" is "10 to 19", the display mode of "green" is "20 to 59", and the display mode of "red" is "60 to 99".

That is, when the "super reach" effect mode at the time of a big hit is selected, the display mode of "no hold change notice" is 10%, the display mode of "blue" is 10%, and the display mode of "green". Is 40%, and the display mode of "red" is set to be selected at a ratio of 40%.

Therefore, in the "pending change notice" selected at the time of the "super reach" effect mode at the time of a big hit, the display mode of "green" or "red" is more easily selected than the "super reach" effect mode at the time of loss (each). 10% → 40%). That is, even in the same "super reach" production mode, the selection rate of "pending change notice" is changed between the time of loss and the time of big hit, and in particular, the display mode of "green" or "red" at the time of big hit is lost. It is easier to select and configure. Then, after displaying the "green" or "red" display mode, the "super reach" effect mode in which the "big hit display" can be expected from the "normal reach" effect mode is executed, so that the "pending change notice" can be obtained. Combined with the display contents, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the "big hit display", and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the pending change table 222e, four display modes of "none", "blue", "green", and "red" are selectably prepared for the "special reach" effect mode at the time of a big hit, and each display mode is On the other hand, the value of the pending change counter 223d is associated with it.

In the example shown in FIG. 18, the correspondence between the value of the hold change counter 223d and the “hold change notice” in the “special reach” effect mode at the time of a big hit is “0 to 9” with respect to the display mode of “none”. The display mode of "blue" is "10 to 29", the display mode of "green" is "30 to 69", and the display mode of "red" is "70 to 99".

That is, when the "special reach" effect mode at the time of a big hit is selected, the display mode of "hold change notice" is "none" in 10%, the display mode of "blue" is 20%, and the display mode of "green". Is set to be selected at a ratio of 40% and the display mode of "red" is selected at a ratio of 30%.

Therefore, in the "pending change notice" selected at the time of the "special reach" production mode at the time of a big hit, the display mode of "green" or "red" is more easily selected than the "special reach" production mode at the time of loss (each). 20% → 40% or 30%). That is, even in the same "special reach" production mode, the selection rate of "pending change notice" is changed between the time of loss and the time of big hit, and in particular, the display mode of "green" or "red" is changed at the time of big hit. It is easier to select and configure. Then, after displaying the "green" or "red" display mode, the "special reach" effect mode in which "big hit display" can be expected from the "normal reach" effect mode or the "super reach" effect mode is executed. , It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the "big hit display" in combination with the display content of the "pending change notice", and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the pending change table 222e, four display modes of "none", "blue", "green", and "red" are selectably prepared for the "special fluctuation" effect mode at the time of a big hit, and each display mode is On the other hand, the value of the pending change counter 223d is associated with it.

In the example shown in FIG. 18, the correspondence between the value of the hold change counter 223d and the “hold change notice” in the “special change” effect mode at the time of a big hit is “0 to 69” for the display mode of “none”. The display mode of "blue" is "70 to 79", the display mode of "green" is "80 to 89", and the display mode of "red" is "90 to 99".

That is, when the "special variation" effect mode at the time of a big hit is selected (when the "2R probability change big hit" is won), 70% of the display modes are "no hold change notice" and "blue" is displayed. The mode is set to be selected in the ratio of 10%, the display mode of "green" is 10%, and the display mode of "red" is 10%.

Therefore, in the "pending change notice" selected at the time of the "special change" effect mode at the time of a big hit, the display mode of "none" is easily selected (70%), and "blue", "green" or "red". Since the display modes of are also set to be selected evenly (10%), it is difficult for the "pending change notice" to occur, but when it does occur, it is set to be selected almost evenly.

As described above, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 grasps the propriety and effect mode of the variable effect indicated by the hold ball number command, and is based on the propriety and effect mode. Therefore, it is configured to determine whether or not the "holding change notice" can be executed and the display mode for the holding symbol which is the holding display. With this configuration, the result of the variation effect is suggested to the player by the reserved symbol before the variation effect is executed, and the variation effect held by the player until the variation effect is executed is generated. By predicting whether or not it will be a big hit, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

Further, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the dummy hold command from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 performs the same look-ahead process as when the hold ball number command is received for the hold symbol which is the dummy hold display, and " It is configured to determine whether or not to execute the "pending change notice" and the display mode. With this configuration, before executing the effect element corresponding to the dummy hold display in a series of "slump effects", the result of the effect element is suggested to the player by the hold symbol, and the effect element is executed. Until then, the player can be made to predict whether or not one production unit of the "slump production" held on hold will be a big hit, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

Furthermore, by executing the same "pending change notice" between the variable effect and the "slump effect", it becomes difficult to distinguish between the variable effect and the "slump effect", and the "slump effect" is executed and acquired. Even when the dynamic effect time of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 is longer than the variation time of the variation effect, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the variation effect and the "slump effect". Therefore, the effect of executing the "slump effect" can be maintained.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. The hold display information storage area 223e is an area for storing hold change information indicating the display mode of the "hold change notice" of the hold symbol and the execution symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6B). be.

Here, the details of the hold display information storage area 223e will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the hold display information storage area 223e. As shown in FIG. 19, the hold display information storage area 223e has six areas, an execution hold display area 223e0 and a first to fifth hold display areas 223e1 to 223e5. The execution hold display area 223e0 and the first to fifth hold display areas 223e1 to 223e5 (hereinafter, the execution hold display area 223e0 and the first to fifth hold display areas 223e1 to 223e5 are referred to as "each hold display area 223e0 to 223e5". (In some cases), the presence / absence of the variation effect or the "slump effect" and the hold change information indicating the display mode of the "hold change notice" are stored.

The execution hold display area 223e0 is an area for storing the hold change information corresponding to the fluctuation effect or "slump effect" currently being executed. Further, the first to fifth reserved display areas 223e1 to 223e5 are areas for storing the reserved change information corresponding to the maximum five reserved variable effects and the "slump effect", respectively.

Specifically, the execution hold display area 223e0 is an area corresponding to the variable effect or "slump effect" currently being executed. Further, the first reserved display area 223e1 is an area corresponding to the first reserved variable effect or "slump effect" in the reserved variable effect or "slump effect". Further, the second reserved display area 223e2 is an area corresponding to the second oldest reserved variable effect or "slump effect" in the reserved variable effect or "slump effect". Further, the third reserved display area 223e3 is an area corresponding to the third oldest reserved variable effect or "slump effect" in the reserved variable effect or "slump effect". Further, the fourth reserved display area 223e4 is an area corresponding to the fourth oldest reserved variable effect or "slump effect" in the reserved variable effect or "slump effect". Further, the fifth reserved display area 223e5 is an area corresponding to the fifth oldest reserved variable effect or "slump effect" in the reserved variable effect or "slump effect".

As described above, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 grasps the propriety and effect mode of the variable effect indicated by the hold ball number command, and determines the pass / fail and the effect mode. Based on this, it is configured to determine and store whether or not to execute the "hold change notice" and the display mode for the hold symbol which is the hold display. Further, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the dummy hold command from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 performs the same look-ahead process as when the hold ball number command is received for the hold symbol which is the dummy hold display, and " It is configured to determine and store whether or not to execute the "pending change notice" and the display mode.

Specifically, when the hold ball number command is received, the value of the sub hold ball number counter 223b is updated based on the hold ball number included in the hold ball number command, and when the dummy hold ball number command is received, the dummy hold ball number is received. The value of the counter 223c is updated. Then, the hold change information is extracted based on the hold change table 222e and the value of the hold change counter 223d to determine the display mode of the "hold change notice", and the extracted hold change information is the updated sub-hold ball. It is stored in any of the first to fifth hold display areas 223e1 to 223e5 corresponding to the total value of the value of the number counter 223b and the value of the dummy hold ball number counter 223c.

Further, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command and the stop type command indicating the start of the variation effect from the main control device 110, or recognizes that it is the start timing of the "slump effect", each of them. The shift process is executed in the hold display areas 223e0 to 223e5.

That is, the reserved variable effect or "slump effect" effect unit is reduced by one, and the execution of the first reserved variable effect or "slump effect" in time is started, so that the first reserved effect or "slump effect" is held. The hold change information stored in the first hold display area 223e1 corresponding to the variable effect or the "slump effect" is displayed in the execution hold display area 223e0 corresponding to the running (starting execution) variation effect or the "slump effect". Move to.

Further, the hold change information stored in the second hold display area 223e2 is moved to the first hold display area 223e1, and the hold change information stored in the third hold display area 223e3 is moved to the second hold display area 223e2. The hold change information stored in the 4th hold display area 223e4 is moved to the 3rd hold display area 223e3, and the hold change information stored in the 5th hold display area 223e5 is moved to the 4th hold display area 223e4. Let me.

As a result, the execution hold display area 223e0 stores the hold change information regarding the running (executed) variation effect or the "slump effect", and the first hold display area 223e1 is the most timely. Hold change information corresponding to the old reserved variable effect or "slump effect" is stored, and the second reserved display area 223e2 corresponds to the second oldest reserved variable effect or "slump effect" in time. The hold change information is stored, and the hold change information corresponding to the third oldest hold variable effect or "slump effect" in time is stored in the third hold display area 223e3, and the hold change information is stored in the fourth hold display area 223e4. Stores the fourth oldest reserved variation effect in time or the pending change information corresponding to the "slump effect", and the fifth reserved display area 223e5 is the fifth oldest reserved variation effect in terms of time. Alternatively, the pending change information corresponding to the "slump effect" is stored.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the "slump state", in order to execute the "slump effect" in which the effect unit is performed more than the number of times the acquired variation effect is executed, the execution of the variation effect is suspended (that is, "" A number larger than the total number (that is, "5") of the total number (that is, "4") of 1 ") and the maximum number of reservations (that is," 4 ") (that is, the maximum number of executions of each effect unit in a series of" slump effects "" 6 " ), Each hold display area 223e0 to 223e5 is provided, and only the information regarding the display mode of the hold symbol and the execution symbol (that is, the hold change information) is stored in each hold display area 223e0 to 223e5. Then, based on the information stored in each of the reserved display areas 223e0 to 223e5, the execution symbol and the reserved symbol are displayed in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6B). By configuring in this way, the player is made to think that he / she is getting a lot of lottery opportunities by executing a larger number of effects than the actually acquired variable effects, thereby improving the interest of the game. can do. Further, since it is possible to display the executed symbol and the reserved symbol while matching the number of the effects, the dynamic effect state of the third symbol display device 81 is lengthened, and the player does not feel a sense of discomfort. It is possible to provide a production.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. The sub-slump flag 223f is a flag for determining whether or not the voice lamp control device 113 is in the “slump state”. When the sub-slump flag 223f is turned on, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 can determine that it is in the “slump state”. Then, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the command related to the variation effect transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 determines the setting status of the sub-slump flag 223f, and the variation effect is displayed in the third symbol display device 81. Identifies whether to perform a "slump effect".

This sub-slump flag 223f is set to off as an initial value when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Then, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 sets the sub-slump flag 223f to ON when the slump command described later is received from the main control device 110 (see S1202 in FIG. 37). On the other hand, the MPU 221 receives a variation pattern command from the main control device 110 when the "slump effect" (variation effect) is executed for the first time in the "slump state", that is, when the sub-slump flag 223f is on. The sub-slump flag 223f is set to off (see S1405 in FIG. 39).

In this way, the sub-slump flag 223f is used to grasp the "slump state" in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. Then, when the MPU 221 receives the command related to the variation effect transmitted from the main control device 110, the MPU 221 determines whether to execute the variation effect or the "slump effect" in the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to perform the effect control to be executed based on the determination result.

The slump effect timer 223 g is a timer for measuring the effect time after the "slump effect" is started. By referring to the value of the slump effect timer 223 g, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 grasps the effect time of the entire series of "slump effect" and is the first effect unit after the "slump effect" is started. (That is, "first effect". Hereinafter, the effect unit of the "slump effect" performed after the "first effect" is referred to as "second effect", and thereafter, the nth (n is a natural number) line. The effect unit of the "slump effect" is referred to as "nth effect") so that the end timing can be grasped.

The slump effect timer 223g is set to "0" as an initial value when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Then, when a variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 at the start of the "slump effect", that is, in the "slump state", a value corresponding to the variation pattern is set in the slump effect timer 223g.

Specifically, when the MPU 221 receives a variation pattern command from the main controller 110 in a "slump state", that is, in a situation where the sub-slump flag 223f is turned on, the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command is ". Determine whether or not the fluctuation pattern includes "reach display". In the case of a fluctuation pattern that does not include the "reach display", an extension time is drawn in order to set an additional effect time as the "slump effect". Then, the value corresponding to the extension time acquired by the lottery is set in the slump effect timer 223 g (see S1408 in FIG. 39). On the other hand, in the case of the fluctuation pattern including the "reach display", since it is a relatively long fluctuation pattern including the "reach display", there is no need to perform an additional effect. Therefore, the extension time is not drawn and the value is not set for the slump effect timer 223g (see S1406: Yes in FIG. 39).

Next, the MPU 221 adds the fluctuation time of the acquired fluctuation pattern to the value of the slump effect timer 223g regardless of the presence or absence of the “reach display” (see S1410 in FIG. 39). Then, based on the value of the slump effect timer 223 g set by the extension time and the fluctuation time, the slump effect table 222f described later is referred to, and the "pseudo-ream" effect or the "gase pseudo-ream" effect in the "slump effect" and the "gase pseudo-ream" effect. / Or select "Development availability". The selected "slump effect" is stored in the slump effect storage area 223h, which will be described later. The details will be described later.

Further, the MPU 221 is used for the "slump effect" when there is a new start prize in the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a during the "slump effect", that is, when the value of the slump effect timer 223g is larger than "0". If the progress is determined and the effect other than the extension time in the "slump effect" is being performed, the value for the extension time is subtracted from the value of the slump effect timer 223 g (see S1421 in FIG. 39).

The reason for performing the above control is that when a new start prize is generated during a series of "slump effects", an additional "slump effect" effect unit is added to the running "slump effect" effect unit. Therefore, in order to match each effect element, the extension time set for performing an additional effect element is temporarily reset, and the effect content of the effect element is newly set again. Further, in performing the above control, the reason limited to the execution of the production other than the production during the extension time is that the production other than the production during the extension time, that is, the production before the production based on the extension time is being performed. For example, the effect of the part corresponding to the acquired extension time has not been executed, and even if the extension time is reset once and the effect content of "slump effect" is set again, the effect content will not be inconsistent. be.

Further, the value of the slump effect timer 223 g is set after the "slump effect" is set based on the set value of the slump effect timer 223 g when the "reach display" is included in the fluctuation pattern acquired in the "slump state". , "0" is configured to be cleared (see S1413 in FIG. 39). This is because the fluctuation pattern including the "reach display" has a relatively long fluctuation time, so that a new prize may occur during the fluctuation time. Therefore, since it is not necessary to continuously perform the "slump effect" based on the winning of the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a up to such a case, the fluctuation pattern including the "reach display" is executed. In this case, after setting the "slump effect" based on the fluctuation pattern including the "reach display", the value of the slump effect timer 223 g is initialized, and until the "slump state" is entered again, the "slump state" is not displayed. Subsequent production is performed as "normal state". Further, by initializing the value of the slump effect timer 223 g at this stage, it is no longer necessary to grasp the progress status of the "slump effect", and it is not necessary to perform shift control of the hold symbol including the dummy hold display. The control load of the MPU 221 can be reduced. In the first embodiment, the fluctuation pattern that does not include the "reach display" has an execution time of only 15 seconds at the maximum and ends in a relatively short time, so that a new start prize may occur during that time. Is low, so if the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect that was first won in the "slump state" is the "non-reach" mode that does not include the "reach display", the "slump state" is maintained and additional Even when a start-up prize is generated, it is configured to perform an effect (that is, an additional "slump effect") according to a series of "slump effects".

On the other hand, when the value is set in the slump effect timer 223 g, that is, when the slump effect timer 223 g is a value larger than "0", the value of the slump effect timer 223 g is the main value of the voice lamp control device 113. Every time 1 millisecond elapses in the process (see S1101: Yes in FIG. 36), the value is subtracted by 1 (S1110 in FIG. 36).

Then, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the value of the subtracted slump effect timer 223 g becomes a predetermined value (in the first embodiment, a value obtained by subtracting "10000" from the set value). When the hold symbol which is the dummy hold display is displayed, that is, when the value of the dummy hold ball number counter 223c is larger than "0", one effect unit in a series of "slump effects" (that is, "Gase pseudo"). It is configured to subtract 1 from the value of the dummy hold ball number counter 223c and execute the shift process in the hold display information storage area 223e, assuming that it is the end timing of the "ream" effect). With this configuration, the start and end of one effect unit in a series of "slump effects" and the shift display of the reserved symbol and the executed symbol are displayed while matching, as if the variable effect is completed once. It is possible to execute a staging as if it were done, and to perform a "slump staging" composed of staging elements more times than the actual number of fluctuating staging without discomfort.

The slump effect storage area 223h is an area for storing the effect information related to the effect content and the stop symbol information related to the stop symbol for each effect unit (effect element) constituting the entire series of "slump effect". be. The MPU221 has the effect content of each effect unit in a series of "slump effects" and the stop symbol (temporary stop symbol) for each effect unit based on the start winnings to the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a during the "slump state". (Including), and information about the determined content (that is, effect information and stop symbol information) is stored in the slump effect storage area 223h, respectively. The effect unit in the "slump effect" is that each third symbol displayed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 6A) of the third symbol display device 81 is a stop display (including a temporary stop display). The same shall apply hereinafter.) The unit of the effect is that the fluctuation is started from the state in which the fluctuation is stopped, and then the fluctuation is stopped and the third symbol is stopped and displayed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 again.

Here, the details of the slump effect storage area 223h will be described with reference to FIG. 20. FIG. 20 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the slump effect storage area 223h. As shown in FIG. 20, the slump effect storage area 223h has seven storage areas from the first effect area 223h1 to the seventh effect area 223h7.

The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to be able to execute the "slump effect" based on the start winning from the "slump state" to the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a, but the first in the "slump state". The fluctuation effect based on the start prize is the "non-reach (long)" effect mode of loss, and the variation time of "15 seconds" which is the effect element of "high speed variation (long)" + "low speed variation" effect element. ", And the fluctuation production based on the next start prize in the" slump production "is the" special reach "production mode of the jackpot, and the production element of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ the production element of" pseudo fluctuation "+ The total time of "55 seconds", which is the fluctuation time of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" production element + "pseudo fluctuation" production element + "special reach" production element + "re-variation" production element " It will be the maximum production time of "slump production". Further, in the first embodiment, when the "slump effect" is executed, each effect unit is configured to be within "10 seconds". Therefore, in order to enable the effect of a maximum of "70 seconds" as a series of "slump effects", the slump effect storage area 223h covers the entire series of "slump effects" (that is, the first effect to the seventh effect). ), The first to seventh effect areas 223h1 to 223h7 are provided in order to store the effect information of the seven effect units and the stop symbol information, respectively.

Specifically, the first staging area 223h1 is an area corresponding to the "first staging" that is first executed in the "slump staging", and the staging content of the first staging ("Gase pseudo-ren" staging, "Gase pseudo-ren" staging, " Production information related to "pseudo-continuous production", "development availability production" or "whichever reach". The same shall apply hereinafter) and the stop symbol (gase chance symbol, chance symbol, loss symbol, jackpot) in the production content. Stores the stop symbol information related to any of the symbols. The same shall apply hereinafter.) Further, the second staging area 223h2 is an area corresponding to the "second staging" performed after the "first staging", and the staging information regarding the staging content of the "second staging" and the stop in the staging content. Stores the stop symbol information related to the symbol. Further, the third effect area 223h3 is an area corresponding to the "third effect" performed after the "second effect", and the effect information regarding the effect content of the "third effect" and the stop in the effect content. Stores the stop symbol information related to the symbol. Further, the fourth effect area 223h4 is an area corresponding to the "fourth effect" performed after the "third effect", and relates to the effect information regarding the effect content of the fourth effect and the stop symbol in the effect content. Stores the stop symbol information. Further, the fifth staging area 223h5 is an area corresponding to the "fifth staging" performed after the "fourth staging", and the staging information regarding the staging content of the "fifth staging" and the stop in the staging content. Stores the stop symbol information related to the symbol. Further, the sixth effect area 223h6 is an area corresponding to the "sixth effect" performed after the "fifth effect", and the effect information regarding the effect content of the "sixth effect" and the stop in the effect content. Stores the stop symbol information related to the symbol. Further, the 7th effect area 223h7 is an area corresponding to the "7th effect" performed after the "6th effect", and the effect information regarding the effect content of the "7th effect" and the stop in the effect content. Stores the stop symbol information related to the symbol.

As described above, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 during the "slump state", the voice lamp control device 113 sets the value of the slump effect timer 223 g and sets the slump effect timer 223 g. With reference to the value of and the slump effect table 222f, the effect status at the time of receiving the variation pattern command based on the start prize (for example, whether the "slump effect" is already being executed or whether it is an extended time part in the "slump effect", etc. ) And the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern command (that is, whether or not the fluctuation time and the "reach display" are included), the effect content and the stop symbol of the "slump effect" are determined, and the determined detection is performed. Information about the content and the stop symbol (that is, the effect information and the stop symbol information) is configured to be stored in the first to seventh effect areas 223h1 to 223h7 of the slump effect storage area 223h in the order of execution of the effect.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 21 to 24, the slump effect table 222f and the “slump effect” selected based on the slump effect table 222f will be described.

FIG. 21 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the slump effect table 222f.

Further, FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the fluctuation effect and the “slump effect” when the variation pattern command is received in the “slump state”, and FIG. 22 (a) shows the start in the “slump state”. FIG. 22 (b) is a timing chart showing the variation time of the variation effect and the effect time of the “slump effect” when the variation effect of the “non-reach (long)” effect mode is acquired based on the winning. Is a timing chart showing the variation time of the variation effect and the effect time of the "slump effect" when various reach variation effects are acquired based on the start winning in the "slump state".

Further, FIG. 23 shows a variation effect and a “slump effect” when the “slump effect” is being executed and the “slump effect” receives a variation pattern command at a timing other than the effect based on the extension time during the execution of the effect. In FIG. 23 (a), a variable effect of the “non-reach (long)” effect mode was acquired based on the start winning prize during the “slump effect” other than the extended time. It is a timing chart showing the fluctuation time of the variation effect and the effect time of the "slump effect" in the case, and FIG. 23 (b) shows various reach based on the start winning prize during the "slump effect" other than the extension time. It is a timing chart which showed the variation time of the variation effect and the effect time of "slump effect" when the variation effect is acquired.

Further, FIG. 24 shows a variation effect and a “slump effect” when the “slump effect” is being executed and the variation pattern command is received at the timing when the “slump effect” is executing the effect based on the extension time. FIG. 24A is a diagram showing the correspondence with the above, and FIG. 24A shows a case where a variable effect of the “non-reach (long)” effect mode is acquired based on the start winning prize in the “slump effect” based on the extension time. It is a timing chart showing the fluctuation time of the variation effect and the effect time of the "slump effect", and FIG. 24 (b) shows variations of various reach based on the start winning prize during the "slump effect" based on the extension time. It is a timing chart which showed the variation time of the variation effect and the effect time of "slump effect" when the effect is acquired.

As described above, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 during the “slump state” or the “slump effect”, the value of the slump effect timer 223g is based on the variation pattern command. Is set (updated), and the effect content and the stop symbol of the "slump effect" are determined with reference to the value of the slump effect timer 223 g and the slump effect table 222f. As shown in FIG. 21, the slump effect table 222f is grouped based on the effect status at the time of receiving the variation pattern command, and the variation pattern (variation time) based on the variation pattern command is used for each group. The contents of the entire "slump effect" are associated with each other.

Specifically, as the effect status when the variation pattern command is received, one is for the "slump state" in the "slump state", and the other is the execution of the "slump effect" and the effect other than the extended time is being executed. It is divided into "during slump production (other than extension time)" and "during slump production (during extension time)" during "slump production" and execution of production based on the extension time. Then, for each of the divided groups, an effect mode based on the received variation pattern command (“non-reach (long)” effect mode, “normal reach” effect mode, “super reach” effect mode, or “special reach” effect mode. A series of production contents of "slump production" are associated with each "effect mode".

In the first embodiment, when the received variation pattern command indicates the "special variation" effect mode, the "slump effect" is not executed. Therefore, the "special" effect table 222f is used. The item of "slump effect" corresponding to the "variation" effect mode is not provided. Further, in the first embodiment, in the "non-reach" effect mode acquired during the "slump state" or during the execution of the "slump effect", the number of reserved balls in the variable effect is "0" or "1". Therefore, it is always configured to have a "non-reach (long)" staging mode. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 21, the "slump effect" in the variation pattern including the "pseudo-ream" effect and the "re-variation" effect mode only increases the number of effect elements. The "slump effect" corresponding to the variation pattern excluding the effect and the effect mode of "re-variation" will be described.

First, with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22, the setting contents of the “slump effect” when the variation pattern command is received during the “slump state” will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 21 and 22A, the “non-reach (long)” effect mode is selected for the “slump state” in the slump effect table 222f, and “5 seconds” is selected as the extension time. In that case, the total effect time is "20 seconds", and "20000" is set as the value of the slump effect timer 223 g. Then, as the "slump effect" corresponding to the value of the slump effect timer 223 g, the first "gase pseudo-ren 1" is set in the "first effect", and the "gase pseudo-ren 2" is set in the "second effect". Set.

Specifically, in the first effect area 223h1 of the slump effect storage area 223h, the effect element of "Gase pseudo-ream 1" (that is, the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + the effect element of "pseudo-variation". .) And the stop symbol information regarding the gassechance symbol (for example, "788"; the same applies hereinafter) are stored. Further, in the second effect area 223h2, the effect information regarding the "Gase pseudo-ren 2" and the stop symbol information regarding the Gase chance item symbol are stored.

Then, a "slump effect" is performed based on the effect information stored in the first to second effect areas 223h1,223h2 of the slump effect storage area 223h and the stop symbol information (see FIG. 43 (a)), and is acquired. The stop symbol of the Gasechance pattern, which is the symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the variable effect (“non-reach (long)” effect mode, so it is “missing display”), is finally stopped and displayed, and a series of “slumps” are displayed. "Direction" ends (see FIG. 43 (f)). If a new start prize is generated in the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a while this "slump effect" is being performed, the transition to the "normal state" is made, but no new start prize is generated. If so, it will be in the "slump state" again.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, about "6 seconds" have passed since the "Gase pseudo-ren 1" of the "slump effect" was executed (that is, before the execution of the "Gase pseudo-ren 2"). In the step), the ball held in the holding device 73 described above is configured to win a prize in the dummy winning opening 75, and the holding symbol, which is a dummy holding display, is displayed in the cockpit display area Db (FIG. 6 (b). )) (See FIG. 43 (a)). With this configuration, the number of reserved symbols that is larger than the number of executions of the acquired variation effect can be displayed in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6B), and the number of executions of the acquired variation effect can be used. Even when the "slump effect" is performed with a large number of executions of the effect unit, it is possible to obtain consistency between the effect unit and the reserved symbol in the "slump effect". As a result, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the production unit in which the winning / failing lottery is performed without causing a discrepancy in the production is performed more than the number of acquired variable productions. Hereinafter, when the "Gase pseudo-ream 1" in the "slump effect" is executed, the same production and control as the above-mentioned "Gase pseudo-ream 1" are executed, and therefore the description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, each effect unit of the series of "slump effect" is composed of "10 seconds" unit, and among them, the effect element of "high speed fluctuation (short)" of "5 seconds". And the staging element of "pseudo-variation". Therefore, at the timing when the fluctuation time of the acquired fluctuation effect ends (that is, when "15 seconds" have elapsed from the winning 1), the effect of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" of "Gase pseudo-ream 2" in "slump effect" The element is terminated, and the fluctuation of the third symbol in the left symbol column Z1 is stopped (hereinafter, referred to as "first stop"). That is, the end timing of the variation effect and the timing of the first stop of the "Gase pseudo-ream 2" are configured to be synchronized. Therefore, the stop timing of any third symbol (that is, the third symbol of the left symbol column Z1) of the "slump effect" performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the dynamic display of the first symbol display device 37 are displayed. It can be synchronized with the stop timing. That is, in the "normal state", the stop timing of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 of the third symbol display device 81 and the stop timing of the dynamic display of the first symbol display device 37 are synchronized and related. It is configured. Therefore, in the same way as the fluctuation effect and the dynamic display in the "normal state" are synchronized, the "slump effect" of the third symbol display device 81 and the dynamic display of the first symbol display device 37 are displayed in the "slump state". It is possible to have relevance (synchronization), and it is possible to make the player recognize the end of the variable effect even while the "slump effect" is being executed. Hereinafter, the effect and control are executed so that the timing of the first stop of the "Gase pseudo-ream 2" in the "slump effect" is synchronized with the end timing of the variable effect, but the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 21 and 22A, the “non-reach (long)” effect mode is selected for the “slump state” in the slump effect table 222f, and the extension time is “10 seconds”. When selected, the total effect time is "25 seconds", and "25000" is set as the value of the slump effect timer 223 g. Then, as the "slump effect" corresponding to the value of the slump effect timer 223 g, "Gase pseudo-ren 1" is set in the "first effect", and "Gase pseudo-ren 2" is set in the "second effect". In the "third effect", a "development possibility effect" corresponding to the effect time (that is, "5 seconds") of the remaining "slump effect" is set.

Specifically, in the first effect area 223h1 of the slump effect storage area 223h, the effect information regarding the "Gase pseudo-ren 1" and the stop symbol information regarding the Gase chance eye symbol are stored. Further, in the second effect area 223h2, the effect information regarding the "Gase pseudo-ren 2" and the stop symbol information regarding the Gase chance item symbol are stored. Further, in the third production area 223h3, there is production information regarding a production that fails to develop to the next production (hereinafter referred to as "development failure"), which is a production element of "development possibility production", and a Gase chance eye. Stop symbol information related to the symbol is stored.

Then, the "slump effect" is performed based on the effect information stored in the first to third effect areas 223h1 to 223h3 of the slump effect storage area 223h and the stop symbol information (see FIGS. 46 (a) to 46 (e)). ), The stop symbol of the Gasechance pattern, which is the symbol corresponding to the acquired stop symbol of the variable effect (“non-reach (long)” effect mode, so it is “missing display”), is finally stopped and displayed. A series of "slump production" is completed.

Since the effect time of the effect element of the "development possibility effect" of the above-mentioned development failure as the "third effect" is "5 seconds", the "second development possibility effect" is performed. Then, at the end timing of the "second development possibility / disapproval effect" of the development failure, the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 does not quasi-break, and the stop display is displayed by the "second effect" "Gase pseudo-ream 2". The third symbol, which has been stopped and displayed as it is, is confirmed and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 21 and 22B, when the "normal reach" effect mode is selected for the "slump state" in the slump effect table 222f, the total effect time is "20 seconds" and the slump. "20000" is set as the value of the effect timer 223 g. Then, as the "slump effect" corresponding to the value of the slump effect timer 223 g, the first "pseudo-ream 1" is set in the "first effect", and the effect element of "whichever reach" is set in the "second effect". Is set.

Specifically, in the first effect area 223h1 of the slump effect storage area 223h, the effect element of "pseudo-ream 1" (that is, the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + the effect element of "pseudo-variation". ) And the stop symbol information regarding the chance item symbol (for example, "778"; the same applies hereinafter) are stored. Further, in the second staging area 223h2, the staging information related to the staging element of "Which da reach" and the stop symbol information corresponding to the acquired variable staging (stop symbol corresponding to "missing display" or "big hit display") are displayed. The corresponding stop symbol. The same shall apply hereinafter.) And is stored.

Then, the "slump effect" is performed based on the effect information and the stop symbol information stored in the first to second effect areas 223h1,223h2 of the slump effect storage area 223h, and corresponds to the acquired stop symbol of the variable effect. The "missing display" or "big hit display" is finally stopped and displayed, and a series of "slump effects" ends.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the variation effect acquired based on the start winning of the ball to the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a in the "slump state" is the effect mode including the "reach display". In this case, the ball held by the holding device 73 is configured not to flow into the dummy winning opening 75. With this configuration, in the "slump effect", the "pseudo-ream" effect that does not consume the reserved symbol is performed instead of the "gase pseudo-ream" effect that consumes the reserved symbol, and the actual variable effect is executed. Even when the same number of "slump effects" are performed, the number of "slump effects" effects and the number of reserved symbols can be consistent. As a result, it is possible to provide a production in which the player does not feel a sense of discomfort without causing a discrepancy in the production.

In the first embodiment, even if the "big hit display" is won in the "slump effect", the extension time is not acquired in the case of the variable effect including the "reach display", and the series of "slump effect" is performed. The staging time of is the same as the fluctuating time of the acquired variable staging. That is, the end timing of the variable effect and the end timing of the "slump effect" are synchronized. Therefore, even if a command (that is, an opening command) related to a jackpot effect (that is, an opening effect) or the like is transmitted from the main control device 110 at the end timing of the dynamic display of the first symbol display device 37, the first 3 In the symbol display device 81, it is possible to match the end of the "slump effect" with the start of the jackpot effect, and it is possible to provide a natural effect from the end of the "slump effect" to the start of the jackpot effect. ..

Next, as shown in FIGS. 21 and 22B, when the "super reach" effect mode is selected for the "slump state" in the slump effect table 222f, the total effect time is "30 seconds". "30000" is set to the value of the slump effect timer 223 g. Then, as the "slump effect" corresponding to the value of the slump effect timer 223 g, "pseudo-ream 1" is set in the "first effect", "pseudo-ream 2" is set in the "second effect", and the "first effect" is set. The production element of "Which da reach" is set in "3 production".

Specifically, in the first effect area 223h1 of the slump effect storage area 223h, the effect information regarding the "pseudo-ream 1" and the stop symbol information regarding the chance symbol are stored. Further, in the second effect area 223h2, the effect information regarding the "pseudo-ream 2" and the stop symbol information regarding the chance item symbol are stored. Further, in the third effect area 223h3, the effect information regarding the effect element of "Which da reach" and the stop symbol information corresponding to the acquired variable effect are stored.

Then, the "slump effect" is performed based on the effect information and the stop symbol information stored in the first to third effect areas 223h1 to 223h3 of the slump effect storage area 223h, and corresponds to the acquired stop symbol of the variable effect. The "missing display" or "big hit display" is finally stopped and displayed, and a series of "slump effects" ends.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 21 and 22B, when the "special reach" effect mode is selected for the "slump state" in the slump effect table 222f, the total effect time is "40 seconds". "40000" is set to the value of the slump effect timer 223 g. Then, as the "slump effect" corresponding to the value of the slump effect timer 223 g, "pseudo-ream 1" is set in the "first effect", "pseudo-ream 2" is set in the "second effect", and the "first effect" is set. "Pseudo-ream 3" is set in "3 staging", and the staging element of "Which da reach" is set in "4th staging".

Specifically, in the first effect area 223h1 of the slump effect storage area 223h, the effect information regarding the "pseudo-ream 1" and the stop symbol information regarding the chance symbol are stored. Further, in the second effect area 223h2, the effect information regarding the "pseudo-ream 2" and the stop symbol information regarding the chance item symbol are stored. Further, in the third effect area 223h3, the effect information regarding the "pseudo-ream 3" and the stop symbol information regarding the chance item symbol are stored. Further, in the fourth effect area 223h4, the effect information regarding the effect element of "Which da reach" and the stop symbol information corresponding to the acquired variable effect are stored.

Then, the "slump effect" is performed and acquired based on the effect information stored in the first to fourth effect areas 223h1 to 223h4 of the slump effect storage area 223h and the stop symbol information (see FIG. 44 (a)). The "missing display" or "big hit display" corresponding to the stop symbol of the variable effect is finally stopped and displayed, and a series of "slump effects" ends (see FIG. 44 (f)).

As described above, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command in the "slump state", the extension time is extracted (including the presence / absence) based on the variation pattern command, and the extension time and the variation. Set the overall production time of the "slump effect" based on the fluctuation time based on the pattern command. Then, based on the effect time of the entire "slump effect", the detailed effect content of the "slump effect" and each stop symbol are set, and the "slump effect" is executed based on the set content. There is. With this configuration, the "slump effect" is performed longer than the fluctuation time of the acquired variation effect, the effect time performed by the third symbol display device 81 is lengthened, and the effect is produced by the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to reduce the situation that is not done and prevent the player from awakening.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 21 and 23, "non-reach (long)" executed based on the start winning prize (hereinafter referred to as "winning 1") to the special drawing winning openings 77a and 78a in the "slump state". ) ”Direction mode (the“ non-reach (long) ”production mode executed based on the prize 1 is referred to as“ non-reach (long) 1 ”) and the extension time“ 5 seconds ”are selected. The "slump effect" (that is, "Gase pseudo-ren 1" and "Gase pseudo-ren 2") to be executed in the case is being executed, and the "slump effect" is executing an effect other than the effect based on the extension time. The setting contents of the "slump effect" when a new fluctuation pattern command is received at the timing (that is, "Gase pseudo-ren 1" or the first half part of "Gase pseudo-ren 2") will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 21 and 23A, an effect other than the extension time of the "slump effect" executed based on the prize 1 for "during the slump effect (other than the extension time)" on the slump effect table 222f. (In the example of FIG. 23 (a), in "Gase pseudo-ren 2"), based on a new start winning prize (hereinafter referred to as "winning 2") to the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a, "non" When a variable effect of the "reach (long)" effect mode (hereinafter referred to as "non-reach (long) 2") is acquired, the "non-reach (long) 2" additionally acquired based on the winning 2 is obtained. The effect time is "15 seconds", and "15000" is added to the value of the slump effect timer 223 g (see S1410 in FIG. 39).

In this case, since the "slump effect" other than the extended time is being executed in the "slump effect" of "20 seconds" based on the prize 1, each additional "slump effect" based on the prize 2 is performed. In order to match the production time of the "slump effect" with the fluctuation time of the acquired variable effect, the extension time set based on the prize 1 is temporarily reset, and the effect based on the "slump effect" based on the extension time is set. It is configured so that the subsequent "slump effect" effect content is reset for the variation time of the variation effect acquired based on the prize 1 and the prize 2 without executing the element. Therefore, at this stage, the MPU 221 subtracts the value for the extension time set based on the winning 1 (that is, “5000” or “10000”) from the value of the slump effect timer 223g (see S1421 in FIG. 39). Further, the MPU 221 adds the value for the fluctuation time (that is, “15000”) acquired based on the prize 2 to the value of the slump effect timer 223 g (see S1410 in FIG. 39).

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 23A, the total production time of the entire "slump effect" converted from the start of the first effect element of the "slump effect" is "30 seconds", and the "slump effect" The total set value of the slump effect timer 223 g converted from the start is "30000". Then, as an effect unit of a series of "slump effect" corresponding to the value of the slump effect timer 223 g, "Gase pseudo-ream 3" is additionally set in the "third effect".

Specifically, in the first effect area 223h1 and the second effect area 223h2 of the slump effect storage area 223h, the effect information of "Gase pseudo-ren 1" and "Gase pseudo-ren 2" and the stop symbol related to the Gase chance symbol are already present. Since the information is stored respectively, at this stage, the effect information regarding the "Gase pseudo-ren 3" and the stop symbol information regarding the Gase chance eye symbol are stored in the third effect area 223h3. Further, the reserved symbol corresponding to the effect element of "Gase pseudo-ren 3" is displayed in the cockpit display area Db at the timing when the winning 2 is generated.

Then, the "slump effect" is continuously performed based on the effect information and the stop symbol information stored in the first to third effect areas 223h1 to 223h3 of the slump effect storage area 223h, and the additional variable effect acquired. The stop symbol of the Gasechance pattern, which is the symbol corresponding to the stop symbol (“non-reach (long) 2”, so it is “missing display”), is finally stopped and displayed, and a series of “slump effects” ends. ..

Next, as shown in FIGS. 21 and 23 (b), the "slump effect" executed based on the winning 1 in the "slump state" for "during the slump effect (other than the extension time)" on the slump effect table 222f. If a variable effect of the "normal reach" effect mode is acquired based on the prize 2 during the execution of the effect other than the extension time of "", the additional effect time acquired based on the prize 2 is "20 seconds". Yes, "20000" is added to the value of the slump effect timer 223 g (see S1410 in FIG. 39).

In this case, in the "slump effect" of "20 seconds" based on the prize 1, the "slump effect" other than the extended time is being executed (in the first embodiment, the "gase pseudo-ren 2" is being executed). When the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is acquired in order to match each "slump effect" in performing the additional "slump effect" based on the prize 2 from that state (FIG. 23 (a)). )), The extension time set based on the winning 1 is temporarily reset, and the subsequent "slump effect" effect content is reset based on the winning 1 and the winning 2. Therefore, at this stage, the MPU 221 subtracts the value for the extension time set based on the winning 1 (that is, “5000” or “10000”) from the value of the slump effect timer 223 g (see S1421 in FIG. 39). .. Further, the MPU 221 adds the value for the fluctuation time (that is, “20000”) acquired based on the prize 2 to the value of the slump effect timer 223 g (see S1410 in FIG. 39).

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 23B, the total production time of the entire "slump effect" converted from the start of the "slump effect" is "35 seconds", which is converted from the start of the "slump effect". The total set value of the slump effect timer 223 g is "35000". Then, as the "slump effect" corresponding to the value of the slump effect timer 223 g, the "first effect" and the "second effect" (that is, the already performed "Gase pseudo-ream 1" and the running "Gase pseudo-ream" are performed. In addition to 2)), a “development possibility production” is set as the “third production”, and a production element of “whichever reach” is set as the “fourth production”.

Specifically, in the first effect area 223h1 and the second effect area 223h2 of the slump effect storage area 223h, the effect information of "Gase pseudo-ren 1" and "Gase pseudo-ren 2" and the stop symbol related to the Gase chance symbol are already present. Since the information is stored respectively, the effect of "20 seconds" has already been set at this stage. Therefore, the remaining "slump effect" effect time is "15 seconds". Therefore, first, in the fourth effect area 223h4 where the stop symbol is finally displayed, the effect information regarding the effect element of "Which da reach" is performed for "10 seconds" and the stop symbol corresponding to the acquired variable effect. Information and is stored. Then, as the remaining "5 seconds" production, in the third production area 223h3, the development to the next production (that is, the production element of "Which da reach"), which is the production element of "development possibility production", is The effect information regarding a successful effect (hereinafter referred to as "development success") and the stop symbol information regarding the reach formation symbol that suggests that the next effect will be developed are stored.

Since the effect element of the "development possibility effect" of the above-mentioned development success as the "third effect" is performed for "5 seconds", the "second development possibility effect" is performed. Then, at the end timing of the "second development possibility / rejection effect" of the successful development, the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 is pseudo-broken, and the stop display is displayed by the "second effect" of the "gase pseudo-ream 2". The Gasechance pattern that was made is replaced with the reach formation symbol (for example, "788" → "7 ○ 7 (○ is changing)"), and it becomes the production element of "Which da reach" which is the "fourth production". Develop.

Then, the "slump effect" is continuously performed based on the effect information and the stop symbol information stored in the 1st to 4th effect areas 223h1 to 223h4 of the slump effect storage area 223h, and the additional variable effect acquired. The "missing display" or "big hit display" corresponding to the stop symbol is finally stopped and displayed, and a series of "slump effects" ends.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 21 and 23 (b), the "slump effect" executed based on the winning 1 in the "slump state" for "during the slump effect (other than the extension time)" on the slump effect table 222f. If a variable effect of the "super reach" effect mode is acquired based on the prize 2 during the execution of the effect other than the extension time of "", the additional effect time acquired based on the prize 2 is "30 seconds". Therefore, "30000" is added to the value of the slump effect timer 223 g (see S1410 in FIG. 39).

In this case, in the "slump effect" of "20 seconds" based on the prize 1, the "slump effect" other than the extended time is being executed (in the first embodiment, the "gase pseudo-ren 2" is being executed). In order to match each "slump effect" in performing an additional "slump effect" based on the prize 2 from that state, a "non-reach (long)" effect mode or a "normal reach" effect mode was acquired. Similar to the case (see FIG. 23 (a) or FIG. 23 (b)), the extension time set based on the winning 1 is temporarily reset, and the subsequent “slump effect” is produced based on the winning 1 and the winning 2. It is configured to reset the contents. Therefore, at this stage, the MPU 221 subtracts the value for the extension time set based on the winning 1 (that is, “5000” or “10000”) from the value of the slump effect timer 223 g (see S1421 in FIG. 39). .. Further, the MPU 221 adds the value for the fluctuation time (that is, “30000”) acquired based on the prize 2 to the value of the slump effect timer 223 g (see S1410 in FIG. 39).

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 23B, the total production time of the entire "slump effect" converted from the start of the "slump effect" is "45 seconds", which is converted from the start of the "slump effect". The total set value of the slump effect timer 223 g is "45000". Then, as the "slump effect" corresponding to the value of the slump effect timer 223 g, the "first effect" and the "second effect" (that is, the already performed "Gase pseudo-ream 1" and the running "Gase pseudo-ream" are performed. In addition to 2)), "development possibility production" is set as "third production", "pseudo-ream 1" is set as "fourth production", and "which" is set as "fifth production". The staging element of "Da Reach" is set.

Specifically, in the first effect area 223h1 and the second effect area 223h2 of the slump effect storage area 223h, the effect information of "Gase pseudo-ren 1" and "Gase pseudo-ren 2" and the stop symbol related to the Gase chance symbol are already present. Since the information is stored respectively, the effect of "20 seconds" has already been set at this stage. Therefore, the remaining "slump effect" effect time is "25 seconds". Therefore, first, in the fifth effect area 223h5 where the stop symbol is finally displayed, the effect information regarding the effect element of "Which da reach" is performed for "10 seconds" and the stop symbol corresponding to the acquired variable effect. Information and is stored. Next, as the remaining "15 seconds" effect, in the fourth effect area 223h4, the effect information about the "pseudo-ream 1" performed for "10 seconds" and the next effect (that is, the effect element of "Which da reach"). ) Is stored with the stop symbol information regarding the reach formation symbol. Then, as the remaining "5 seconds" production, it is suggested that the third production area 223h3 will be developed into the next production (that is, "pseudo-ren 1") and the production information regarding the "development possibility production" of the successful development. The stop symbol information related to the chance symbol is stored.

Since the effect element of the "development possibility effect" of the above-mentioned development success as the "third effect" is performed for "5 seconds", the "second development possibility effect" is performed. Then, at the end timing of the "second development possibility / rejection effect" of the successful development, the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 is pseudo-broken, and the stop display is displayed by the "second effect" of the "gase pseudo-ream 2". The changed Gase Chance symbol is replaced with the Chance symbol (for example, "788" → "778". See FIGS. 46 (e) and (f)), and the "fourth production" is "pseudo-ren 1". (See Fig. 47 (c)).

Then, the "slump effect" is continuously performed based on the effect information and the stop symbol information stored in the 1st to 5th effect areas 223h1 to 223h5 of the slump effect storage area 223h, and the additional variable effect acquired. The "missing display" or "big hit display" corresponding to the stop symbol is finally stopped and displayed, and a series of "slump effects" ends (see FIGS. 46 and 47).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 21 and 23 (b), the "slump effect" executed based on the winning 1 in the "slump state" for "during the slump effect (other than the extension time)" on the slump effect table 222f. If a variable effect of the "special reach" effect mode is acquired based on the prize 2 during the execution of the effect other than the extension time of "", the additional effect time acquired based on the prize 2 is "40 seconds". Therefore, "40000" is added to the value of the slump effect timer 223 g (see S1410 in FIG. 39).

In this case, in the "slump effect" of "20 seconds" based on the prize 1, the "slump effect" other than the extended time is being executed (in the first embodiment, the "gase pseudo-ren 2" is being executed). In order to match each "slump effect" in performing an additional "slump effect" based on the prize 2 from that state, a "non-reach (long)" effect mode, a "normal reach" effect mode, or a "super reach" As in the case where the effect mode is acquired (see FIG. 23 (a) or FIG. 23 (b)), the extension time set based on the winning 1 is temporarily reset, and after that, based on the winning 1 and the winning 2. It is configured to reset the effect content of "Slump effect". Therefore, at this stage, the value for the extension time set based on the prize 1 (that is, “5000” or “10000”) is subtracted from the value of the slump effect timer 223 g (see S1421 in FIG. 39).

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 23B, the total production time of the entire "slump effect" converted from the start of the "slump effect" is "55 seconds", which is converted from the start of the "slump effect". The total set value of the slump effect timer 223 g is "55000". Then, as the "slump effect" corresponding to the value of the slump effect timer 223 g, the "first effect" and the "second effect" (that is, the already performed "Gase pseudo-ream 1" and the running "Gase pseudo-ream" are performed. In addition to 2)), "development possibility production" is set as "third production", "pseudo-ream 1" is set as "fourth production", and "pseudo-ream 1" is set as "fifth production". "Ren 2" is set, and the staging element of "Which da reach" is set as the "sixth staging".

Specifically, in the first effect area 223h1 and the second effect area 223h2 of the slump effect storage area 223h, the effect information of "Gase pseudo-ren 1" and "Gase pseudo-ren 2" and the stop symbol related to the Gase chance symbol are already present. Since the information is stored respectively, the effect of "20 seconds" has already been set at this stage. Therefore, the remaining "slump effect" effect time is "35 seconds". Therefore, first, in the sixth effect area 223h6 where the stop symbol is finally displayed, the effect information regarding the effect element of "Which da reach" is performed for "10 seconds" and the stop symbol corresponding to the acquired variable effect. Information and is stored. Next, as the remaining "25 seconds" effect, in the fifth effect area 223h5, the effect information about the "pseudo-ren 2" performed for "10 seconds" and the next effect (that is, the effect element of "Which da reach"). ) Is stored as the stop symbol information regarding the reach formation symbol. Next, as the remaining "15 seconds" effect, in the fourth effect area 223h4, the effect information regarding the "pseudo-ren 1" performed for "10 seconds" and the next effect (that is, "pseudo-ren 2") are developed. The stop symbol information about the chance symbol that suggests to be performed is stored. Then, as the remaining "5 seconds" production, it is suggested that the third production area 223h3 will be developed into the next production (that is, "pseudo-ren 1") and the production information regarding the "development possibility production" of the successful development. The stop symbol information related to the chance symbol is stored.

Since the effect element of the "development possibility effect" of the above-mentioned development success as the "third effect" is performed for "5 seconds", the "second development possibility effect" is performed. Then, at the end timing of the "second development possibility / rejection effect" of the successful development, the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 is pseudo-broken, and the stop display is displayed by the "second effect" of the "gase pseudo-ream 2". The changed Gase Chance symbol is replaced with the Chance symbol (for example, "788" → "778". See FIGS. 46 (e) and (f)), and the "fourth production" is "pseudo-ren 1". (See Fig. 47 (c)).

Then, the "slump effect" is continuously performed based on the effect information and the stop symbol information stored in the 1st to 6th effect areas 223h1 to 223h6 of the slump effect storage area 223h, and the additional variable effect acquired. The "loss display" or "big hit display" corresponding to the stop symbol is finally stopped and displayed, and a series of "slump effects" ends (see FIGS. 46 and 47).

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 has a time other than the extension time of the "slump effect" in the "slump effect" executed based on the prize 1 to the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a in the "slump state". If a variable effect is acquired based on the new prize 2 to the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a during the execution of the effect, the "slump effect" other than the extension time based on the prize 1 is being executed. Therefore, in order to match each "slump effect" when performing an additional "slump effect" based on the prize 2, the extension time set based on the prize 1 is temporarily reset, and the prize 1 and the prize are won. It is configured to reset the effect content of the subsequent "slump effect" based on 2. Therefore, even if a variable effect is added due to a new start prize in the middle of the "slump effect", the end timing of the acquired variable effect can be synchronized with the end timing of the entire "slump effect". , It is possible to provide a production that the player does not feel uncomfortable without causing a discrepancy in the production. As a result, when the "slump effect" is executed based on the start prize in the "slump state", the end timing of the series of "slump effect" and the end timing of the acquired variable effect are different, but the "slump" is generated. Since it is configured so that the contents of the production can be matched even if a new start prize is generated during the production, even if the "slump production" is executed longer than the fluctuation time of the acquired variable production, the production is performed. It is possible to execute an effect longer than the variation time of the acquired variation effect while configuring so that the content is not inconsistent.

In addition, when setting an additional "slump effect", it is configured to reset each effect unit that is performed for a fixed time from the last effect in the entire "slump effect", and when it is set again. The remaining time less than the execution time (that is, less than "10 seconds") of the production element of 1 is a production that does not cause a sense of discomfort even if the production is interrupted in the middle, and the production time is flexible. (There is a range) Set to supplement with "development possibility production". With this configuration, even if a variable effect is added due to a new start prize in the middle of the "slump effect", the end timing of the acquired variable effect and the end timing of the entire "slump effect" Can be synchronized, and it is possible to provide a production that the player does not feel uncomfortable without causing a discrepancy in the production.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 21 and 24, the “slump effect” (ie, “slump effect”) performed when the “non-reach (long) 1” and the extension time “5 seconds” are selected based on the prize 1. Gase pseudo-ren 1 "and" Gase pseudo-ren 2 ") are being executed, and at the timing when the" slump effect "is executing the effect based on the extension time (that is, the latter half of" Gase pseudo-ren 2 "). The setting contents of "slump effect" when a new fluctuation pattern command is received will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 21 and 24 (a), in the "slump effect in progress (during extension time)" in the slump effect table 222f, based on the prize 1 in the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a in the "slump state". Specially during the execution of the effect based on the extended time of the executed "slump effect" (in the example shown in FIG. 24 (a), during the "Gase pseudo-ren 2" and when the extended time "4 seconds" has elapsed). If the variable effect of "non-reach (long) 2" is acquired based on the new winning 2 to the winning openings 77a and 78a, the "non-reach (long)" additionally acquired based on the winning 2 is acquired. The effect time of "2" is "15 seconds", and the value "15000" of the slump effect timer 223 g is added (see S1410 in FIG. 39).

In this case, in the "slump effect" of "20 seconds" based on the prize 1, since the "slump effect" in the extended time is being executed, the effect based on the extended time has already been performed, and the effect is based on the prize 2 from that state. In order to match each "slump effect" when performing an additional "slump effect", the remaining amount of the extended time acquired based on the prize 1 is temporarily stored (see S1422 in FIG. 39), and then. , The value of the slump effect timer 223g is cleared to "0" (S1423 in FIG. 39). Then, the effect content of the "slump effect" is set again based on the fluctuation time acquired based on the prize 2. Therefore, at this stage, the MPU 221 adds (sets) the value for the fluctuation time (that is, “15000”) acquired based on the winning 2 to the value of the slump effect timer 223g (see S1410 in FIG. 39).

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 24A, the "slump effect" performed from the start time of the "slump effect" to the winning 2 is "19 seconds", and the remaining "slump effect" at the time of winning 2. The remaining time of "" is "1 second", and the value of the slump effect timer 223g is "1000". Then, after holding the value of the slump effect timer 223 g in the storage area of the RAM 223, the value of the slump effect timer 223 g is cleared to "0". Next, since the variation time of the variation effect acquired based on the prize 2 is "15 seconds", "15000" is added (set) to the value of the slump effect timer 223 g at this point. Then, as the "slump effect" corresponding to the value of the slump effect timer 223 g and the residual value (that is, "1000"), the "third effect" is "development possibility effect" and the "fourth effect" is "gase". "Pseudo-ream 3" is additionally set.

Specifically, in the first effect area 223h1 and the second effect area 223h2 of the slump effect storage area 223h, the effect information of "Gase pseudo-ren 1" and "Gase pseudo-ren 2" and the stop symbol related to the Gase chance symbol are already present. Since the information and the information are stored respectively, the effect of "20 seconds" has already been set at this stage. Therefore, since the period from the time of winning 2 to the end of the running "Gase pseudo-ren 2" is the same as the above residual value, the remaining "slump effect" is performed when the "Gase pseudo-ren 2" ends. The value is determined to be "14000", which is obtained by subtracting "1000" from "15000". Therefore, based on the above determination result, the MPU 221 is, as a "slump effect" performed after the "third effect", first, in the fourth effect area 223h4 where the stop symbol is finally displayed, "10 seconds". The staging information of the "Gase pseudo-ren 3" to be performed and the stop symbol information related to the Gase chance eye symbol are stored. Then, as the remaining "4 seconds" effect, the development to the next effect (that is, "Gase pseudo-ren 3"), which is an effect element of the "development possibility effect", fails in the third effect area 223h3. The production information about the development failure and the gasechance pattern that suggests that the next production will not be developed are stored.

Since the effect element of the "development possibility effect" of the above-mentioned development failure as the "third effect" is performed for "4 seconds", the "second development possibility effect" is performed. Then, at the end timing of the "second development possibility / disapproval effect" of the development failure, the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 does not quasi-break, and the stop display is performed by the "second effect" "Gase pseudo-ream 2". The displayed Gasechance pattern will continue to be displayed.

Then, the "slump effect" is continuously performed based on the effect information and the stop symbol information stored in the 1st to 4th effect areas 223h1 to 223h4 of the slump effect storage area 223h, and the additional variable effect acquired. The stop symbol of the Gasechance pattern, which is the symbol corresponding to the stop symbol (“non-reach (long) 2”, so it is “missing display”), is finally stopped and displayed, and a series of “slump effects” ends. ..

With this configuration, even if a variable effect is added due to a new start prize in the middle of the "slump effect", the end timing of the acquired variable effect and the end timing of the entire "slump effect" Can be synchronized, and it is possible to provide a production that the player does not feel uncomfortable without causing a discrepancy in the production.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 21 and 24 (b), in the case of "during the slump effect (during the extension time)" on the slump effect table 222f, the prize 1 to the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a in the "slump state" is used. Based on the new prize 2 to the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a during the execution of the effect based on the extended time of the "slump effect" executed based on (in the first embodiment, in the "Gase pseudo-ren 2"). When the variable effect of the "normal reach" effect mode is acquired, the effect time additionally acquired based on the winning 2 is "20 seconds", and the value "20,000" of the slump effect timer 223 g is added. (See S1410 in FIG. 39).

In this case, in the "slump effect" of "20 seconds" based on the prize 1, since the "slump effect" in the extended time is being executed, the effect based on the extended time has already been performed, and the effect is based on the prize 2 from that state. In order to match each "slump effect" when performing an additional "slump effect", the remaining amount of the extended time acquired based on the prize 1 is temporarily stored (see S1422 in FIG. 39), and then. , The value of the slump effect timer 223g is cleared to "0" (S1423 in FIG. 39). Then, the effect content of the "slump effect" is set again based on the fluctuation time acquired based on the prize 2. Therefore, at this stage, the MPU 221 adds (sets) the value for the fluctuation time (that is, “20000”) acquired based on the winning 2 to the value of the slump effect timer 223g (see S1410 in FIG. 39).

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 24 (b), the "slump effect" performed from the start time of the "slump effect" to the winning 2 is "19 seconds", and the remaining "slump effect" at the time of winning 2. The remaining time of "" is "1 second", and the value of the slump effect timer 223g is "1000". Then, after holding the value of the slump effect timer 223 g in the storage area of the RAM 223, the value of the slump effect timer 223 g is cleared to "0". Next, since the variation time of the variation effect acquired based on the prize 2 is "20 seconds", "20000" is added (set) to the value of the slump effect timer 223 g at this point. Then, as the "slump effect" corresponding to the value of the slump effect timer 223 g and the residual value (that is, "1000"), the "third effect" is "development possibility effect" and the "fourth effect" is "which one". The staging element of "Da Reach" is additionally set.

Specifically, in the first effect area 223h1 and the second effect area 223h2 of the slump effect storage area 223h, the effect information of "Gase pseudo-ren 1" and "Gase pseudo-ren 2" and the stop symbol related to the Gase chance symbol are already present. Since the information is stored respectively, the effect of "20 seconds" has already been set at this stage. Therefore, since the period from the time of winning 2 to the end of the running "Gase pseudo-ren 2" is the same as the above residual value, the remaining "slump effect" is performed when the "Gase pseudo-ren 2" ends. The value is determined to be "19000", which is obtained by subtracting "1000" from "20000". Therefore, based on the above determination result, the MPU 221 is, as a "slump effect" performed after the "second effect", first, in the fourth effect area 223h4 where the stop symbol is finally displayed, "10 seconds". The staging information about the staging element of "Which da reach" to be performed and the stop symbol information corresponding to the acquired variable staging are stored. Then, as the remaining "9 seconds" production, the third production area 223h3 develops into the production information regarding the "development possibility production" of the successful development and the next production (that is, the production element of "Which da reach"). The stop symbol information about the reach formation symbol suggesting that is stored.

Since the effect element of the "development possibility effect" of the above-mentioned development success as the "third effect" is performed for "9 seconds", the "third development possibility effect" is performed. Then, at the end timing of the "third development possibility / disapproval effect" of the successful development, the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 is pseudo-broken, and the stop display is performed by the "second effect", the "gase pseudo-ream 2". The Gase chance eye symbol is replaced with the reach formation symbol (for example, "788" → "7 ○ 7 (○ is changing)". See FIGS. 46 (d) to (f)), "4th production". It develops into a directing element of "Which da reach" (see Fig. 47 (e)).

Then, the "slump effect" is continuously performed based on the effect information and the stop symbol information stored in the first to fourth effect areas 223h1 to 223h4 of the slump effect storage area 223h, and the additionally acquired variation effect is performed. The "missing display" or "big hit display" corresponding to the stop symbol is finally stopped and displayed, and a series of "slump effects" ends (see FIGS. 46 and 47).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 21 and 24 (b), in the case of "during the slump effect (during the extension time)" on the slump effect table 222f, the prize 1 to the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a in the "slump state" is used. Based on the new prize 2 to the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a during the execution of the effect based on the extended time of the "slump effect" executed based on (in the first embodiment, in the "Gase pseudo-ren 2"). When the variable effect of the "super reach" effect mode is acquired, the effect time additionally acquired based on the winning 2 is "30 seconds", and the value "30000" of the slump effect timer 223 g is added. (See S1410 in FIG. 39).

In this case, in the "slump effect" of "20 seconds" based on the prize 1, since the "slump effect" in the extended time is being executed, the effect based on the extended time has already been performed, and the effect is based on the prize 2 from that state. In order to match each "slump effect" when performing an additional "slump effect", the remaining amount of the extended time acquired based on the prize 1 is temporarily stored (see S1422 in FIG. 39), and then. , The value of the slump effect timer 223g is cleared to "0" (S1423 in FIG. 39). Then, the effect content of the "slump effect" is set again based on the fluctuation time acquired based on the prize 2. Therefore, at this stage, the MPU 221 adds (sets) the value for the fluctuation time (that is, “30000”) acquired based on the winning 2 to the value of the slump effect timer 223g (see S1410 in FIG. 39).

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 24 (b), the "slump effect" performed from the start time of the "slump effect" to the winning 2 is "19 seconds", and the remaining "slump effect" at the time of winning 2. The remaining time of "" is "1 second", and the value of the slump effect timer 223g is "1000". Then, after holding the value of the slump effect timer 223 g in the storage area of the RAM 223, the value of the slump effect timer 223 g is cleared to "0". Next, since the variation time of the variation effect acquired based on the prize 2 is "30 seconds", "30000" is added (set) to the value of the slump effect timer 223 g at this point. Then, as the "slump effect" corresponding to the value of the slump effect timer 223 g and the residual value (that is, "1000"), the "third effect" is "development possibility effect" and the "fourth effect" is "pseudo". The staging element of "Which da reach" is additionally set in "Ren 1" and "Fifth staging".

Specifically, in the first effect area 223h1 and the second effect area 223h2 of the slump effect storage area 223h, the effect information of "Gase pseudo-ren 1" and "Gase pseudo-ren 2" and the stop symbol related to the Gase chance symbol are already present. Since the information is stored respectively, the effect of "20 seconds" has already been set at this stage. Therefore, since the period from the time of winning 2 to the end of the running "Gase pseudo-ren 2" is the same as the above residual value, the remaining "slump effect" is performed when the "Gase pseudo-ren 2" ends. The value is determined to be "29000", which is obtained by subtracting "1000" from "30,000". Therefore, based on the above determination result, the MPU 221 is, as a "slump effect" performed after the "second effect", first, in the fifth effect area 223h5 where the stop symbol is finally displayed, "10 seconds". The staging information about the staging element of "Which da reach" to be performed and the stop symbol information corresponding to the acquired variable staging are stored. Next, as the remaining "19 seconds" effect, in the fourth effect area 223h4, the effect information about the "pseudo-ream 1" performed for "10 seconds" and the next effect (that is, the effect element of "Which da reach"). ) Is stored with the stop symbol information regarding the reach formation symbol. Then, as the remaining "9 seconds" production, it is suggested that the third production area 223h3 will be developed into the next production (that is, "pseudo-ren 1") and the production information regarding the "development possibility production" of the successful development. The stop symbol information related to the chance symbol is stored.

Since the effect element of the "development possibility effect" of the above-mentioned development success as the "third effect" is performed for "9 seconds", the "third development possibility effect" is performed. Then, at the end timing of the "third development possibility / disapproval effect" of the successful development, the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 is pseudo-broken, and the stop display is performed by the "second effect", the "gase pseudo-ream 2". The changed Gase Chance symbol is replaced with the Chance symbol (for example, "788" → "778". See FIGS. 46 (d) to (f)), and go to "Pseudo-ren 1" which is the "fourth production". (See Fig. 47 (c)).

Then, the "slump effect" is continuously performed based on the effect information stored in the 1st to 5th effect areas 223h1 to 223h5 of the slump effect storage area 223h and the stop symbol information, and the additional variable effect acquired. The "missing display" or "big hit display" corresponding to the stop symbol is finally stopped and displayed, and a series of "slump effects" ends (see FIGS. 46 and 47).

Next, as shown in FIGS. 21 and 24 (b), in the case of "during the slump effect (during the extension time)" on the slump effect table 222f, the prize 1 to the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a in the "slump state" is used. Based on the new prize 2 to the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a during the execution of the effect based on the extended time of the "slump effect" executed based on (in the first embodiment, in the "Gase pseudo-ren 2"). When the variable effect of the "special reach" effect mode is acquired, the effect time additionally acquired based on the winning 2 is "40 seconds", and the value "40000" of the slump effect timer 223 g is added. (See S1410 in FIG. 39).

In this case, in the "slump effect" of "20 seconds" based on the prize 1, since the "slump effect" in the extended time is being executed, the effect based on the extended time has already been performed, and the effect is based on the prize 2 from that state. In order to match each "slump effect" when performing an additional "slump effect", the remaining amount of the extended time acquired based on the prize 1 is temporarily stored (see S1422 in FIG. 39), and then. , The value of the slump effect timer 223g is cleared to "0" (S1423 in FIG. 39). Then, the effect content of the "slump effect" is set again based on the fluctuation time acquired based on the prize 2. Therefore, at this stage, the MPU 221 adds (sets) the value for the fluctuation time (that is, “40000”) acquired based on the winning 2 to the value of the slump effect timer 223g (see S1410 in FIG. 39).

Here, in the example shown in FIG. 24 (b), the "slump effect" performed from the start time of the "slump effect" to the winning 2 is "19 seconds", and the remaining "slump effect" at the time of winning 2. The remaining time of "" is "1 second", and the value of the slump effect timer 223g is "1000". Then, after holding the value of the slump effect timer 223 g in the storage area of the RAM 223, the value of the slump effect timer 223 g is cleared to "0". Next, since the variation time of the variation effect acquired based on the prize 2 is "40 seconds", "40000" is added (set) to the value of the slump effect timer 223 g at this point. Then, as the "slump effect" corresponding to the value of the slump effect timer 223 g and the residual value (that is, "1000"), the "third effect" is "development possibility effect" and the "fourth effect" is "pseudo". "Ren 1", "Pseudo-Ren 2" are additionally set in "Fifth production", and "Which da reach" is additionally set in "Sixth production".

Specifically, in the first effect area 223h1 and the second effect area 223h2 of the slump effect storage area 223h, the effect information of "Gase pseudo-ren 1" and "Gase pseudo-ren 2" and the stop symbol related to the Gase chance symbol are already present. Since the information is stored respectively, the effect of "20 seconds" has already been set at this stage. Therefore, since the period from the time of winning 2 to the end of the running "Gase pseudo-ren 2" is the same as the above residual value, the remaining "slump effect" is performed when the "Gase pseudo-ren 2" ends. The value is determined to be "39000", which is obtained by subtracting "1000" from "40,000". Therefore, based on the above determination result, the MPU 221 is, as a "slump effect" performed after the "second effect", first, in the sixth effect area 223h6 where the stop symbol is finally displayed, "10 seconds". The staging information about the staging element of "Which da reach" to be performed and the stop symbol information corresponding to the acquired variable staging are stored. Next, as the remaining "29 seconds" effect, in the fifth effect area 223h5, the effect information about the "pseudo-ren 2" performed for "10 seconds" and the next effect (that is, the effect element of "Which da reach"). ) Is stored with the stop symbol information regarding the reach formation symbol. Then, as the remaining "19 seconds" effect, the effect information regarding the "pseudo-ren 1" performed for "10 seconds" and the next effect (that is, "pseudo-ren 2") are developed in the fourth effect area 223h4. The stop symbol information about the chance symbol that suggests that is stored. Next, as the remaining "9 seconds" effect, it is suggested that the third effect area 223h3 will be developed into the next effect (that is, "pseudo-ren 1") and the effect information regarding the "development possibility effect" of the successful development. The stop symbol information related to the chance symbol is stored.

Since the effect element of the "development possibility effect" of the above-mentioned development success as the "third effect" is performed for "9 seconds", the "third development possibility effect" is performed. Then, at the end timing of the "third development possibility / disapproval effect" of the successful development, the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 is pseudo-broken, and the stop display is performed by the "second effect", the "gase pseudo-ream 2". The changed Gase Chance symbol is replaced with the Chance symbol (for example, "788" → "778". See FIGS. 46 (d) to (f)), and go to "Pseudo-ren 1" which is the "fourth production". (See Fig. 47 (c)).

Then, the "slump effect" is continuously performed based on the effect information and the stop symbol information stored in the 1st to 6th effect areas 223h1 to 223h6 of the slump effect storage area 223h, and the additional variable effect acquired. The "missing display" or "big hit display" corresponding to the stop symbol is finally stopped and displayed, and a series of "slump effects" ends (see FIGS. 46 and 47).

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the extension time of the "slump effect" in the "slump effect" executed based on the prize 1 to the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a in the "slump state". If a variable effect is acquired based on the new prize 2 to the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a during the execution of the based effect, the extended time "slump effect" based on the prize 1 is being executed. Therefore, in order to match each "slump effect" when performing an additional "slump effect" based on the prize 2, the remaining amount of the extended time acquired based on the prize 1 is temporarily stored (). (See S1422 in FIG. 39), and then the value of the slump effect timer 223 g is cleared to “0” (S1423 in FIG. 39). Then, the effect content of the "slump effect" is set again based on the fluctuation time acquired based on the prize 2. Therefore, even if a variable effect is added due to a new start prize in the middle of the "slump effect", the end timing of the acquired variable effect can be synchronized with the end timing of the entire "slump effect". , It is possible to provide a production that the player does not feel uncomfortable without causing a discrepancy in the production.

In addition, when setting an additional "slump effect", it is configured to reset each effect unit that is performed for a fixed time from the last effect in the entire "slump effect", and when it is set again. The remaining time less than one production unit is supplemented by "development possibility production", which is a production that does not cause discomfort even if the production is interrupted in the middle, and the production time is flexible (there is a range). To set. In addition, the maximum effect time of this "development possibility effect" is configured to be equal to the extendable time that can be acquired. With this configuration, in the situation where the "slump effect" that is longer than the acquired fluctuation effect is being executed, that is, during the execution of the "slump effect" based on the extended time, a new one is created in the middle of the "slump effect". Even if a variable effect is added due to the start prize, the effect time can be made consistent by the "development possibility effect" that can be executed within the width equal to or less than the extension time, and the acquired variable effect can be obtained. Since the end timing and the end timing of the entire "slump effect" can be synchronized, it is possible to provide an effect that the player does not feel uncomfortable without causing a discrepancy in the effect.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. The hold information storage area 223i is information for performing look-ahead processing, that is, the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter acquired from the counter buffer 203b in the main control device 110 in connection with the start winning and transmitted by the hold ball number command. This is an area for storing the values of C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1.

The voice lamp control device 113 uses the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold information storage area 223i and the tables 222a to 222d stored in the ROM 222 to perform a look-ahead process (hold display setting process (hold display setting process). See FIG. 38)).

The execution information storage area 223j is information for performing a variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, that is, a jackpot acquired from the counter buffer 203b in the main control device 110 with a start winning prize and transmitted by the hold ball number command. This is an area for storing the values of the random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1.

When the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation effect, the hold information storage first area (FIG. 25) of the above-mentioned hold information storage area 223i is used to execute the setting of the variation effect and the like. The information (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) for performing the variation effect stored in the reference) is shifted to the execution information storage area 223j.

Here, the details of the hold information storage area 223i and the execution information storage area 223j will be described with reference to FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configurations of the hold information storage area 223i and the execution information storage area 223j.

The execution information storage area 223j includes a jackpot random number counter storage area 223j1 in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored, a jackpot type counter storage area 223j2 in which the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored, and a value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. A stop pattern selection counter storage area 223j3 in which the value is stored and a variation type counter storage area 223j4 in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored are provided at least.

Further, the hold information storage area 223i has four areas of the hold information storage 1st to 4th areas, and each of the hold information storage 1st to 4th areas is a hit like the execution information storage area 223j. The jackpot random number counter storage area 223i1 in which the value of the random number counter C1 is stored, the jackpot type counter storage area 223i2 in which the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored, and the stop pattern selection counter in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored. At least a storage area 223i3 and a variable type counter storage area 223i4 in which the value of the variable type counter CS1 is stored are provided.

Specifically, the execution information storage area 223j is an area corresponding to the fluctuation effect currently being executed, and the reserved information storage first area is the first reserved variation effect in terms of time. The area corresponding to the effect, the reserved information storage second area is the area corresponding to the second oldest reserved variable effect in terms of time among the reserved variable effects, and the reserved information storage third area is This is the area corresponding to the 3rd oldest reserved variation effect among the reserved variation effects, and the 4th area for storing the reserved information is the 4th oldest reserved variation effect in terms of time. It is an area that corresponds to the variable production.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command from the main control device 110, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 is set from the hold ball number command. Extract. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the values of the extracted counters C1 to C3 and CS1 in the areas corresponding to the number of reserved balls included in the reserved ball number command in the reserved information storage first to fourth areas, respectively. It is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 223i1, the jackpot type counter storage area 223i2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 223i3, and the variation type counter storage area 223i4.

Specifically, if the number of reserved balls included in the reserved ball number command is X (1 ≦ X ≦ 4), the number of variable effects held at that time is X, and the reserved ball number command is used. Since the values of the included counters C1 to C3 and CS1 correspond to the Xth reserved variation effect in time among the reserved variation effects, each counter storage area in the hold information storage X area Stores the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to 223i1 to 223i4. At this time, the main control device 110 stores the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the hold ball number command in the hold X area of the hold ball storage area 203c. That is, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold X area of the main control device 110 are stored in the hold information storage X area.

Further, in the first embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 performs a look-ahead process (hold display setting process (see FIG. 38)) based on each value stored in each counter storage area 223i1 to 223i4 in the hold information storage X area. ), And the hold change information generated based on the result of this look-ahead processing is stored in the above-mentioned hold display information storage area 223e (see FIG. 19). That is, the information related to the variable effect is stored in the hold information storage area 223i and the execution information storage area 223j, and the effect information and the stop symbol information of the "slump effect" are stored in the above-mentioned slump effect storage area 223h, and the variable effect or "slump" is stored. The hold number and hold change information of the "effect" are stored in the hold display information storage area 223e.

On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command indicating the start of the fluctuation effect from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the shift process in the hold information storage area 223i and the execution information storage area 223j. That is, the reserved variable effect is reduced by one, and the execution of the first reserved variable effect in time is started. Therefore, the reserved information storage first area corresponding to the first reserved variable effect is started. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223i1 to 223i4 are moved to the storage areas 223j1 to 223j4 of the execution information storage area 223j corresponding to the variation effect currently being executed.

Further, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223i1 to 223i4 of the hold information storage second area are moved to the storage areas 223i1 to 223i4 of the hold information storage first area, and the hold information is stored. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223i1 to 223i4 of the third area are moved to the storage areas 223i1 to 223i4 of the hold information storage second area, and each of the hold information storage fourth areas. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223i1 to 223i4 are moved to the storage areas 223i1 to 223i4 in the hold information storage third area.

As a result, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d of the main control device 110 are stored in the execution information storage area 223j. Further, in the hold information storage 1st to 4th areas, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold 1st to 4th areas of the hold ball storage area 203c of the main control device 110 are stored, respectively. Will be done. That is, in the voice lamp control device 113, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the fluctuation effects being executed and held by the main control device 110 are stored in the execution information storage area 223j and the hold information storage area 223i. To.

The voice lamp control device 113 grasps the number of fluctuation effects (number of reserved balls) held from the sub-held ball number counter 223b when the look-ahead process (hold display setting process (see FIG. 38)) is performed. Then, based on the number of reserved balls, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the areas in which the variable effect is reserved in the reserved information storage 1st to 4th areas are pre-read, and the variable effect, Alternatively, it is determined whether or not a big hit is achieved in one effect unit (that is, the effect element to be executed last) in the "slump effect", the fluctuation time, and the like. For example, if the value of the sub-holding ball number counter 223b is "1", the number of holding balls for the fluctuation effect is one, so that the holding information storage first area has each of the stored counters C1 to C3 and CS1. Look ahead to the value and make a decision. Further, if the value of the sub-held ball number counter 223b is "4", the number of reserved balls in the variable effect is four times, so that the reserved information storage fourth area has each of the stored counters C1 to C3 and CS1. Look ahead to the value and make a decision.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 in only one direction, and the voice lamp control device 113 accesses RAM 203 or the like of the main control device 110. Can't. On the other hand, the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with a hold information storage area 223i, and stores the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 corresponding to the fluctuation effect held by the main control device 110 in the voice lamp control device 113 as well. Therefore, by referring to the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold information storage area 223i, the pre-reading process can be executed by the voice lamp control device 113.

That is, what will happen to the result of the variable effect or "slump effect" when the reserved variable effect or "slump effect" is executed (whether or not it will be a big hit, what will happen to the variable time, etc.). The voice lamp control device 113 can execute control related to determining the execution of various effects by making a determination before executing the variation effect or the “slump effect”.

The above-mentioned shift processing in the hold information storage area 223i and the execution information storage area 223j is updated based on the number of held balls when the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are received (the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are received. Data is moved (shifted) only in the areas corresponding to the reserved variable effect among the reserved information storage 1st to 4th areas (value of the sub-held ball count counter 223b) before the data is stored.

For example, the value of the sub-holding ball count counter 223b before the update when the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are received is "4", and the entire area of the hold information storage area 223i (hold information storage first to fourth areas). ) Suppose that the data is stored. In this case, the data in the hold information storage first area is shifted to the execution information storage area 223j, the data in the hold information storage second area is shifted to the hold information storage first area, and the data in the hold information storage third area is held. It shifts to the information storage second area, and shifts the data in the hold information storage fourth area to the hold information storage third area.

On the other hand, if the value of the sub-holding ball count counter 223b before the update when the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are received is "2", the data in the hold information storage first area is shifted to the execution information storage area 223j. , The data in the hold information storage second area is shifted to the hold information storage first area, and the data shift is completed. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the data shift processing is not performed for the hold information storage third and fourth areas where the fluctuation effect is not held, the number of data shifts can be reduced. The control burden can be reduced.

Regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the reserved information storage 1st to 4th areas is shifted to an area having an area number smaller by 1 (execution information storage area 223j or reserved information storage 1st to 3rd areas). It may be configured as follows. In that case, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the data is stored (held) in each of the reserved information storage first to fourth areas, so that the program can be easily created.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. The staging conversion flag 223k is a flag for changing 1 "Gase pseudo-ream" staging in "slump staging" to a staging element of "development possibility staging" in the on state. In the first embodiment, when a series of "slump effects" are performed, when the ball is not held in the holding device 73, the ball is not won in the dummy winning opening 75 and the holding symbol which is the dummy holding display is not displayed. .. For this reason, if the "slump effect" including the "gase pseudo-ren" effect that digests the reserved symbol of 1 is executed as it is, the number of effects in the "slump effect" and the number of reserved symbols cannot be matched. .. Therefore, when the dummy winning opening 75 is not allowed to win the ball based on the fact that the ball is not held in the holding device 73, the "Gase pseudo-ren" effect, which is a "slump effect" that digests one reserved symbol, is suspended. It is configured to execute a series of "slump effects" by converting them into the effect elements of "development possibility effect" that do not digest the design.

This effect conversion flag 223k is set to off as an initial value when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Then, when a hold rank-up command for raising the display mode of the hold symbol or the execution symbol by one rank is received from the main control device 110, that is, the start prize in the "slump state" (the previous start prize (win 1), and the start prize 1). (Including any of the later starting prizes (winning 2)), when the fluctuation pattern of the variation effect based on the starting prize includes "reach display", or when the ball is not held by the holding device 73. , This effect conversion flag 223k is set to ON (see S1205 in FIG. 37).

On the other hand, the effect conversion flag 223k is configured to be set to off after setting the effect content in the “slump effect” in the variation setting process (see FIG. 39) (see S1418 in FIG. 39).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the effect content of the "slump effect" is set based on the start prize in the "slump state", the effect conversion flag 223k is set to on, and the start is performed. When the variation pattern of the variation effect acquired based on the prize does not include the "reach display", the effect information of 1 "Gase pseudo-ren" effect set in the slump effect storage area 223h can be "developed". It is configured to be converted into the staging information of the staging element of "staging". With this configuration, the number of effects (number of production units) of the "slump effect" and the number of reserved symbols can be matched, and it is possible to provide an effect that the player does not feel uncomfortable. can.

The effect conversion flag 223k is turned on when the ball is not held in the holding device 73, and is output when the variation pattern of the acquired variation effect includes "reach display". Since it is set to ON even when a command is received (see S1205 in FIG. 37), it is initialized every time the effect content of "slump effect" is set regardless of whether "reach display" is included or not. That is, it is configured to be turned off). Specifically, in the variation setting process (see FIG. 39), when the acquired variation pattern of the variation effect includes the "reach display", the "gase pseudo-ream" effect is not executed in the "slump effect". Even if there is, or even if the acquired variation pattern of the variation effect does not include the "reach display" and the "gase pseudo-ream" effect is executed, the "slump effect" is used. It is configured to be set to off after setting the effect content of "(see 1418 in FIG. 39). With this configuration, even when a new start prize (that is, prize 2) occurs during the execution of the "slump effect" and the content of the "slump effect" is additionally changed (updated). Since the setting content of the effect conversion flag 223k is initialized at that timing, when the effect content based on the new start prize (that is, prize 2) is reset, the previous start prize (that is, prize 1) is used. Consistent production settings are possible without being affected by the settings of the "slump effect" based on it.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed.

The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read / written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 37) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is analyzed, and processing according to the command (for example, setting of a command for the display control device 114) is performed.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variation effect related to the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 and "" It controls the "slump effect" or the "pending change notice" in the reserved symbol and the executed symbol.

The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a program ROM 232, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. ing.

A voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input port 238, and the display control device 114 indicates a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 determined by the voice lamp control device 113 via the input port 238. The command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. The MPU 231, the program ROM 232, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are also connected to the input port 238 via the bus line 240. A video RAM 236 is connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is another model in which the lottery probability of the jackpot and the number of prize balls to be paid out in one jackpot are different, the pachinko machine 10 has the same specifications as the symbol configuration displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce the cost.

The MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the command input from the voice lamp control device 113. The program ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231. The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231.

The character ROM 234 includes a character storage area (not shown) in which image data of each sprite such as a symbol (background symbol or decorative symbol) displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is stored. In the character storage area, the above image data is stored as compressed data in order to reduce the amount of data to be stored. In the first embodiment, the image data before compression is composed of about 1024 megabytes, and the image data of about 1024 megabytes is compressed to about 768 megabytes and stored in the character storage area.

The video RAM 236 is a memory having two frames of a frame buffer area for storing an image for one frame displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The image controller 237 generates image data for one frame according to the drawing list and writes it in one frame buffer area of the video RAM 236, and also writes the image data for one frame written in the other frame buffer area of the video RAM 236. Is read out, and the read image data is output to the third symbol display device 81 via the output port 239, so that a plurality of frame images are continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The image controller 237 reads the image data (compressed format image data) of the sprite specified in the drawing list from the character storage area (not shown) according to the order described in the drawing list, and decompresses the image data (not shown). After (expanding), processing is performed according to the drawing information specified in the drawing list, and the image data of the sprite is written in one frame buffer area of the video RAM 236 at the display position coordinates specified in the drawing list. By decompressing, processing, and writing image data for all sprites specified in the drawing list, image data to be displayed in one frame is generated.

Writing one frame of image data to one frame buffer area and reading one frame of image data from the other frame buffer area are performed in parallel, both of which are completed in "20 milliseconds". do. Then, when the reading of the image data for one frame from the other frame buffer area is completed, the image data for one frame previously written from the one frame buffer area is subsequently read, and the other is in the meantime. Image data for the next frame is written to the frame buffer area of.

In this way, by alternately writing image data and reading image data in one frame buffer area and the other frame buffer area, a plurality of frame images are continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It can be displayed.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 26 to 34. The processes of the MPU 201 are roughly classified into a start-up process (see FIG. 33) that is started when the power is turned on, a main process (see FIG. 34) that is executed after the start-up process, and a periodic (first embodiment). Then, there is a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26) that is activated in a cycle of 4 milliseconds) and an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 32) that is activated by inputting the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. Here, for convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the start-up process and the main process will be described.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process that is repeatedly executed every 4 milliseconds. By executing this timer interrupt process by the MPU 201, various processes to be executed periodically are performed.

In this timer interrupt process, first, an external output process is executed (S101). In the timer interrupt process and the main process, commands to be transmitted to the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, etc. are generated based on various processes, and are temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. .. In the external output process of S101, output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer is transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side.

For example, the hold ball number command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 27) described later is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, the confirmation command, etc. set in the variation processing (see FIG. 28) and the variation start processing (FIG. 29), which is one process of the variation processing, are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, a ball launch signal set when firing a ball in the launch control process (see S110 in FIG. 26) described later is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S102), and then the jackpot process for executing the process at the time of the jackpot of the first symbol (third symbol) is executed (S103). ..

Next, the second symbol control process for executing the process related to the variable display of the second symbol and the drive control of the electric accessory 79 is executed (S104). Briefly, the second symbol is variablely displayed by the second symbol display device 83 on the condition that the ball has passed through the second entry port 67, and as a result of the variable display of the second symbol, the second symbol is displayed. When the hit symbol (for example, the “◯” symbol) appears and the hit state is reached, the electric accessory 79 is openly driven for a predetermined time.

Next, the reading process of various winning switches is executed (S105). That is, the states of the various switches 208 and 73g connected to the main control device 110 are read, and the states of the switches 208 and 73g are determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. Further, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 based on the prize detection information is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. As a result, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process executed next. Further, after recognizing whether or not the ball is held in the holding device 73 based on the detection information of the holding ball detection switch 73g, the start winning process (S108) and the holding device control process (S111) described later are performed. Run.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S106). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (“899” in the first embodiment), it is cleared to “0”. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203b area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (“99” in the first embodiment), it is cleared to “0” and the second initial value is cleared. The updated value of the random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203b area of the RAM 203.

Further, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 and the hit random number counter C4 are updated (S107). Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 and the hit random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the first embodiment). , "899", "99", "99", "199", "99", respectively), clear to "0" respectively. When the jackpot random number counter C1 or the hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is used as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the hit random number counter C4. It is read as a value, and the initial value is set in the jackpot random number counter C1 or the hit random number counter C4. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203b area of the RAM 203.

Next, the start winning process associated with winning the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a is executed (S108). The details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG. 27.

After the start winning process (S108) is executed, a process for dynamically displaying the first symbol by the first symbol display device 37 or a third symbol display device based on the processing content of the start winning process (S108) is performed. A variation process for setting a variation effect of the third symbol according to 81 or a variation pattern (effect pattern) of the “slump effect” is executed (S109). The details of the variation processing (S109) will be described later with reference to FIG. 28.

After executing the variation processing (S109), the firing control processing is executed (S110). This launch control process (S110) detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and the ball is not operated on the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process to determine the on / off of the firing of. Then, when the ball launch is on, the information of the ball launch signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 in order to transmit the ball launch signal to the launch control device 112. As a result, the ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process executed next.

After executing the launch control process (S110), the hold device control process is executed (S111). In the hold device control process, a process of whether or not to release (release) the ball held in the hold device 73 is performed based on the setting content of the hold device drive flag 203f and the value of the hold device drive timer 203g. Will be. The details of the holding device control process (S111) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After executing the holding device control process (S111), the dummy winning process is executed (S112). In the dummy winning process, a prize ball command is set for the payout control device 111 and a dummy hold command is set for the voice lamp control device 113 according to whether or not a ball has won a prize in the dummy winning opening 75. The details of the dummy winning process (S112) will be described later with reference to FIG. 31.

After the dummy winning process (S112) is executed, other processes that should be executed periodically are further executed (S113), and the timer interrupt process is terminated.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 27, a start winning process (S108), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S108). The start winning process determines whether or not a ball has won a prize in the special drawing winning openings 77a and 78a, and if there is a winning, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the reserved ball storage area 203c (holding). ) Execute the process. Further, a process for transmitting the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be held together with the number of held balls to the voice lamp control device 113 is executed.

In this start winning process (S108), the MPU 201 first determines whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a (S201). Here, the special figure entry port switch (not shown) for detecting the entry (winning) into the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a read in the switch reading process of the timer interrupt process (see S105 in FIG. 26). Based on the output signal of, the ball entering the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a is detected over three timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 26).

When it is determined that the ball has won a prize in the special drawing winning openings 77a and 78a (there was a starting prize) (S201: Yes), the three prize balls instructing the payout control device 111 to pay out three prize balls. A command is set (S202), and the process shifts to S203. The three prize ball commands set in the process of S202 are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and are executed next in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S101 in FIG. 26). Inside, it is transmitted toward the payout control device 111.

The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured so that the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a and the dummy winning openings 75 have the same number of prize balls. With this configuration, the player cannot determine whether the prizes have been won in the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a or the dummy winning openings 75 based only on the number of prize balls paid out. Therefore, the player decides whether the effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 is a variable effect in the "normal state" based only on the number of prize balls paid out, or the "slump effect" in the "slump state". Because it is not possible to determine whether it is, even if the "slump effect" that is performed longer than the fluctuation time of the actual variation effect is performed, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable and awakening to the game. can do.

In the process of S203, the value of the hold ball number counter 203a (the number of operation hold balls N of the dynamic display of the first symbol held in the main control device 110 (variation effect of the third symbol)) is the upper limit value (first). In the embodiment, it is determined whether or not it is less than "4") (S203). Then, even if there is a prize in the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a, if the number of balls on hold for operation is not N <(S203: No), this start winning process (S108) is terminated and the timer interrupt process (FIG. 26). See).

On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls N <4 (S203: Yes), the value of the number of reserved balls counter 203a (number of reserved balls N) is added by 1 (S204). Then, the process shifts to S205.

In the process of S205, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are read from the counter buffer 203b (see FIG. 8) and provided in the reserved ball storage area 203c. Among the reserved 1st to 4th areas, the jackpot random number counter storage area 203c1, the jackpot type counter storage area 203c2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3, and the variable type counter storage in the area corresponding to the value indicated by the hold ball number counter 203a. Each is reserved (stored) in the area 203c4 (S205).

Specifically, for example, if the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a after addition by the processing of S204 based on the winning of the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a is "1", each storage area of the reserved first area. The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in 203c1 to 203c4, respectively. If the value of the reserved ball counter 203a after addition is "2", the storage areas 203c1 to 203c4 in the second area are reserved, and if the value of the reserved ball counter 203a after addition is "3", the storage area 203c1 to 203c4 is reserved. If the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a after addition is "4" in each of the storage areas 203c1 to 203c4 of the third area, the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the storage areas 203c1 to 203c4 of the reserved fourth area, respectively. The value is reserved.

Next, the value of the hold ball number counter 203a (number of operation hold balls N) after the addition by the processing of S204, the jackpot random number counter C1 stored (held) in the hold ball storage area 203c by the processing of S205, and the jackpot type counter C2. , In order to transmit the hold ball number command including the respective values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1 to the voice lamp control device 113, the hold ball number command is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. (S206). As a result, the hold ball number command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process of S101 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26) to be executed next.

As the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the reserved ball number command in the processing of S206, the values themselves read from the counter buffer 203b in the processing of S205 may be used, or the reserved balls are stored in the processing of S205. The value stored (held) in the area 203c may be read out and used.

After the execution of the process of S206, it is determined whether or not the start winning prize is the starting winning prize in the "slump state", that is, whether or not the value of the main slump counter 203e is larger than "0" (S207). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the value of the main slump counter 203e is not a value larger than "0" (S207: No), that is, when the value of the main slump counter 203e is "0", the start winning prize is given. Is not a starting prize in the "slump state", but a starting prize in the "normal state". Therefore, since it is not necessary to perform control related to the "slump effect" based on the start winning prize, the start winning process (S108) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26).

On the other hand, in the process of S207, when the value of the main slump counter 203e is determined to be a value larger than "0" (S207: Yes), the starting prize is the starting prize in the "slump state", so that the "slump" is used. The process shifts to S208 in order to perform control related to "staging".

In the process of S208, first, 1 is subtracted from the value of the main slump counter 203e (S208), and then it is determined whether or not the hold ball detection switch 73g is turned on (S209). As a result of the determination, if the hold ball detection switch 73g is turned on (S209: Yes), since the ball is held in the hold device 73, the hold symbol consistent with the "slump effect" is displayed next. Therefore, in order to determine whether or not the variable pattern is such that the reserved ball is won in the dummy winning opening 75, the process is shifted to S210.

In the process of S210, whether or not the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect acquired based on the start winning is included in the "reach display", that is, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the stop pattern counter acquired this time. It is determined whether or not the variation effect selected based on the values of C3 and the variation type counter CS1 is a "normal reach" effect mode, a "super reach" effect mode, a "special reach" effect mode, or a "special variation" effect mode. (S210).

As a result of the determination, if the variation pattern does not include the "reach display" (S210: No), each effect unit of the series of "slump effects" to be executed from now on is based on the number of times the acquired variation effect is executed (the number of reserved symbols). Since the "Gase pseudo-ream" effect is executed one more time (that is, twice), the holding device drive flag 203f is set to ON and the holding device drive flag 203f is held (S211) in order to make the display of the holding symbol consistent. “1500” is set in the value of the device drive timer 203g (S212), and the start winning process (S108) is completed. With this configuration, the ball held in the holding device 73 can flow into the dummy winning opening 75, and the holding symbol, which is a dummy holding display, can be displayed, and the effect unit in a series of "slump effects" can be displayed. It is possible to make the number of effects and the number of reserved symbols consistent. After the start winning process is completed, the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26).

If the hold ball detection switch 73g is not turned on (S209: No) in the process of S209, since the ball is not held in the hold device 73, there is no ball to flow into the dummy winning opening 75. The process of S210 to S212 is not performed, the hold rank up command is set (S213), and the start winning process (S108) is terminated.

In addition, in the processing of S210, if the fluctuation pattern includes "reach display" (S210: Yes), "pseudo-ream" that does not digest the reserved symbol is performed in "slump effect", and "whichever reach" is performed. Since the effect element is executed, in this case as well, the processing of S211 and S212 is not performed, and the subsequent game state is returned to the "normal state" and the "slump effect" is set based on the additional start prize. The value of the main slump counter 203e is cleared to "0" so as not to be performed (S214). Then, as in the case where the ball is not held in the holding device 73, the holding rank-up command is set (S213), and the start winning process (S108) is terminated.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, if the voice lamp control device 113 that has received the hold rank-up command has a variation pattern including "reach display", the number of "slump effect" effects and the number of hold symbols are displayed. Since they match, the "slump effect" is executed with the initially set effect content. On the other hand, if the variation pattern does not include the "reach display", the number of "slump effect" effects and the number of reserved symbols displayed do not match. It is configured to execute a series of "slump effects" by changing the "Gase pseudo-ren" effect to the effect element of "development possibility effect" that does not digest the reserved symbol of 1. By configuring in this way, the number of effects of the "slump effect" and the number of displayed symbols can be matched, and even if the "slump effect" is performed longer than the actual fluctuation time, the player feels uncomfortable. It is possible to provide no production.

Next, with reference to FIG. 28, a variation process (S109), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this variation processing. This variation processing controls the dynamic display in the first symbol display device 37 and the variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81, and when the variation effect is not performed in the third symbol display device 81, the variation effect is performed. The demo display is set and the "slump state" is set.

In this fluctuation processing (S109), the MPU 201 first determines whether or not the jackpot is currently being hit (S301). The jackpot includes the middle of the jackpot game displayed by the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the jackpot, and the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is completed. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot is in progress (S301: Yes), the variation processing is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 26).

If it is not a big hit (S301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is in the dynamic display (S302), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is dynamically displayed. If it is not in the middle (S302: No), then it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after the dynamic display on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (S303). As a result, if a predetermined time has not elapsed after the dynamic display is stopped (S303: No), the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26). As a result, the stop symbol in the dynamic display (variation effect) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined time, so that the player can visually recognize the stop symbol. can.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S303, if a predetermined time has elapsed after the dynamic display is stopped (S303: Yes), the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (movement of the first symbol suspended in the main control device 110). It is determined whether or not the operation holding ball number N) of the target display (variation effect) is larger than "0" (S304). As a result, if the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a is not "0" (S304: Yes), it is determined that it is the execution start timing of the dynamic display of the first symbol (variation effect of the third symbol). The value of the reserved ball number counter 203a is subtracted by 1 (S305). This is because the variable start processing (S307), which will be described later, starts the execution of the dynamic display (variable effect) of one of the reserved dynamic display of the first symbol (variable effect of the third symbol). This is because the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of the first symbol is reduced by one.

Next, the data stored in the reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S306). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the hold 1st to 4th areas of the hold ball storage area 203c toward the hold ball execution area 203d, and is a process of sequentially shifting the hold ball execution area 203d from the hold first area to the hold ball execution. The data in each area is shifted such as area 203d, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on.

After the data shift processing of S306, the fluctuation start processing for the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is executed based on the values of various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d by the data shift processing. (S307), the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26). The fluctuation start processing (S307) will be described later with reference to FIG. 29.

In the process of S304, when it is determined that the value of the hold ball number counter 203a (operation hold ball number N) is "0" (S304: No), a demonstration effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81. It is determined whether or not it is in a state, that is, whether or not it is being demoed (S308). In this determination process, after the demo command is transmitted to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113, until the value of the hold ball number counter 203a (operation hold ball number N) is determined to be larger than "0". It is determined that the interval is being demonstrated.

If it is determined that the demo is not in progress (S308: No), a demo command to be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S309), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26).

The demo command set in the process of S309 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed next in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S101 in FIG. 26). It is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the demo command, the display control device 113 transmits the display demo command to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 demos to the third symbol display device 81 based on the reception of the display demo command. Control to display the effect.

Here, the demo command is set when, as described above, there is no reserved ball when a predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation has stopped. Therefore, if the fluctuation effect is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the variation is stopped, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

If it is determined in the process of S308 that the demonstration is not in progress (S308: No), a process of determining whether or not a second predetermined time longer than the predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation is stopped is further performed. The demo command may be set by executing the process of S309 when the second predetermined time has elapsed after the execution and the fluctuation stop. As a result, if there is no reserved ball after the fluctuation is stopped, the player can see the stopped symbol of the stopped fluctuation effect for a relatively long time without starting the demonstration effect immediately.

On the other hand, in the process of S308, when it is determined that the demonstration is in progress (S308: Yes), then, after the demonstration is in progress, the maximum extension time (that is, the maximum extension time) selected in the "slump effect" is selected. , "10 seconds" after entering the demo period) is determined (S310). As a result of the determination, if the maximum extension time has elapsed (S310: Yes), the value of the main slump counter 203e is set to "2" in order to set the gaming state from the "normal state" to the "slump state". (S311). Here, by setting the value of the main slump counter 203e to "2", it becomes possible to recognize whether or not the "slump state" is present at the timing of the subsequent start winning. Then, in order to notify the voice lamp control device 113 that the "slump state" has been entered, a slump command to be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S312), and the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26) is performed. return. Since the voice lamp control device 113 can recognize the occurrence of the "slump state" by receiving the demo command, the voice lamp control device 113 may be configured not to set the slump command itself.

The slump command set in the process of S312 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed next in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S101 in FIG. 26). It is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113.

Upon receiving the slump command, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the sub-slump flag 223f to ON, and while the sub-slump flag 223f is set to ON, the voice lamp control device 113 also responds to the "slump state". Processing is possible.

On the other hand, in the processing of S310, if it is determined that the maximum extension time has not elapsed since the demonstration entered (S310: No), the processing of S311 and S312 is skipped and the "slump state" is set. This variation processing (S109) is terminated without performing.

This is because, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the series of "slump effects" is during the maximum extension time acquired after entering the demonstration period after the end of the fluctuation that triggered the execution of the "slump effects" ( That is, it is configured to be executed for a maximum of "10 seconds"). Therefore, of the series of "slump effects", a new "slump effect" is set as a "slump state" during the execution of the "slump effect" based on the extended time, that is, at the timing when a new start prize is generated during the demonstration period. When the setting process of "" is performed, the setting process for obtaining the consistency with the "slump effect" being executed is required, and the setting process for obtaining the consistency may become complicated.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, once the "slump effect" is started, the main control device 110 side again changes the "slump state" until the extension time in the "slump effect" ends. Change to the "slump state" when a series of "slump effects" is completed without making any settings. That is, while the series of "slump effects" are being executed, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effects has elapsed, and even if the demo effects are internally in the state, the change to the "slump state" is performed for a while. Is waiting. Therefore, in the main control device 110, a series of "slump effects" are completed, and then the "slump state" is set and the "slump effect" is set again. Therefore, the "slump state" and the "slump state" are set. It is not necessary to perform complicated control regarding the consistency with the "staging", and the processing load of the main control device 110 can be reduced even when the "slump staging" is performed.

Next, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is being dynamically displayed (S302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the dynamic display time (variable time) has elapsed. (S313). The display time during the dynamic display of the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this dynamic display is performed. If the time (variable time) has not elapsed (S313: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S314), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26).

In the first embodiment, in the 7-segment display 37b of the first symbol display device 37, for example, the central segment of the 7-segment display 37b blinks from the start of the dynamic display until the fluctuation time elapses. The display mode to be displayed is set.

On the other hand, if the dynamic display time (variable time) of the dynamic display in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S313: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol for the first symbol display device 37. Is set (S315). The stop symbol is preset by the fluctuation start process (S307) described later with reference to FIG. 29. In the fluctuation start processing, whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is determined according to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d by the processing of S306, and if it is a jackpot, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 determines. After the jackpot, it is determined whether the symbol is "15R probability variation jackpot", "15R normal jackpot", or "2R probability variation jackpot".

In the first embodiment, when the "15R probability variation jackpot" is obtained after the jackpot, the symbol "7" is displayed on the 7-segment display 37b, and when the "15R normal jackpot" is reached, the 7-segment display 37b is displayed. In, the symbol of "3" is displayed, and when it becomes "2R probability variation jackpot", the symbol of "5" is displayed on the 7-segment display 37b. Further, in the case of loss, only the central segment of the 7-segment display 37b is displayed (that is, "-").

When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S315, the stop symbol of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 is set to the 7-segment display 37b in the first symbol display device 37. In order to display the confirmation in synchronization with the display of, a confirmation command is set (S316), and this variation processing (S109) is terminated. The confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variation effect being executed by the third symbol display device 81.

Upon receiving this confirmation command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits a display confirmation command to the display control device 114 at the end timing of the "normal state" or the "slump effect", and executes the "slump effect". If the timing is in the middle (that is, the "Gase pseudo-ream 2" is being executed), the first display stop command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

The display control device 114 is configured to stop the variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 and display the stopped symbol in a definite manner by receiving the display confirmation command. On the other hand, by receiving the first stop command for display, the left symbol column Z1 of the "slump effect" of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is stopped, and the "slump effect" is being performed by the stop. It is configured to suggest the end of the variable staging in. In this way, by relating the end of the variable effect to the effect content of the "slump effect", it is possible to make the player recognize the end of the variable effect even while the "slump effect" is being executed. Will be.

Next, with reference to FIG. 29, a variation start process (S307), which is a process of the variation process (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start processing (S307).

This fluctuation start processing (S307) performs a big hit or loss lottery (big hit lottery) based on the values of various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d, and also performs a dynamic display performed by the first symbol display device 37. The dynamic pattern and stop type of the above, and the fluctuation pattern and stop type of the fluctuation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 are determined.

In this fluctuation start processing (S307), the MPU 201 first determines whether or not it is a jackpot based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d and the jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 9A). A jackpot lottery (win / fail determination) process for determining whether or not is performed (S401).

Whether or not it is a jackpot is determined based on the relationship between the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the mode at that time. As described above, in the jackpot random number table 202a, when the possible gaming state (mode) of the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal low probability state (“normal gaming state” or “time shortening state”), “7,307”. , 582 ”is defined as a jackpot random number value. Further, when the gaming state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is in a high probability state (“probability fluctuation state”), “28,122,298,390,486,567,656,750,866” is a big hit. It is defined as a random value.

In the process of S401, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d is compared with the jackpot random number value defined in these jackpot random number tables 202a, and when they match, the jackpot is hit. It is determined that it is. When it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot as a result of the processing of S401 (S401: Yes), the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d and the jackpot type table 202b (see FIG. 9B). Based on the above, the display mode (type of jackpot) at the time of jackpot is set (S402).

In this process, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d by the jackpot type table 202b, that is, the “probability fluctuation state” after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds. "15R probability variation jackpot" that shifts to "15R probability change jackpot", "15R normal jackpot" that shifts to "time reduction state" after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, or "probability fluctuation state" after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds It is determined whether or not the "2R probability variation jackpot" to be transferred. Then, based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode (lighting state of the light emitting diode 37a) at the time of jackpot in the first symbol display device 37 is set.

Further, in the third symbol display device 81, as a display result of the fluctuation effect or the "slump effect", the jackpot type ("15R probability variation jackpot", "2R probability variation jackpot") is used to stop and display various jackpot symbols corresponding to the jackpot type. , "15R Normal jackpot") is set as the stop type as it is, so that the display mode at the time of jackpot in the third symbol display device 81 is set.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S403), and the process proceeds to S406. Specifically, in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the display mode (stop type) at the time of a big hit and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d are set. The effect mode is selected based on the effect mode, and the variation time of the variation effect is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d from the selected effect mode. In determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of the jackpot, first, the stop pattern table 202d (see FIG. 11 or FIG. 12) to be used is selected according to the stop type of the jackpot.

When "15R probability variation jackpot" or "15R normal jackpot" is set as the jackpot type in the processing of S402, it is stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d in the selected stop pattern table 202d (D table 202d4). The effect mode associated with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is selected. That is, in this case, one of the "normal reach" effect mode, the "super reach" effect mode, and the "special reach" effect mode is selected (see FIG. 12A).

Specifically, when the "normal reach" effect mode is set as the effect mode, it is stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d in the "E6: normal reach" group of the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 (see FIG. 14). The variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected. That is, in this case, "20 seconds" "" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+" low-speed fluctuation "+" normal reach "", "25 seconds" "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "low-speed fluctuation" + "normal reach" "+" Re-variation "", "30 seconds" "" High-speed fluctuation (long) "+" Pseudo-variation "+" High-speed fluctuation (short) "+" Pseudo-variation "+" Normal reach "", or "35 seconds" "High-speed fluctuation (long)" + "pseudo-variation" + "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + "pseudo-variation" + "normal reach" + "re-variation" "variation pattern is selected (see Fig. 14). .. Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time defined in advance (see FIG. 14).

When the "super reach" effect mode is set as the effect mode, it is stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d in the "E7: super reach" group of the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 (see FIG. 14). The variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected. That is, in this case, "30 seconds" "" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+" low-speed fluctuation "+" super reach "", "35 seconds" "" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+" low-speed fluctuation "+" "Super Reach", "40 seconds" "" High-speed fluctuation (long) "+" Pseudo-variation "+" High-speed fluctuation (short) "+" Pseudo-variation "+" Super reach "", or "45 seconds" The fluctuation pattern of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "pseudo-variation" + "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + "pseudo-variation" + "super reach" + "re-variation" is selected (see FIG. 14). Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time defined in advance (see FIG. 14).

When the "special reach" effect mode is set as the effect mode, it is stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d in the "E8: special reach" group of the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2 (see FIG. 14). The variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 is selected. That is, in this case, "40 seconds" "" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+" low-speed fluctuation "+" special reach "", "45 seconds" "" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+" low-speed fluctuation "+" "Special Reach", "50 seconds" "" High-speed fluctuation (long) "+" Pseudo-variation "+" High-speed fluctuation (short) "+" Pseudo-variation "+" Special reach "", or "55 seconds" The fluctuation pattern of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "pseudo-variation" + "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + "pseudo-variation" + "special reach" + "re-variation" is selected (see FIG. 14). Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time defined in advance (see FIG. 14).

Further, when "2R probability variation jackpot" is set as the jackpot type in the processing of S402, the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d in the selected stop pattern table 202d (E table 202d5). Select the effect mode associated with the value. That is, when the "2R probability variation jackpot" is won, the "special variation" effect mode is selected without exception. Then, with reference to the selected effect mode and the jackpot variation pattern table 202e2, the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d is selected. In the first embodiment, in this case, only the "movie" is selected (see FIG. 14). Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time defined in advance (see FIG. 14).

On the other hand, if it is determined by the process of S401 that it is not a big hit (S401: No), the display mode at the time of loss is set (S404). In the process of S404, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the lost symbol, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the hold ball number counter 203a stored in the hold ball execution area 203d. As the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the value of and the current gaming state, a "non-reach (long)" effect mode, a "non-reach (middle)" effect mode, and a "non-reach (short)" effect mode are displayed. ) ”Direction mode,“ Normal reach ”production mode,“ Super reach ”production mode, or“ Special reach ”production mode is set. In the first embodiment, as described above, each effect depends on whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a “probability fluctuation state”, a “time shortening state”, or a “normal gaming state”. The stop pattern table 202d (A table 202d1, B table 202d2, or C table 202d3) is set so that the range of values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the embodiment is different.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss is determined (S405), and the process proceeds to S406. Specifically, in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the fluctuation time until the stop display is performed with the lost symbol is determined. At this time, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the "normal gaming state", the A table 202d1, the B table 202d2, or the B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d corresponding to the number of reserved balls indicated by the reserved ball number counter 203a at that time. One of the C tables 202d3 (see FIGS. 11 (a) to 11 (c)) is selected. When the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the "time reduction state" or the "probability fluctuation state", the B table 202d2 of the stop pattern table 202d corresponding to the number of reserved balls indicated by the reserved ball number counter 203a at that time. Alternatively, either C table 202d3 (see FIG. 11 (b) or FIG. 11 (c)) is selected.

When the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is set as the effect mode in the processing of S404, the reserved ball execution area 203d is set in the "E0: non-reach (long)" group of the loss variation pattern table 202e1. The variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in is selected. That is, in this case, only "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "low-speed fluctuation" of "15 seconds" is selected, and other fluctuation patterns are not selected (see FIG. 13). Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time defined in advance (see FIG. 13).

Further, when the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode is set as the effect mode in the processing of S404, the reserved ball execution area 203d is set in the "E1: non-reach (middle)" group of the loss variation pattern table 202e1. The variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in is selected. That is, in this case, only "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + "low-speed fluctuation" of "10 seconds" is selected, and other fluctuation patterns are not selected (see FIG. 13). Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time defined in advance (see FIG. 13).

Further, when the “non-reach (short)” effect mode is set as the effect mode in the processing of S404, the reserved ball execution area 203d is set in the “E2: non-reach (short)” group of the loss variation pattern table 202e1. The variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in is selected. That is, in this case, only "high-speed fluctuation (short)" of "5 seconds" is selected, and other fluctuation patterns are not selected (see FIG. 13). Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time defined in advance (see FIG. 13).

When the "normal reach" effect mode is set as the effect mode, the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d in the "E3: normal reach" group of the loss pattern table 202e1 (see FIG. 13). Select the variation pattern associated with the value of. That is, in this case, "20 seconds" "" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+" low-speed fluctuation "+" normal reach "" or "30 seconds" "" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+" pseudo-variation "+ The fluctuation pattern of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + "pseudo fluctuation" + "normal reach" is selected (see FIG. 13). Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time defined in advance (see FIG. 13).

When the "super reach" effect mode is set as the effect mode, the variation type stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d in the "E4: super reach" group of the loss pattern table 202e1 (see FIG. 13). The fluctuation pattern associated with the value of the counter CS1 is selected. That is, in this case, "30 seconds" "" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+" low-speed fluctuation "+" super reach "" or "40 seconds" "" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+" pseudo-variation " + "High-speed fluctuation (short)" + "Super reach" "variation pattern is selected (see FIG. 13). Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time defined in advance (see FIG. 13).

When the "special reach" effect mode is set as the effect mode, the variation type stored in the reserved ball execution area 203d in the "E5: special reach" group of the loss pattern table 202e1 (see FIG. 13). The fluctuation pattern associated with the value of the counter CS1 is selected. That is, in this case, "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "low-speed fluctuation" + "special reach" of "40 seconds" or "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "pseudo-variation" of "50 seconds". + "High-speed fluctuation (short)" + "Special reach" "variation pattern is selected (see FIG. 13). Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time defined in advance (see FIG. 13).

In this way, the effect mode and variation pattern setting process at the time of big hit and the effect mode and variation pattern setting process at the time of loss are determined and determined by the same determination program using the same random number values C3 and CS1. Therefore, the program can be standardized and the development man-hours at the time of development can be reduced.

Next, in the process of S406, a variation pattern command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern is set based on the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined by the processes of S403 and S405. (S406). Specifically, for example, a jackpot lottery is won, the jackpot is a "15R probability variation jackpot", and a fluctuation pattern of a "super reach" production mode of "30 seconds" (that is, "high-speed fluctuation (long)" ) ”+“ Low speed fluctuation ”+“ Super reach ”)”), a fluctuation pattern command indicating “super reach” of jackpot, “15R probability variation jackpot”, and “30 seconds” is set. In addition, if the jackpot lottery is lost and a variation pattern of the "super reach" production mode of "30 seconds" is selected, a variation pattern command indicating the loss and "super reach" of "30 seconds" is set. Will be done.

In this way, even if the variation effect has the same variation time, by setting the variation pattern command together with the propriety of the variation effect and the content of the rough variation pattern, the voice lamp control device 113 can perform the effect mode including the result. It is possible to grasp the content and the fluctuation time of the above, and to determine the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect or the “slump effect” in detail based on the information.

Further, a stop type command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the stop type set in the processing of S402 or S404 is set (S407), and the process returns to the variation processing (see FIG. 28).

Specifically, for example, if a jackpot is won and the content of the jackpot is "15R probability variation jackpot", the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "7" symbol, etc.) is not specified. Set a stop type command indicating that it is a "15R probability change jackpot". If the jackpot is won and the content of the jackpot is "15R normal jackpot", the "15R normal jackpot" is not specified and the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "4" symbol etc.) is not specified. Set the stop type command indicating that.

On the other hand, if the jackpot is not won and the "super reach" effect mode is selected, the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "787") is not specified, and the "super reach" effect mode is not specified. A stop type command is set to indicate that the "super reach" effect mode (so-called front-back loss). Further, if the jackpot is not won and the "normal reach" effect mode is selected, the "normal reach" mode at the time of loss is not specified without specifying the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "737"). A stop type command indicating that the mode is an effect mode (so-called loss other than front and back) is set. Further, if the jackpot is not won and the "non-reach" effect mode is selected, the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "258") is not specified, and the "non-reach" effect mode is "" at the time of loss. A stop type command indicating that the mode is "non-reach" effect mode (so-called complete loss) is set.

In this way, by setting a rough stop type based on the success or failure of the variation effect in the stop type command, the voice lamp control device 113 (display control device 114) grasps the stop type based on the success or failure and makes them. The details can be determined based on the information of the above, and the stop result of the variable effect or the "slump effect" can be determined.

These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are executed in the timer interrupt process (see S101 in FIG. 26) to be executed next. It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command or the stop type command, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a display fluctuation pattern command and a display type command, or a display slump fluctuation command and a display slump symbol command based on the fluctuation pattern command, and displays control. It is transmitted to the device 114.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the hold device control process (S111), which is one of the timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the holding device control process.

In this holding device control process (S111), as described above, during the "slump effect", the timing for releasing (flowing down) the ball held (stored) in the holding device 73 is counted, and the timing is reached. In this case, the holding device solenoid 73f is driven to release the ball held in the holding device 73, and the ball is allowed to flow into the dummy winning opening 75.

In this hold device control process (S111), the MPU 201 first determines whether or not the hold device drive flag 203f is turned on (S501). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the holding device drive flag 203f is not turned on (S501: No), the condition for releasing the ball held in the holding device 73 is not satisfied, so that the holding device control is performed. The process ends, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26).

On the other hand, in the process of S501, when it is determined that the holding device drive flag 203f is turned on (S501: Yes), 1 is subtracted from the value of the holding device drive timer 203g (S502), and then the subtracted holding device is subtracted. It is determined whether or not the value of the drive timer 203g is "0" (S503). By executing these processes, the conditions for releasing the ball held in the holding device 73 (that is, the start of the "slump effect", the ball is held in the holding device 73, and the acquired variable effect are exhibited. When the fluctuation pattern does not include "reach display") is established, the timing at which the ball held in the holding device 73 flows into the dummy winning opening 75 can be counted.

If it is determined in the process of S503 that the value of the holding device drive timer 203g is not "0" (S503: No), the release timing of the ball held in the holding device 73 has not been reached yet. In order to continuously count the release timing, the processes of S504 and S505 are skipped, the hold device control process (S111) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26).

On the other hand, in the process of S503, when the value of the holding device drive timer 203g is determined to be "0" (S503: Yes), it is the release timing of the ball held in the holding device 73. The hold device solenoid 73f is set to be driven on for "2000 milliseconds" (S504), the hold device drive flag 203f is set to off (S505), and the hold device control process (S111) is terminated. ..

In this way, by controlling the release timing of the ball held in the holding device 73 based on the holding device drive flag 203f and the holding device drive timer 203g, the "slump effect" is being executed. A ball is flowed into the dummy winning opening 75 before the execution of the effect element (that is, "Gase pseudo-ren 2"), and before the execution of the corresponding effect element, a hold symbol which is a dummy hold display corresponding to the effect element is displayed. Can be displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 31, a dummy winning process (S112), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the dummy winning process.

In this dummy winning process (S112), it is determined whether or not a ball has flowed (winning) into the dummy winning opening 75, and if the ball wins in the dummy winning opening 75, it is transmitted to the payout control device 111. Along with setting a prize ball command to be executed, a dummy hold command to be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 is set.

In this dummy winning process (S112), the MPU 201 first determines whether or not a ball has won a prize in the dummy winning opening 75 (S601). Here, it is based on the output signal of the dummy winning opening switch (not shown) that detects the entry (winning) into the dummy winning opening 75, which is read in the switch reading process of the timer interrupt processing (see S105 in FIG. 26). Then, the ball entering the dummy winning opening 75 is detected over three timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 26). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the ball has not won in the dummy winning opening 75 (S601: No), this dummy winning process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

On the other hand, in the process of S601, if it is determined that the ball has won a prize in the dummy winning opening 75 (S601: Yes), a prize equivalent to the special drawing winning openings 77a and 78a is awarded based on the winning in the dummy winning opening 75. In order to pay out the balls, a three-prize ball command instructing the payout control device 111 to pay out three prize balls is set (S602), and the process shifts to S603. The three prize ball commands set in the process of S602 are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and are executed next in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S101 in FIG. 26). Inside, it is transmitted toward the payout control device 111.

With this configuration, the player cannot determine whether the prizes have been won in the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a or the dummy winning openings 75 based only on the number of prize balls paid out. Further, in playing the game, the player can perform the effect (variable effect, "slump effect", or hold) performed by the third symbol display device 81 from the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a and the dummy winning opening 75. Focusing on the design, etc.), we do not pay much attention to the winning mode of the ball to the special drawing winning openings 77a and 78a and the dummy winning opening 75. Therefore, the player asks whether the effect (reserved symbol) corresponding to the prize ball corresponds to the variable effect in the "normal state" based only on the number of prize balls paid out, or "in the slump state". It is not possible to determine whether or not it corresponds to the production unit of "slump production". As a result, the player feels uncomfortable even when the "slump effect" is performed in which the effect element is performed longer than the variation time of the acquired variation effect and more than the number of acquired variation effects. It is possible to prevent awakening to the game without getting excited.

In the process of S603, a dummy hold command for instructing the voice lamp control device 113 to display the hold symbol corresponding to the dummy hold display is set (S603), the dummy winning process (S112) is terminated, and the timer is interrupted. The process returns to the interrupt process (see FIG. 26). The dummy hold command set in the process of S603 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed next in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S101 in FIG. 26). , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the dummy hold ball number counter, the voice lamp control device 113 adds 1 to the value of the dummy hold ball number counter 223c, and sets the value of the dummy hold ball number counter 223c after the addition and the value of the sub hold ball number counter 223b. Based on the total value, the display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 receives the display reserved ball number command, and the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81. Control is performed so as to display the display of the reserved symbol (and the executed symbol) in (see FIG. 6 (b)).

With this configuration, the number of reserved symbols that is one more than the number of reserved balls in the actual variation effect can be displayed in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6B), and the actual variation effect can be executed. Even when the "slump effect" is performed more times than the number of times, the number of effect units in the "slump effect" can be consistent with the reserved symbol. As a result, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the production in which the winning / failing lottery is performed is performed more than the actual number of variable productions without causing a discrepancy in the production.

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the NMI interrupt process executed in the main control device 110 when a power failure or the like occurs will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like.

By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The MPU 201 to which the power failure signal SG1 is input to the NMI terminal interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, and stores the power failure occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power failure occurrence information (S701). ), Ends the NMI interrupt process.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111, and the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on.

In the start-up process, the MPU 201 first executes an initial setting process associated with turning on the power (S801). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. In addition, an initial operation is performed to determine whether or not electronic components such as the holding device solenoid 73f operate normally. Even when the holding device solenoid 73f performs the initial operation, the initial operation is performed so as to maintain the state in which the ball is held by the holding ball holding portion 73b of the holding device 73. It is configured. Next, in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as voice lamp control device 113, payout control device 111, etc.) to be in an operable state, a weight process (“1 second” in the first embodiment) is performed. ) Is executed (S802). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S803).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 2) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S804), and if it is turned on (S804: Yes), the process shifts to S811. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805), and if it is not stored (S805: No). Since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the processing is also shifted to S811 in this case as well.

If the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S806), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S807: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and even in such a case, the process is transferred to S811.

As will be described in S906 of FIG. 34, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S811, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S811). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S812, S813) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the initialization process (S812, S813) of the RAM 203 is executed. Further, when the power cutoff occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process (S812, S813) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner. .. In the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S812, S813), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to “0” (S812), and then the initial value is set in the RAM 203 (S813). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S810.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), the power off occurrence information is stored (S805: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S807: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S808). Then, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff is transmitted (S809), and the process proceeds to S810. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S810, interrupts are permitted (S810). Then, the process proceeds to the main process (see FIG. 34) described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the counter update process and the power cutoff process are roughly executed.

In the main process, the MPU 201 first determines whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S901). If the information on the occurrence of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (S901: No), the power failure signal SG1 is not output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252, and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S902 and S903).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S902). Specifically, when the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and the counter value reaches the maximum value (“899”, “99” in the first embodiment). , Clear to "0". Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203b area of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S107 (see FIG. 26) (S903), and the process shifts to the process of S901.

Here, while this main process is being executed, the timer interrupt process described with reference to FIG. 26 is started and executed at predetermined time intervals (“4 milliseconds” in the first embodiment). In the timer interrupt process, different processes are executed depending on the state of the game. For example, during the big hit, the execution of controlling the opening and closing of the big winning opening 65a is performed, and if the ball passes through the second entry opening 67, the second symbol display device 83 relates to the variable display of the second symbol. Display control is performed. Further, in the jackpot lottery executed when the dynamic display on the first symbol display device 37 is started, the number of jackpot random numbers to be compared with the acquired jackpot random number counter C1 is determined depending on whether it is in the high probability state or the low probability state. It will be different. Therefore, the time required to execute one timer interrupt process changes according to the state of the game. Therefore, the remaining time from the end of one timer interrupt process to the execution timing of the next timer interrupt process is not constant and changes according to the state of the game at that time.

The above-mentioned processes S902 and S903, which are one of the main processes, are executed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt process. That is, since the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is repeatedly executed using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number are used. The counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the initial value of the hit random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variable type counter CS1 can also be updated at random. In particular, by randomly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, the randomness of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the hit random number counter C4 that use these as the initial value of the update is random. Can be given.

Further, in the process of S901, if the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S9011: Yes), the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 32 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S904 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S904), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S905). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S906), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S907), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The process of S901 is executed at the timing when one cycle of the processes of S902 and S903 performed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26) ends. As a result, in the main processing of the main control device 110, various settings by the timer interrupt processing are completed, and the power cutoff occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when the update of each counter CINI1, CINI2, CS1 is completed. .. Therefore, when returning from the power cutoff state, the process can be started from the process of S901 after the start-up process (see FIG. 33) is completed. That is, the process can be started from the process of S901 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process.

Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S801). By setting a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S901. As a result, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

In the first embodiment, the process to be executed periodically is executed by the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 26), and in the main process (see FIG. 34), each counter CINI1, CINI2, CS1 is used for the remaining time of the timer interrupt process. Although the case of executing the update of is described, it is configured to execute a part or all of the processing executed in the timer interrupt processing every predetermined time (for example, 4 milliseconds) in the main processing. You may. For example, the prize ball counting signal, the payout abnormality signal reading process (S102), the jackpot processing (S103), the second symbol control processing (S104), and the switch reading processing (S104), which were executed in the timer interrupt processing in the first embodiment ( S105), start winning process (S108), variation processing (S109), launch control processing (S110), holding device control processing (S111), dummy winning process (S112), part or all of them, not timer interrupt processing. , May be configured to be executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process.

In this case, a step is provided in the main process (see FIG. 34) to determine whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds) has elapsed, and only when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the process is executed every predetermined time. Is executed, and each counter CINI1, CINI2, CS1 may be updated regardless of the elapse of a predetermined time. As a result, each of the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 is updated during the remaining time of the process to be executed at predetermined time intervals, but the process to be executed at predetermined time intervals is executed according to the state of the game. Since the time required for the operation changes, the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 can be updated at random even in such a configuration.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 35 to 42, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a start-up process (see FIG. 35) that is started when the power is turned on and a main process (see FIG. 36) that is executed after the start-up process.

First, with reference to FIG. 35, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, the MPU 221 first executes the initial setting process associated with turning on the power (S1001). Specifically, a predetermined predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power cutoff processing flag is turned on, the power cutoff process of S1122 (see FIG. 36) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "momentary power failure") in this start-up process. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S1002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 36, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see S1119 in FIG. 36), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S1122. The power cutoff processing flag is turned on before the power cutoff process is executed, and the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off after the power cutoff process is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power cutoff process of S1122 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power cutoff process in progress flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1002: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S1122 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113 (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1003).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1003: Yes), the process proceeds to S1004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1003: No), the process proceeds to S1008.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1004. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power cutoff process of S1122 was completed after the momentary power failure occurred, or it was reset only to the MPU221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is normal (S1003: No), and the process proceeds to S1008.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S1002: Yes), the start-up processing this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and the voice lamp control device 113 is being executed during the power-off processing of S1122. MPU221 was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power cutoff process is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S1004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, it is confirmed whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to "0".

If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1005: No), the abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S1008, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S1008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1122 is executed (see S1121 in FIG. 36). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1122 is executed, the process of S1008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the operation is started after the power failure of S1122 is completed after the power failure occurs. Therefore, in such a case (S1008: Yes), the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1010), and then an interrupt is performed. The permission is set (S1011), and the process proceeds to the main process (see FIG. 36). The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the processing of S1008 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the startup processing of this time is started after, for example, the power supply is completely cut off, so that the processing of S1004 to S1006 is performed in S1008. This is the case when the process is reached or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset (without receiving the power cutoff command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1008: No), S1009, which is the clearing process of the work area of RAM223, is skipped, the process is shifted to S1010, the initial value of RAM223 is set (S1010), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S1011), the process proceeds to the main process (see FIG. 36).

It should be noted that the reason for skipping the clearing process of S1009 is that when the processing of S1008 is reached via the processing of S1004 to S1006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1004. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 36, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this main process.

When the main process is executed, the MPU221 first determines whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the previous process of S1101 was executed (S1101), and if 1 millisecond or more has not elapsed (S1101). : No), the process proceeds to S1116 without performing the processes of S1102 to S1115. In the processing of S1101, it is not necessary to process S1102 to S1115 in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond) to determine whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed, whereas the command determination processing of S1116 This is because it is preferable to execute the variation effect processing of S1117 and S1117 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1116 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent the reception omission of the command transmitted from the main control unit 110, and by executing the processing of S1117 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination processing. Based on the above, the settings related to the variable effect can be made without delay. Further, by executing the processes of S1102 to S1115 every 1 millisecond, it is possible to accurately count various control timings.

In the process of S1101, if it is determined that 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the process of S1101 was executed last time (S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S1102. When the process of S1101 is executed for the first time after the start-up process shown in FIG. 35, the process directly proceeds to the process of S1102.

In the process of S1102, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1103 to S1117 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S1106 described later (S1103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1104). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not at the time of turning on the power, the process shifts to the process of S1105 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

Next, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1105). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process to set to perform the production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

In addition, if the frame button 22 is pressed during the period when the fluctuation effect and the "slump effect" are not executed or during the period of the effect element of the "high-speed fluctuation", the stage is changed and the frame button operation command is used. Instead, a rear image change command is set for the display control device 114. By including information on the type of the rear image corresponding to the changed stage in this rear image change command, the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be changed to an image corresponding to the stage. The process of changing to is performed.

Also, when the notice character appears at the start of the fluctuation effect or "slump effect", the frame button 22 can be pressed to display the expected value of the jackpot due to this variation, or the frame button 22 can be pressed during the "reach display". By doing so, the effect may be changed to one that gives a feeling of expectation for a big hit, or the frame button 22 may be used as a decision button for selecting one of the plurality of reach effects presented on the screen. If the frame button 22 is not arranged, the process of S1105 is omitted.

After the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1105) is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1106), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S1107). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display (that is, the variation effect or the “slump effect”) performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S1107, the liquid crystal display execution management processing is executed (S1108), and the process proceeds to the processing of S1109. In the liquid crystal display execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variation effect or the "slump effect" performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1106 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, and the sound editing / output process of S1107 is also performed in the variable effect or "slump effect" performed by the third symbol display device 81. It will be executed in synchronization with the required time.

In the process of S1109, it is determined whether or not the value of the slump effect timer 223g is larger than "0" (S1109). This determination is for grasping the progress status of the "slump effect" and shifting the reserved symbol at the timing when one effect unit of the "slump effect" ends, in accordance with the start of the next effect unit. ..

In the process of S1109, when it is determined that the value of the slump effect timer 223 g is not a value larger than "0" (S1109: No), that is, when the value of the slump effect timer 223 g is "0", "slump effect". Since it is not in the middle, the processing of S1110 to S1115 is skipped and the processing is transferred to S1116.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1109 that the value of the slump effect timer 223 g is larger than "0" (S1109: Yes), the "slump effect" is in progress, so the value of the slump effect timer 223 g is used. 1 is subtracted (S1110), the value of the slump effect timer 223 g is determined, and it is determined whether or not "10 seconds" have elapsed since the "slump effect" was started (S1111).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "slump effect" can occur when the variation effect of the third symbol is not held and the variation effect is not executed in the third symbol display device 81. Is. Therefore, when a variable effect of the "non-reach" effect mode that does not include the "reach display" is acquired based on the start prize in the "slump state", the effect mode of the variable effect is "non-reach" of "15 seconds" without exception. The "reach (long)" effect mode is selected.

Here, when the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is selected based on the starting prize in the "slump state", at least the two effect elements "Gase pseudo-ren 1" and "Gase pseudo-ren 2" " "Slump effect" is executed. Further, since each effect unit in the "slump effect" is configured to be performed based on "10 seconds", "10 seconds" from the start of the first effect unit (that is, "Gase pseudo-ren 1") in the "slump effect". At that point, the first staging unit ends, and the execution of the next staging unit (that is, "Gase pseudo-ream 2") in the "slump staging" is started.

Therefore, when the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is selected, it suggests the end of the first effect unit in the "slump effect" and the start of the next effect unit, and also indicates the execution status of each effect unit. Execution displayed in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6B) of the third symbol display device 81 according to the execution status of the effect unit in order to ensure consistency with the display contents of the reserved symbol and the execution symbol. It is necessary to erase the symbol and shift the display of the reserved symbol (hereinafter, erasing the displayed execution symbol and shifting the display of the reserved symbol is simply referred to as "shift display"). Therefore, the end timing of the first effect unit in the "slump effect" is measured by the process of S1111, and when the end timing is reached, the display contents of the reserved symbol and the executed symbol are changed by the process of S1114.

In addition, when an effect mode including "reach display" is selected based on the start prize in the "slump state", the reserved symbol and the execution symbol are set as the "slump effect" corresponding to the effect mode including the "reach display". A "pseudo-ream" effect that does not consume is executed.

Therefore, when the effect mode including "reach display" is selected, the reserved symbol and the executed symbol are not consumed in the effect unit in the "slump effect", so that the execution status of each effect unit and the display contents of the reserved symbol and the executed symbol are displayed. In order to maintain consistency with the above, the execution symbol and the reserved symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6B) of the third symbol display device 81 are displayed as they are according to the execution status of the effect unit. Continue to do.

With this configuration, it is possible to ensure consistency between the execution status of each effect unit in the "slump effect" and the display contents of the reserved symbol and the execution symbol. As a result, even when a series of "slump effects" that are performed for a longer time than the actual variable effect is executed, it is possible to provide an effect that the player does not feel uncomfortable.

In the process of S1111, whether or not "10 seconds" have elapsed since the "slump effect" was started is determined based on the value of the slump effect timer 223 g and the acquired extension time. ing. Specifically, when the acquired variation effect is a "non-reach (long)" effect mode of "15 seconds" and the acquired extension time is "5 seconds", the slump effect timer 223 g. At the stage when the remaining value of "10000" is reached, that is, at the timing when 10000 is subtracted from the slump effect timer 223 g set to "20000", it is determined that "10 seconds" has elapsed from the start of the "slump effect". It is configured to do. Further, when the acquired variation effect is a "non-reach (long)" effect mode of "15 seconds" and the acquired extension time is "10 seconds", the value of the slump effect timer 223 g is set. At the stage when the remaining "15000" is reached, that is, at the timing when 10000 is subtracted from the slump effect timer 223 g set to "25000", it is determined that "10 seconds" have elapsed from the start of the "slump effect". It is configured.

Therefore, in the process of S1111, if it is determined that "10 seconds" have not elapsed from the start of the "slump effect" (S1111: No), the shift timing of the reserved symbol (that is, "Gase pseudo-ream 1") Since the end timing) has not arrived, the processes of S1112 to S1115 are skipped, and the processes are transferred to S1116.

On the other hand, in the process of S1111, if it is determined that "10 seconds" have elapsed from the start of the "slump effect" (S1111: Yes), then is the value of the dummy reserved ball count counter 223c larger than "0"? Whether or not, that is, whether or not the hold symbol which is a dummy hold display is being displayed is determined (S1112). This means that if the variation pattern including "reach display" or the ball is not held in the holding device 73, the dummy hold command is not received from the main control device 110, and the holding symbol which is the dummy hold display is displayed. In such a case, the shift display of the reserved symbol and the executed symbol is not performed.

In the process of S1112, when it is determined that the value of the dummy hold ball number counter 223c is not larger than "0" (S1112: No), that is, the value of the dummy hold ball number counter 223c is "0" and the dummy When the hold symbol which is the hold display is not displayed, the process of S1113 to S1115 is skipped and the process is transferred to S1116.

On the other hand, in the process of S1112, when it is determined that the value of the dummy hold ball number counter 223c is larger than "0" (S1112: Yes), the hold symbol which is the dummy hold display is displayed. Since it is the shift display timing of the hold symbol, first, 1 is subtracted from the value of the dummy hold ball number counter 223c (S1113), and the data stored in the hold display information storage area 223e is shifted (S1114).

This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fifth hold display areas 223e1 to 223e5 toward the execution hold display area 223e0, and the first hold display area 223e1 → execution hold display. Area 223e0, 2nd hold display area 223e2 → 1st hold display area 223e1, 3rd hold display area 223e3 → 2nd hold display area 223e2, 4th hold display area 223e4 → 3rd hold display area 223e3, 5th hold display area The data in each area 223e0 to 223e5 is shifted, such as from 223e5 to the fourth hold display area 223e4.

After the data shift process of S1114, the hold ball number command for display is set based on the value of the sub-hold ball number counter 223b and the hold change information stored in the hold display information storage area 223e by the above data shift process. Then (S1115), the process is transferred to S1116. The display reserved ball count command set in the process of S1115 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is stored in the display control device 114 in the command output process (S1102) to be executed next. Will be sent to.

When the display control device 114 receives the display reserved ball number command, the display control device 114 has the number of reserved symbols indicated by the display reserved ball number command in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6B) of the third symbol display device 81. In addition to displaying the execution symbol, the display mode (display color) of the corresponding reservation symbol or execution symbol is controlled based on the hold change information included in the display hold ball number command.

In the process of S1116, a command determination process for performing a process according to a command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1116), and the process proceeds to the process of S1117. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 37.

In the processing of S1117, after the processing of the command determination processing (S1116), the variation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main control device 110 in order to display the variation effect or the "slump effect" on the third symbol display device 81. A variation effect process, which is a process for starting a variation effect or a “slump effect”, is executed based on the above. The details of this variation effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 42.

Next, a counter update process for updating various counters such as the hold change counter 223d provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed (S1118), and the process shifts to S1119. Specifically, in this counter update process, for example, the pending change counter 223d is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (both are "99" in the first embodiment), "0" is cleared. .. The hold change counter 223d updated in this way is used for executing the “hold change notice” and selecting the display mode.

In the process of S1119, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1119). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the process of S1119 (S1119: Yes), both the power cutoff flag and the power cutoff processing flag are turned on (S1121), and the power cutoff process is executed (S1122). After the power cutoff process is executed, the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off (S1123), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the information on the occurrence of the power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1119 (S1119: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1120), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1120: No), the process returns to the process of S1101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1120: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing.

Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S1116) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the command determination process. This command determination process is executed in the main process (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, the command received from the main control device 110 is determined.

In the command determination process (S1116), the MPU 221 first reads and analyzes the first unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, and analyzes the command from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not a slump command has been received (S1201). Then, when it is determined that the slump command has been received (S1201: Yes), the sub-slump flag 223f is set to ON (S1202), this command determination process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 36). By setting the sub-slump flag 223f to ON based on the reception of the slump command, the MPU 221 can recognize that the voice lamp control device 113 is in the “slump state”.

On the other hand, in the process of S1201, when it is determined that the slump command has not been received (S1201: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold rank-up command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1203). Then, when it is determined that the hold rank up command has been received (S1203: Yes), the hold change information of the hold display information storage area 223e indicated by the total value of the sub hold ball number counter 223b and the dummy hold ball number counter 223c is displayed. Raise one rank (S1204).

In the process of S1204, specifically, for example, the hold change information corresponding to "none (white)" in the hold display information storage area 223e indicated by the total value of the sub-hold ball number counter 223b and the dummy hold ball number counter 223c. If is stored, the pending change information is updated to the pending change information corresponding to "blue". If the hold change information corresponding to "blue" is stored in the hold display information storage area 223e indicated by the total value of the sub-hold ball number counter 223b and the dummy hold ball number counter 223c, the hold change information is stored. Update to the pending change information corresponding to "green". If the hold change information corresponding to "green" is stored in the hold display information storage area 223e indicated by the total value of the sub-hold ball number counter 223b and the dummy hold ball number counter 223c, the hold change information is stored. Update to the pending change information corresponding to "red".

With this configuration, the display mode of the reserved symbol and the executed symbol corresponding to each effect unit of the "slump effect" can be upgraded by one rank, and the number of effects of the "slump effect" and the reserved symbol and the executed symbol can be increased. While maintaining consistency with the number of displays, it is possible to enhance the fun of the game by enriching the variation of the production content.

After the processing of S1204, the effect conversion flag 223k is set to ON (S1205), this command determination processing (S1116) is terminated, and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 36). By setting the effect conversion flag 223k to ON based on the reception of the hold rank-up command, the "gase pseudo-ream" effect that can digest the hold symbol is executed in the "slump effect" on the voice lamp control device 113 side. In some cases, it can be recognized that the reserved symbol is converted into an effect element of "development possibility effect" that does not digest. With this configuration, it is possible to ensure consistency between the content of the production unit in the "slump effect" and the consumption status of the reserved symbol and the executed symbol, and it is possible to prevent the effect content from being inconsistent. ..

In the process of S1203, if it is determined that the hold rank-up command has not been received (S1203: No), then it is determined whether or not the dummy hold command has been received (S1206). As a result of the determination, if the dummy hold command is received (S1206: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the dummy hold ball counter 223c (S1207), and then the hold display setting is set to set the display mode of the hold symbol. Processing is performed (S1208), and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 36). In this hold display setting process, control regarding "hold change notice" is performed based on the value of the dummy hold ball number counter 223c updated in S1206 and the value of the sub hold ball number counter 223b at that time. The details of this hold display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 38.

In the process of S1206, when it is determined that the dummy hold command has not been received (S1206: No), then it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1209). As a result of the determination, if the hold ball number command is received (S1209: Yes), the value of the hold ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110 included in the received hold ball number command (that is, the held fluctuation effect). The number of reserved balls) is extracted and stored in the sub-held ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1210).

Here, since the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a (starting winning), the process of S1210 is performed every time there is a starting winning. Therefore, the value of the sub-holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 can be adjusted to the value of the hold ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, even if the value of the sub-holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the hold ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the voice lamp control device 113 at the time of detecting the start winning prize The value of the sub-held ball number counter 223b can be modified to match the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110.

After the processing of S1210, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 included in the received hold ball number command is extracted, and the hold information storage area 223i is held. Among the information storage first to fourth areas (see FIG. 25), the information is stored in the hold information storage first to fourth areas corresponding to the values of the sub-hold ball count counter 223b updated by the process of S1210 (S1211).

That is, when the value (number of reserved balls) of the sub-held ball number counter 223b is X (1 ≦ X ≦ 4), the extracted jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, stop pattern selection counter C3, and variable type Each value of the counter CS1 is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 223i1, the jackpot type counter storage area 223i2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 223i3, and the variation type counter storage area 223i4, respectively, in the hold information storage X area.

The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the reserved ball number command are those acquired from the counter buffer 203b in the main control device 110 when the balls win the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a (starting winning). When the number of reserved balls included in the reserved ball number command is X, it is a value stored in the reserved X area of the reserved ball storage area 203c of the main control device 110. That is, the same information (values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) as the hold ball storage area 203c of the main control device 110 is stored in the hold information storage area 223i of the voice lamp control device 113.

By referring to the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold information storage area 223i, the voice lamp control device 113 can execute the look-ahead process in the hold display setting process (see FIG. 38) described later. ing. That is, what will happen to the result of the variable effect or "slump effect" when the reserved variable effect or "slump effect" is executed (whether or not it will be a big hit, what will happen to the variable time, etc.). Is determined before the execution of the variable effect or the "slump effect" to determine the execution of various effects, and the voice lamp control device 113 is controlled to determine whether or not the "pending change notice" can be executed and the display mode. Can be executed.

After the process of S1211, in order to determine the display mode of the hold symbol based on various information indicated by the hold ball number command received this time, the hold display setting process (S1208) is performed as in the case of receiving the dummy hold command. , Return to the main process (see FIG. 36).

In the process of S1209, if it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received (S1209: No), then it is determined whether or not the variation pattern command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1212). Then, when it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S1212: Yes), the variation setting process is performed (S1213) in order to set the variation effect or the "slump effect" based on the variation pattern command, and the main process is performed. Return to (see FIG. 36). In this variation setting process, a variation pattern (variation time) is extracted from the received variation pattern command, and the variation effect or the detailed effect content of the “slump effect” is set based on the variation pattern. This fluctuation setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 39.

If it is determined in the process of S1212 that the variation pattern command has not been received (S1212: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1214). As a result of the determination, if the stop type command is received (S1214: Yes), the symbol setting process is performed (S1215) in order to set the stop symbol of the variation effect or the "slump effect" based on the stop type command. Return to the main process (see FIG. 36). In this symbol setting process, the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command, and the detailed stop symbol of the variation effect or the "slump effect" is set based on the stop type. This symbol setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 40.

If it is determined in the process of S1214 that the stop type command has not been received (S1214: No), then it is determined whether or not the confirmation command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1216). As a result of the determination, if the confirmation command is received (S1216: Yes), the confirmation setting process is performed (S1217) in order to display the variation effect or the "slump effect" based on the confirmation command, and the main process (FIG. 36). In this confirmation setting process, based on the received confirmation command, the confirmation display of the variation effect is performed if the variation effect is being executed, and the left symbol column in the "slump effect" if the "slump effect" is being executed. The stop display of Z1 is performed. This confirmation setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 41.

In the process of S1216, if it is determined that the confirmation command has not been received (S1216: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed (S1216: No). S1218), the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 36). For example, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. Set the command so that it is sent to the device 114. The demo command received from the main control device 110 is set as a display demo command by the processing of S1218, is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and then is the command output processing of the main processing (FIG. FIG. It is transmitted to the display control device 114 by (see S1102 of 36).

Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the hold display setting process (S1208) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the hold display setting process. As described above, this hold display setting process is executed when the hold ball number command or the dummy hold command is received from the main control unit 110, and determines whether or not to execute the "hold change notice" in the hold symbol. At the same time, a command for the number of reserved balls for display is set according to the determined content.

In this hold display setting process (S1208), the MPU 221 is first executed based on various information indicated by the hold ball number command received this time, or at the timing when the dummy hold command received this time is received. Based on the success or failure of the next production unit of the production unit of "", it is determined whether or not the execution lottery of the "pending change notice" has been won (S1301). As described above, in the execution lottery of the "hold change notice", in the "normal state", each of the hold information storage X areas corresponding to the value of the sub hold ball counter 223b corresponding to X (1 ≦ X ≦ 4). Based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the counter storage areas 223i1 to 223i4, the validity and the effect mode are extracted. Then, based on the extracted pass / fail and the effect mode, the value of the hold change counter 223d at that time and the hold change table 222e (see FIG. 18) are referred to, and whether or not the "hold change notice" can be executed and displayed. Determine the aspect.

Further, if the "slump effect" based only on the start winning of 1 (that is, the winning 1) is being performed, the validity of the "slump effect" being executed is stored in each counter storage area 223j1 to 223j4 of the execution information storage area 223j. Extraction is performed based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1. Further, if the "slump effect" based on the additional start prize (that is, the prize 2) is being executed after the start prize of 1 (that is, the prize 1), the validity of the executing "slump effect" is determined. Extraction is performed based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the counter storage areas 223j1 to 223j4, 223i1 to 223i4 in the hold information storage first area. Then, based on the extracted correctness, the value of the pending change counter 223d at that time and the pending change table 222e are referred to to determine whether or not the "pending change notice" can be executed and the display mode.

As a result of the processing of S1301, if the execution lottery of the "hold change notice" is won (S1301: Yes), the hold indicating the display mode (for example, "blue") which is the execution lottery result of the "hold change notice". The change information is stored in the hold display information storage area 223e indicated by the total value of the value of the sub-hold ball number counter 223b and the value of the dummy hold ball number counter 223c (S1302), and the process is shifted to S1304. On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S1301, if the execution lottery of the "hold change notice" is not won (S1301: No), the hold change information (that is, Null data) indicating that the "hold change notice" is not executed is displayed. It is stored in the hold display information storage area 223e indicated by the total value of the value of the sub-hold ball number counter 223b and the value of the dummy hold ball number counter 223c (S1303), and the process is shifted to S1304. As a result, it is possible to store in the hold display information storage area 223e whether or not to execute the "hold change notice" for each effect unit of the "normal state" variation effect and the "slump effect".

By writing Null data to the corresponding hold display information storage area 223e in the process of S1303, for example, duplicate use of information related to the "hold change notice" stored in the hold display information storage area 223e before writing is performed. It can be prevented, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a discrepancy in the production (for example, the "pending change notice" is "red" even though it is a variable production of the "non-reach" production mode). can.

Next, in the process of S1304, the display control device 114 displays the total value of the value of the sub-holding ball number counter 223b and the value of the dummy holding ball number counter 223c, and the holding change information stored in the holding display information storage area 223e. The display hold ball number command for notifying is set (S1304), the hold display setting process (S1208) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 37).

The display reserved ball count command set in the process of S1304 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 36). Will be sent. As a result, the display control device 114 that has received the display hold ball number command displays the hold symbol according to the hold ball number and hold change information indicated by the display hold ball number command in the cockpit of the third symbol display device 81. The process of displaying in the area Db (see FIG. 6B) is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the variation setting process (S1213) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the variation setting process. As described above, in the command determination process (see FIG. 37), when the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110, the variation setting process includes the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern command and the gaming state at that time (that is, the gaming state). , "Normal state" or "Slump state"), and set the effect content of the variable effect or "slump effect".

In this variation setting process (S1213), the MPU221 first extracts a variation pattern (variation time) from the variation pattern command (S1401), and shifts the process to S1402. The fluctuation pattern extracted by the processing of S1401 is stored in the RAM 223, and the processing of S1402 to S1418 is performed based on the fluctuation pattern.

In the process of S1402, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern extracted in S1401 is a variation pattern indicating "2R probability variation jackpot", that is, a "special variation" effect mode (S1402). As a result of the determination, if the variation pattern indicates "2R probability variation jackpot" (S1402: Yes), the processing of S1404 to S1423 is performed in order to execute the variation effect with the variation pattern in any gaming state. Instead, the sub-slump flag 223f is set to off (initialization) (S1403), and this variation setting process (S1213) is terminated. After the variation setting process is completed, the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 37).

On the other hand, in the processing of S1402, if it is not a fluctuation pattern indicating "2R probability variation jackpot" (S1402: No), then it is determined whether or not the sub-slump flag 223f is turned on (S1404). As a result of the determination, if the sub-slump flag 223f is turned on (S1404: Yes), the fluctuation pattern command is received during the "slump state". Therefore, first, the sub-slump flag 223f is set to off (S1405). Next, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern extracted in S1401 includes "reach display" (S1406).

In the process of S1406, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern does not include the "reach display" (S1406: No), that is, when it is determined that the effect mode is "non-reach (long)", the "slump effect" is used. The extension time is drawn by lottery (S1407), the extracted extension time is added to the value of the slump effect timer 223g (S1408), the extracted extension time is stored in the RAM 223 (S1409), and the process is transferred to S1410. .. On the other hand, in the processing of S1406, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern includes the "reach display" (S1406: Yes), the processing of S1407 to S1409 is skipped in order to perform the "slump effect" without acquiring the extension time. Then, the process is transferred to S1410. With this configuration, the extension time is acquired for the "slump effect" in the variation pattern that does not include the "reach display", and the dynamic effect of the third symbol, which is longer than the variation time of the actual variation effect, is executed. be able to.

In the process of S1410, the variation time is added to the value of the slump effect timer 223 g based on the variation pattern extracted in the process of S1401 (S1410), and the process shifts to S1411. Specifically, for example, when the fluctuation pattern is the fluctuation time of "15 seconds" of "" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+" low-speed fluctuation "", "15000" is added to the value of the slump effect timer 223g. If the fluctuation pattern is "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "pseudo-variation" + "high-speed fluctuation (short)" + "pseudo-variation" + "special reach", the fluctuation time is "50 seconds". "50,000" is added to the value of the slump effect timer 223 g. In the first embodiment, a series of "slump effect" is executed based on the value set in the slump effect timer 223 g in S1408 and the value added to the slump effect timer 223 g in this S1410.

In the process of S1411, it is determined again whether or not the variation pattern extracted in S1401 includes "reach display" (S1411). As a result of the determination, if the fluctuation pattern includes the "reach display" (S1411: Yes), the "slump effect" newly set or additionally set this time is developed from the "pseudo-ream" effect. In order to execute the "reach display", the situation at the time of winning (when receiving the fluctuation pattern command) (that is, during the "slump state", during the execution of the "slump effect" based on other than the extension time, or the "slump" based on the extension time Whether or not the "staging" is being executed. The same shall apply hereinafter), the value of the slump staging timer 223g set (added) in the processing of S1408 and / or S1410, and the "slump staging (extended time)" in S1422 described later. Based on the residual value of the extension time stored in the RAM 223 only when it is a variation pattern command during execution, the effect element of "pseudo-ream" effect and / or "development possibility effect" and "whichever reach" Each effect unit with the effect element is set in the first to seventh effect areas 223h1 to 223h7 of the slump effect storage area 223h (S1412), and the process shifts to S1413. In the process of S1412, if the status at the time of winning is the "slump state" or the "slump effect" based on other than the extension time is being executed, the residual value is not set, so that the winning is performed. The content of the "slump effect" is set based on the situation and the value of the slump effect timer 223 g.

Next, in the process of S1413, since the "reach display" is performed as the "slump effect", an additional "slump effect" is set based on the reception of a new variation pattern command during the execution of the "slump effect". In order not to do so, the value of the slump effect timer 223g is cleared to "0" (S1413), and the process is shifted to S1417.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1411 that the fluctuation pattern does not include the "reach display" (S1411: No), a prize is won in the "slump effect" newly set or additionally set this time. The time (when receiving the fluctuation pattern command), the value of the slump effect timer 223 g set (added) in the processing of S1408 and / or S1410, and the variation during execution of the "slump effect (extended time)" in S1422 described later. Based on the residual value of the extension time stored in the RAM 223 only when it is a pattern command, each effect unit of the effect element of the "Gase pseudo-ream" effect and / or the "development possibility effect" is set in the slump effect storage area 223h. The first to seventh staging areas 223h1 to 223h7 are set respectively (S1414), and the process shifts to S1415. In the process of S1414, if the status at the time of winning is the "slump state" or the "slump effect" based on other than the extension time is being executed, the residual value is not set, so that the winning is performed. The content of the "slump effect" is set based on the situation and the value of the slump effect timer 223 g.

Next, in the process of S1415, it is determined whether or not the effect conversion flag 223k is turned on (S1415). As a result of the determination, if the effect conversion flag 223k is turned on (S1415: Yes), the 1 "Gase pseudo-ream" effect that consumes the reserved symbol (execution symbol) is suspended in the "slump effect" set this time. The slump effect storage area 223h is updated (S1416) by converting it into an effect element of "development possibility effect" that does not consume the symbol (execution symbol), and the process shifts to S1417. On the other hand, if the effect conversion flag 223k is not turned on (S1415: No), the process of S1416 is skipped and the process is transferred to S1417 without converting the set "slump effect". By configuring in this way, the number of executions of the production unit in the "slump effect" and the number of display of the reserved symbols are matched, and by providing a consistent effect, the player does not feel a sense of discomfort. You can play the game.

In the process of S1417, the residual value of the extension time stored in the RAM 223 is cleared by "0" (S1417) only when the variation pattern command is executed during the execution of the "slump effect (extension time)" in S1422 described later (S1417). , The effect conversion flag 223k is set to off (S1418), and this variation setting process (S1213) is terminated. After the variation setting process is completed, the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 37). In this way, when one variation pattern command is received, by initializing the residual value and the effect conversion flag 223k acquired (set) based on the reception of the variation pattern command, each received variation pattern command is received. It is possible to execute an accurate fluctuation effect or a "slump effect" setting process.

On the other hand, in the process of S1404, when it is determined that the sub-slump flag 223f is not turned on (S1404: No), then it is determined whether or not the value of the slump effect timer 223g is larger than "0" (S1419). ). If it is determined as a result of the determination that the value of the slump effect timer 223g is larger than "0" (S1419: Yes), it means that the variation pattern command is received during the execution of the "slump effect". The start winning (that is, winning 2) that caused the pattern command is during the variable time of the variable effect based on the previous variable pattern command (that is, winning 1) in the "slump effect" (including during the confirmation display. The same applies hereinafter). ) Is determined whether or not the starting prize is won (S1420). This determination is made when the value of the slump effect timer 223 g is smaller than the value corresponding to the extension time stored in the RAM 223 in S1409 at the timing of the variation pattern command received this time. It is determined that it is not during the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effect based on the fluctuation pattern command. On the other hand, if the value of the slump effect timer 223 g is larger than the value corresponding to the extension time at the timing of the variation pattern command received this time, the variation effect based on the previous variation pattern command in the "slump effect" is performed. It is determined that the time is fluctuating.

If, as a result of the determination in S1420, it is determined that the reception timing of the variation pattern command received this time is during the variation time of the variation effect based on the previous variation pattern command (S1420: Yes), it is based on other than the extension time. Since the variation pattern command is received while the "slump effect" is being executed, it corresponds to the extension time stored in S1409 in order to set an additional "slump effect" based on the received variation pattern command. (That is, "5000" or "10000") is subtracted from the value of the slump effect timer 223 g (S1421), and the process is transferred to S1410.

On the other hand, in the process of S1420, when it is determined that the reception timing of the variation pattern command received this time is not within the variation time of the variation effect based on the previous variation pattern command (S1420: No), that is, " Since the fluctuation pattern command is received while the "slump effect" is being executed, it is once the value of the slump effect timer 223 g in order to additionally execute the "slump effect" based on the received fluctuation pattern command. The remaining value of the "slump effect" is stored in the RAM 223 (S1422), the value of the slump effect timer 223 g is cleared to "0" (S1423), and the process shifts to S1410.

Then, in the processing after S1410, first, in S1410, the value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is added again to the value of the slump effect timer 223g reset in S1421 or S1423 (S1410), and in S1412 or S1414 or the like. An additional "slump effect" is set based on the value of the slump effect timer 223 g added in S1410 and the residual value of the "slump effect" stored in the RAM 223 in S1422.

In the process of S1419, when it is determined that the value of the slump effect timer 223 g is not a value larger than "0" (S1419: No), that is, when the value of the slump effect timer 223 g is "0", "0". Since the "slump state" and the "slump effect" are not being executed but are in the "normal state", the variation setting process (S1213) is terminated and the command is executed in order to execute the variation effect based on the reception of the variation pattern command. The process returns to the determination process (see FIG. 37).

In this way, the value of the slump effect timer 223 g and the remaining value of the extension time or the extension time are set for each situation at the time of winning (when the fluctuation pattern command is received), and "slump" is performed by common processing based on those set values. "Staging" can be set, and the program capacity stored in the ROM 222 can be reduced.

Next, the symbol setting process (S1215) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the symbol setting process. In this symbol setting process, as described above, when a stop type command is received from the main control device 110 in the command determination process (see FIG. 37), the stop type is extracted from the stop type command and the stop type is extracted. Fluctuation pattern corresponding to the command A stop symbol in the variation effect or the "slump effect" is set based on the variation pattern indicated by the command and the setting status of the slump effect storage area 223h.

In this symbol setting process (S1215), first, the stop type (effect mode) is extracted from the stop type command (S1501), and the process is transferred to S1502. The stop type extracted by the process of S1501 is stored in the RAM 223, and the processes of S1502 to S1506 are performed based on the stop type.

In the process of S1502, it is determined whether or not the stop type extracted in S1501 is a stop type indicating "2R probability variation jackpot", that is, a "special variation" effect mode (S1502). As a result of the determination, if the stop type indicates "2R probability variation jackpot" (S1502: Yes), the processes of S1503 to S1506 are performed in order to execute the variation effect with the stop type in any situation. Instead, the process shifts to S1507.

On the other hand, in the process of S1502, if it is not the stop type indicating "2R probability variation jackpot" (S1502: No), then it is determined whether or not the data related to "slump effect" is stored in the slump effect storage area 223h (Slump effect). S1503). As a result of the determination, if the data related to the "slump effect" is not stored in the slump effect storage area 223h (S1503: No), the stop type command is received in the "normal state", so that the process is related to the "slump effect". The processing of S1504 to S1506 is not performed, and the processing is transferred to S1507.

On the other hand, in the process of S1503, if the data related to the "slump effect" is stored in the slump effect storage area 223h (S1503: Yes), the variable setting process is performed in order to set the stop symbol of each effect unit in the "slump effect". It is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern stored in the RAM 223 in S1401 in (see FIG. 39) includes the “reach display” (S1504).

As a result of the determination of S1504, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern includes the "reach display" (S1504: Yes), the chance symbol symbol according to the number of "pseudo-ream" effects in the "slump effect" is stored in the slump effect. In addition to setting the area 223h, the stop symbol (big hit symbol or lost symbol) in the effect element of "Which da reach" is set in the slump effect storage area 223h (S1505) according to the stop type extracted in S1501, and the process is S1507. Move to.

On the other hand, as a result of the determination of S1504, when it is determined that the variation pattern does not include the "reach display" (S1504: No), that is, when the variation pattern is the "loss display", the "gase pseudo-ream" effect is produced. The gassechance pattern according to the number of times is set in the slump effect storage area 223h (S1506), and the processing is shifted to S1507. With this configuration, the stop symbol can be displayed for each effect unit of the "slump effect", and even when the "slump effect" is performed, the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type command can be displayed. Can be displayed.

In the process of S1507, in the variation effect processing (see FIG. 42) described later, the variation in the third symbol display device 81 is based on the setting contents in the variation setting process (see FIG. 39) and the symbol setting process (S1215) described above. In order to start the effect or the "slump effect", the fluctuation start flag 223a is set to ON (S1507), and this symbol setting process is terminated. After the symbol setting process is completed, the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 37).

Next, the confirmation setting process (S1217) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the final setting process. As described above, this confirmation setting process is an effect on the third symbol display device 81 when the confirmation command is received from the main control device 110 in the command determination process (see FIG. 37). Based on the situation (that is, whether the variable effect is being produced or the "slump effect" is being performed), the third symbol to be stopped and displayed is set.

In this confirmation setting process (S1217), first, it is determined whether or not the "slump effect" is being executed (S1601). This determination is made based on whether or not the value of the slump effect timer 223g is larger than "0". As a result of the determination, if the "slump effect" is not being executed (S1601: No), the confirmation command is received at the time of executing the variation effect, so that the display control device 114 is instructed to confirm the variation effect. The confirmation command for display is set (S1602), the confirmation setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 37).

The display confirmation command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (see S1102 in FIG. 36) of the main process. .. By receiving the display confirmation command, the display control device 114 stops the variation effect being executed by the third symbol display device 81, and corresponds to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command described later. By stopping and displaying the third symbol, the third symbol in the variation effect is confirmed and displayed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1601 that the "slump effect" is being executed (S1601: Yes), the "slump effect" is being executed and the first stop timing of the "gase pseudo-ream 2" is executed. Since it is the reception of the confirmation command in, the first display for instructing the display control device 114 to stop the first stop of the "Gase pseudo-ream 2" of the "slump effect" (that is, the stop of the left symbol column Z1). A stop command is set (S1603), this confirmation setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 37).

The first display stop command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 36). Will be done. By receiving the first stop command for display, the display control device 114 changes in the left symbol column Z1 in the "Gase pseudo-ream 2" of the "slump effect" being executed by the third symbol display device 81. 3 Stop the symbol. After that, after the "slump effect" is performed for a predetermined time according to the effect information stored in the slump effect storage area 223h and the stop symbol, the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 and the third symbol are stopped and displayed. By doing so, the third symbol in the "slump effect" is confirmed and displayed.

In this way, when a confirmation command is received from the main control device 110, it corresponds to the effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 depending on whether the variable effect is being executed or the "slump effect" is being executed. The command can be transmitted to the display control device 114, and it is possible to provide an effect that does not cause a discrepancy in the effect contents and that does not give a sense of discomfort.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the variation effect processing (S1117) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the variation effect processing. This variation effect process is executed in the main process (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the above-mentioned variation setting process (see FIG. 39) and the symbol setting process (see FIG. 40). The process of starting the variable effect or the "slump effect" set in and is executed.

In the variation effect processing (S1117), the MPU 221 first determines whether or not the variation start flag 223a provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1701). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223a is not on (that is, it is off) (S1710: No), at least the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so that this fluctuation. The effect processing is finished, and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 36).

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1701 that the fluctuation start flag 223a is on (S1701: Yes), since both the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are received, either the fluctuation effect or the "slump effect" is received. First, the fluctuation start flag 223a is turned off (S1702), and then the data included in the hold information storage first area provided in the hold information storage area 223i is shifted to the execution information storage area 223j. (S1703) Further, the data included in the hold information storage second to fourth areas provided in the hold information storage area 223i is shifted to the hold information storage first to third areas (S1704), and the process is performed in S1705. Move to.

That is, in this case, the reserved variation effect is reduced by one, and the execution of the variation effect or the "slump effect" is started based on the information regarding the first reserved variation effect in time. Hold information corresponding to the variable effect held in It is moved to each storage area 223j1 to 223j4 of the execution information storage area 223j. Further, the values and various information (data) of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223i1 to 223i4 of the hold information storage second area are stored in the storage areas 223i1 to 223i4 of the hold information storage first area. The values and various information (data) of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223i1 to 223i4 of the hold information storage third area after being moved are stored in the storage areas 223i1 to 223i4 of the hold information storage second area. The values and various information (data) of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223i1 to 223i4 of the hold information storage 4th area are stored in each storage area 223i1 to the hold information storage 3rd area. Move to 223i4.

As a result, in the execution information storage area 223j of the voice lamp control device 113, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold ball execution area 203d of the main control device 110 are stored, and the voice is stored. The hold information storage first to fourth areas provided in the hold information storage area 223i of the lamp control device 113 are stored in the hold first to fourth areas of the hold ball storage area 203c of the main control device 110, respectively. The same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored.

In the process of S1705, it is determined whether or not the data is stored in the slump effect storage area 223h (S1705), and if the data is stored in the slump effect storage area 223h (S1705: Yes), "slump effect". In order to set, the process is shifted to S1708, and when data is not stored in the slump effect storage area 223h (S1705: No), the process is shifted to S1706 in order to set the variable effect.

In the process from S1706, in order to execute the variation effect in the "normal state", the variation pattern of the variation effect based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution information storage area 223j is displayed on the display control device 114. A display variation pattern command is set for notification (S1706). Similarly, a display stop type command is set in order to notify the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect based on the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the execution information storage area 223j (S1707). , The process shifts to S1711.

The display variation pattern command set in the process of S1706 and the display stop type command set in the process of S1707 are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and are executed next. It is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the command output process of the process (see S1102 in FIG. 36).

When the display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, the display control device 114 is based on the variation pattern and the stop symbol indicated by the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command in the third symbol display device 81. Controls the variation effect of the third symbol.

Regarding the execution of the variation effect, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command are always generated and transmitted as a pair within a predetermined time (for example, 20 milliseconds). Therefore, when the display control device 114 receives only one of the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, the command is normally generated or transmitted due to noise, disconnection, etc. when executing the variation effect. Since there is no such abnormality, it is recognized that some abnormality has occurred, and the effect of the third symbol display device 81 is switched to an error display (for example, default variation) corresponding to the above abnormality instead of the variation effect, and the display control of the error display is controlled. Start.

Here, the default variation means that the third symbol is variablely displayed and confirmed at high speed until the confirmation command (display confirmation command) transmitted from the main control device 110 is received via the voice lamp control device 113. It is a variable effect that determines a fixed special stop symbol (for example, a symbol displayed as "9", "8", "7" in order from the left column) indicating a loss as a stop symbol according to the reception of a command.

On the other hand, in the process from S1708, in order to execute the "slump effect", the display control device 114 is notified of each effect unit of the "slump effect" based on each effect information stored in the slump effect storage area 223h. A display slump fluctuation pattern command is set (S1708). Then, a display slump symbol command is set (S1709) in order to notify the display control device 114 of each stop symbol of the "slump effect" based on the stop symbol information stored in the slump effect storage area 223h, and the slump effect is produced. The storage area 223h is cleared (initialized) to 0 (S1710), and the process is transferred to S1711.

The display slump fluctuation pattern command set in the process of S1708 and the display slump symbol command set in the process of S1709 are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223 and executed next. It is transmitted to the display control device 114 in the command output process (see S1102 in FIG. 36) of the main process.

When the display control device 114 receives the display slump fluctuation pattern command and the display slump symbol command, and the "slump effect" is not started in the third symbol display device 81, the display slump fluctuation pattern command. And control related to the "slump effect" of the third symbol is performed based on the effect pattern and the stop symbol indicated by the display slump symbol command. On the other hand, when the display control device 114 receives the display slump fluctuation pattern command and the display slump symbol command, and the third symbol display device 81 has already started the "slump effect", the display control device 114 is executing "slump effect". While maintaining consistency between the content of the "slump effect" and the effect pattern and the stop symbol indicated by the received display slump fluctuation pattern command and the display slump symbol command, the control related to the "slump effect" of the third symbol is performed. Specifically, while performing one effect unit being executed in the "slump effect" based on the previous display slump fluctuation pattern command and display slump symbol command, the effect unit is transferred from the next to the effect unit being executed. Is configured to be performed based on the later display slump fluctuation pattern command and display slump symbol command.

Regarding the execution of the "slump effect", the display slump fluctuation pattern command and the display slump symbol command are always paired for a predetermined time (for example, like the display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop type command). , 20 milliseconds). Therefore, when the display control device 114 receives only one of the display slump fluctuation pattern command and the display slump symbol command, the command is normally generated or disconnected due to noise, disconnection, etc. when executing the "slump effect". Since it has not been transmitted, it recognizes that some abnormality has occurred, switches the effect on the third symbol display device 81 to an error display (for example, default fluctuation) corresponding to the above abnormality instead of the "slump effect", and the error. Start display control of the display.

Next, in the process of S1711, it is determined whether or not the value of the dummy reserved ball number counter 223c is larger than "0" (S1711). This determination is the start timing of the variable effect or the "slump effect", and the reserved symbol (execution symbol) is consumed (that is, the reserved symbol displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Db1) with the start. The hold symbol is displayed in shift display according to the variable effect corresponding to (or the setting of "slump effect"), or the hold symbol that is a dummy hold display while the "slump effect" is being executed. At this stage, it is determined whether it is the timing to shift the reserved symbol.

As a result of the processing of S1711, when it is determined that the value of the dummy reserved ball number counter 223c is not larger than "0" (S1713: No), the value of the dummy reserved ball number counter 223c is "0" and " Since the "slump effect" is not executed and the hold symbol, which is a dummy hold display, is not displayed, the value of the sub-hold ball number counter 223b is first subtracted by 1 in order to shift the hold symbol at this stage. S1714). Then, the data stored in the hold display information storage area 223e is shifted (S1715).

Similar to the shift process of the main process (see S1114 in FIG. 36), this data shift process shifts the data stored in the first to fifth hold display areas 223e1 to 223e5 in order toward the execution hold display area 223e0. In the processing, the first hold display area 223e1 → execution hold display area 223e0, second hold display area 223e2 → first hold display area 223e1, third hold display area 223e3 → second hold display area 223e2, fourth hold display. The data in each area 223e0 to 223e5 is shifted such that the area 223e4 → the third hold display area 223e3, the fifth hold display area 223e5 → the fourth hold display area 223e4, and so on.

After the data shift process of S1715, the hold ball number command for display is set based on the value of the sub-hold ball number counter 223b and the hold change information stored in the hold display information storage area 223e by the above data shift process. (S1716), this variation effect processing (S1117) is terminated, and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 36). The display reserved ball count command set in the process of S1716 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is in the command output process (see S1102 of FIG. 36) of the main process to be executed next. Then, it is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives the display reserved ball number command, the display control device 114 has the number of reserved symbols indicated by the display reserved ball number command in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6B) of the third symbol display device 81. In addition to displaying the execution symbol, the display mode (display color) of the corresponding reservation symbol or execution symbol is controlled based on the hold change information included in the display hold ball number command.

On the other hand, when it is determined as a result of the processing of S1713 that the value of the dummy reserved ball number counter 223c is larger than "0" (S1713: No), the value of the dummy reserved ball number counter 223c is "1". Since the "slump effect" is being executed and the hold symbol, which is a dummy hold display, is displayed, the processing of S1714 to S1716 is skipped in order to prevent the shift display of the hold symbol at this stage. Then, the variation effect processing (S1117) is terminated, and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 36).

In this way, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command, the effect to be executed by the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and the variation effect or the “slump effect” is performed. However, it is possible to provide an effect in which the content of the effect and the reserved symbol are consistent with each other.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 43 to 47, an execution example of various effects of the variation effect or the “slump effect” in the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment will be described.

First, with reference to FIG. 43, each effect unit of the “slump effect” in the third symbol display device 81 will be described (see FIG. 23 (a) for a time chart). FIG. 43A shows a state in which the effect element of “high-speed fluctuation” is executed in the “slump effect” in the third symbol display device 81, and the state just before the chance eye development symbol appears. FIG. 43 (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the Gase chance symbol is stopped in the staging element of "pseudo-variation" in "Gase pseudo-ream 1" from the state of FIG. 43 (a). FIG. 43 (c) is a diagram showing a state in which the reserved symbol is shifted from the state of FIG. 43 (b) and the effect element of “high-speed fluctuation”, which is “Gase pseudo-ream 2”, is executed. FIG. 43 (d) is a diagram showing a state in which the Gase chance eye symbol is stopped in the staging element of "pseudo-variation" in "Gase pseudo-ream 2" from the state of FIG. 43 (c), and FIG. 43 (e) is a diagram. FIG. 43 (f) is a diagram showing a state in which the reserved symbol is shifted from the state of FIG. 43 (d) and the effect element of “high-speed fluctuation”, which is “Gase pseudo-ream 3”, is executed. FIG. 43 (f) is a diagram. It is a figure which showed the state which the Gasechance stitch symbol stopped in the effect element of "pseudo-variation" in "pseudo-variation 3" from the state of (e), and a series of "slump effect" was completed. In FIGS. 43 (a) to 43 (f), the display mode of the third symbol is omitted (hereinafter, the same applies to the description in FIGS. 44 to 47).

As the gaming state of FIG. 43, the previous start winning (that is, winning 1) occurs in the "slump state", and the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is extracted in the winning 1 and based on the winning 1. While the first production unit of the "slump effect", "Gase Pseudo-Ren 1", is being executed, a new start prize (that is, prize 2) is generated, and the prize 2 is also "non-reach (long)". "The effect mode is extracted, and an additional" slump effect "is set and executed based on the prize 2 and the previous prize 1 (see FIG. 23 (a)).

Specifically, in FIG. 43 (a), in the left display area Dm1 (left symbol column Z1; the same applies hereinafter) of the main display area Dm, the third symbol of the “7” symbol is stopped and displayed, and the right side. Immediately before the third symbol of the "8" symbol is stopped and displayed in the display area Dm3 (right symbol row Z3; the same applies hereinafter), and further, the middle display area Dm2 (middle symbol row Z2; the same applies hereinafter). In, the third symbol is still invisible and fluctuating at high speed. That is, the staging element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" or the staging element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" (hereinafter, the staging element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" and the staging element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" are collectively referred to. Then, it is being executed (sometimes referred to simply as "the effect element of" high-speed fluctuation "), and the so-called" 7 "symbol and" 8 "symbol are just before the appearance of the chance eye development symbol (immediately before). Shows the state of.

Further, in the sub-display area Ds, the character symbol is displayed in a warning mode suggesting that the chance eye development symbol appears in the situation where the fluctuation effect or the "slump effect" is executed in the central small area Ds2. It is displayed. Specifically, the character symbol displayed in the central small area Ds2 is displayed as if it is cheering. A predetermined background (not shown) is displayed in the left small area Ds1 and the right small area Ds3, and no character symbol or the like is displayed.

Here, when the chance eye development symbol is stopped, the effect element of "pseudo-variation" is started, and in the effect element of the "pseudo-variation", the symbol is the same as the left display area Dm1 in the middle display area Dm2. It is produced whether the "7" symbol stops and the chance symbol symbol appears, or the symbol different from the left display area Dm1 (for example, the "8" symbol) stops and the gasechance symbol appears. ..

In the cockpit display area Db, the execution symbol is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0, and the reserved symbol is displayed in the first to second reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db2. Therefore, the execution symbol indicates that one effect unit of the variation effect or the "slump effect" is executed in the main display area Dm, and the hold symbol of 2 indicates that the hold ball of each effect unit of the "slump effect". It shows that the number is 2 times.

Here, the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 and the reserved symbol displayed in the second reserved symbol display area Db2 are displayed at the timing when the ball wins in the winning openings 77a and 78a. On the other hand, the reserved symbol displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Db1 is a dummy reserved display displayed at the timing when the ball wins in the dummy winning opening 75. When the player recognizes this situation, it is grasped that the effect unit performed by the third symbol display device 81 exists three times including the effect unit being executed.

Next, in the state of FIG. 43 (b), from the state of FIG. 43 (a), in the middle display area Dm2 of the main display area Dm, the third symbol of the "8" symbol is pseudo-stopped and displayed on the left. The “7” symbol in the area Dm1 and the “8” symbol in the middle display area Dm2 and the right display area Dm3 are displayed in a pseudo manner. It suggests a state in which one of the staging units of 1 ends as if it ends with "missing display". Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the state of FIG. 43 (b), the effect element of "pseudo-variation" ends in the main display area Dm, and one effect unit of the "slump effect" ends. I guess.

Next, in the state of FIG. 43 (c), from the state of FIG. 43 (b), a new variation (effect unit) is started again from the gasechance symbol of "788" which was stopped and displayed in the main display area Dm. , The whole display area Dm1 to Dm3 is invisible and fluctuates at high speed.

At this time, in the sub-display area Ds, the same display mode as in FIG. 43 (b) is displayed, while in the cockpit display area Db, a new effect unit is started, so that the state of FIG. 43 (b) is displayed. The execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 is deleted from, the reserved symbol displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Db1 is shifted to the execution symbol display area Db0 and displayed as the execution symbol, and the second is displayed. The reserved symbol displayed in the reserved symbol display area Db2 is shifted to the first reserved symbol display area Db1 and displayed as a reserved symbol. Since the reserved symbols displayed in the second reserved symbol display area Db2 are shifted and displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Db1, the reserved symbols are not displayed in the second reserved symbol display area Db2.

That is, the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db is a dummy hold display, and in the main display area Dm, the effect unit based on the dummy hold display is executed.

Next, in the state of FIG. 43 (d), from the state of FIG. 43 (c), in the middle display area Dm2 of the main display area Dm, the third symbol of the "8" symbol is pseudo-stopped and displayed on the left. The “7” symbol in the area Dm1 and the “8” symbol in the middle display area Dm2 and the right display area Dm3 are displayed in a pseudo manner. It suggests a state in which one of the staging units of 1 ends as if it ends with "missing display". Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the state of FIG. 43 (d), the effect element of "pseudo-variation" ends in the main display area Dm, and one effect unit of the "slump effect" ends. I guess.

Next, in the state of FIG. 43 (e), from the state of FIG. 43 (d), a new variation (effect unit) is started again from the gasechance symbol of "788" which was stopped and displayed in the main display area Dm. , The whole display area Dm1 to Dm3 is invisible and fluctuates at high speed.

At this time, in the sub-display area Ds, the same display mode as in FIG. 43 (d) is displayed, while in the cockpit display area Db, a new effect unit is started, so that the state of FIG. 43 (d) is displayed. The execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 is deleted from, and the reserved symbol displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Db1 is shifted to the execution symbol display area Db0 and displayed as an execution symbol. Since the reserved symbol displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Db1 is shifted and displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0, the reserved symbol is not displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Db1.

That is, the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db is the present hold display, and in the main display area Dm, the effect unit based on the present hold display is executed.

Next, in the state of FIG. 43 (f), from the state of FIG. 43 (e), in the middle display area Dm2 of the main display area Dm, the third symbol of the "8" symbol is pseudo-stopped and displayed on the left. The “7” symbol in the area Dm1 and the “8” symbol in the middle display area Dm2 and the right display area Dm3 are displayed in a pseudo manner. It suggests that the production unit of 1 is finished with "missing display". Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the state of FIG. 43 (f), the effect element of "pseudo-variation" ends in the main display area Dm, and one effect unit of the "slump effect" ends. I guess.

Here, the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db is erased after the end of the effect unit, and a series of "slump effects" ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, a plurality of “pseudo-ream” effects performed in the “slump effect” in the third symbol display device 81 will be described (as a time chart, the “special reach” in FIG. 22 (b). Refer to the part corresponding to "). FIG. 44A shows a state in which the “high-speed fluctuation (long)” effect element or the “high-speed variation (short)” effect element is executed in the “slump effect” of the third symbol display device 81. It is a figure showing the state just before the chance eye development symbol appears, and FIG. 44 (b) shows the first chance eye symbol in the staging element of "pseudo-variation" from the state of FIG. 44 (a). It is a figure which showed the state which put out, and FIG. 44 (c) showed the state which the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation (short)" which all symbols fluctuate again from the state of FIG. 44 (b) is executed. FIG. 44 (d) is a diagram showing a state in which a second chance symbol appears after the effect element of “pseudo-variation” is executed from the state of FIG. 44 (c). 44 (e) is a diagram showing a state in which the “high-speed fluctuation (short)” staging element in which all the symbols change again from the state of FIG. 44 (d) is executed, and FIG. 44 (f) is a diagram showing a state in which the effect element is executed. It is a figure which showed the state just before the reach formation symbol appeared in the staging element of "pseudo-variation" from the state of FIG. 44 (e).

Specifically, in FIG. 44A, the third symbol of the “7” symbol is stopped and displayed in the left display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm, and the “8” symbol is stopped and displayed in the right display area Dm3. It is just before the three symbols are stopped and displayed, and further, it shows a state in which the third symbol is still invisible and fluctuates at high speed in the middle display area Dm2. That is, it shows the state just before (immediately before) the appearance of the so-called "7" symbol and the chance eye development symbol by the so-called "7" symbol and the "8" symbol while the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation" is being executed.

Further, in the sub-display area Ds, the character symbol is displayed in a warning mode suggesting that the chance eye development symbol appears in the situation where the fluctuation effect or the "slump effect" is executed in the central small area Ds2. It is displayed. Specifically, the character symbol displayed in the central small area Ds2 is displayed as if it is cheering. A predetermined background (not shown) is displayed in the left small area Ds1 and the right small area Ds3, and no character symbol or the like is displayed.

Further, in the cockpit display area Db, the execution symbol is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0, while the reserved symbol is not displayed in the first to fifth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db5. Therefore, the execution symbol indicates that one effect unit of the variable effect or the "slump effect" is executed in the main display area Dm, and the absence of the reserved symbol indicates that the variable effect and the "slump effect" are executed. It shows that the number of reserved balls in the production unit is 0 times.

Next, in the state of FIG. 44 (b), from the state of FIG. 44 (a), the third symbol of the "7" symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle display area Dm2 of the main display area Dm, and the left display area Dm1 and the left display area Dm1 and The chance symbol symbol by the "7" symbol in the middle display area Dm2 and the "8" symbol in the right display area Dm3 is confirmed, and the appearance of the chance symbol symbol will develop (continue) this "slump effect". Suggests. Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the state of FIG. 44 (b), the player recognizes that the "pseudo-ream" does not end in the main display area Dm and the "slump effect" is continuously executed. The display mode of the sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db is the same as that of FIG. 44 (a) because the execution symbol is not erased because the "pseudo-ream" continues.

Next, in the state of FIG. 44 (c), from the state of FIG. 44 (b), the chance symbol of "778", which was stopped and displayed in the main display area Dm, starts to change again, and the entire display areas Dm1 to Dm3 Indicates a state in which is invisible and fluctuates at high speed.

Further, in the sub-display area Ds, in the right small area Ds3, a "x2" symbol indicating that the second "pseudo-ream" effect has been developed due to the appearance of the chance symbol symbol is displayed. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "pseudo-ream" effect can be executed up to 5 times in the "slump effect", and the more the "pseudo-ream" effect is executed, the more the selection is made at the time of a big hit. Since it is configured so that it can be easily performed, by clearly displaying the number of times the "pseudo-ream" effect is executed in the right small area Ds3, the player can always recognize the expectation of the jackpot in the effect being executed. can. The display modes of the other sub-display areas Ds and the cockpit display area Db are the same as those in FIG. 44 (b) because the execution symbols are not erased because the "pseudo-ream" continues.

Next, in the state of FIG. 44 (d), from the state of FIG. 44 (c), the third symbol of the "7" symbol is stopped and displayed in the left display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm, and then in the right display area Dm3. The third symbol of the "8" symbol is stopped and displayed, and the third symbol of the "7" symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle display area Dm2. The chance symbol with the "8" symbol in the right display area Dm3 is confirmed again, suggesting that the appearance of the chance symbol will develop (continue) this "slump effect". Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the state of FIG. 44 (d), the player recognizes that the "pseudo-ream" does not end in the main display area Dm and the "slump effect" is continuously executed. The display mode of the sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db is the same as that of FIG. 44 (c) because the execution symbol is not erased because the "pseudo-ream" continues.

Next, in the state of FIG. 44 (e), from the state of FIG. 44 (d), the chance symbol of "778", which was stopped and displayed in the main display area Dm, starts to change again, and the entire display areas Dm1 to Dm3 Indicates a state in which is invisible and fluctuates at high speed.

Further, in the sub-display area Ds, in the right small area Ds3, a "x3" symbol indicating that the chance symbol symbol has developed into the third "pseudo-ream" effect is displayed. The display modes of the other sub-display areas Ds and the cockpit display area Db are the same as those in FIG. 44 (d), because the "pseudo-ream" continues, the execution symbols are not erased.

Next, in the state of FIG. 44 (f), from the state of FIG. 44 (e), the third symbol of the "7" symbol is stopped and displayed in the left display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm, and the right display area Dm3. The third symbol of the "7" symbol is just before the stop display, and further, in the middle display area Dm2, the third symbol is still invisible and fluctuates at high speed. That is, it shows a state just before (immediately before) the reach formation symbol by the "7" symbol appears during the execution of the "pseudo-variation" effect element, and the so-called "reach display" by the "7" symbol appears. .. The display modes of the sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are the same as those in FIG. 44 (e).

Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the state of FIG. 44 (f), the "reach display" appears in the third "pseudo-ream" effect, so that a plurality of "pseudo-ream" effects are performed. By executing some kind of "reach display" above, it is possible to focus on the subsequent production (that is, "reach display") with the expectation for the big hit increased, so it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Can be done.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the effect element of the “development possibility effect” performed in the “slump effect” in the third symbol display device 81 will be described. FIG. 45 (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the “first development possibility effect” is executed in the “slump effect” in the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 45 (b) is a diagram showing a state in which the “first development possibility effect” is executed. It is a figure which showed the state which the "second development possibility effect" is executed from the state of FIG. 45 (c), and the "third development possibility effect" is executed from the state of FIG. 45 (b). It is a figure which showed the state which is.

Specifically, in FIG. 45A, first, the third symbol of the “7” symbol is stopped and displayed in the left display region Dm1 of the main display region Dm, and then the third symbol of the “8” symbol is stopped and displayed in the right display area Dm3. The three symbols are stopped and displayed, and the third symbol of the "8" symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle display area Dm2, and the "7" symbol of the left display area Dm1 and the "7" symbol of the middle display area Dm2 and the right display area Dm3 are displayed. 8 ”The Gasechance pattern with the symbol appears in a pseudo manner, suggesting that the appearance of the Gasechance pattern makes this variable effect a“ loss display ”.

Further, on the front side of the third symbol that is stopped and displayed in each display area Dm1 to Dm3, the liquid crystal screen of the central portion (mainly the middle display area Dm2) of the third symbol display device 81 is pseudo-cracked. , Indicates a state in which the effect element of the "first development possibility effect" is executed as if the liquid crystal screen is cracked.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the pseudo cracks on the liquid crystal screen further spread from the effect element of the "first development possibility effect" to the effect element of the "second development possibility effect" described later (success). ), Or the screen is pseudo-split from the state of the staging element of the "first development possibility / non-progress" and develops (successfully) into a "pseudo-ream" staging or "whichever reach" staging element. There are four production patterns for whether the production (that is, "slump production") ends (development failure) with the production elements of "1 development possibility production".

Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the state of FIG. 45 (a), the effect being executed (that is, the "slump effect") is "whether or not the second development is possible" without determining the Gase chance pattern. It is speculated that it may develop into a staging element of "staging", a "pseudo-ren" staging, or a staging element of "whichever reach", and the player should maintain the expectation for a big hit by continuing the staging. Can be done. It should be noted that this "first development possibility / disapproval effect" is configured so that it can be performed in a period from the beginning (that is, "0 seconds") of the "development possibility / disapproval effect" to "3 seconds".

Next, in the state of FIG. 45 (b), the pseudo crack display area is the left display area Dm1, the right display area Dm3, and the sub display area from the effect element of the “first development possibility effect” of FIG. 45 (a). It shows the state in which the effect element of the "second development possibility effect" expanded to Ds is being executed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the pseudo cracks on the liquid crystal screen further spread from the effect element of the "second development possibility effect" to the effect element of the "third development possibility effect" described later (success). ), Or the screen is quasi-split from the state of the staging element of the "second development possibility production" and develops (successfully) into a "pseudo-ream" staging or "whichever reach" staging element. There are four production patterns for whether the production (that is, "slump production") ends (development failure) with the production elements of "2 development possibility production".

Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the state of FIG. 45 (b), the effect being executed (that is, the "slump effect") is "whether or not the third development is possible" without determining the Gase chance pattern. It is speculated that it may develop into a staging element of "staging", a "pseudo-ren" staging, or a staging element of "whichever reach", and the player should maintain the expectation for a big hit by continuing the staging. Can be done. In addition, this "second development possibility production" is configured so that it can be performed in the width of the period from "3 seconds" to "7 seconds" in the "development possibility production".

Next, in the state of FIG. 45 (c), the effect element of the "third development possibility effect" in which the display area of the pseudo crack is further expanded from the effect element of the "second development possibility effect" of FIG. 45 (b). Indicates the state in which is being executed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the liquid crystal screen is pseudo-split from the state of the effect element of the "third development possibility effect" to the "pseudo-ream" from the state of the effect element of the "third development possibility effect". 3 Whether to develop (success) into a staging or "Which da reach" staging element, or to end (development failure) the staging (that is, "slump staging") with the staging element of the "third development possibility production". Two staging patterns are available.

Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the state of FIG. 45 (c), the effect being executed (that is, the “slump effect”) is the “pseudo-ream” effect without being determined as the gassechance pattern. Or, it is possible to speculate that it will develop into a directing element of "Which da reach", and it is possible to keep the player expecting a big hit by continuing the directing. It should be noted that this "third development possibility effect" is configured so that it can be performed in the range of the period from "7 seconds" to "10 seconds" in the "development possibility effect".

It should be noted that the effect element of each "development possibility effect" in the first embodiment is configured to display cracks as if the liquid crystal screen is artificially cracked with respect to the main display area Dm and the sub display area Ds. On the other hand, the cockpit display area Db is configured so that the above cracks do not enter (cannot reach or are displayed on the back side). This is because the effect element of the "development possibility effect" is an effect of whether or not the stop result of the running "slump effect" changes, and the pending effect (variable effect or "slump effect") is. It does not mean to change. Therefore, the display mode of the cockpit display area Db that cannot be changed by this "development possibility production" should be maintained as it is even if the production element of the "development possibility production" is successfully developed. The cockpit display area Db is not cracked, indicating that it is not changed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, an effect element of "pseudo-variation" and an effect element of "development possibility effect" performed in the "slump effect" in the third symbol display device 81 will be described (as a time chart, FIG. 23 (b) or FIG. 24 (b)). FIG. 46A shows a state in which the effect element of “high-speed fluctuation” is executed in the “slump effect” in the third symbol display device 81, and the state just before the chance eye development symbol appears. 46 (b) is a diagram showing a state of whether or not the chance symbol is stopped in the staging element of “pseudo-variation” from the state of FIG. 46 (a), and is a diagram of FIG. 46 (c). ) Is a diagram showing a state in which the gassechance pattern appears in the staging element of “pseudo-variation” from the state of FIG. 46 (b), and FIG. 46 (d) is a diagram showing the state of FIG. 46 (c). FIG. 46 (e) is a diagram showing a state in which it is suggested that the staging element of “pseudo-variation” is completed and the variation effect is terminated by the appearance of the Gasechance pattern. FIG. 46 (e) is FIG. 46 (d). It is a figure showing the state in which the "third development possibility / disapproval effect" is executed from the state of FIG. 46 (f), and FIG. It is a figure which showed the state which the chance eye symbol appeared.

Specifically, in FIG. 46A, the third symbol of the “7” symbol is stopped and displayed in the left display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm, and the “8” symbol is stopped and displayed in the right display area Dm3. It is just before the three symbols are stopped and displayed, and further, it shows a state in which the third symbol is still invisible and fluctuates at high speed in the middle display area Dm2. That is, it shows the state just before (immediately before) the appearance of the so-called "7" symbol and the chance eye development symbol by the so-called "7" symbol and the "8" symbol while the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation" is being executed.

Further, in the sub-display area Ds, the character symbol is displayed in a warning mode suggesting that the chance eye development symbol appears in the situation where the "slump effect" is being executed in the central small region Ds2. There is. Specifically, the character symbol displayed in the central small area Ds2 is displayed as if it is cheering. A predetermined background (not shown) is displayed in the left small area Ds1 and the right small area Ds3, and no character symbol or the like is displayed.

Further, in the cockpit display area Db, the execution symbol is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0, while the reserved symbol is not displayed in the first to fifth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db5. Therefore, the execution symbol indicates that one effect unit of the variable effect or the "slump effect" is executed in the main display area Dm, and the absence of the reserved symbol indicates that the variable effect and the "slump effect" are executed. It shows that the number of reserved balls in the production unit is 0 times.

Next, in FIG. 46 (b), from the state of FIG. 46 (a), the third symbol of the “8” symbol is stopped and displayed in the right display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, and the “7” of the left display area Dm1 is displayed. It shows a state in which the chance eye development symbol by the symbol and the “8” symbol in the right display area Dm3 is determined, and the effect element of “pseudo-variation” is executed in the main display area Dm.

In this "pseudo-variation" effect element, in the middle display area Dm2, the "7" symbol, which is the same symbol as the left display area Dm1, is stopped and the chance symbol symbol appears, or the symbol is different from the left display area Dm1. (For example, the "8" symbol) is stopped and the effect of whether or not the Gasechance symbol appears is performed. The display modes of the sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are the same as those in FIG. 46 (a).

Next, in the state of FIG. 46 (c), from the state of FIG. 46 (b), the state immediately before the third symbol of the "8" symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle display area Dm2 of the main display area Dm is shown. There is. That is, although the "pseudo-variation" is being executed, the so-called gasechance symbol appears in the "7" symbol in the left display area Dm1 and the "8" symbol in the middle display area Dm2 and the right display area Dm3. It shows the state just before (immediately before). The display modes of the sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are the same as those in FIG. 46 (b).

Next, in the state of FIG. 46 (d), from the state of FIG. 46 (c), in the middle display area Dm2 of the main display area Dm, the third symbol of the "8" symbol is pseudo-stopped and displayed on the left. The “7” symbol in the area Dm1 and the “8” symbol in the middle display area Dm2 and the right display area Dm3 are displayed in a pseudo manner. Suggests a state as if it ends with "missing display". Therefore, it is presumed that when the player visually recognizes the state of FIG. 46 (d), the effect element of the "pseudo-variation" ends in the main display area Dm, and the "slump effect" ends. ..

Further, the character symbol of the central small area Ds2 of the sub-display area Ds is displayed in a disappointing manner due to the pseudo appearance of the "loss display" in the "slump effect". The display modes of the other sub-display areas Ds and the cockpit display area Db are the same as those in FIG. 46 (c).

Next, the state of FIG. 46 (e) shows a state in which the effect element of the “third development possibility effect” is executed from the state of FIG. 46 (d).

Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the state of FIG. 46 (e), the effect being executed (that is, the “slump effect”) is the “pseudo-ream” effect without being determined as the gassechance pattern. Or, it is possible to speculate that it will develop into a directing element of "Which da reach", and it is possible to keep the player expecting a big hit by continuing the directing. The display mode of the sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db is the same as that of FIG. 46 (d) because the "development possibility / non-development effect" is continued and the execution symbol is not erased.

Next, in the state of FIG. 46 (f), from the state of FIG. 46 (e), the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 is pseudo-cracked in the staging element of the “third development possibility effect”, and the beat is broken. 46 (e) shows a state in which the gassechance symbol (that is, “788”) displayed in the main display area Dm is replaced with the chance symbol (that is, “778”).

Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the state of FIG. 46 (f), he / she feels a sense of happiness due to the fact that the content estimated in the state of FIG. 46 (e) is correct, and the player continues to produce the effect. It is possible to maintain the expectation for the big hit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the effect element of "pseudo-variation" and the effect element of "whichever reach" performed in the "slump effect" in the third symbol display device 81 will be described (as a time chart, FIG. 23 (b) or FIG. 24 (b)). FIG. 47 (a) shows a state in which the effect element of “high-speed fluctuation” is executed in the “slump effect” in the third symbol display device 81, immediately before the chance eye development symbol stops in the main display area Dm. FIG. 47 (b) is a diagram showing a state, and FIG. 47 (b) is a diagram showing a state in which a chance symbol symbol appears in the staging element of “pseudo-variation” from the state of FIG. 47 (a), and is a diagram of FIG. 47 (c). ) Is a state in which the effect element of “pseudo-variation” is executed after all the symbols have changed again from the state of FIG. 47 (b), and is a state showing the state just before the reach forming symbol appears. 47 (d) is a diagram showing a state in which the reach-forming symbol appears from the state of FIG. 47 (c), the sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are erased, and the reach-forming symbol is enlarged. FIG. 47 (e) is a diagram showing a state in which the effect element of “Which da reach” is executed in the main display area Dm from the state of FIG. 47 (d), and FIG. 47 (f) is a diagram showing a state in which the effect element of “Which da reach” is executed. It is a figure which showed the state which the jackpot symbol appeared from the state of FIG. 47 (e).

Specifically, in FIG. 47 (a), the third symbol of the “7” symbol is stopped and displayed in the left display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm, and the “8” symbol is stopped and displayed in the right display area Dm3. It is just before the three symbols are stopped and displayed, and further, it shows a state in which the third symbol is still invisible and fluctuates at high speed in the middle display area Dm2. That is, it shows the state just before (immediately before) the appearance of the so-called "7" symbol and the chance eye development symbol by the so-called "7" symbol and the "8" symbol while the effect element of "high-speed fluctuation" is being executed.

Further, in the sub-display area Ds, the character symbol is displayed in a warning mode suggesting that the chance eye development symbol appears in the situation where the fluctuation effect or the "slump effect" is executed in the central small area Ds2. It is displayed. Specifically, the character symbol displayed in the central small area Ds2 is displayed as if it is cheering. A predetermined background (not shown) is displayed in the left small area Ds1 and the right small area Ds3, and no character symbol or the like is displayed.

Further, in the cockpit display area Db, the execution symbol is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0, while the reserved symbol is not displayed in the first to fifth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db5. Therefore, the execution symbol indicates that one effect unit of the variable effect or the "slump effect" is executed in the main display area Dm, and the absence of the reserved symbol indicates that the variable effect and the "slump effect" are executed. It shows that the number of reserved balls in the production unit is 0 times.

Next, in the state of FIG. 47 (b), from the state of FIG. 47 (a), the third symbol of the "7" symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle display area Dm2 of the main display area Dm, and the left display area Dm1 and the left display area Dm1 and The chance symbol symbol by the "7" symbol in the middle display area Dm2 and the "8" symbol in the right display area Dm3 is confirmed, and the appearance of the chance symbol symbol will develop (continue) this "slump effect". Suggests. Therefore, when the player visually recognizes the state of FIG. 47 (b), the effect element of the "pseudo-variation" does not end in the main display area Dm, and the "slump effect" is continuously executed. recognize. The display mode of the sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db is the same as the state of FIG. 47 (a) without erasing the execution symbol because the "pseudo-ream" continues.

Next, in the state of FIG. 47 (c), from the state of FIG. 47 (b), the third symbol of the "7" symbol is stopped and displayed in the left display area Dm1 of the main display area Dm, and the right display area Dm3. The third symbol of the "7" symbol is just before the stop display, and further, in the middle display area Dm2, the third symbol is still invisible and fluctuates at high speed. That is, it shows a state just before (immediately before) the reach formation symbol by the "7" symbol appears during the execution of the "pseudo-variation" effect element, and the so-called "reach display" by the "7" symbol appears. ..

However, in the sub-display area Ds, in the right small area Ds3, a "x2" symbol indicating that the second "pseudo-ream" effect has been developed due to the appearance of the chance symbol symbol is displayed. The display modes of the other sub-display areas Ds and the cockpit display area Db are the same as those in FIG. 47 (b).

Next, in the state of FIG. 47 (d), from the state of FIG. 47 (c), the third symbol of the "7" symbol is stopped and displayed in the right display area Dm3 of the main display area Dm, and the "7" symbol is used. The "reach display" is confirmed, and the state in which the effect element of "whichever reach" is executed in the main display area Dm is shown. In the effect element of this "Which da reach", first, it is displayed as if the entire main display area Dm is enlarged. Specifically, in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm3, the "7" symbol being stopped and displayed is enlarged and displayed, and in the middle display area Dm2, the third symbol is visibly changed at a low speed (for example). , "6" symbol is scrolled slowly to "7" symbol).

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are erased with the expansion of the main display area Dm based on the generation of the effect element of "Which da reach", and the sub-display area Ds and the cockpit display area Db are invisible. It is in a state of being.

This is because the sub-display area Ds mainly has a function of suggesting whether or not "reach display" occurs in the fluctuation effect or "slump effect" in the main display area Dm, and the "reach display" in the main display area Dm. This is because the significance of the existence of the sub-display region Ds diminishes when "" occurs. Further, the player pays attention to whether or not the result of the "reach display" becomes the "big hit display" or the "missing display" when the "reach display" occurs in the main display area Dm. Therefore, attention to the display content of the sub-display area Ds, which suggests the occurrence of "reach display", is diminished. Therefore, when the "reach display" occurs in the main display area Dm, the display content of the main display area Dm is enlarged in order to make it easier for the player to recognize the content of the "reach display" that the player pays attention to. It is configured to display the image and erase the sub-display area Ds as the image is enlarged.

In the state of FIG. 47 (d), the “x2” symbol is displayed in the portion corresponding to the right small area Ds3 of the sub-display area Ds, as in the display state of FIG. 47 (c). Therefore, as in FIG. 47 (c), it is shown that the second "pseudo-ream" production has been developed.

This is because the "x2" symbol suggests to the player the expected degree of jackpot in the variable effect or "slump effect" during execution, and the "x2" symbol is displayed during the variable effect or "slump effect". By having the player confirm, whether or not the running fluctuation effect or the "slump effect" is a big hit is configured to be predictable to the player, and the interest based on the prediction is given.

Further, the cockpit display area Db is a display suggesting how many holding numbers of the variable effect or the "slump effect" are held, and the "reach display" that can be expected to be a big hit in the running variable effect or the "slump effect" is displayed. When it occurs, the player decides whether the running fluctuation effect or "slump effect" becomes "big hit display" or "missing display" rather than how many fluctuation effects or "slump effects" are on hold (standby). I am paying attention to whether it will be.

Therefore, the player does not pay attention to the reserved symbol and the executed symbol indicating the number of reserved balls in the variable effect or the “slump effect”, and the reserved symbol and the executed symbol are displayed by the cockpit display area Db during the execution of the “reach display”. If is displayed, the player cannot concentrate on the effect of the "reach display", and the player may feel annoyed with the display of the reserved symbol and the executed symbol.

Further, the reserved symbols displayed in the 1st to 5th reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db5 of the cockpit display area Db have no direct relation to the variable effect or the "slump effect" being executed. .. Further, the reserved symbols displayed in the first to fifth reserved symbol display areas Db1 to Db5 are different from the display control of the variable effect being executed or the "slump effect" (that is, the variable effect process (see FIG. 42)). The display is controlled by system processing (in the voice lamp control device 113, the hold display setting process (see FIG. 38)). During the execution of "reach display", many additional effects are executed for many sprites by displaying various character symbols and displaying many effects on each character symbol. The processing load of display control is increasing. In such a situation, if the display control of a plurality of reserved symbols that are not directly related to the running fluctuation effect or the "slump effect" is performed, the number of sprites of each reserved symbol is reduced by the number of the third symbol display device 81. The processing load related to the overall display control increases, and there is a possibility that display abnormalities such as so-called dropped frames may occur.

Further, the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 of the cockpit display area Db inherits (inherits) the display mode of the hold symbol changed by the "hold change notice", and is being executed in that display mode. In order to show the jackpot expectation of the variable effect, it has a direct relationship with the variable effect or "slump effect" being executed. However, the "pending change notice" suggests the appearance expectation of the "big hit display" and the appearance expectation of the "reach display". Therefore, when the "reach display" appears, the suggestion of the appearance expectation of the "reach display" as the "pending change notice" is fulfilled. Further, when the "reach display" appears, it is in a state where the suggestion of the appearance expectation degree of the "big hit display" is satisfied to a certain extent (for example, half). Further, as described above, when the "reach display" appears, the player is paying attention to the effect content of the "reach display", and the interest in the display mode of the "pending change notice" in the execution symbol is diminished. There is.

Therefore, during the execution of the "reach display", the reserved symbol and the executed symbol, which are not attracting the attention of the player, are deleted, and the effect of the "reach display" is mainly executed on the display screen to display the player in the "reach display". You can pay attention to (concentrate) the production of. In addition, by erasing the reserved symbols and executed symbols that are not attracting the attention of the player in advance, the burden on the display control is removed in advance, so that the player does not feel a sense of discomfort regarding the game, and frames are dropped. It is possible to prevent a display abnormality from occurring.

Next, in FIG. 47 (e), from the state of FIG. 47 (d), the effect is executed when the “big hit display” or the “missing display” is set in the “whichever effect” in the main display area Dm. It shows the state of being.

In this "Which da production", the "7" symbol that constitutes the "big hit display" and the "8" symbol that constitutes the "missing display" push each other out of the display area. To. Then, if the "7" symbol constituting the "big hit display" pushes out the "8" symbol from the display area and the "7" symbol is displayed in the center of the display area in the "Which da effect" effect. It becomes a big hit, and it is set so that the "big hit display" appears as a display result. On the other hand, if the "8" symbol constituting the "missing display" pushes out the "7" symbol from the display area and the "8" symbol is displayed in the center of the display area, it is lost and the display result is "missing display". Is set to appear.

In the state of FIG. 47 (e), the reach forming symbol of the “7” symbol, which is the cause of the effect element of this “Which da reach”, is reduced in the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed. "Which da production" indicates whether the "slump production" being executed becomes "big hit display" or "missing display", but since it is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), it is tentatively reach. When "Which da reach" is performed while the formed symbols are not displayed at all, the player may forget which third symbol caused the "reach display". On the other hand, if the reach formation symbol is displayed large during the execution of "Which da reach", it becomes difficult to see the "Which da production", and the third symbol hinders the production itself of the "Which da production". There is a risk that it will end up.

Therefore, during the execution of "Which da effect", the reach forming symbol of the third symbol, which is the cause of "Which da reach", is displayed in a small size in the upper left of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. .. By configuring in this way, it is suggested to the player that the "reach display" is generated without disturbing the "which direction", and the type of the third symbol that generated the "reach display" is played. Can be clearly suggested to the person.

Further, in the state of FIG. 47 (e), the portion corresponding to the right small area Ds3 of the sub-display area Ds has a “x2” symbol as in the display state of FIGS. 47 (c) and 47 (d). Is displayed.

Next, in FIG. 47 (f), from the state of FIG. 47 (e), the “7” symbol, which is the same symbol as the reach forming symbol, is displayed in “Which da reach”, and the “7” symbol is displayed in the main display area Dm. Shows the state in which the "big hit display" by is appearing. Therefore, the player can obtain a feeling of happiness and satisfaction for the appearance of the "big hit display" as a result of the "slump effect".

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is used so as not to fall into a situation where the third symbol display device 81 does not execute the variation effect of the third symbol as much as possible. From the time of the actual variation effect when the variation effect of the third symbol is executed based on the winning to the left special figure winning opening 77a or the right special figure winning opening 78a for the first time from the slump state in which the variation effect is not performed. The long "slump effect" is configured to be executed by the third symbol display device 81. By configuring in this way, the effect time performed by the third symbol display device 81 is lengthened, the situation where the effect is not performed by the third symbol display device 81 is reduced, and the player is prevented from awakening. Can be done.

Further, the dummy hold display is displayed in the same manner as the actual main hold display based on the winning of the dummy winning opening 75, and the dummy hold display is digested (erased) when the "slump effect" is executed. .. With this configuration, the first symbol (third symbol) is actually drawn by entering the left special figure winning opening 77a or the right special drawing winning opening 78a, or the dummy winning opening 75. While making it difficult to identify whether the first symbol (third symbol) is actually drawn by entering the ball, the third symbol is produced by the "slump effect" executed by the third symbol display device 81. The effect time performed on the display device 81 can be longer than the actual variation effect time. Therefore, it is possible to execute a larger number of effects than the actually acquired variable effects, and to improve the fun of the game by the number of the effects. Further, since the number of executed symbols and the number of reserved symbols can be displayed while being matched with the number of executed effects, the player can lengthen the dynamic effect state of the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to provide a production that does not make you feel uncomfortable.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in order to match the displayed execution symbol and reserved symbol with the number of executions of the effect unit of the "slump effect" when performing the "slump effect", a special figure is used. When a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the ball to the winning openings 77a and 78a and the start of the "slump effect", the ball held in the holding device 73 is made to win in the dummy winning opening 75, and the dummy hold display is displayed. Display the pending symbol as. Then, every time the effect unit of 1 "slump effect" is completed, the execution symbol is deleted, the hold symbol which is a dummy hold display is moved to the execution symbol, and the next "slump effect" is based on the moved execution symbol. By starting the production unit of "", the production is performed as if the variable production was completed once. With this configuration, while executing the effect unit equal to or greater than the number of times the acquired variation effect is executed, the dynamic effect of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 is longer than the change time of the acquired variation effect. By lengthening the time and reducing the situation in which the third symbol display device 81 does not dynamically produce the third symbol, it is possible to prevent the player from awakening and improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the effect mode of the variable effect acquired by the start winning in the "slump state" is the "non-reach" effect mode, the variation time of the acquired variable effect is An extension time for performing an additional effect is acquired by lottery, and the "slump effect" is configured to be executed during the total time of the acquired fluctuation time and the extension time. With this configuration, even if the variable effect is not given a big hit, the dynamic effect time of the third symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81 is longer than the variable time of the acquired variable effect. However, by reducing the situation in which the third symbol display device 81 does not dynamically produce the third symbol, it is possible to prevent the player from awakening.

Further, the effect mode of the variable effect acquired by the start winning in the "slump state" executes the "reach display" (that is, the "normal reach" effect mode, the "super reach" effect mode, or the "special reach" effect mode. ), The extension time is not drawn, and one or more "pseudo-ream" effects are executed according to the acquired fluctuation time, and the effect element of "whichever reach" is executed. As a result, when the "reach display", which is less necessary to extend the production time, is acquired, the extension time is not drawn and acquired, thereby reducing the processing burden related to the extraction of the extension time. , It becomes easy to manage the production time of "slump production".

In addition, if the effect mode of the variable effect acquired by the start prize during the "slump effect" is the "non-reach (long)" effect mode, the extension time is not drawn, and " It is configured to add the production time of "slump production". This is because the extension time has already been acquired in the already executed "slump effect", and if an additional extension time is acquired in that state, the effect time of the "slump effect" becomes longer than necessary. At the same time, the management of the production time becomes complicated. Therefore, when a variable effect is acquired during the "slump effect", the processing load related to the extraction of the extended time is reduced by configuring so that the additional extension time is not extracted, and the "slump effect" is performed. It becomes easy to manage the production time of.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the effect time (variation time) of all the effect elements of the variable effect that can be executed in the "normal state" is an integral multiple of the effect time in "5 seconds" units (that is, "". It is composed of "5 seconds", "10 seconds", "15 seconds", "20 seconds", "25 seconds" or "50 seconds"). Further, in the "slump state", the effect time of all the effect elements except the effect element of "development possibility effect" is also composed of an integral multiple of the effect time in units of "5 seconds". The extension time selected in the "slump state" is also composed of an integral multiple of the production time in "5 seconds" units. With this configuration, when performing a "slump effect" composed of a plurality of effect units in relation to the acquired 1 variable effect, the variable time (and extension time) of the variable effect and the "slump effect" are performed. It is possible to easily match with the effect time of "", and even when a plurality of "slump effects" are executed in relation to one variation effect (and extension time), the variation time (and extension time) And the production time can be matched.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the main control device 110 does not provide a variation in the number of variation patterns of the "pseudo-ream" effect, but provides only a variation pattern in which the number of "pseudo-ream" effects is one. Even in the case, since the fluctuation pattern of the "pseudo-ream" effect can be executed multiple times as the "slump effect", the ROM capacity can be reduced and the variation of the effect can be enriched. You can improve your interest.

Further, during the execution of the "slump effect", the ball held in the holding device 73 is made to win a prize in the dummy winning opening 75 according to the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, and the holding symbol which is the dummy holding display is displayed based on the winning. By displaying in the cockpit display area Db, it is possible to display in the cockpit display area Db a number of reserved symbols that is one more than the number of reserved balls of the acquired variation effect. Further, even when the effect unit of the "slump effect" is performed more times than the number of times the acquired variable effect is executed, the number of effect units of the "slump effect" can be consistent with the reserved symbol. As a result, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the production in which the winning / failing lottery is performed is performed more than the actual number of variable productions without causing a discrepancy in the production.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 can execute the look-ahead process based on the dummy hold command received from the main control device 110, as in the case of receiving the hold ball number command. In the look-ahead processing based on the dummy hold command, whether or not the "slump effect" to be executed is confirmed is grasped, and whether or not the "hold change notice" is performed with reference to the hold change counter 223d and the hold change table 222e based on the success or failure. Is drawn. With this configuration, it is possible to execute the "hold change notice" even for the hold symbol related to the "slump effect", and to enrich the variation of the effect.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a plurality of effect units are executed in the "slump effect", and the "pending change notice" of the "slump effect" determines the plurality of effect units at once. It is configured as follows. By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to draw a lottery for the "hold change notice" for each production unit of the "slump effect", and the control regarding the "hold change notice" at the time of the "slump effect" is simplified. This makes it easier to create a program and reduces the processing load.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the variation effect acquired based on the start winning of the ball to the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a in the "slump state" is the effect mode including the "reach display". In this case, since it is not necessary to display an additional reserved symbol because the "pseudo-ren" effect that does not consume the reserved symbol is performed instead of the "gase pseudo-ream" effect that consumes the reserved symbol, it is reserved by the holding device 73. It is configured so that the ball is not allowed to flow into the dummy winning opening 75. With this configuration, the "pseudo-ream" effect that does not consume the reserved symbol is performed in the "slump effect", and the "slump effect" effect unit is performed the same number of times as the actual effect unit (variable effect) is executed. Even in this case, it is possible to ensure consistency between the number of effects of the “slump effect” effect unit and the number of reserved symbols. As a result, it is possible to provide a production in which the player does not feel a sense of discomfort without causing a discrepancy in the production.

Further, in the first embodiment, even if the "big hit display" is won in the "slump effect", the extension time is not acquired in the case of the variable effect including the "reach display", and the series of "slump effect" is performed. The staging time of is the same as the fluctuating time of the acquired variable staging. That is, the end timing of the variable effect and the end timing of the "slump effect" are synchronized. Therefore, even when a command related to a big hit effect (that is, an opening effect) is transmitted from the main control device 110, it is possible to match the effect contents, and the big hit effect is performed from the end of the "slump effect". It is possible to provide a natural effect at the start.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the variation effect acquired based on the start winning of the ball to the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a in the "slump state" is the effect mode including the "reach display". In this case, the ball held by the holding device 73 is configured not to flow into the dummy winning opening 75, the holding symbol or the execution symbol as the dummy hold display is not displayed, and instead, the display mode of "hold change notice" is displayed. Is configured to be upgraded by one rank (for example, the display mode of "none" is changed to the display mode of "blue"). Here, if the display mode of the reserved symbol or the executed symbol is upgraded by one rank, the display mode indicates that the "reach display" or the like is confirmed (that is, the display mode of "green" or "red"). At that time, if the reserved symbol corresponding to the effect mode in which the "reach display" does not appear is upgraded by one rank, there is a possibility that the content of the effect may be inconsistent. Therefore, in the reserved symbol or the executed symbol corresponding to the "slump effect" at the time of loss, the lowest display mode (that is, "none (white)" does not cause a discrepancy in the effect content even if the display mode is upgraded by one rank. By displaying the reserved symbol or the executed symbol (display mode), it is configured so as not to cause unnecessary confusion to the player.

Further, the MPU 221 of the first embodiment is in the "slump effect", that is, when the value of the slump effect timer 223 g is larger than "0", and when there is a new start prize in the special figure winning openings 77a, 78a. It is configured to determine the progress status of the "slump effect" and subtract the value for the extension time from the value of the slump effect timer 223g if the effect other than the extension time in the "slump effect" is being performed. .. With this configuration, if a new start prize occurs during the "slump effect", each "slump effect" will be added to the running "slump effect". The extension time set for performing an additional effect can be reset once, and the effect content of the "slump effect" can be newly set. This means that if the staging element other than the staging element during the extension time, that is, the staging element at the stage before the staging element based on the extension time is being executed, the staging element of the portion corresponding to the acquired extension time is executed. This is because even if the extension time is reset once and the production content of a series of "slump effects" is set again, there is no discrepancy in the production content.

Further, the value of the slump effect timer 223 g is set after the "slump effect" is set based on the set value of the slump effect timer 223 g when the "reach display" is included in the fluctuation pattern acquired in the "slump state". , "0" is configured to be cleared. This is because the fluctuation pattern including the "reach display" has a relatively long fluctuation time, so that a new prize may occur during the fluctuation time. Therefore, since it is not necessary to continuously perform the "slump effect" based on the winning of the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a up to such a case, the fluctuation pattern including the "reach display" is executed. In this case, after setting the "slump effect" based on the fluctuation pattern including the "reach display", the value of the slump effect timer 223 g is initialized, and until the "slump state" is entered again, the "slump state" is not displayed. Subsequent production is performed as "normal state". Further, by initializing the value of the slump effect timer 223 g at this stage, it is no longer necessary to grasp the progress status of the "slump effect", and it is not necessary to perform shift control of the hold symbol including the dummy hold display. The control load of the MPU 221 can be reduced. In addition, when a relatively long fluctuation time is acquired based on the start winning in the "slump state", the method of not executing the additional "slump effect" based on the subsequent starting winning is limited to the above control contents. However, any control content may be used as long as the control content does not execute the additional "slump effect".

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when "10 seconds" has elapsed from the start of the "slump effect", when the hold symbol which is the dummy hold display is displayed, that is, the dummy hold ball number counter. When the value of 223c is larger than "0", it is regarded as the end timing of one effect unit in the "slump effect (that is," Gase pseudo-ream "effect)", and the value of the dummy reserved ball number counter 223c is subtracted by 1. At the same time, the shift process is configured to be executed in the hold display information storage area 223e. By configuring in this way, the start and end of the "slump effect" and the shift display of the reserved symbol and the executed symbol are displayed while being aligned, so that the effect is as if the variable effect was completed once. It is possible to execute the "slump effect" more times than the actual number of variable effects without discomfort.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 of the first embodiment is the "slump effect" in the "slump effect" executed based on the previous start winning of the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a in the "slump state". If a variable effect is acquired based on a new start prize for the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a during the execution of the effect based on the extension time of, the "slump effect" of the extension time based on the previous start prize is being executed. Is. For this reason, in order to match each "slump effect" when performing an additional "slump effect" based on the new start prize, the remaining amount of the extended time once acquired based on the previous start prize (See S1422 in FIG. 39), and then clear the value of the slump effect timer 223g to "0" (S1423 in FIG. 39). Then, it is configured to reset the effect content of the "slump effect" based on the fluctuation time acquired based on the new start prize. Therefore, even if a variable effect is added due to a new start prize in the middle of the "slump effect", the end timing of the acquired variable effect can be synchronized with the end timing of the entire "slump effect". , The end timing of the variable effect and the end timing of the "slump effect" can be synchronized without performing complicated control.

Furthermore, when setting an additional "slump effect", it is configured to reset each effect unit that is performed for a fixed time from the last effect in the entire "slump effect", and when it is set again. The remaining time less than one production unit is supplemented by "development possibility production", which is a production that does not cause discomfort even if the production is interrupted in the middle, and the production time is flexible (there is a range). To set. In addition, the maximum effect time of this "development possibility effect" is configured to be equal to the extendable time that can be acquired. With this configuration, in the situation where the "slump effect" that is longer than the acquired variable effect is being executed, that is, during the execution of the "slump effect" based on the extended time, a new one is created in the middle of the "slump effect". Even if a variable effect is added due to the start prize, the effect time can be made consistent by the "development possibility effect" that can be executed within the width equal to or less than the extension time, and the acquired variable effect can be obtained. Since the end timing and the end timing of the entire "slump effect" can be synchronized, it is possible to provide an effect that the player does not feel uncomfortable without causing a discrepancy in the effect.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured so that the number of prize balls in the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a and the dummy winning opening 75 is the same three. With this configuration, the player cannot determine whether the prizes have been won in the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a or the dummy winning openings 75 based only on the number of prize balls paid out. Therefore, the player decides whether the effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 is a variable effect in the "normal state" based only on the number of prize balls paid out, or the "slump effect" in the "slump state". Because it is not possible to determine whether it is, even if the "slump effect" that is performed longer than the fluctuation time of the actual variation effect is performed, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable and awakening to the game. can do.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, once the "slump effect" is started, the main control device 110 side again changes the "slump state" until the extension time in the "slump effect" ends. Change to the "slump state" when a series of "slump effects" is completed without making any settings. That is, while the series of "slump effects" are being executed, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation effects has elapsed, and even if the demo effects are internally in the state, the change to the "slump state" is performed for a while. Is waiting. Therefore, in the main control device 110, a series of "slump effects" are completed, and then the "slump state" is set and the "slump effect" is set again. Therefore, the "slump state" and the "slump state" are set. It is not necessary to perform complicated control regarding the consistency with the "staging", and the processing load of the main control device 110 can be reduced even when the "slump staging" is performed.

Further, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the confirmation command from the main control device 110, the effect status in the third symbol display device 81 when the confirmation command is received (that is, during the variation effect or “slump effect”. Set the third symbol to be stopped and displayed based on (inside). Specifically, if the "slump effect" is not being executed when the confirmation command is received, the confirmation command is received when the variation effect is executed, so the display control device 114 is instructed to confirm the variation effect. Set the confirmation command for display. On the other hand, if it is determined that the "slump effect" is being executed when the confirmation command is received, the confirmation command is being received at the first stop timing of the "gase pseudo-ream 2" while the "slump effect" is being executed. Therefore, a display first stop command for instructing the display control device 114 to stop the first stop of the "Gase pseudo-ream 2" of the "slump effect" (that is, the stop of the left symbol column Z1) is set. .. In this way, when a confirmation command is received from the main control device 110, it corresponds to the effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 depending on whether the variable effect is being executed or the "slump effect" is being executed. The command can be transmitted to the display control device 114, and it is possible to provide an effect that does not cause a discrepancy in the effect contents and that does not give a sense of discomfort.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when an additional start prize is generated during the execution of the "slump effect" and the number of pending variable effects is "2" or more, the "slump effect" is "slumped". It is configured to execute a variable effect without executing "effect". With this configuration, in a situation where the effect of executing the "slump effect" is poor (that is, the number of pending variable effects is accumulated to a certain extent), the variable effect is executed without executing the "slump effect". Since it is not necessary to perform complicated processing for maintaining the consistency of the "slump effect", the program can be simplified and the processing load can be reduced.

Further, the tip portion of the holding device opening / closing plate 73a of the first embodiment is formed so as to have an inclined surface in a sharp shape, and when the holding device opening / closing plate 73a is tilted toward the front passage wall 72a, the holding device opening / closing plate 73a is said to be tilted. The inclined surface is configured to come into surface contact with the front passage wall 72a of the distribution ball opening 72. With this configuration, when the holding device opening / closing plate 73a is tilted, the holding device opening / closing plate 73a can be tilted toward the front passage wall 72a of the sorting ball opening 72, and the sorting ball opening 72 can be tilted. The ball that has flowed into the holding device 73 can be reliably guided into the holding device 73.

Further, in the first embodiment, the ball flowing into the distribution ball opening 72 is less likely to collide with the upper surface side of the tip portion of the holding device opening / closing plate 73a, and the holding device opening / closing plate 73a is tilted toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10. By being configured to collide with a surface (that is, the upper right surface of the tilted holding device opening / closing plate 73a; see FIG. 5C), the impact when the ball collides with the holding device opening / closing plate 73a is mitigated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the holding device opening / closing plate 73a from being damaged.

Further, in the first embodiment, the holding device 73 is configured to hold one ball, and the one ball is made to win a prize in the dummy winning opening 75 to give a predetermined game value, and in the “slump effect”. By entwining with the staging (display of the reserved symbol, which is a dummy hold display), not only the game value is simply given, but also the winning of the dummy winning opening 75 is related to the staging, so that the variation of the game is enriched. , It is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, since the above-mentioned interest can be achieved by the configuration in which one ball is held in the holding device 73, the configuration of the holding device 73 can be made more compact than the conventional holding device in which a plurality of holding balls must be held. can. Therefore, the installation area of the holding device 73 in the game area can be reduced, and the degree of freedom in board design in the game area can be increased.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and it is easy that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be inferred from. For example, the numerical values given in the above embodiment are examples, and it is naturally possible to adopt other numerical values.

In addition, it is naturally possible to combine and configure each configuration of the above embodiment with respect to any configuration of the modification shown below. Further, it is naturally possible to combine each configuration of the other one or a plurality of modifications with respect to the configuration of any of the modifications shown below. In these cases, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration. Hereinafter, the description will be made based on the code numbers of the parts used in the description in the first embodiment, but it is naturally possible to replace them with the code numbers of the same type or similar parts in other embodiments.

<Modification 1>
In the above embodiment, regarding the alternating distribution unit 71, the distribution input ball port 72, the holding device 73, the board surface return port 74, the dummy winning port 75, the distribution device 76, the left side route 77, the right side route 78, and the left side special figure winning. The mouth 77a, the right side special drawing winning mouth 78a, and the like were unitized into one alternating distribution unit 71. On the other hand, the members 72 to 78a may be configured as separate members, or the members 72 to 78a may be unitized so as to be different from the alternating distribution unit 71. With such a configuration, the number of parts increases, but the replacement of each member 72 to 78a at the time of failure becomes easy, and the efficiency of the maintenance work of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

<Modification 2>
In the above embodiment, one ball can be held in the holding device 73. On the other hand, two or more balls may be configured to be holdable. In this case, when the release condition of the reserved balls is satisfied (for example, a predetermined number of seconds have elapsed from the start of the "slump effect"), the reserved balls are all released at once. It may be configured to release a plurality of reserved balls one by one. In this case, it is possible to display a plurality of hold symbols that are dummy hold displays in the "slump effect", increase the number of effect units that can be executed in the "slump effect", and enrich the variation of the effect.

<Modification 3>
In the above embodiment, when a ball starts winning a prize in the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a in the "slump state", the "slump effect" is executed regardless of whether or not the variation effect based on the start winning is successful. Was there. On the other hand, if the acquired variation effect is a big hit, the "slump effect" may not be performed, and the "slump effect" may be performed only when the acquired variation effect is a loss. As for the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot, there are staging elements that are not in the fluctuation pattern of loss, such as the staging element of "re-variation". Therefore, when the "slump effect" is performed so as to match the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot, the processing becomes complicated and the control load may increase. Therefore, by configuring the "slump effect" to be performed only when the acquired variation effect is a loss variation pattern, it is not necessary to match with the jackpot variation pattern, which simplifies the process and controls. The burden can be reduced. In order to realize the above control, if the fluctuation effect acquired based on the start winning to the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a in the "slump state" is a big hit, the value of the main slump counter 203e is set to "0". It may be configured to perform a variable effect without performing a "slump effect" while clearing.

<Modification example 4>
In the above embodiment, in the "slump state", when the ball starts winning a prize in the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a, regardless of whether the variation effect based on the starting prize is correct or not, and in the case of "reach display". However, it was configured to perform "slump production". On the other hand, if the acquired variable effect is an effect mode for executing the "reach display", the "slump effect" is not performed, and only when the acquired variable effect is the "non-reach" effect mode, the "slump effect" is performed. It may be configured as. The fluctuation pattern including the "reach display" has various "reach display" staging elements, and the fluctuation pattern is wide-ranging. Therefore, when the "slump effect" is performed so as to be consistent with the fluctuation pattern including the "reach display", the processing becomes complicated and the control load may increase. Therefore, by configuring the "slump effect" to be performed only when the acquired variation effect is the variation pattern of the "non-reach" effect mode, the matching with the variation pattern of the effect mode for executing the "reach display" is performed. Since it is not necessary to take, the processing is simplified and the control load can be reduced. In order to realize the above control, when the variable effect acquired based on the start winning to the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a in the "slump state" is the effect mode including the "reach display", the main slump The value of the counter 203e may be cleared to "0", and the variable effect may be performed without performing the "slump effect".

<Modification 5>
In the above embodiment, when a ball wins a prize in the dummy winning opening 75, the reserved symbol is displayed in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6B) as a dummy holding display. On the other hand, on condition that a prize is won in another winning opening (for example, a general winning opening 63), an inflow to the out opening 66, a ball passes through the second entry opening 67, etc., a pending symbol is displayed as a dummy hold display. May be configured to be displayed in the cockpit display area Db. In addition to winning the ball (inflow), when a predetermined time has passed from the start of the "slump effect", or when the "slump effect" performs a predetermined effect (for example, an effect of dividing a reserved symbol into multiple pieces) is performed. As a result, the reserved symbol may be displayed as a dummy hold display. With such a configuration, the holding device 73 and the dummy winning opening 75 are not required, so that the number of parts can be reduced and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

<Modification 6>
In the above embodiment, the "slump effect" is not mentioned for the fluctuation pattern including the "pseudo-ream" effect and the "re-variation" effect element, but the variation including the "pseudo-ream" effect and the "re-variation" effect element. The pattern may be configured to perform a "slump effect".

<Modification 7>
In the above embodiment, the staging element of the "development possibility production" is configured to always start from the "first development possibility production". On the other hand, the start of the effect element of the "development possibility effect" may be configured to start from the "second development possibility effect" or the "third development possibility effect". By configuring in this way, it is possible to enrich the variation of the production and improve the fun of the game.

<Modification 8>
In the above embodiment, in the production element of "development possibility production", "first development possibility production"->"second development possibility production"->"third development possibility production" is developed in proportion to the passage of time. It was configured to change. On the other hand, it may be configured so that the change mode is not proportional to the passage of time. Specifically, for example, a pattern that maintains the state of "first development possibility production" at all times, or a pattern that changes to "first development possibility production" after changing to "second development possibility production". , A pattern that suddenly changes from "1st development possibility production" to "3rd development possibility production", or after changing from "1st development possibility production" to "2nd development possibility production" in "2 seconds", " Examples of the "second development possibility production" to the "third development possibility production" include patterns that change in "1 second". By constructing in this way, it is possible to enrich the variation of the production and improve the fun of the game.

<Modification 9>
In the above embodiment, the degree of development (content) of the "development possibility effect" is set according to the remaining time of the "slump effect". On the other hand, it may be configured to select the degree of development and the change pattern of the "development possibility production" according to the degree of expectation of a big hit. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the variation of the production and change the jackpot expectation according to the development content of the "development possibility production", so that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Modification 10>
In the above embodiment, the liquid crystal screen of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to perform a pseudo-breaking effect as a "development possibility effect" having a time adjustment function in the "slump effect". On the other hand, an effect that the player does not feel uncomfortable even if the execution time of the effect changes variably may be adopted as an effect for time adjustment in the "slump effect". Specifically, for example, a blackout effect in which the liquid crystal screen goes dark, a freeze effect in which the liquid crystal screen freezes on the same screen, and the like, the effect as if the third symbol display device 81 is broken is used to create a "development possibility effect". May be configured to do. In addition, the player can predict that a specific effect will be repeatedly executed, such as an effect in which the fluctuating symbol temporarily stops and continues to swing on the spot until the final stop, or an effect in which a reciprocating motion is repeated. It may be configured to perform "development possibility production". By configuring in this way, even if the "development possibility production" suddenly starts or is interrupted and replaced with another production, the time in the "slump production" can be reduced so that the player does not feel uncomfortable. It may be configured to be adjusted.

<Modification 11>
In the above embodiment, "development possibility production" and "whichever reach" are configured as production elements dedicated to "slump production". On the other hand, the "development availability effect" and the "either reach" may be configured so that they can be selected even in the "normal state" variable effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to enrich the variation of the production and improve the fun of the game.

<Modification 12>
In the above embodiment, once the "slump state" is reached, the "slump state" is changed to the "normal state" by winning a start prize. On the other hand, once the "slump state" is reached, the "slump state" may be maintained for a predetermined period (for example, a predetermined number of seconds or until the next big hit).

<Modification 13>
In each of the above embodiments, in the special symbol lottery, only one of "15R probability variation jackpot", "15R normal jackpot" or "2R probability variation jackpot" is given. On the other hand, a lottery of a jackpot different from the above jackpot (for example, "non-probability variable jackpot", "latent probability variable jackpot", so-called "sudden probability variable jackpot (2R probability variable jackpot)") or a "small hit" different from the jackpot May be configured to do. By constructing in this way, when a big hit is won, the game value given to the player is different, so that the game can be varied and various game characteristics can be realized to improve the interest of the game. be able to.

In particular, when a "small hit" is provided in the special symbol lottery, when the small hit is won, the opening / closing mode of the large winning opening 65a or the like similar to or similar to the big hit to which the "latent probability fluctuation state" is given shall be used. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the "normal gaming state" and the "latent probability fluctuation state". With this configuration, it is possible to create a playability that allows the player to guess which game state the game is in, and to improve the interest of the game.

The "small hit" is a lottery result in which the opening and closing of the large winning opening 65a and the like are executed, but unlike the "15R probability variation jackpot" and the "2R probability variation jackpot", the transition of the gaming state is not executed.

<Modification 14>
In each of the above embodiments, when a ball wins a prize in the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the like is acquired based on the winning timing, and the jackpot lottery is performed. On the other hand, instead of the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a, a plurality of predetermined winning areas are provided, and when a ball flows into the winning area, a game value corresponding to the winning area is given. May be good. Specifically, for example, the first winning area in which the first game value (for example, "7R time saving jackpot") is given by the inflow of the ball and the first game value higher than the first game value by the inflow of the ball. A second winning area to which a second game value (for example, "15R probability variation jackpot") is given is provided. Then, the driving mode of the driving accessory such as the electric accessory may be changed according to the gaming state so that whether or not the ball flows down to each winning area may be different. In addition, the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a and the above-mentioned winning area may be used in combination, respectively. With such a configuration, it is possible to enrich the variation of the game and contribute to the improvement of the interest of the game.

<Modification 15>
In each of the above embodiments, only when the "15R probability variation jackpot" or the "2R probability variation jackpot" is won, the so-called loop type game specification that maintains the "probability fluctuation state" until the next jackpot occurs is configured. .. On the other hand, regardless of which jackpot is won after the jackpot ends, the so-called ST type game specification may be configured in which a predetermined number of "probability fluctuation states" are given without exception after the jackpot ends. With such a configuration, it is possible to enrich the variation of the game and contribute to the improvement of the interest of the game.

<Modification 16>
In each of the above embodiments, the second symbol is variablely displayed based on the passage of the ball to the second entry port 67, and when the hit result is derived by the variable display, the electric accessory 79 is opened for a predetermined time. It was configured to be in a state. On the other hand, the electric accessory 79 may be configured to be displaced to the open state based on the entry of the ball into the predetermined entry means. With such a configuration, the playability of how to allow the ball to enter the ball entry means in order to open the electric accessory 79 is born, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Modification 17>
In the above embodiment, the stop display of the left symbol column Z1 of the "Gase pseudo-ren 2" in the "slump effect" and the final timing of the variable effect are configured to be synchronized. On the other hand, the stop of the fluctuation of some symbol (for example, the stop timing of the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the pseudo stop such as the billiard effect in the "reach display") is synchronized with the final timing of the variation effect. It may be configured as follows.

<Modification 18>
In the above embodiment, the "slump effect" and the acquired variation effect are only synchronized with the stop display of the left symbol column Z1 of the "Gase pseudo-ren 2" in the "slump effect" and the confirmation timing of the variation effect. Relatedly, until the final stop symbol appeared, the content of the variable staging was not suggested in the "slump staging". On the other hand, when the left symbol column Z1 of the "Gase pseudo-ream 2" in the "slump effect" is stopped and displayed, the result suggestion display suggesting the result of the variation effect may be performed. Specifically, when the result of the fluctuation effect is "reach display" or "big hit display", when the left symbol column Z1 of "Gase pseudo-ren 2" is stopped, the symbol is a peculiar stop action (for example, bound stop). Etc.) may be configured to be performed.

<Modification 19>
In the above embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 dynamically displays the first symbol, and the third symbol display device 81 is a decorative effect of the dynamic display performed by the first symbol display device 37. It was configured to perform a variable effect of three symbols or a "slump effect". On the other hand, the first symbol display device is displayed by displaying the fourth symbol different from the first symbol display device 37 on the third symbol display device 81 and synchronizing the fourth symbol with the dynamic display and the fluctuation of the variation effect. It may be configured to have the same function as 37. With this configuration, a series of symbols can be produced by only one display device (third symbol display device 81), and the number of parts can be reduced. Further, since the fourth symbol is synchronized with the dynamic display of each special symbol in the first symbol display device 37 and the fluctuation display of each special symbol in the third symbol display device 81, the player can see the player. For example, even if the fluctuation of the third symbol is temporarily stopped, blacked out, or frozen in the third symbol display device 81, the variation effect (dynamic display) can be achieved by confirming the execution mode of the fourth symbol. ) Is being executed or not. In addition, even when the "slump effect" is being executed, the fluctuation of the fourth symbol is synchronized with the dynamic display, so that the fourth symbol can be confirmed even while the "slump effect" is being executed. , It becomes possible to recognize the start and end of the dynamic display. Further, by displaying the number of reserved balls of the third symbol as the fourth symbol, it is possible to accurately grasp the number of reserved balls of the variable effect acquired by the start winning.

<Modification 20>
In the above embodiment, the hold symbol, which is a dummy hold display, is added and displayed without omission based on the ball entering the dummy winning opening 75. On the other hand, the hold symbol, which is a dummy hold display, may be additionally displayed only when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, for example, a hold symbol, which is a dummy hold display, may be displayed based on the ball entering the dummy winning opening 75 only when the ball is continuously fired, or a predetermined notice effect may be displayed. When the execution lottery is won, the hold symbol, which is a dummy hold display, may be displayed at the same time as the notice effect appears. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the variety of production modes such as the appearance pattern of the reserved symbol, which is a dummy hold display, and improve the fun of the game.

<Modification 21>
In the above embodiment, when the "slump effect" is executed, the ball held in the holding device 73 is released at the timing "6 seconds" after the "first effect" of the "slump effect" is started. Then, the ball is made to win a prize in the dummy winning opening 75, and the holding symbol which is the dummy holding display is displayed. On the other hand, the timing for winning the dummy winning opening 75 may be delayed from the above timing and set to the timing before the start of the "second effect" of the "slump effect". If the hold symbol, which is a dummy hold display, is displayed at an early stage, the player stops firing the ball (so-called stop hitting) due to the display of the hold symbol, and the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 decreases. There is a risk of doing so. Therefore, when displaying the hold symbol, which is a dummy hold display, the pachinko machine 10 is operated by preventing the player from stopping by displaying the hold symbol just before the second effect corresponding to the hold symbol is executed. It is possible to prevent the decrease.

<Modification 22>
In the above embodiment, when the variation effect is not executed in the third symbol display device 81, the process shifts to the "slump state", and during the "slump state", the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a are based on the start winning prize. It was configured to perform a "slump effect". On the other hand, in a situation where a special condition different from the above condition is satisfied, the system shifts to the "slump state" and the "slump effect" is executed based on the start winning of the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a. May be good. Specifically, for example, the game shifts to the "slump state" every predetermined time from the start of the game, or when the game state is changed, the game state changes and the game state changes to the "slump state". It may be configured to shift to the "slump state" when a prize is won in the winning opening. By configuring in this way, it is possible to enrich the variation of the production and improve the fun of the game.

<Modification 23>
In the above embodiment, the lottery information of the first symbol (third symbol), which is one special symbol, is acquired due to the winning of the game ball to the left special figure winning opening 77a or the right special figure winning opening 78a. Based on the lottery information, the first symbol display device 37 (third symbol display device 81) is configured to display the lottery result of the first symbol (third symbol). On the other hand, the dynamic display (variable effect) of a plurality of special symbols is configured to be executable, and the lottery information of the first special symbol is acquired due to the winning of the left special symbol winning opening 77a, and the right special symbol is obtained. The lottery information of the second special symbol different from the first special symbol due to the winning of the winning opening 78a may be acquired, and the lottery may be performed in each of them. Further, as a lottery method for a plurality of special symbols, a lottery method for preferentially executing one of the special symbols (so-called priority change) and a lottery method for executing the lottery in the order of acquired special symbols (so-called). , The winning order may be changed), or a lottery method (so-called simultaneous change) in which the acquired special symbols are drawn at the same time and in parallel may be performed.

<Modification 24>
In the above embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to additionally reset the “slump effect” when a variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 during the execution of the “slump effect”. Was there. On the other hand, it is configured to additionally reset the "slump effect" when the hold ball number command output at the time of a new start winning is received from the main control device 110 during the execution of the "slump effect". You may. Specifically, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command (that is, look-ahead processing), the jackpot random number counter C1 included in the hold ball number command and stored in the hold information storage area 223i. Etc., the same control as in S1418 to S1423 in the variation setting process (see FIG. 39) is performed, and the content of the additional "slump effect" is set. With this configuration, the contents of a series of "slump effects" can be reset when a new start prize (that is, prize 2) occurs during the "slump effect", and when a variable pattern command is received. It is possible to reduce the control burden in.

<Modification 25>
In the above embodiment, the "slump effect" is set without considering the definite display time in the variable effect (that is, the definite display time of the variable effect is "0"). On the other hand, the definite display time of the variable effect may be set to a predetermined time (for example, "1 second"), and the "slump effect" may be set based on the definite display time. In this case, by considering the fixed display time in the execution of the variable effect, it may be difficult to adjust the execution time and extension time of the effect element of the variable effect and the execution time of the effect unit of the "slump effect". By executing the "development possibility effect" for adjusting the remaining time, it is possible to adjust the variation time and extension time of the variation effect including the fixed display time and the execution time of the effect unit of the "slump effect". Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the production content is interrupted (freezes) when the "slump effect" is executed. Here, the definite display time of the staging unit in the "slump staging" and the definite display time in the normal variable staging are set to be the same or similar (for example, within ± 0.5 seconds, which makes it difficult for humans to recognize the difference). This makes it easier to recognize the effect unit of the "slump effect" as the execution of one variable effect. In this case, a plurality of variations (for example, 0.5 seconds, 1 second, 1.5 seconds, 2 seconds as the final display time) may be provided in the final display time in the variation effect.

<Modification 26>
In the above embodiment, the extension time is added to the fluctuation time of the acquired fluctuation effect, and during the total time between the variation time and the extension time, the third symbol display device 81 uses the “slump effect” instead of the variation effect. Was configured to run. On the other hand, an extension time is acquired for an effect that can be executed (for example, a big hit effect, a variable display of a normal symbol, an effect by a small hit, etc.), and during the total time of the effect time and the extension time, the above effect It may be configured to perform different alternative effects. With this configuration, it is possible to execute an effect longer than the acquired execution time even in a variable display of a normal symbol, a big hit effect, or a small hit effect, and the third symbol display device 81 operates. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by configuring the period during which the typical production is executed for a long time. In this case, a plurality of variations may be provided in the big hit effect, the small hit effect, and the variable display time of the normal symbol.

<Modification 27>
In the above embodiment, the main hold display and the dummy hold display are displayed as the execution symbol and the hold symbol, and the number of the main hold display and the dummy hold display is suggested to the player by the number of symbols. On the other hand, it may be configured to suggest the number of the main hold display and the dummy hold display to the player by a number. With this configuration, it is not necessary to secure a display area for displaying symbols for suggesting the number of main hold display and dummy hold display, and the degree of freedom in designing the screen composition in the third symbol display device 81 is increased. Can be improved.

<Modification 28>
In the above embodiment, the "slump effect" is configured to be performed across a plurality of variable effects. On the other hand, it may be configured to perform a series of effects such as "slump effect" straddling one variable effect and another effect. Specifically, for example, a series of effects may be performed across the variable effect and the jackpot effect, a series of effects may be performed across the variable effect and the demo effect, and the variable effect and the small hit may be performed. A series of productions may be performed across the productions. In this case, in the big hit effect or the small hit effect, a plurality of variations of the opening time are provided, and the series of effect times are changed according to the opening time, so that the series of effects can be varied and the game is played. It is possible to improve the interest of.

<Modification 29>
In the above embodiment, the main control device 110 manages the drive timing of the holding device 73, and based on the control of the main control device 110, the holding ball stored in the holding device 73 is released to win a prize in the dummy winning opening 75. I was letting you. On the other hand, the voice lamp control device 113 may be configured to manage the drive timing of the hold device 73 and release the hold ball stored in the hold device 73 based on the control of the voice lamp control device 113. good. In this case, for example, the out ball is stored in the holding device 73, and the ball is configured to enter the ball at the entry port other than the winning opening where the prize ball is generated. With this configuration, it is possible to perform an effect using the holding ball stored by the voice lamp control device 113, which has less restrictions than the main control device 110, improve the degree of freedom of the effect, and improve the interest of the game. Can be planned.

<Modification 30>
In the above embodiment, as the drive timing of the holding device 73, when a start winning is generated in the "slump state", the ball stored in the holding device 73 at the timing when a predetermined period elapses (6 seconds after the starting winning). Was released so that the dummy winning opening 75 could win a prize. On the other hand, as the drive timing of the holding device 73, the ball stored in the holding device 73 is released at the timing when the start winning is generated or immediately after the occurrence, or the timing when a predetermined effect is generated (for example, specific). The ball stored in the holding device 73 may be released at the timing when a notice or “reach display”) occurs.

<Modification 31>
In the above embodiment, the executable time of the "development possibility effect" is shorter than the execution time (that is, 10 seconds) of the "pseudo-ream" effect and the "gase pseudo-ream" effect (longer than 0 seconds and shorter than 10 seconds). ). On the other hand, the executable time of the "developable / non-developable effect" may be configured to be executable for the same time as or longer than the "pseudo-ream" effect and the "gase pseudo-ream" effect. By configuring in this way, the "pseudo-ren" production or "gase pseudo-ren" production can be replaced with "development possibility production", or the "development possibility production" can be replaced with "pseudo-ren" production or "gase pseudo-ren" production. It is possible to replace (change) with, to enrich the variation of the production, and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, a rule (restriction) based on the execution of the "pseudo-ren" effect and the "gase pseudo-ren" effect, for example, the rule that "reach display" is always executed when the "pseudo-ren" effect is performed twice or more. Also, the rule that if the "pseudo-ren" effect is performed three or more times, the "super reach" or higher effect is always executed, and the "gase pseudo-ren" effect is never performed three or more times in a row. If there is such a rule, by replacing the "pseudo-ren" production or the "gase pseudo-ren" production with a "development possibility production", a consistent production can be executed without violating the production rules. Can be done.

<Modification 32>
In the above embodiment, the condition for generating the "slump state" is set when the period during which the variable effect is not executed after the demonstration effect is entered is 10 seconds. On the other hand, as a condition for entering the "slump state", it may be configured to occur immediately after entering the demo effect or on the condition that the frame button 22 is operated by the player. In this case, the current state is set to the "slump state" on the condition that the frame button 22 is operated after getting tired of the current effect state such as volume change, light amount change, brightness fluctuation, character selection, background selection, etc. of the pachinko machine 10. It is possible to perform an unusual production for a player who is tired of the production state of the above, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 33>
In the above embodiment, in order to synchronize the drive of the holding device 73 by the main control device 110 with the "slump effect" in the third symbol display device 81 by the voice lamp control device 113, it is based on a command from the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to execute the “slump effect”. On the other hand, when an abnormality such as a command transmission error occurs, all the commands related to "slump effect" from the main control device 110 cannot be received accurately, and the command related to "slump effect" is only fragmented. Even in a situation where reception is not performed (for example, only a slump command), the voice lamp control device 113 may be configured to execute control related to the “slump effect”. In this case, for example, even if the dummy hold command is not received, the display control related to the dummy hold display may be performed, or conversely, if the dummy hold command is not received, the hold display may be performed. The content of the "slump effect" is adjusted and changed on the voice lamp control device 113 side, such as replacing the "pseudo-ream" effect that digests one with the "development possibility effect" that does not digest the hold display. You may. With such a configuration, there is no discrepancy in the content of the production, no production such as so-called breaking of the law due to the discrepancy in the content of the production is generated, and it is possible to prevent the player from making a mistake.

<Modification 34>
In the above embodiment, when performing the "slump effect", the last effect element in the "slump effect" is determined, and then the remaining effect elements are determined in order. On the other hand, the content of the "slump effect" may be determined in descending order of importance of the effect element.

<Modification 35>
In the above embodiment, the present hold display and the dummy hold display are displayed as individual hold displays of 1. On the other hand, the present hold display is configured by the main display of one character symbol, the dummy hold display is configured by the sub (auxiliary) display of the one character symbol, and the main hold display and the dummy hold display are one character. The hold display may be displayed so as to form a symbol. Further, the dummy hold display may be configured to be displayed by the decorative display related to the hold display. The decorative display related to this hold display is, for example, a symbol associated with one character symbol, a symbol attached to one character symbol, or a symbol capable of recalling one character. Any mode may be used as long as it is available.

<Modification 36>
In the above embodiment, the dummy hold display is digested in the "slump effect" so that the hold display is shifted at a timing different from the hold shift timing of the actual variable effect. On the other hand, the hold display may be performed at a timing different from the hold shift timing of the actual fluctuation effect even at a timing other than the “slump effect”.

In the above embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to give a display instruction to the display control device 114. The command may be directly transmitted from the control device 110 to the display control device 114. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 may be connected to the display control device 114, and a command for instructing the output of each voice and the lighting of the lamp may be transmitted from the display control device 114 to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 may be configured as one control device. By using these as one control device, the number of parts can be reduced and the cost increase of the pachinko machine can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, the variation of the third symbol (special symbol) that is suspended and executed when the ball is entered into the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a (starting prize) is changed or becomes a big hit during the "slump effect". Whether or not there is an effect or a "slump effect" has been described in the case of performing a "hold change notice" in the execution symbol and the hold symbol. On the other hand, among the variable displays of the second symbol that are suspended and executed when the ball passes through the second entrance 67 (starting prize), the one that hits (stops at the symbol "○") Whether or not there is a big hit during the variation effect of the third symbol by using the second symbol hold lamp 84, the third symbol display device 81, etc., and whether or not there is a "slump effect". Alternatively, the player may be notified instead. As a result, the player can grasp whether or not there is a winning variable display in the variable display of the second symbol being held or in the variable display of the second symbol being executed and pending. .. Therefore, it can be inferred whether or not the second symbol is a hit before the variable display of the second symbol is executed. Some gaming machines have improved playability depending on the presence or absence of a hit of the second symbol, and are particularly effective in such gaming machines.

In the above embodiment, the case where the demo effect is to stop and display the third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. , The third symbol consisting of the main symbol with a number or the main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semi-transparent state. Further, only the rear image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a back image completely different from the third symbol or the back image used in the variation effect may be displayed.

In the above embodiment, the case where the "holding change notice", which is one form of the continuous notice effect, is executed on the third symbol display device 81 on which the variation effect is performed has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko The machine 10 is provided with a fourth symbol display device different from the third symbol display device 81, and the fourth symbol display device is combined with the variation effect or the "slump effect" executed by the third symbol display device 81. By displaying the symbol, unlike the "hold change notice" or "hold change notice", a continuous notice effect (hereinafter, "hold change notice") that is executed across a plurality of fluctuation effects or "slump effects" is included. You may also execute (referred to as "continuous notice production"). In this case, the control of the fourth symbol display device may be performed by the display control device 114 or the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an accessory different from each movable accessory that operates according to various effects, and the accessory is operated in a predetermined mode in combination with the variable effect or the "slump effect" to continuously notify the pachinko machine. You may perform the production. Further, the continuous notice effect may be executed by outputting the sound for the continuous notice effect from the voice output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10 under the control of the voice lamp control device 113, or the lighting unit of the pachinko machine 10 may be executed. A continuous advance notice effect may be executed by lighting or blinking 29 to 33 in combination with the variable effect or the “slump effect”.

As a result, every time the variation effect or the "slump effect" (dynamic display) is performed on the third symbol display device 81 (and the first symbol display device 37), the symbol is continuously displayed on the fourth symbol display device. The player is expected to win a big hit by operating the accessory in a predetermined manner, outputting voice from the voice output device 226, or lighting or blinking the illumination units 29 to 33. You can have it. Further, the player usually keeps an eye on the third symbol display device 81 on which the variable effect or the "slump effect" is performed, and continues the game, but the fourth symbol display different from the third symbol display device 81 is performed. Since the continuous notice effect is performed by displaying the design by the device, operating the accessory, outputting the voice from the voice output device 226, or lighting / blinking the lighting units 29 to 33, the player is different from the usual one. It is possible to easily recognize that the production has been performed. In addition, the continuous notice effect can be easily continuously performed by simple control such as symbol display by the fourth symbol display device, operation of the accessory, voice output from the voice output device 226, or lighting / blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33. It is possible to make a notice production.

Further, if the continuous notice effect is performed by the sound output from the voice output device 226 or the lighting or blinking of the lighting units 29 to 33, the continuous notice effect is controlled by the voice lamp control device 113, so that at the time of starting winning. By causing the main control device 110 to perform the hit / fail determination and the lottery process at the start of the fluctuation, the voice lamp control device 113 to perform the continuous advance notice effect, and the display control device 114 to perform the variation effect or the “slump effect”. When the continuous notice effect is performed by the pachinko machine 10, each control device can share each process. Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the load from being concentrated on one control device, the performance required for the MPU of each control device can be suppressed to a low level.

It should be noted that the display of the symbol for the continuous advance notice effect on the third symbol display device 81, the display of the symbol for the continuous advance notice effect on the fourth symbol display device, the operation in a predetermined mode of the accessory, the voice from the voice output device 226. A continuous advance notice effect may be executed by combining at least two or more of the output and the lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33 and controlling each of them in conjunction with each other. This makes it possible to execute a wider variety of continuous notice effects. Further, a method of executing the continuous notice effect (display by the third symbol display device 81, display by the fourth symbol display device, operation of the accessory, voice output from the voice output device 226, lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33). , Or a combination of them), the continuous notice effect selected according to the game state ("15R probability change big hit", "15R normal jackpot", "2R probability change big hit", off) after the end of the continuous notice effect. A plurality of embodiments may be prepared.

In the above embodiment, the main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the number of reserved balls added by "1" when there is a prize (starting prize) in the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a. The case where the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203b in connection with the start winning prize are included as they are and transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 has been described, but the hold ball number command has been described. The type of the counter included in may be a part of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1, or may include the values of other counters. Further, when the main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired in connection with the start winning, the information indicating the value of each of these counters is included in the hold ball number command and notified. Instead, a command other than the reserved ball count command may include information indicating the values of each counter and notify the voice lamp control device 113 of these values. As another command, it may be a dedicated command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired with the start winning, or another information such as a fluctuation pattern command or a stop symbol command may be voiced. The value of each counter acquired with the start winning may be added to the command for notifying the lamp control device 113. As another command, when the value of each counter acquired in connection with the start winning is notified to the voice lamp control device 113, the value of each counter to be notified is changed to the variable effect corresponding to any number of holdings. Information indicating whether this is the case may be included. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 is included in the command in any of the areas 1 to 4 of the hold information corresponding to the hold count, based on the information regarding the hold count included in the command. The value of the counter can be stored.

In the above embodiment, the winning of the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a and the passage of the second entry opening 67 are each suspended up to 4 times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is 4 times. The number of times is not limited to, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of reserved balls for the variable effect or the "slump effect" based on the winning of the special figure winning openings 77a and 78a is numerically or divided into four areas in a part of the third symbol display device 81. May be displayed in a mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern) different by the number of reserved balls, and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37 and is held by the light emitting member. It may be configured to notify the number of balls.

Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variation effect or the "slump effect", which is the variation display of the third symbol, scrolls the symbol as the identification information in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The design is not limited to the above, and the design may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a horizontal direction or an L-shape. Further, the variable display of the symbol is not limited to the variable effect of the symbol, and for example, an effect performed by displaying one or a plurality of characters together with the symbol or by displaying various movements or changes separately from the symbol. Display etc. are also included. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each of the above embodiments, when the variation effect or the "slump effect" is executed, a case where all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed to the extent that the player cannot see them is displayed. Instead of displaying high-speed fluctuations, all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are reduced to an invisible degree and displayed, or all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are randomly displayed with a large number of white dots. It may be displayed as an image.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above-described embodiment. For example, once a big hit is made, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item or a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the big hit until multiple (for example, two or three times) big hits occur. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variablely displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined amount. With the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. It is possible to solve problems such as the burden on equipment and restrictions on the location of gaming machines due to the separate handling of medals and balls.

Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.
<Group A: Perform dynamic production over the set fluctuation time>
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game medium such as a ball enters the starting ball entry means while a dynamic display (variation effect) of a symbol or the like is performed by a display means such as a liquid crystal display device. , There is a case where the dynamic display related to the entry is suspended up to a predetermined number. Then, when the running dynamic display ends, the execution of the held unexecuted dynamic display starts.

In this dynamic display, when a special result other than the specific display result that can cause a big hit appears as part of the interest of the game, the symbol is changed again in the dynamic display, and the dynamic display is executed again. There is one that executes a pseudo-effect as if it was done (so-called "pseudo-ream" effect) and also performs an effect of whether or not a specific display result appears again (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 1). 2015-134027 (Japanese Patent Publication No. 2015).

However, in the conventional gaming machine, the content of the dynamic display becomes monotonous, and the content of the production cannot be unexpected. Therefore, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game from the conventional gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of the group A has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the interest of the game.

Acquisition means for acquiring lottery information (for example, jackpot random number counter C1) when a predetermined start condition is satisfied (for example, left side special figure winning opening 77a or right side special drawing winning opening 78a).
A determination means (for example, S401 of the variation start process (S307)) that makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means.
A selection means (for example, a selection means for selecting an execution time of dynamic display of identification information (for example, a variation effect of the third symbol) performed by the display means (for example, the third symbol display device 81) based on the determination result by the determination means. For example, the variable type counter CS1) and
A dynamic display execution means (for example, a voice lamp control device 113) for executing the dynamic display in the display means based on the execution time selected by the selection means is provided.
In a gaming machine that gives a player a predetermined gaming value when specific identification information (for example, "big hit display") appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means.
An execution determination means (for example, a main slump counter 203e or a demo command) capable of determining whether or not the dynamic display is being executed by the dynamic display execution means, and
When the lottery information is acquired by the acquisition means and it is determined that the dynamic display is not executed by the execution determination means, the execution time is longer than the execution time selected by the selection means in the display means. The gaming machine A0 is characterized by comprising a specific effect executing means (for example, a slump effect storage area 223h) that executes a specific effect (for example, "slump effect") instead of the time and the dynamic display.

According to the gaming machine A0, the lottery information is acquired by the acquisition means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the determination means makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, based on the determination result by the determination means, the selection means selects the execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information performed by the display means, and the dynamic display execution means is based on the execution time selected by the selection means. Causes dynamic display to be executed in the display means. Then, when the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means, a predetermined game value is given to the player. Here, the execution discriminating means is configured to be able to discriminate whether or not the dynamic display by the dynamic display executing means is being executed. Then, when the lottery information is acquired by the acquisition means and it is determined that the dynamic display is not executed by the execution determination means, the execution time selected by the selection means in the display means by the specific effect execution means. For a longer period of time, a specific effect is performed instead of the dynamic display. This has the effect of increasing the execution time of the effect in the display means, reducing the situation in which the effect is not performed in the display means, and improving the interest of the game.

The specific effect may be, for example, the same, substantially the same or related effect as the dynamic display, the same, substantially the same or related effect as the demo effect, or the same as or abbreviated as the big hit effect or the small hit effect. Examples thereof include effects that are the same or related, or that are completely different or unrelated to the dynamic display.

In the gaming machine A0
The specific effect executing means is
When the specific effect is executed, the extension time selection means for selecting a predetermined extension time (for example, extension time) (for example, S1406 of the variation setting process (S1213)) and
With the total time execution means (for example, slump effect timer 223 g) for executing the specific effect during the total time between the extension time selected by the extension time selection means and the execution time selected by the selection means. A game machine A1 characterized by being equipped with.

According to the gaming machine A1, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the specific effect is executed, the predetermined extension time is selected by the extension time selection means provided in the specific effect execution means. Then, the specific effect is executed by the total time execution means also provided in the specific effect execution means during the total time between the extension time selected by the extension time selection means and the execution time selected by the selection means. .. As a result, the specific effect can be executed for longer than the selected dynamic display execution time, and by increasing the execution time of the effect in the display means, the situation where the effect is not performed in the display means is reduced, and the game is played. It has the effect of improving the interest of the.

In the gaming machine A0 or A1
The dynamic display execution means is
In the dynamic display, a determination effect of whether or not the specific identification information appears or whether non-specific identification information different from the specific identification information (for example, "missing display" or a gassechance pattern) appears. (For example, when all symbols such as a "slow fluctuation" effect element, a "pseudo-ren" effect, a "gase pseudo-ren" effect, or a "normal reach" effect element are stopped), the determination effect execution means is provided.
The specific effect executing means is
In the specific effect, a plurality of times execution means (for example, the first effect and the second effect in the "slump effect") for executing the determination effect in a number larger than the number of the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means are provided. A game machine A2 characterized by being

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A0 or A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is determined whether the specific identification information appears or the non-specific identification information different from the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display by the determination effect executing means provided in the dynamic display execution means. The production is executed. Then, the plurality of times execution means provided in the specific effect execution means executes the determination effect in a number larger than the number of lottery information acquired by the acquisition means in the specific effect. As a result, in the specific effect, the number of determination effects that is larger than the number of the actually acquired dynamic displays is executed, and the player is made to have the illusion that many lottery opportunities have been obtained. It has the effect of improving the interest.

In the gaming machine A2
The multiple times execution means is
A first effect executing means for executing a first effect (for example, "Gase pseudo-ream 1") including the determination effect of 1.
After the first effect is performed by the first effect execution means, the second effect execution means for executing the second effect (for example, "Gase pseudo-ream 2") including the determination effect of 1 again, and the second effect execution means. Equipped with
The first effect executing means is
The first effect is completed within the execution time of the dynamic display selected by the selection means.
The second staging execution means is
The gaming machine A3, characterized in that the second effect is terminated when the total time of the execution time selected by the selection means and the extension time selected by the extension time selection means elapses.

According to the gaming machine A3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2. That is, the first effect including the determination effect of 1 is executed by the first effect execution means provided in the multiple times execution means, and the first effect is executed by the second effect execution means also provided in the multiple times execution means. After the first effect by the execution means is performed, the second effect including the determination effect of 1 is executed again. Here, the first effect execution means is performed so that the first effect is completed within the execution time of the dynamic display selected by the selection means, and the execution time selected by the selection means by the second effect execution means. And, when the total time of the extension time selected by the extension time selection means elapses, the second effect is finished. As a result, based on the establishment of the execution condition of the dynamic display of 1, the first effect and the second effect including the determination effect are executed in the specific effect, respectively, and the number of the dynamic display actually acquired is larger than the number of the acquired dynamic display. It is possible to perform a number determination effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved by making the player have the illusion that many lottery opportunities have been obtained.

In the gaming machine A2 or A3
The dynamic display execution means is
Based on the execution time selected by the selection means, a predetermined effect element (for example, "high-speed fluctuation" + "low-speed fluctuation", "gase pseudo-ream" effect, "pseudo-ream" effect, or "normal reach" effect element. Etc.), and the staging element selection means (for example, S1708 of the variable staging process (S1117)) for selecting at least one staging element is provided.
The multiple times execution means is
The gaming machine A4, characterized in that, in the specific effect, the same or similar effect element as the effect element that can be selected by the effect element selection means is executed.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A2 or A3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the effect element selection means provided in the dynamic display execution means selects at least one effect element from the predetermined effect elements based on the execution time selected by the selection means. Then, the same or similar effect element as the effect element that can be selected by the effect element selection means is executed by the multiple times execution means in the specific effect. This makes it possible for the player to have the illusion that the dynamic display has been performed more times (longer execution time) than the actual number of times the dynamic display has been executed, and it is as if many lottery opportunities have been obtained. By making the player think of it, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

"Same or similar" means that the time and content are all the same, the time is the same and the content is slightly different (color, composition, size, etc. are slightly different), or the content is the same and the time is slightly (slightly different). If it is an example of something that is different (a few seconds), and if it is an effect element with content and time that can be associated with a reference effect element, it falls into the above-mentioned "same or similar" category.

In any of the gaming machines A2 to A4
The dynamic display execution means and the specific effect execution means
Each of the plurality of display areas of the display means includes individual area change means (for example, left symbol row Z1, middle symbol row Z2, and right symbol row Z3) for changing and stopping the identification information.
The multiple times execution means is
A timing synchronization means (for example, "non-reach (for example)" that synchronizes the end timing of the execution time of the dynamic display selected by the selection means with the stop timing of the identification information in any of the display areas in the specific effect. The gaming machine A5 is characterized by comprising (long) "the determination timing of the effect mode and the stop timing of the left symbol row Z1 of the" Gase pseudo-ren 2 ").

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines A2 to A4, the following effects are played. That is, the identification information is changed or stopped in each of the plurality of display areas of the display means by the individual area change means provided in the dynamic display execution means and the specific effect execution means. Then, the timing synchronization means provided in the multiple times execution means synchronizes the end timing of the execution time of the dynamic display selected by the selection means with the stop timing of the identification information of any of the display areas in the specific effect. To. This makes it possible to make the specific effect executed instead of the dynamic display related to the dynamic display, and to recognize the end timing of the dynamic display even while the specific effect is being executed. It has the effect of being able to suggest to the player the relationship between the specific effect and the dynamic display.

In the gaming machine A5
The timing synchronization means is
In the second effect by the second effect executing means, the identification information (for example, the left symbol) in the display area other than the display area (for example, the middle symbol string Z2) for stopping the identification information at the end of the second effect. The gaming machine A6 characterized in that the stop timing of the column Z1) is synchronized with the end timing of the execution time of the dynamic display.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the second effect by the second effect execution means by the timing synchronization means, the stop timing of the identification information in the display area other than the display area where the identification information is stopped at the end of the second effect is the execution time of the dynamic display. Is synchronized with the end timing of. As a result, the stop timing of the identification information of the display area that is stopped other than the end timing of the specific effect is related to the stop timing of the dynamic display, and the end timing of the dynamic display is recognized even during the execution of the specific effect. This has the effect of being able to suggest to the player the relationship between the specific effect and the dynamic display.

In any of the gaming machines A0 to A6
The specific effect executing means is
When it is determined by the determination means that the specific identification information is not displayed, it is characterized by including a loss-time execution means (for example, S1405 of the variation setting process (S1213)) for executing the specific effect. Game machine A7.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines A0 to A6, the following effects are played. That is, when the determination means determines that the specific identification information is not displayed by the loss execution means provided in the specific effect execution means, the specific effect is executed. As a result, even if the game value is not given because the specific identification information does not appear in the dynamic display, the specific effect is performed in the display means longer than the acquired dynamic time, and the display means is dynamic. By reducing the number of situations where the production is not performed, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from awakening.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A7
The extension time selection means is
When the specific identification information appears, the gaming machine A8 is provided with an extension non-acquisition means (for example, S1405: Yes of the variation setting process (S1213)) for non-acquisition of the extension time. ..

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines A1 to A7, the following effects are played. That is, the extension non-acquisition means provided in the extension time selection means is configured so that the extension time is not acquired when the specific identification information appears. When the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display, the game shifts to a special game state (for example, a big hit) in which a predetermined game value is given immediately after the end of the dynamic display, and notification according to the special game state is given. It must be made. Therefore, even in the dynamic display in which the specific identification information appears, if the extension time is acquired and the specific effect based on the extension time is executed, the specific effect is interrupted in the middle with the start of the special gaming state. Therefore, the player may feel uncomfortable with the content of the production. Therefore, according to the gaming machine A8, when the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display, the extension time is not acquired. With this configuration, even when a specific effect is performed, the end timing of the acquired dynamic time and the end timing of the specific effect can be synchronized, so that there is no discrepancy in the effect. , There is an effect that the player can provide a production that does not feel uncomfortable.

In the gaming machine A8
The selection means is
In the dynamic display, a pre-stage selection means (for example,) for selecting whether or not to display the pre-stage identification information (for example, “reach display”) which is a combination of the identification information constituting a part of the specific identification information. , Stop pattern selection counter C3),
The extension non-acquisition means
The gaming machine A9, characterized in that the extension time is not acquired when the previous stage identification information is displayed in the dynamic display by the previous stage selection means.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the pre-stage selection means provided in the selection means selects whether or not to display the pre-stage identification information, which is a combination of the identification information constituting a part of the specific identification information, in the dynamic display. Then, when the previous stage identification information is displayed in the dynamic display by the previous stage selection means, the extension non-acquisition means is configured so that the extension time is not acquired. In the dynamic display including the previous stage identification information, it is general to perform a determination effect of whether the specific identification information appears or the non-specific identification information appears. Therefore, in order to execute the determination effect. A relatively long dynamic display execution time is selected. In such a case, lottery information may be newly acquired by the acquisition means during the dynamic time. Therefore, there is little need to perform a specific effect that is performed for a longer time than the acquired dynamic time up to such a case. Therefore, in the gaming machine A9, when the execution time of the dynamic display for displaying the previous stage identification information is selected, the extension time is not acquired. With such a configuration, there is an effect that the effect time in the display means is not lengthened more than necessary and the player can be prevented from being awakened to the game.

<Group B: Converting a variable effect of loss to a chance-up effect>
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game medium such as a ball enters the starting ball entry means while a dynamic display (variation effect) of a symbol or the like is performed by a display means such as a liquid crystal display device. , There is a case where the dynamic display related to the entry is suspended up to a predetermined number. Then, when the running dynamic display ends, the execution of the held unexecuted dynamic display starts.

In this dynamic display, when a special result other than the specific display result that can cause a big hit appears as part of the interest of the game, the symbol is changed again in the dynamic display, and the dynamic display is executed again. By performing a pseudo-effect (so-called "pseudo-ream" effect) as if it was done, and performing a special effect as if a judgment was made in multiple dynamic displays, the expectation for a big hit is amplified. (For example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-134827)).

However, in the conventional gaming machine, if the predetermined production lottery is not won, even the special production such as the above-mentioned "pseudo-ream" production is not executed, and the content of the dynamic display becomes monotonous, which creates unexpectedness in the production content. There wasn't. Therefore, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game from the conventional gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The invention of the group B has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the interest of the game.

Acquisition means for acquiring lottery information (for example, jackpot random number counter C1) when a predetermined start condition is satisfied (for example, left side special figure winning opening 77a or right side special drawing winning opening 78a).
A determination means (for example, S401 of the variation start process (S307)) that makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means.
A selection means (for example, a selection means for selecting an effect pattern for dynamic display of identification information (for example, a variation effect of the third symbol) performed by the display means (for example, the third symbol display device 81) based on the determination result by the determination means. For example, the variable type counter CS1) and
A dynamic display executing means (for example, a voice lamp control device 113) for executing the dynamic display in the display means based on the effect pattern selected by the selection means is provided.
In a gaming machine that gives a player a predetermined gaming value when specific identification information (for example, "big hit display") appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means.
When the specific identification information appears, a predetermined event effect (for example, a "gase pseudo-ream" effect, a "pseudo-ream" effect, or an effect element including a "reach display") is executed in the dynamic display. Possible event production execution means and
An execution determination means (for example, a main slump counter 203e or a demo command) capable of determining whether or not the dynamic display is being executed by the dynamic display execution means, and
When it is determined by the execution determination means that the dynamic display is not executed, and the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means does not show the specific identification information, the display means performs the operation. The gaming machine B0 is characterized by comprising a specific effect executing means (for example, slump effect storage area 223h) for executing the event effect as a specific effect (for example, "slump effect") instead of the target display.

According to the gaming machine B0, the acquisition means acquires the lottery information when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the determination means makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, based on the determination result by the determination means, the selection means selects the effect pattern of the dynamic display of the identification information performed by the display means, and the dynamic display execution means is based on the effect pattern selected by the selection means. Causes dynamic display to be executed in the display means. Then, when the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means, a predetermined game value is given to the player. Here, when the specific identification information appears by the event effect execution means, a predetermined event effect can be executed in the dynamic display, and the execution determination means executes the dynamic display by the dynamic display execution means. It is configured so that it can be determined whether or not it is done. Then, when it is determined by the execution determination means that the dynamic display is not executed, and the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means does not show the specific identification information, the specific effect execution means causes the display means to display the specific identification information. An event effect is executed as a specific effect instead of the dynamic display. As a result, for example, even if the specific identification information does not appear and the game value cannot be expected to be given, and even if the event effect is not executed in the execution lottery, it is determined that the dynamic display is not executed. If this is the case, the event effect can be executed as a specific effect, and the appearance of the event effect makes the player expect the appearance of the specific identification information, and the effect that the interest of the game can be improved. There is.

The "event effect" is, for example, an identification information in addition to an effect unit that can be executed in a dynamic display such as an effect element including a "gase pseudo-ren" effect, a "pseudo-ren" effect, or a "reach display". It may be an effect of displaying a different suggestion symbol (preliminary symbol) or an effect of changing the background symbol displayed in the display means.

In the gaming machine B0
The event production execution means is
As the event effect, a development suggestion effect (for example, "Gase pseudo-ren") as to whether or not a development suggestion symbol (for example, stop of a chance eye symbol) suggesting that the dynamic display is continuously executed appears. A gaming machine B1 characterized by performing an "effect" or "pseudo-ream" effect).

According to the gaming machine B1, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the event effect execution means executes the development suggestion effect of whether or not the development suggestion symbol suggesting that the dynamic display is continuously executed appears as the event effect. As a result, even when the specific identification information does not appear and the game value cannot be expected to be given, it is possible to execute the development suggestion effect of whether or not the dynamic display is continued as the specific effect. The appearance of the suggestion effect has the effect of making the player expect that the dynamic display will continue and the appearance of the specific identification information, and improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine B0 or B1
The specific effect executing means is
As the specific effect, a plurality of execution means (for example, "Gase pseudo-ren 1" and "Gase pseudo-ren 2" in "slump effect") for executing the event effect at least twice or more are provided. Game machine B2 to play.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B0 or B1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the event effect is executed twice or more as the specific effect by the multiple execution means provided in the specific effect execution means. As a result, by executing the event production multiple times, it is possible to make the player expect whether or not the specific identification information appears by the appearance of each event production, and to improve the interest of the game. effective.

In the gaming machine B2
A time selection means (for example, variation type counter CS1) for selecting the execution time of the dynamic display based on the determination result by the determination means is provided.
The multiple execution means
A destination execution means (for example, execution of "Gase pseudo-ream 1") that executes the event effect within the execution time of the dynamic display selected by the time selection means.
A post-execution means (for example, "Gase pseudo-ream") that executes the event effect after the event effect by the prior execution means and exceeds the execution time of the dynamic display selected by the time selection means. 2 ”), and the gaming machine B3.

According to the gaming machine B3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B2. That is, the time selection means selects the execution time of the dynamic display based on the determination result by the determination means. Then, the earlier execution means provided in the multiple execution means executes the previous event effect within the execution time of the dynamic display selected by the time selection means, and the post-execution means also provided in the multiple execution means. As a result, the subsequent event production is executed beyond the execution time of the dynamic display selected by the time selection means. As a result, even if the game value is not given due to the fact that the specific identification information does not appear in the dynamic display, the event is produced multiple times and the effect is produced in the display means longer than the acquired dynamic time. There is an effect that the player can be prevented from awakening by reducing the situation where the dynamic effect is not performed in the display means.

In the gaming machine B3
The multiple execution means
When the event effect is executed later by the post-execution means, the extension time selection means (for example, S1406 of the variation setting process (S1213)) that selects a predetermined extension time (for example, the extension time) is used.
A total time execution means (for example, a slump) that executes the event effect a plurality of times based on the total time of the extension time selected by the extension time selection means and the execution time selected by the time selection time. A game machine B4 characterized by having a production timer (223 g) and.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the post-execution means executes the later event effect by the extension time selection means provided in the execution means a plurality of times, a predetermined extension time is acquired. Then, based on the total time of the extension time selected by the extension time selection means and the execution time selected by the time selection means, the event production is executed a plurality of times by the total time execution means. As a result, it is possible to execute the event effect that is equal to or longer than the selected dynamic display execution time and the number of execution times. It has the effect of reducing the number of situations that have not been performed, and by executing multiple event productions, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for a big hit and improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine B3 or B4
The dynamic display execution means is
Based on the execution time selected by the time selection means, a predetermined effect element (for example, "high-speed fluctuation" + "low-speed fluctuation", "gase pseudo-ream" effect, "pseudo-ream" effect, or "normal reach" effect A staging element selection means (for example, S1708 of the variable staging process (S1117)) for selecting at least one staging element from among the staging elements) is provided.
The multiple execution means
A gaming machine B5 characterized by executing an effect element that is the same as or similar to the effect element that can be selected by the effect element selection means.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines B3 or B4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least one effect element is selected from the predetermined effect elements based on the execution time selected by the time selection means by the effect element selection means provided in the dynamic display execution means. Then, the same or similar effect element as the effect element that can be selected by the effect element selection means is executed by the multiple times execution means. This makes it possible for the player to have the illusion that the dynamic display has been performed more times (longer execution time) than the actual number of times the dynamic display has been executed, and it is as if many lottery opportunities have been obtained. By making the player think of it, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

"Same or similar" means that the time and content are all the same, the time is the same and the content is slightly different (color, composition, size, etc. are slightly different), or the content is the same and the time is slightly (slightly different). If it is an example of something that is different (a few seconds), and if it is an effect element with content and time that can be associated with a reference effect element, it falls into the above-mentioned "same or similar" category.

In any of the gaming machines B3 to B5
The dynamic display execution means and the specific effect execution means
Each of the plurality of display areas of the display means includes individual area change means (for example, left symbol row Z1, middle symbol row Z2, and right symbol row Z3) for changing and stopping the identification information.
The multiple times execution means is
A timing synchronization means (for example, ". The gaming machine B6 is characterized by having "non-reach (long)" effect determination timing and "gase pseudo-ren 2" left symbol row Z1 stop timing (synchronized).

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines B3 to B5, the following effects are played. That is, the identification information is changed or stopped in each of the plurality of display areas of the display means by the individual area change means provided in the dynamic display execution means and the specific effect execution means. Then, the end timing of the execution time of the dynamic display selected by the time selection means by the timing synchronization means provided in the multiple times execution means, and the stop timing of any of the identification information in the event production by the multiple times execution means. Is synchronized. This makes it possible to relate the dynamic display and the event production by the multiple execution means, and to recognize the end timing of the dynamic display even during the execution of the event production by the multiple execution means. There is an effect that it is possible to suggest to the player the relationship between the event production by the multiple execution means and the dynamic display.

In the gaming machine B6
The timing synchronization means is
In the event effect after the post-effect execution means, the stop timing of the identification information (for example, the left symbol column Z1) other than the identification information (for example, the middle symbol string Z2) that is stopped at the end of the event effect is set. The gaming machine B7 characterized by synchronizing with the end timing of the execution time of the dynamic display.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the timing synchronization means synchronizes the stop timing of the identification information other than the identification information that stops at the end of the event effect with the end timing of the execution time of the dynamic display in the later event effect by the post-effect execution means. .. As a result, the stop timing of the identification information other than the end timing of the event effect by the multiple execution means is related to the stop timing of the dynamic display, and the end of the dynamic display even during the execution of the event effect by the multiple execution means. It is possible to recognize the timing, and there is an effect that it is possible to suggest to the player the relationship between the event production by the multiple execution means and the dynamic display.

In any of the gaming machines B0 to B7
The specific effect executing means is
The gaming machine B8 is provided with an effect changing means for changing the effect pattern selected by the selection means to the event effect.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines B0 to B7, the following effects are played. That is, the effect pattern selected by the selection means is changed to the event effect by the effect changing means provided in the specific effect executing means. Thereby, for example, even if the effect pattern is such that the event effect is not executed at the beginning, the event effect can be executed, and the appearance of the event effect causes the player to expect the appearance of the specific identification information, and the game can be played. It has the effect of improving the taste.

In any of the gaming machines B4 to B8
The extension time selection means is
The gaming machine B9 is provided with an extension non-acquisition means (for example, S1405: Yes of the variation setting process (S1213)) for non-acquisition of the extension time when the specific identification information appears. ..

According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines B4 to B8, the following effects are played. That is, the extension non-acquisition means provided in the extension time selection means is configured so that the extension time is not acquired when the specific identification information appears. When the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display, the game shifts to a special game state (for example, a big hit) in which a predetermined game value is given immediately after the end of the dynamic display, and notification according to the special game state is given. It must be made. Therefore, if the extension time is acquired even in the dynamic display in which the specific identification information appears and the event production based on the extension time is executed, the event production is interrupted in the middle with the start of the special gaming state. Therefore, the player may feel uncomfortable with the content of the production. Therefore, according to the gaming machine B9, when the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display, the extension time is not acquired. With this configuration, even when a specific effect is performed, the end timing of the acquired dynamic time and the end timing of the event effect by the multiple execution means can be synchronized, so that the effect can be achieved. There is an effect that it is possible to provide an effect that the player does not feel uncomfortable without causing a discrepancy.

In the gaming machine B9
The selection means is
In the dynamic display, a pre-stage selection means (for example,) for selecting whether or not to display the pre-stage identification information (for example, “reach display”) which is a combination of the identification information constituting a part of the specific identification information. , Stop pattern selection counter C3),
The extension non-acquisition means
The gaming machine B10, characterized in that the extension time is not acquired when the previous stage identification information is displayed in the dynamic display by the previous stage selection means.

According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the pre-stage selection means provided in the selection means selects whether or not to display the pre-stage identification information, which is a combination of the identification information constituting a part of the specific identification information, in the dynamic display. Then, when the pre-stage identification information is displayed in the dynamic display by the pre-stage selection means by the extension non-acquisition means, the extension time is not acquired. In the dynamic display including the previous stage identification information, it is general that a determination effect of whether or not the specific identification information appears is performed. Therefore, in order to execute the determination effect, a relatively long dynamic display is performed. The execution time is selected. In such a case, lottery information may be newly acquired by the acquisition means during the dynamic time. Therefore, there is little need to perform event production by a plurality of execution means that is performed for a longer time than the dynamic time acquired up to such a case. Therefore, in the gaming machine B10, when the execution time of the dynamic display for displaying the previous stage identification information is selected, the extension time is not acquired. With such a configuration, there is an effect that the effect time in the display means is not lengthened more than necessary and the player can be prevented from being awakened to the game.

<Group C: In the acquired production time, the production content is determined from the later production elements>
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game medium such as a ball enters a predetermined starting ball entering means, a display means such as a liquid crystal display device dynamically displays a symbol or the like (variable display). A gaming machine is known in which a jackpot game is executed when the display result indicates a jackpot.

In such a gaming machine, a plurality of types of dynamic display fluctuation patterns are provided in advance. Then, one variation pattern is selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns according to the winning timing of the ball to the starting winning opening, and dynamic display based on the variation pattern is executed in the display means.

In this fluctuation pattern, first, in the main control means that mainly controls the game, the execution time of the dynamic display is selected due to the entry of the ball into the starting winning opening, and the control signal based on the execution time is selected. Notifying the sub-control means, the sub-control means determines a detailed variation pattern based on the execution time (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-134827)).

However, in the conventional gaming machine, a wide variety of game settings must be made in the main control means, and there is a demand for how to reduce the control load in the main control means, and this point is still improved. There is room.

The invention of group C has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the control load of the main control means.

The main control means (for example, the main control device 110) that executes the control of the game, and
Sub-control means (for example, voice lamp control device 113) that executes game control based on a control signal from the main control means, and
It has a display means (for example, a third symbol display device 81) whose display is controlled by the sub-control means.
The main control means
Acquisition means for acquiring lottery information (for example, jackpot random number counter C1) when a predetermined start condition is satisfied (for example, left side special figure winning opening 77a or right side special drawing winning opening 78a).
A determination means (for example, S401 of the variation start process (S307)) that makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means.
With a time selection means (for example, a variation type counter CS1) that selects an execution time of dynamic display of identification information (for example, a variation effect of a third symbol) performed by the display means based on a determination result by the determination means. ,
A notification means (for example, an external output process (S101) for timer interrupt processing) for notifying the sub-control means of the control signal based on the execution time selected by the selection means is provided.
The sub-control means
A pattern selection means (for example, variation setting process (S1213)) for selecting one effect pattern from a plurality of effect patterns that execute at least one effect element based on the control signal notified from the notification means. ,
A dynamic display executing means (for example, variable effect processing (S1117)) for executing the dynamic display in the display means based on the effect pattern selected by the pattern selection means is provided.
In a gaming machine that gives a player a predetermined gaming value when specific identification information (for example, "big hit display") appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means.
The pattern selection means is
In the second half selection means (for example, "slump effect"), when the control signal is notified by the notification means, the second half selection means (for example, "slump effect") is selected first from the effect element executed in the second half portion of the dynamic display based on the control signal. Stored in the slump production storage area 223h from "Which da reach"),
Residual selection means for selecting the remaining effect element based on the remaining time obtained by subtracting the effect time based on the effect element selected by the latter half selection means from the execution time (for example, "Which one" in "slump effect" The gaming machine C0 is characterized by having "Da Reach" stored in the slump effect storage area 223h and then "development suggestion effect" stored in the slump effect storage area 223h).

According to the gaming machine C0, the main control means executes the control of the game, the sub control means executes the control of the game based on the control signal from the main control means, and the sub control means displays the display means. Be controlled. Then, the lottery information is acquired by the acquisition means provided in the main control means when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means by the determination means also provided in the main control means. Judgment is made. Further, the time selection means also provided in the main control means selects the execution time of the dynamic display of the identification information performed in the display means based on the determination result by the determination means, and is also provided in the main control means. The notification means notifies the sub-control means of the control signal based on the execution time selected by the selection means. Then, the pattern selection means provided in the sub control means selects one effect pattern from the plurality of effect patterns that execute at least one effect element based on the control signal notified from the notification means. The dynamic display execution means provided in the sub-control means executes the dynamic display in the display means based on the effect pattern selected by the pattern selection means. Then, when the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means, a predetermined game value is given to the player. Here, when the control signal is notified by the notification means, the effect element to be executed in the latter half of the dynamic display based on the control signal is selected first by the latter half selection means provided in the pattern selection means. .. Then, the residual selection means also provided in the pattern selection means executes the remaining effect elements based on the residual time obtained by subtracting the effect time based on the effect element selected by the latter half selection means from the execution time. As a result, the main control means only needs to select the execution time of the dynamic display and notify the sub control means of the execution time, and the sub control means executes the dynamic display in the latter half of the dynamic display based on the execution time. The production pattern is selected first from the production elements to be performed, and then the production elements are determined based on the remaining remaining time, and the content of the dynamic display is determined while maintaining the consistency of the series of dynamic displays. Can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the control load of the main control means can be reduced by executing the main control of selecting the effect pattern of the dynamic display in the sub control means.

In the gaming machine C0
The staging element is
Includes a fixed-time effect element (eg, a "gase pseudo-ren" effect, a "pseudo-ren" effect, or a "either reach" effect element) composed of a predetermined fixed time (eg, "10 seconds").
The execution time of the dynamic display selected by the time selection means is
The gaming machine C1 comprising a time that is an integral multiple of the effect time of the fixed effect.

According to the gaming machine C1, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a fixed time effect element composed of a predetermined fixed time is included as the effect element, and the execution time of the dynamic display selected by the time selection means includes an integral multiple of the fixed time. As a result, when the sub-control means selects the effect pattern of the dynamic display based on the notified execution time, when the execution time that is an integral multiple of the effect time of the fixed effect element is selected, the fixed time effect element It is possible to select an effect pattern for executing dynamic display by combining the above, and it is possible to execute an effect that is consistent with the execution time.

In the gaming machine C1
The staging element is
Includes static staging elements that do not change or have little change over time (eg, staging elements for "development availability", freeze staging, or blackout staging).
The residual selection means is
The gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the static effect element can be selected.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are played. That is, the staging element includes a static staging element that does not change or has little change over time. Then, the static effect element can be selected by the residual selection means. As a result, for example, even if the remaining time is less than the fixed time effect element of 1, by selecting the static effect element as the effect element of the remaining time, there is no or little change over time. Even when the production element is interrupted in the middle and the next production element is executed, there is an effect that the player can be provided with a production that does not feel uncomfortable.

Note that "no or little change over time" means, for example, a state in which there is no change for several seconds, or even if there is a change, the main content (for example, the entire background or the entire screen composition). An example is the case where the character pattern (character pattern, etc.) does not change and only the auxiliary content (for example, a part of the background, a part of the screen composition, etc.) changes.

In any of the gaming machines C0 to C2
The sub-control means
An execution determination means (for example, a subslump flag 223f) capable of determining whether or not the dynamic display is being executed by the dynamic display execution means, and
When the control signal is notified by the notification means and it is determined that the dynamic display is not executed by the execution determination means, the dynamic display based on the control signal notified by the notification means is used. The display means is provided with a specific effect execution means (for example, a slump effect storage area 223h) that executes a specific effect (for example, “slump effect”) instead of the dynamic display for a time longer than the execution time of the above. A game machine C3 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines C0 to C2, the following effects are played. That is, the execution discriminating means provided in the sub-control means can determine whether or not the dynamic display by the dynamic display executing means is executed. Then, when the control signal is notified by the notification means and it is determined that the dynamic display is not executed by the execution determination means, the dynamic display based on the control signal notified by the notification means by the specific effect execution means is performed. In the display means, a specific effect is executed instead of the dynamic display for a time longer than the display execution time. This has the effect of increasing the execution time of the effect in the display means, reducing the situation in which the effect is not performed in the display means, and improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine C3
The specific effect executing means is
When the specific effect is executed, the additional time selection means (for example, S1406 of the variation setting process (S1213)) that selects a predetermined additional time (for example, an extension time) is used.
Total time execution means (for example, slump effect timer 223 g) for executing the specific effect during the total time between the additional time selected by the additional time selection means and the execution time selected by the time selection means. And, a game machine C4 characterized by being equipped with.

According to the gaming machine C4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C3. That is, when the specific effect is executed, the predetermined additional time is selected by the additional time selection means provided in the specific effect execution means. Then, the specific effect is executed by the total time execution means also provided in the specific effect execution means during the total time between the additional time selected by the additional time selection means and the execution time selected by the selection means. .. As a result, the specific effect can be executed for longer than the selected dynamic display execution time, and by increasing the execution time of the effect in the display means, the situation where the effect is not performed in the display means is reduced, and the game is played. It has the effect of improving the interest of the.

In the gaming machine C4
The additional time selected by the additional time selection means is
The gaming machine C5, which includes a time that is an integral multiple of the effect time of the fixed effect.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine C4, the following effects are played. That is, the additional time selected by the additional time selection means includes a time that is an integral multiple of the fixed effect. As a result, when the sub-control means selects the effect pattern of the dynamic display based on the total time of the notified execution time and the added additional time, the dynamic display is executed by combining the fixed time effect elements. There is an effect that it is possible to select an effect pattern to be performed, and it is possible to execute a specific effect that is consistent with the execution time.

In any of the gaming machines C0 to C5
The latter half selection means
A determination effect selection means for selecting a determination effect (for example, an effect element of "Which da reach") whether or not the specific identification information appears or non-specific identification information different from the specific identification information appears. Prepare,
The residual selection means is
A determination transition effect selection means for selecting a determination transition effect (for example, a "pseudo-ream" effect in which a chance symbol or a gasse chance symbol appears) as to whether or not to shift to the determination effect.
A development selection means for selecting the determination transition effect or the development effect of whether or not to shift to the determination effect (for example, an effect element of "pseudo-variation" in which the chance development symbol or the reach formation symbol appears) is provided. A gaming machine C6 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines C0 to C5, the following effects are played. That is, the determination effect selection means provided in the latter half selection means selects the determination effect of whether the specific identification information appears or the non-specific identification information different from the specific identification information appears. In addition, the determination transition effect selection means provided in the residual selection means selects the determination transition effect of whether or not to shift to the determination effect, and the development selection means also provided in the residual selection means determines the determination transition effect or the determination. A developmental production is selected as to whether or not to shift to the production. As a result, the effect pattern is selected first from the effect elements executed in the latter half of the dynamic display in the sub-control means based on the above execution time, and then the effect elements are determined based on the remaining remaining time. It has the effect of being able to determine the content of the dynamic display while maintaining the consistency of the series of dynamic displays.

In the gaming machine C6
The time selection means is
The gaming machine C7 is configured so that a long execution time can be easily selected when the specific identification information appears.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the time selection means is configured so that a long execution time can be easily selected when the specific identification information appears. As a result, when the execution time of the selected dynamic display is a long execution time that makes it easy to execute many effects, a determination transition effect or a development effect with a high expectation of appearance of the specific identification information is executed. Since the appearance expectation of the specific identification information changes depending on the execution of the judgment transition effect or the development effect, there is an effect that the interest of which effect is to be shifted is created and the interest of the game can be improved. ..

In the gaming machine C6 or C7
The determination transition effect and the development effect are
A gaming machine C8 characterized by executing the same or similar staging elements.

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C6 or C7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the same or similar staging elements are executed for the determination transition staging and the development staging. This makes it difficult for the player to identify whether the judgment transition effect is performed or the development effect is performed, and the dynamic display is performed more times (longer execution time) than the actual number of times the dynamic display is executed. It is possible to give the illusion that the display has been performed, and to make the player think that many lottery opportunities have been obtained, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

"Same or similar" means that the time and content are all the same, the time is the same and the content is slightly different (color, composition, size, etc. are slightly different), or the content is the same and the time is slightly (slightly different). If it is an example of something that is different (a few seconds), and if it is an effect element of content and time that can be associated with a reference effect element, it falls into the above-mentioned "same or similar" category.

In any of the gaming machines C3 to C8
The specific effect executing means is
When the new lottery information is acquired by the acquisition means during the execution of the specific effect, the time acquisition means (for example, variation setting process) for acquiring the new execution time of the dynamic display based on the lottery information. (S1213) S1401) and
Residual summing means (for example, S1409 of the variation setting process (S1213)) that sums the execution time acquired by the time acquisition means and the remaining time of the specific effect being executed.
A game characterized by comprising a summing setting means (for example, S1411 or S1413 of the variation setting process (S1213)) for setting the specific effect again based on the summing time summed by the residual summing means. Machine C9.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines C3 to C8, the following effects are played. That is, when new lottery information is acquired by the acquisition means during the execution of the specific effect by the time acquisition means provided in the specific effect execution means, the execution time of the new dynamic display is based on the lottery information. The execution time acquired by the time acquisition means and the remaining time of the specific effect being executed are added up by the residual totaling means that is also provided in the specific effect executing means. Then, the specific effect is set based on the total time added by the residual total means by the total setting means also provided in the specific effect execution means. As a result, even if the execution time of a new dynamic display is acquired during the execution of the specific effect, by setting the content of the specific effect again, the consistency between the specific effect being executed and the execution time There is an effect that the content of a specific effect can be set while taking the above.

In the gaming machine C9
The total setting means is
The gaming machine C10 is characterized in that the effect element executed in the latter half of the specific effect based on the total time is selected first by the second half selection means.

According to the gaming machine C10, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C9. That is, in the total setting means, the effect element executed in the latter half of the specific effect based on the total time is selected first by the latter half selection means. As a result, even if a new dynamic display execution time is acquired during the execution of the specific effect, the effect pattern to be executed in the latter half of the specific effect based on the total time is selected first. After that, there is an effect that the content of the staging effect can be determined while maintaining the consistency of a series of dynamic displays by setting the staging element again based on the remaining remaining time.

<Group D: Dummy hold display>
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game medium such as a ball enters the starting ball entry means while a dynamic display (variation effect) of a symbol or the like is performed by a display means such as a liquid crystal display device. , There is a case where the dynamic display related to the entry is suspended up to a predetermined number. Then, when the running dynamic display ends, the execution of the held unexecuted dynamic display starts.

In this dynamic display, when a special result other than the specific display result that can cause a big hit appears as part of the interest of the game, the symbol is changed again in the dynamic display, and the dynamic display is executed again. There is one that executes a pseudo-effect as if it was done (so-called "pseudo-ream" effect) and also performs an effect of whether or not a specific display result appears again (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 1). 2015-134027 (Japanese Patent Publication No. 2015).

However, in the conventional gaming machine, the above-mentioned pseudo-continuous production becomes monotonous, and the production content cannot be unexpected. Therefore, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game from the conventional gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of the D group has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the interest of the game.

Acquisition means for acquiring lottery information (for example, jackpot random number counter C1) when a predetermined start condition is satisfied (for example, left side special figure winning opening 77a or right side special drawing winning opening 78a).
A determination means (for example, S401 of the variation start process (S307)) that makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic display of the identification information (for example, the variation effect of the third symbol) performed in the first display means (for example, the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81) is executed. A dynamic display execution means (for example, a voice lamp control device 113) is provided.
In a gaming machine that imparts a predetermined gaming value to a player when specific identification information appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means.
A storage means (for example, a reserved ball storage area 203c) for storing the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number.
A second display means (for example, the cockpit display area Db) capable of displaying the effect number information corresponding to the number of the lottery information stored in the storage means, and
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, the second display means includes a pseudo display means (for example, a hold symbol which is a dummy hold display) for displaying pseudo pseudo-effect number information.
The dynamic display execution means is
In the dynamic display, a determination effect of whether or not the specific identification information appears or whether non-specific identification information different from the specific identification information (for example, "missing display" or a gassechance pattern) appears. (For example, when all symbols such as the effect element of "low speed fluctuation", the "pseudo-ream" effect, the "gase pseudo-ren" effect, or the effect element of "normal reach" are stopped), and the determination effect execution means.
A total number of staging execution means (for example, a slump staging storage area 223h and a hold information storage area 223i) for executing the determination staging in a number corresponding to the total number of the staging number information and the pseudo staging number information is provided. A game machine D0 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine D0, the acquisition means acquires the lottery information when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the determination means makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information in the first display means. Then, when the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means, a predetermined game value is given to the player. Here, the storage means stores the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number, and the second display means stores the effect number information corresponding to the number of lottery information stored in the storage means. Is displayed. Then, when a predetermined condition is satisfied by the pseudo display means, the pseudo display number information is displayed in the second display means. Here, whether or not the specific identification information appears or the non-specific identification information different from the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display by the determination effect executing means provided in the dynamic display execution means. The judgment effect is executed. Further, the total number of staging execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means executes the determination staging of the number corresponding to the total number of the staging number information and the pseudo staging number information. As a result, the pseudo-effect number information is displayed or deleted so as to be linked with the determination effect in which the specific identification information or the non-specific identification information appears, and the determination effect is actually executed even if the pseudo-effect number information is used. It is possible to create a sense of realism as if the dynamic display of is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game by executing an unexpected effect.

In the gaming machine D0
The means for executing the total number of effects is
Additional effect selection means (for example, variable setting) for selecting an additional effect (for example, "Gase pseudo-ream 2" in "slump effect") to be additionally executed when the pseudo effect number information is displayed by the pseudo display means. S1413) of the process (S1213),
The pseudo display means is
Before executing the additional effect selected by the additional effect selection means, a ball is placed in the dummy winning opening 75 before the execution of the pre-execution display means (for example, "Gase pseudo-ren 2") for displaying the pseudo-effect number information. A gaming machine D1 characterized in that a holding symbol, which is a dummy hold display, is displayed by entering a ball).

According to the gaming machine D1, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D0, the following effects are played. That is, the additional effect selection means provided in the total effect number execution means selects the additional effect to be additionally executed when the pseudo effect number information is displayed by the pseudo display means. Then, the pre-execution display means provided in the pseudo display means displays the pseudo-effect number information before executing the additional effect selected by the additional effect selection means. As a result, the pseudo-effect number information can be displayed before the additional effect to be additionally executed is executed. Therefore, for example, the additional effect is displayed even though neither the pseudo-effect number information nor the effect number information is displayed. Can be prevented from the situation where is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved while providing a consistent production.

In the gaming machine D0 or D1
A launching means for launching a game ball (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) and
A first ball entry means (for example, left side special figure winning opening 77a or right side special drawing winning opening 78a) on which a game ball launched by the launching means can enter is provided.
The acquisition means
The lottery information is acquired due to the entry of the game ball into the first entry means, and the lottery information is acquired.
The pseudo display means is
The gaming machine D2 is characterized by displaying the pseudo-effect number information due to the entry of a gaming ball into a second entry means different from the first entry means.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D0 or D1, the following effects are played. That is, a game ball is launched by the launching means, and the ball launched by the launching means is configured to be able to enter the first ball entry means. Then, the lottery information is acquired by the acquisition means due to the entry into the first entry means. Here, the pseudo display means displays the pseudo-effect number information due to the entry of the game ball into the second entry means different from the first entry means. As a result, it is possible to display pseudo-effect number information, which is the number of effects performed by the first display means, due to the entry of the game ball into the second ball-entry means different from the first ball-entry means. By entering the ball into the first ball entry means, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the effect number information is displayed. As a result, the actual dynamic display is executed even when the pseudo-effect number information is displayed based on the entry into the second ball entry means and the pseudo-effect is performed based on the pseudo-effect number information. It is possible to create a sense of realism as if it were. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game by executing an unexpected effect.

In the gaming machine D2
The second ball entry means is
The gaming machine D3, characterized in that it is arranged in the vicinity of the first ball entry means.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D2, the following effects are played. That is, the second ball entry means is arranged in the vicinity of the first ball entry means. This makes it difficult to recognize whether the game ball that has flowed down in the vicinity of the first ball entry means has entered the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means, thereby making it difficult to recognize whether the game ball has entered the second ball entry means. Even when the pseudo-effect number information is displayed based on the ball entry, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the effect number information is displayed by entering the first ball entry means. As a result, the actual dynamic display is executed even when the pseudo-effect number information is displayed based on the entry into the second ball entry means and the pseudo-effect is performed based on the pseudo-effect number information. It is possible to create a sense of realism as if it were. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game by executing an unexpected effect.

The term "neighborhood of the first ball entry means" means, for example, an area adjacent to the first ball entry means or, in the case of having a plurality of first ball entry means, an area between the first ball entry means. Alternatively, a position where both the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means can be visually recognized at the same time is exemplified.

In the gaming machine D2 or D3
A holding means (for example, a holding device 73) that can be changed into a holding state for holding a game ball launched by the launching means and a release state for releasing the held game ball based on the establishment of a predetermined release condition. Equipped with
The second ball entry means is
The gaming machine D4, characterized in that the gaming ball released from the holding means is arranged at a position where the ball can enter.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines D2 or D3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the holding means is configured so as to be changeable between a holding state in which the game ball launched by the launching means is held and a release state in which the held game ball is released based on the establishment of a predetermined release condition. The second ball entry means is arranged at a position where the game ball released from the ball can enter. As a result, the game ball held by the holding means can be entered into the second ball entry means based on the establishment of the predetermined release condition, and the pseudo-effect number information can be displayed. As a result, the reserved game ball can be immediately entered into the second ball entry means, and the pseudo effect number information is displayed while displaying the pseudo effect number information based on the ball entry into the second ball entry means. Even when a pseudo-effect is performed based on the above, it is possible to create a sense of realism as if an actual dynamic display is being executed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game by executing an unexpected effect.

In the gaming machine D4
The means for executing the total number of effects is
When the additional effect is selected by the additional effect selection means, a counting means (for example, a holding device drive timer 203 g) for counting whether or not it is time to display the pseudo-effect number information corresponding to the additional effect. , Equipped with
The holding means is
A release means (for example, a holding device solenoid 73f) for releasing the game ball held by the holding means when it is time to display the pseudo-effect number information according to the counting result by the counting means is provided. A gaming machine D5 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D4, the following effects are played. That is, when the additional effect is selected by the additional effect selection means by the counting means provided in the total effect number execution means, it is counted whether or not it is the timing to display the pseudo effect number information corresponding to the additional effect. Will be done. Then, when the release means provided in the holding means reaches the timing to display the pseudo-effect number information based on the counting result by the counting means, the game ball held by the holding means is released. Thereby, the timing of entering the game ball into the second ball entry means and the timing of displaying the pseudo-effect number information corresponding to the additional effect can be associated with each other. As a result, the actual dynamic display is executed even when the pseudo-effect number information is displayed based on the entry into the second ball entry means and the pseudo-effect is performed based on the pseudo-effect number information. It is possible to create a sense of realism as if it were. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game by executing an unexpected effect.

In the gaming machine D5
The means for executing the total number of effects is
A hold determination means (for example, a hold ball detection switch 73 g) for determining whether or not a game ball is held in the hold means, and
When it is time to display the pseudo-effect number information based on the counting result by the counting means, and the holding determination means determines that the game ball is not held by the holding means, the additional effect is added. The gaming machine D6 is provided with an effect changing means (for example, an effect conversion flag 223k) for changing the effect number information or the pseudo effect number information into a non-digestive effect that is not digested.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D5, the following effects are played. That is, whether or not the game ball is held by the holding means is determined by the holding determination means provided in the total number of effects execution means. Then, when it is time to display the pseudo-effect number information based on the counting result by the counting means by the effect changing means also provided in the total effect number executing means, the game ball is held in the hold means by the hold determination means. When it is determined that the staging is not performed, the additional staging is changed to a non-digesting staging that does not digest the staging number information or the pseudo staging number information. As a result, when the game ball to be entered into the second ball entry means is not held by the holding means, the pseudo-effect number information is not displayed, and the number of effects executed by the first display means and the second effect. It is possible to maintain consistency with the effect number information and the pseudo effect number information displayed by the ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be provided with a natural effect and the player can be prevented from awakening the game.

In the gaming machine D6
A storage determination means (for example, a hold display setting process (S1208)) for determining whether or not the dynamic display that displays the specific identification information is included in the lottery information stored in the storage means.
A display changing means (for example, a hold change counter 223d) that changes the display mode of the effect number information and the pseudo effect number information based on the determination result by the storage determination means is provided.
The effect changing means is
When the additional effect is changed to the non-digestion effect, the display changing means is provided with a change-time changing means (for example, a hold rank-up command) for changing the display mode of the effect number information. Game machine D7.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine D6, the following effects are played. That is, the memory discriminating means determines whether or not there is a dynamic display in which the specific identification information appears in the lottery information stored in the storage means, and the display changing means is based on the discriminating result by the storage discriminating means. Therefore, the display mode of the effect number information and the pseudo effect number information is changed. Here, when the additional effect is changed to the non-digesting effect by the change-time changing means provided in the effect changing means, the display mode of the effect number information is changed by the display changing means. As a result, even when the additional effect is changed to the non-digestive effect because the game ball is not held in the holding means, the display mode of the effect number information is changed and the player's expectation for the specific identification information is felt. By amplifying, there is an effect that the variation of the production can be enriched and the fun of the game can be improved.

<Group E: Hold shift before the lapse of fluctuation time>
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game medium such as a ball enters the starting ball entry means while a dynamic display (variation effect) of a symbol or the like is performed by a display means such as a liquid crystal display device. , There is a case where the dynamic display related to the entry is suspended up to a predetermined number. Then, when the running dynamic display ends, the execution of the held unexecuted dynamic display starts.

The pending number of this dynamic display is displayed by a predetermined pending symbol, and when the running dynamic display ends, the pending symbol corresponding to the unexecuted dynamic display is configured to be shifted (shifted). Has been done. With this configuration, the player is suggested to end the dynamic display that was being executed and the start of a new dynamic display, and the player is suggested to the remaining number of pending dynamic displays. (For example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2003-340046)).

However, in the conventional gaming machine, the shift display of the reserved symbol is monotonous, and it has not been possible to create unexpectedness in the production content. Therefore, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game from the conventional gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of the group E has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately improving the interest of a game by performing an unexpected effect. ..

Acquisition means for acquiring lottery information (for example, jackpot random number counter C1) when a predetermined start condition is satisfied (for example, left side special figure winning opening 77a or right side special drawing winning opening 78a).
A determination means (for example, S401 of the variation start process (S307)) that makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic display of the identification information (for example, the variation effect of the third symbol) performed in the first display means (for example, the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81) is executed. A dynamic display execution means (for example, a voice lamp control device 113) is provided.
In a gaming machine that imparts a predetermined gaming value to a player when specific identification information appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means.
A second display means (for example, a cockpit display area Db) capable of displaying information on the number of effects corresponding to the number of effects executed by the first display means.
Based on the acquisition of the lottery information by the acquisition means, the reserved symbol is added based on the winning of the first increasing means (for example, the left special figure winning opening 77a) for increasing (adding) and displaying the effect number information. Display) and
A first reducing means (for example, erasing the execution symbol based on the end of the variable effect) for reducing (erasing) the effect number information based on the end of the dynamic display by the dynamic display execution means.
Based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition different from the acquisition of the lottery information by the acquisition means, the second increasing means for increasing and displaying the effect number information (for example, holding based on the winning of the dummy winning opening 75). Add a design and display),
Based on the establishment of a predetermined second condition different from the end of the dynamic display by the dynamic display executing means, the second reducing means for reducing the effect number information (for example, "Gase pseudo-ream 1" in the "slump effect" The execution symbol is erased based on the end of the game), and the gaming machine E0 is characterized by the feature.

According to the gaming machine E0, the lottery information is acquired when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the determination means makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information in the first display means. Then, when the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means, a predetermined game value is given to the player. Here, the second display means is configured to be able to display the effect number information corresponding to the effect number executed by the first display means. Then, the first increasing means increases and displays the effect number information based on the acquisition of the lottery information by the acquiring means, and the first decreasing means increases and displays the dynamic display based on the end of the dynamic display by the dynamic display executing means. The number of production information is reduced. Further, the second increasing means increases and displays the effect number information based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition different from the acquisition of the lottery information by the acquiring means, and the second decreasing means causes the dynamic display executing means. The number of effects information is reduced based on the establishment of a predetermined second condition different from the end of the dynamic display. Thereby, the increase and decrease of the effect number information can be performed under conditions different from the start or end of the dynamic display. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide variations in the increase display and decrease of the effect number information, provide an unexpected effect, and improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine E0
A launching means for launching a game ball (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) and
A first ball entry means (for example, left side special figure winning opening 77a or right side special drawing winning opening 78a) on which a game ball launched by the launching means can enter is provided.
The acquisition means
The lottery information is acquired due to the entry of the game ball into the first entry means, and the lottery information is acquired.
The first condition is
A gaming machine E1 characterized in that a gaming ball enters a second entry means different from the first entry means.

According to the gaming machine E1, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a game ball is launched by the launching means, and the game ball launched by the launching means is configured to be able to enter the first ball entry means. Then, the lottery information is acquired by the acquisition means due to the entry of the game ball into the first entry means. Here, the first condition is the entry of the game ball into the second entry means different from the first entry means. That is, the number of effects information is increased and displayed based on the entry of the game ball into the second entry means different from the first entry means. This has the effect of providing variations in the display of the increase in the number of effects, providing unexpected effects, and improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine E0 or E1
An execution determination means (for example, a main slump counter 203e or a demo command) capable of determining whether or not the dynamic display is being executed by the dynamic display execution means, and
When the lottery information is acquired by the acquisition means and it is determined that the dynamic display is not executed by the execution determination means, the first display means has a plurality of specific effects (for example, "slump". A specific effect execution means (for example, a slump effect storage area 223h) for executing each effect unit of the effect) is provided.
The second condition is
The gaming machine E2 characterized by the end of the specific effect of 1.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E0 or E1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the execution determination means is configured to be able to determine whether or not the dynamic display by the dynamic display execution means is being executed, and when the lottery information is acquired by the acquisition means, the execution determination means displays the dynamic display. When it is determined that the specific effect has not been executed, the specific effect execution means executes the specific effect a plurality of times in the first display means. Here, the end of the specific effect of 1 is set as the second condition. That is, the effect number information is reduced based on the end of one specific effect different from the end of the dynamic display. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game by providing a variation on the reduction of the number of production information and providing an unexpected production.

In the gaming machine E2
A time selection means (for example, variation type counter CS1) for selecting the execution time of the dynamic display based on the determination result by the determination means is provided.
The specific effect executing means is
The gaming machine E3 is provided with a long-time execution means for executing the specific effect a plurality of times for a period longer than the execution time selected by the time selection means.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine E2, the following effects are played. That is, the time selection means selects the execution time of the dynamic display based on the determination result by the determination means. Then, the long-time execution means provided in the specific effect execution means executes the specific effect a plurality of times for a period longer than the execution time selected by the time selection means. That is, the specific effect is executed a plurality of times, which is longer than the execution time of the acquired dynamic display. As a result, by increasing the execution time of the effect in the first display means, it is possible to reduce the situation where the effect is not performed in the first display means and improve the interest of the game. In addition, the player will be awakened by maintaining consistency between the execution of the effect in the first display means and the increase and decrease of the effect number information displayed in the second display means, and providing a natural effect. It has the effect of being able to prevent this.

In the gaming machine E3
The long-time execution means
When the specific effect is executed, the extension time selection means for selecting a predetermined extension time (for example, extension time) (for example, S1406 of the variation setting process (S1213)) and
Total time execution means (for example, slump effect timer 223 g) for executing the specific effect during the total time between the extension time selected by the extension time selection means and the execution time selected by the time selection means. A game machine E4 characterized by being equipped with.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the specific effect is executed by the extension time selection means provided in the long-time execution means, a predetermined extension time is selected, and the extension time is selected by the total time execution means also provided in the long-time execution means. The specific effect is executed during the total time of the extension time selected by the means and the execution time selected by the time selection means. As a result, the specific effect can be executed for longer than the selected dynamic display execution time, and by increasing the execution time of the effect in the first display means, the situation where the effect is not performed in the display means is reduced. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine E3 or E4
The dynamic display execution means is
In the dynamic display, a determination effect of whether or not the specific identification information appears (for example, an effect element of "slow speed fluctuation", an effect of "pseudo-ream", an effect of "gase pseudo-ream", or an effect element of "normal reach". Equipped with a judgment effect execution means, which executes (when all symbols are stopped), etc.
The specific effect executing means is
The gaming machine E5 is provided with specific effect determination execution means (for example, the first effect and the second effect in the "slump effect") for executing the determination effect for each specific effect.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines E3 or E4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the determination effect execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means executes the determination effect of whether or not the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display. Then, the determination effect is executed for each specific effect by the specific effect execution means provided in the specific effect execution means. As a result, for each specific effect, a larger number of judgment effects than the number of dynamically acquired dynamic displays are executed to give the player the illusion that many lottery opportunities have been obtained. It has the effect of improving the interest of the.

In the gaming machine E5
The specific effect executing means is
A first effect executing means for executing the first effect (for example, "Gase pseudo-ream 1") for performing the determination effect of 1.
A second effect executing means for executing a second effect (for example, "Gase pseudo-ream 2") for performing the determination effect again after the first effect is performed by the first effect executing means is provided.
The second reducing means is
The information on the number of effects is reduced based on the end of the first effect by the first effect execution means, and the information on the number of effects is reduced based on the end of the second effect by the second effect execution means. A game machine E6 featuring.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first effect for performing the determination effect 1 is executed by the first effect execution means provided in the specific effect execution means, and the first effect execution means is executed by the second effect execution means also provided in the specific effect execution means. After the first effect by the means is performed, the second effect of performing the determination effect is executed again. Here, the second reducing means reduces the number of staging information based on the end of the first staging by the first staging executing means, and the number of staging based on the end of the second staging by the second staging executing means. Information is reduced. As a result, the player is given the illusion that many lottery opportunities have been obtained, and the number of effects of the determination effect in the first display means is consistent with the information on the number of effects displayed in the second display means. It has the effect of preventing the player from being awakened by maintaining and providing a natural effect.

In any of the gaming machines E2 to E6
The dynamic display execution means is
Based on the execution time selected by the time selection means, a predetermined effect element (for example, "high-speed fluctuation" + "low-speed fluctuation", "gase pseudo-ream" effect, "pseudo-ream" effect, or "normal reach" effect A staging element selection means (for example, S1708 of the variable staging process (S1117)) for selecting at least one staging element from among the staging elements) is provided.
The specific effect executing means is
The gaming machine E7 is characterized in that, in the specific effect, the same or similar effect element as the effect element that can be selected by the effect element selection means is executed.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines E2 to E6, the following effects are played. That is, at least one effect element is selected from the predetermined effect elements based on the execution time selected by the time selection means by the effect element selection means provided in the dynamic display execution means. Then, the specific effect executing means executes the same or similar effect element as the effect element that can be selected by the effect element selection means in the specific effect. This makes it possible for the player to have the illusion that the dynamic display has been performed more times (longer execution time) than the actual number of times the dynamic display has been executed, and it is as if many lottery opportunities have been obtained. By making the player think of it, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

"Same or similar" means that the time and content are all the same, the time is the same and the content is slightly different (color, composition, size, etc. are slightly different), or the content is the same and the time is slightly (slightly different). If it is an example of something that is different (a few seconds), and if it is an effect element with content and time that can be associated with a reference effect element, it falls into the above-mentioned "same or similar" category.

In any of the gaming machines E2 to E7
The dynamic display execution means and the specific effect execution means
Each of the plurality of display areas of the first display means includes individual area change means (for example, left symbol row Z1, middle symbol row Z2, and right symbol row Z3) for changing and stopping the identification information.
The specific effect executing means is
A timing synchronization means (for example, "non-reach") that synchronizes the end timing of the execution time of the dynamic display selected by the time selection means with the stop timing of the identification information in any of the display areas in the specific effect. (Long) ”The gaming machine E8 is characterized by having the determination timing of the effect mode and the stop timing of the left symbol row Z1 of the“ Gase pseudo-ren 2 ”).

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines E2 to E7, the following effects are played. That is, the identification information is changed or stopped in each of the plurality of display areas of the first display means by the individual area change means provided in the dynamic display execution means and the specific effect execution means. Then, the timing synchronization means provided in the specific effect execution means synchronizes the end timing of the execution time of the dynamic display selected by the time selection means with the stop timing of the identification information of any of the display areas in the specific effect. Will be done. This makes it possible to make the specific effect executed instead of the dynamic display related to the dynamic display, and to recognize the end timing of the dynamic display even while the specific effect is being executed. It has the effect of being able to suggest to the player the relationship between the specific effect and the dynamic display.

In the gaming machine E8
The timing synchronization means is
In the second effect by the second effect executing means, the identification information (for example, the left symbol column Z1) in a display area other than the display area (for example, the middle symbol string Z2) for stopping the identification information at the end of the second effect. ) Is synchronized with the end timing of the execution time of the dynamic display.

According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the second effect by the second effect execution means by the timing synchronization means, the stop timing of the identification information in the display area other than the display area where the identification information is stopped at the end of the second effect is the execution time of the dynamic display. Is synchronized with the end timing of. As a result, the stop timing of the identification information other than the end timing of the specific effect is related to the stop timing of the dynamic display, and the end timing of the dynamic display is executed even during the execution of the specific effect executed instead of the dynamic display. It becomes possible to recognize, and there is an effect that the relationship between the specific effect and the dynamic display can be suggested to the player.

<Group F: Relationship between slump effect and holding device>
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game medium such as a ball enters the starting ball entry means while a dynamic display (variation effect) of a symbol or the like is performed by a display means such as a liquid crystal display device. , There is a case where the dynamic display related to the entry is suspended up to a predetermined number. Then, when the running dynamic display ends, the execution of the held unexecuted dynamic display starts.

Further, as this type of gaming machine, there is a pachinko machine provided with a holding means for holding a ball launched in a gaming area. In this pachinko machine, the ball is held by the holding means, and the ball held by the holding means is released based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the operation of pressing the release button by the player), and the ball is moved to the downstream side. It is configured to enter the ball into the provided entrance, and is configured to give a predetermined gaming value to the player (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-95235)).

However, in the conventional gaming machine, the entry of the ball released from the holding means into the entrance and the dynamic display based on the entry into the starting entry means are not related, and the game is monotonous. I wasn't able to create any surprises in the production. Therefore, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game from the conventional gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of the F group has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game using a ball held by a holding means.

A launching means (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) that launches a game ball toward the game area, and
A first ball entry means (for example, left side special figure winning opening 77a or right side special drawing winning opening 78a) on which a game ball launched by the launching means can enter.
An acquisition means (for example, a special figure winning opening switch) for acquiring lottery information (for example, a jackpot random number counter C1) due to the entry of a game ball into the first entry means.
A determination means (for example, S401 of the variation start process (S307)) that makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means.
A selection means (for example, a variation effect of the third symbol) for selecting a dynamic display of identification information (for example, a variation effect of the third symbol) performed in the first display means (for example, the third symbol display device 81) based on the determination result by the determination means. , Variable type counter CS1),
The dynamic display execution means (for example, the voice lamp control device 113) for executing the dynamic display selected by the selection means in the first display means is provided.
In a gaming machine that gives a player a predetermined gaming value when specific identification information (for example, "big hit display") appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means.
A second ball entering means (for example, a dummy winning opening 75) that is capable of entering a game ball launched by the launching means and is different from the first ball entering means.
A holding means (for example, a holding device 73) provided above the game area of the second ball entry means and capable of holding a game ball flowing down the game area.
A release means (for example, hold) that releases the game ball held by the hold means based on the establishment of a predetermined first condition regarding the dynamic display (for example, "6 seconds" have elapsed from the start of the "slump effect"). Device solenoid 73f) and
When the game ball released by the release means enters the second ball entry means, the related display related to the dynamic display (for example, a hold symbol as a dummy hold display) appears. The gaming machine F0 comprising means (for example, a dummy reserved ball number counter 223c).

According to the gaming machine F0, a gaming ball is launched toward the gaming area by the launching means, and the gaming ball launched by the launching means can enter the first ball entry means. Then, due to the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry means, the lottery information is acquired by the acquisition means, and the determination is made by the determination means based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. Will be. Then, based on the determination result by the determination means, the selection means selects the dynamic display of the identification information performed in the first display means, and the dynamic display selected by the selection means is the dynamic display execution means. , Is executed in the first display means. Then, when the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means, a predetermined game value is given to the player. Here, a game ball launched by the launching means is configured to be able to enter a second ball entry means different from the first entry means, and a holding means provided above the game area of the second entry means. As a result, the game ball flowing down the game area can be held. Then, based on the establishment of the predetermined first condition regarding the dynamic display, the game ball held by the holding means is released by the releasing means. Then, when the game ball released by the release means enters the second entry means, the related display means causes the related display related to the dynamic display to appear. As a result, the game ball held by the holding means is released based on the satisfaction of the first condition in the dynamic display, and the released game ball enters the second entry means to be dynamically displayed. It is possible to make a related display that is relevant. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect by the effect in the dynamic display and the effect using the game ball held in the hold means, and improve the interest of the game using the game ball held in the hold means. It has the effect of being able to plan.

In the gaming machine F0
The first condition is
The gaming machine F1 is characterized in that a predetermined number of seconds have elapsed since the execution of the dynamic display was started.

According to the gaming machine F1, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first condition is that a predetermined number of seconds have elapsed since the execution of the dynamic display was started. That is, when a predetermined number of seconds have elapsed since the execution of the dynamic display is started, the game ball held by the holding means can be released and the ball can be entered into the second entry means. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect related to the dynamic display based on the entry of the game ball held by the holding means. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect by the effect in the dynamic display and the effect using the game ball held in the hold means, and improve the interest of the game using the game ball held in the hold means. It has the effect of being able to plan.

In the gaming machine F0 or F1
A storage means (for example, a reserved ball storage area 203c) for storing the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number.
A second display means (for example, cockpit display area Db) capable of displaying the effect number information of the dynamic display corresponding to the number of the lottery information stored in the storage means is provided.
The related manifestation means
As the related display, the gaming machine F2 is provided with an effect number information increasing means (for example, a hold symbol is added as a dummy hold display) for increasing and displaying the effect number information.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F0 or F1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means is stored by the storage means up to a predetermined number, and the effect number information of the dynamic display corresponding to the number of lottery information stored in the storage means is the second. It is configured to be displayable on the display means. Here, the effect number information is increased and displayed as the related display by the effect number information increasing means provided in the related appearance means. That is, when the game ball held by the holding means enters the second ball entry means, the effect number information, which is the number of effects of the dynamic display, is increased and displayed. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect as if the number of dynamic display effects is increased based on the entry of the game ball held by the holding means. Therefore, the fun of the game is improved by displaying a larger number of effects information than the actually acquired dynamic display effects and giving the player the illusion that many lottery opportunities can be obtained. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the gaming machine F2
The dynamic display execution means is
In the dynamic display, a determination effect of whether or not the specific identification information appears or non-specific identification information different from the specific identification information appears (for example, an effect element of "slow fluctuation", "pseudo-ream". It is equipped with a judgment effect execution means for executing (when all symbols such as "effect", "gase pseudo-ren" effect, or "normal reach" effect element is stopped).
The related manifestation means is
When the effect number information is increased and displayed by the effect number information increasing means, the determination effect increasing means for increasing the number of executions of the determination effect once (for example, "Gase pseudo-ream 1" in the "slump effect" and A game machine F3 characterized by being equipped with "Gase pseudo-ren 2").

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is determined whether the specific identification information appears or the non-specific identification information different from the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display by the determination effect executing means provided in the dynamic display execution means. The production is executed. Then, when the effect number information is increased and displayed by the effect number information increasing means by the determination effect increasing means provided in the related appearance means, the number of times the determination effect is executed is increased by one. As a result, the determination effect in the dynamic display is increased based on the entry of the game ball held in the holding means, and a number of determination effects larger than the actually acquired number of determination effects in the dynamic display is executed. By making the player feel as if he / she can get many lottery opportunities, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine F3, the related manifesting means is
When the number of times the determination effect is executed is increased by the determination effect increasing means, it is executed at the end of the increase time decreasing means (for example, "Gase pseudo-ream 1") that reduces the effect number information by one at the end of the determination effect. The gaming machine F4, which is characterized by having (erased a symbol).

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the number of times the determination effect is executed is increased by the determination effect increasing means by the increase decrease means provided in the related appearance means, the effect number information is reduced by one at the end of the determination effect. As a result, when the judgment effect is increased, the effect number information is increased by 1 as the judgment effect increases, and the effect number information is decreased by 1 as the determination effect ends, so that the actual determination effect is performed. It is possible to create a sense of realism as if the number of items is increasing. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game by executing an unexpected effect.

In any of the gaming machines F0 to F4
A first flow path (for example, a distribution ball opening 72), which allows a game ball launched by the launching means to flow down to the first ball entry means, is provided.
The holding means is
The gaming machine F5, which is provided in the first flow path.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines F0 to F4, the following effects are played. That is, the game ball launched by the launching means is flowed down to the first ball entering means by the first flow path. Then, the holding means is provided in the first flow path. As a result, it becomes possible to hold the game ball that can enter the first ball entry means by the holding means, and if the game ball can flow into the first ball entry means, the game ball is first held by the holding means. Can be put on hold. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the state in which the game ball is held by the holding means when the effect related to the dynamic display is performed based on the entry of the game ball held by the holding means. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect by the effect in the dynamic display and the effect using the game ball held in the hold means, and improve the interest of the game using the game ball held in the hold means. It has the effect of being able to plan.

In the gaming machine F5
The holding means is
A storage unit that can store game balls (for example, a holding ball holding unit 73b) and
When the game ball is not stored in the storage unit, a guide unit (for example, a holding device opening / closing plate 73a) for guiding the game ball flowing down the first flow path to the storage unit is provided.
The guide unit
A gaming machine F6 characterized in that when a gaming ball is stored in the storage portion, the gaming ball flowing down the first flow path is allowed to flow down to the first ball entry means side.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the game ball is configured to be able to be stored by the storage unit provided in the holding means, and the game ball is not stored in the storage part, the first flow path is also provided by the guide unit provided in the holding means. The game ball flowing down is guided to the storage section. Then, when the game ball is stored in the storage unit by the guide unit, the game ball flowing down the first flow path is flowed down to the first ball entry means side. As a result, when the game ball is not stored in the storage section, the game ball that can enter the first ball entry means can be held by the holding means, while the game ball is stored in the storage section. If so, a game ball that can enter the first entry means can be made to flow down to the first entry means side. Therefore, when the game ball can enter the first ball entry means, the game ball can be put on hold by the holding means first. Therefore, when performing an effect related to the dynamic display based on the entry of the game ball held by the holding means, the game ball can be always held by the holding means. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect by the effect in the dynamic display and the effect using the game ball held in the hold means, and improve the interest of the game using the game ball held in the hold means. It has the effect of being able to plan.

In the game machine F6
The first flow path is
It has a passage wall (for example, a side wall on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 of the distribution ball opening 72) through which the game ball flows down.
The guide unit
The gaming machine F7 is characterized in that when the gaming ball is guided to the storage portion, the tip portion of the guiding portion is in surface contact with the passage wall.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball is flowed down by the passage wall of the first flow path. Then, when the guide portion is in a state of guiding the game ball to the storage portion, the tip portion of the guide portion is configured to be in surface contact with the passage wall. That is, when the tip portion of the guide portion comes into surface contact with the passage wall, the game ball collides with a portion other than the upper surface portion of the tip portion. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the guide portion from being damaged by making it difficult for the game ball flowing into the first flow path to collide with the upper surface portion of the tip portion of the guide portion.

In any of the gaming machines F5 to F7
The first ball entry means is
Predetermined predetermined first ball entry means (for example, left side special figure winning opening 77a) and
A plurality of specific first ball entry means (for example, right side special figure winning opening 78a) different from the predetermined first ball entry means are provided.
The first flow path is
A distribution means (for example, a distribution device 76) for alternately distributing a game ball flowing down the first flow path to the predetermined first entry means or the specific first entry means is provided.
The second ball entry means is
A gaming machine F8, characterized in that it is arranged in an area between the predetermined first ball entry means and the specific first ball entry means.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines F5 to F7, the following effects are played. That is, as the first ball entry means, a plurality of predetermined predetermined first ball entry means and specific second ball entry means different from the predetermined first ball entry means are provided, and the distribution is provided in the first flow path. By the means, the game balls flowing down the first flow path are alternately distributed to the predetermined first entry means or the specific first entry means. Then, the second ball entry means is arranged in the region between the predetermined first ball entry means and the specific second ball entry means. This makes it difficult to recognize whether the game ball flowing down the first flow path has entered the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means, so that the ball can enter the second ball entry means. Even when the effect number information is displayed based on the above, it is possible to give the player an illusion as if the effect number information was displayed by entering the first ball entry means. As a result, even if the determination effect is performed based on the effect number information while displaying the effect number information based on the ball entering the second ball entry means, whether the actual determination effect is executed a plurality of times. It is possible to create a sense of realism. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game by executing an unexpected effect.

In the gaming machine F8
The holding means is
A gaming machine F9 characterized in that it is arranged on the upstream side of the sorting means in the gaming area.

According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the holding means is arranged on the upstream side of the sorting means in the game area. As a result, the game ball that can enter the predetermined first ball entry means or the specific first ball entry means can be held by the holding means before being sorted by the sorting means. Therefore, when the game ball can enter either the predetermined first ball entry means or the specific first ball entry means, in either case, the game ball can be put on hold by the holding means first. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the state in which the game ball is held by the holding means when the effect related to the dynamic display is performed based on the entry of the game ball held by the holding means. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect by the effect in the dynamic display and the effect using the game ball held in the hold means, and improve the interest of the game using the game ball held in the hold means. It has the effect of being able to plan.

In any of the gaming machines F0 to F4
A second flow path (for example, an out port 66) for flowing down a game ball that has entered the first ball entry means is provided.
The holding means is
The gaming machine F10, which is provided in the second flow path.

According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines F0 to F4, the following effects are played. That is, the game ball that has entered the first ball entry means is flowed down by the second flow path, and the holding means is provided in the second flow path. If the game ball that can enter the first ball entry means is suspended, the player feels a sense of loss due to the fact that the lottery information that may reveal the specific identification information is not acquired, and the game is played. There is a risk of awakening. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F10, a gaming ball that has entered the first ball entry means and is not used for subsequent games can be held by the holding means. Therefore, instead of the game ball that can enter the first ball entry means and is used for the game, the game ball that is not used for the game is made to enter the second ball entry means, and the effect and the holding means in the dynamic display are used. With the production using the reserved game ball, it is possible to enrich the variation of the production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game using the reserved game ball without awakening the player. , Has the effect.

<Group G: Performs a production that straddles multiple variable productions, and changes the production time according to the winning timing>
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game medium such as a ball enters the starting ball entry means while a dynamic display (variation effect) of a symbol or the like is performed by a display means such as a liquid crystal display device. , There is a case where the dynamic display related to the entry is suspended up to a predetermined number. Then, when the running dynamic display ends, the execution of the held unexecuted dynamic display starts.

In this dynamic display, when a special result other than the specific display result that can cause a big hit appears as part of the interest of the game, the symbol is changed again in the dynamic display, and the dynamic display is executed again. There is one that executes a pseudo-effect as if it was done (so-called "pseudo-ream" effect) and also performs an effect of whether or not a specific display result appears again (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 1). 2015-134027 (Japanese Patent Publication No. 2015).

However, in the conventional gaming machine, the content of the dynamic display becomes monotonous, and the content of the production cannot be unexpected. Therefore, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game from the conventional gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of the G group has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the interest of the game.

Acquisition means for acquiring lottery information (for example, jackpot random number counter C1) when a predetermined start condition is satisfied (for example, left side special figure winning opening 77a or right side special drawing winning opening 78a).
A determination means (for example, S401 of the variation start process (S307)) that makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means.
Criteria selection means for selecting a reference time for dynamic display of identification information (for example, variation effect of the third symbol) performed by the display means (for example, the third symbol display device 81) based on the determination result by the determination means. (For example, variable type counter CS1) and
A dynamic display executing means (for example, a voice lamp control device 113) for executing the dynamic display in the display means based on the reference time selected by the reference selection means is provided.
In a gaming machine that gives a player a predetermined gaming value when specific identification information (for example, "big hit display") appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means.
With a specific effect executing means (for example, slump effect storage area 223h) that executes a specific effect (for example, "Gase pseudo-ream 2" of "slump effect") performed over at least a part of each of the plurality of dynamic displays. ,
When the new lottery information is acquired by the acquisition means during the execution of the specific effect by the specific effect execution means, the timing determination means for determining the acquisition timing of the lottery information (for example, variation setting process (S1213)). ) S1419) and
A special effect setting means (for example, a special effect setting means (for example) that sets an effect time of a predetermined special effect (for example, "Gase pseudo-ream 3" or "development possibility effect") performed after the specific effect based on the determination result of the timing determination means. , S1420 to S1422) of the variation setting process (S1213), and the gaming machine G0.

According to the gaming machine G0, the acquisition means acquires the lottery information when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the determination means makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, based on the determination result by the determination means, the reference selection means selects the reference time for the dynamic display of the identification information performed by the display means, and the dynamic display is based on the reference time selected by the reference selection means. The execution means performs dynamic display in the display means. Then, when the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means, a predetermined game value is given to the player. Here, the specific effect executing means executes a specific effect performed across at least a part of each of a plurality of dynamic displays, and during the execution of the specific effect by the specific effect executing means, new lottery information is obtained by the acquisition means. Is acquired, the timing determination means determines the acquisition timing of the lottery information. Then, based on the determination result of the timing determination means, the special effect setting means sets the effect time of the predetermined special effect to be performed after the specific effect. As a result, the production time of the subsequent special production is varied according to the acquisition timing of the lottery information during the execution of the specific production performed over at least a part of each of the plurality of dynamic displays. It has the effect of increasing the variety of games and improving the fun of the game.

In the gaming machine G0
The specific effect executing means is
When the specific effect is executed, the addition time selection means (for example, S1406 of the variation setting process (S1213)) for selecting a predetermined addition time (for example, extension time) and
A total time execution means (for example, slump effect timer 223 g) for executing the specific effect during the total time between the addition time selected by the addition time selection means and the reference time selected by the reference time selection means. ) And,
The timing determination means is
A gaming machine G1 characterized in that it is determined whether or not the timing is such that the specific effect is executed based on the addition time selected by the addition time selection means.

According to the gaming machine G1, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine G0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the specific effect is executed, the predetermined addition time is selected by the addition time selection means provided in the specific effect execution means. Then, the specific effect is executed during the total time between the addition time selected by the addition time selection means and the reference time selected by the reference time selection means by the total time execution means also provided in the specific effect execution means. Will be done. Here, the timing determination means determines whether or not the timing is such that the specific effect based on the addition time selected by the addition time selection means is being executed. That is, when the specific effect executed by the reference time and the addition time is being executed in the portion performed based on the addition time, the subsequent special effects are determined according to whether or not the lottery information is acquired. The production time of the production is set. Therefore, since the effect time of the special effect can be set in consideration of the addition time, even if the specific effect based on the addition time is executed, the effect contents of the specific effect and the special effect are matched. There is an effect that the sex can be maintained and the player can provide a production that does not feel uncomfortable.

In the gaming machine G1
The specific effect executing means is
The elapsed time counting means (for example, S1421 of the variation setting process (S1213)) for counting the elapsed time of the specific effect based on the addition time is provided.
The special effect setting means is
When the timing determination means determines that the specific effect based on the addition time is being executed, the specific effect counted by the reference time and the elapsed time counting means based on the lottery information. The gaming machine G2 is provided with an elapsed time amount setting means (for example, S1411 or S1413 of the variation setting process (S1213)) for setting the special effect based on the elapsed time.

According to the gaming machine G2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1. That is, the elapsed time of the specific effect based on the addition time is counted by the elapsed time counting means provided in the specific effect executing means. Then, when the timing determination means determines that the specific effect based on the addition time is being executed by the elapsed time setting means provided in the special effect setting means, the reference time and the elapsed time based on the previous lottery information are determined. A special effect is set based on the elapsed time of the specific effect counted by the time counting means. That is, the effect time of the special effect changes based on the elapsed time of the specific effect. As a result, the production time of the subsequent special production is varied according to the acquisition timing of the lottery information during the execution of the specific production performed over at least a part of each of the plurality of dynamic displays. It has the effect of increasing the variety of games and improving the fun of the game.

In the gaming machine G1 or G2
The special effect setting means is
When it is determined by the timing determination means that the timing at which the new lottery information is acquired by the acquisition means and the specific effect based on the addition time is not being executed, the acquired addition time is subtracted. Above, S1420 of the addition / deduction setting means (for example, variation setting process (S1213)) for setting the special effect based on the reference time based on the lottery information and the reference time based on the lottery information later. ), The gaming machine G3 characterized by being equipped with.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines G1 or G2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is determined by the addition / deduction setting means provided in the special effect setting means that the timing at which the new lottery information is acquired by the acquisition means is not during the execution of the specific effect based on the addition time. In this case, after deducting the acquired additional time, the special effect is set based on the reference time based on the earlier lottery information and the reference time based on the later lottery information. That is, if the specific effect based on the added time is not executed, there is no discrepancy between the effect content and the effect time even if the additional time is subtracted for the subsequent special effects, and the effect time can be easily managed. Become. This makes it easier to manage the consistency of the production and the production settings, and at least according to the acquisition timing of the lottery information during the execution of the specific production that is performed over each part of the plurality of dynamic displays. Therefore, by providing variations in the production time of the subsequent special production, there is an effect that the variation of the production can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines G0 to G3
The dynamic display execution means is
In the dynamic display, a determination effect of whether or not the specific identification information appears (for example, an effect element of "slow speed fluctuation", an effect of "pseudo-ream", an effect of "gase pseudo-ream", or an effect element of "normal reach". Equipped with a judgment effect execution means, which executes (when all symbols are stopped), etc.
The specific effect executing means and the special effect setting means are
The gaming machine G4, characterized in that the determination effect is executed in the specific effect and the special effect.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines G0 to G3, the following effects are played. That is, the determination effect execution means provided in the dynamic display execution means executes the determination effect of whether or not the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display. Then, the determination effect is executed in the specific effect and the special effect by the specific effect execution means and the special effect setting means. As a result, by executing the determination effect also in the specific effect and the special effect, there is an effect that the variation of the effect can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G4
An execution determination means (for example, a main slump counter 203e or a demo command) capable of determining whether or not the dynamic display is being executed by the dynamic display execution means is provided.
The specific effect executing means is
When the lottery information is acquired by the acquisition means and it is determined that the dynamic display is not executed by the execution determination means, the reference time selected by the reference selection means and the addition time. The gaming machine G5, characterized in that the specific effect is executed until the total time, which is the sum of the addition time selected by the selection means, elapses.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines G1 to G4, the following effects are played. That is, it is possible to determine whether or not the dynamic display by the dynamic display execution means is executed by the execution determination means. Then, when the lottery information is acquired by the acquisition means by the specific effect execution means and it is determined that the dynamic display is not executed by the execution determination means, the reference time selected by the reference selection means and the addition are added. The specific effect is executed until the total time, which is the sum of the added time selected by the time selection means, elapses. As a result, even after the selected dynamic display reference time has elapsed, the specific effect can be executed until the addition time elapses, and by increasing the execution time of the effect in the display means, the effect can be produced in the display means. It has the effect of reducing the number of situations that are not being played and improving the enjoyment of the game.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G5
The specific effect executing means is
When it is determined by the determination means that the specific identification information does not appear, the addition time is selected by the addition time selection means, and the specific effect is executed based on the addition time (for example, a loss-time execution means). The gaming machine G6 comprising the variation setting process (S1213) S1405).

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines G1 to G5, the following effects are played. That is, when the determination means determines that the specific identification information does not appear by the loss execution means provided in the specific effect execution means, the addition time is selected by the addition time selection means, and the addition time is selected based on the addition time. A specific effect is executed. As a result, even if the game value is not given because the specific identification information does not appear in the dynamic display, the specific effect is performed in the display means longer than the acquired reference time, and the dynamic effect is performed in the display means. By reducing the number of situations in which is not performed, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from awakening.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G6
The addition time selection means is
The gaming machine G7 is provided with an addition / non-acquisition means (for example, S1405: Yes of the variation setting process (S1213)) that does not acquire the addition time when the specific identification information appears. ..

According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machines G1 to G6, the following effects are played. That is, the addition / non-acquisition means provided in the addition time selection means is configured so that the addition time is not acquired when the specific identification information appears. When the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display, the game shifts to a special game state (for example, a big hit) in which a predetermined game value is given immediately after the end of the dynamic display, and notification according to the special game state is given. It must be made. Therefore, even in the dynamic display in which the specific identification information appears, if the addition time is acquired and the specific effect based on the addition time is executed, the specific effect is interrupted in the middle with the start of the special gaming state. Therefore, the player may feel uncomfortable with the content of the production. Therefore, according to the gaming machine G7, when the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display, the addition time is not acquired. With this configuration, the end timing of the acquired dynamic time and the start timing of the special gaming state based on the specific identification information can be synchronized, so that the player feels uncomfortable without causing a discrepancy in the production. It has the effect of being able to provide a production that does not feel.

In the gaming machine G7
The selection means is
In the dynamic display, a pre-stage selection means (for example,) for selecting whether or not to display the pre-stage identification information (for example, “reach display”) which is a combination of the identification information constituting a part of the specific identification information. , Stop pattern selection counter C3),
The means for which addition has not been obtained is
The gaming machine G8, characterized in that the addition time is not acquired when the previous stage identification information is displayed in the dynamic display by the previous stage selection means.

According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the pre-stage selection means provided in the selection means selects whether or not to display the pre-stage identification information, which is a combination of the identification information constituting a part of the specific identification information, in the dynamic display. Then, when the previous stage identification information is displayed in the dynamic display by the previous stage selection means by the addition non-acquisition means, the addition time is not acquired. In the dynamic display including the previous stage identification information, it is general that a determination effect of whether or not the specific identification information appears is performed. Therefore, in order to execute the determination effect, a relatively long dynamic display is performed. The execution time is selected. In such a case, lottery information may be newly acquired by the acquisition means during the dynamic time. Therefore, there is little need to perform a specific effect that is performed for a longer time than the acquired dynamic time up to such a case. Therefore, in the gaming machine G8, when the execution time of the dynamic display for displaying the previous stage identification information is selected, the addition time is not acquired. With such a configuration, there is an effect that the effect time in the display means is not lengthened more than necessary and the player can be prevented from being awakened to the game.

<Group H: Configuration of holding device>
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game medium such as a ball enters the starting ball entry means while a dynamic display (variation effect) of a symbol or the like is performed by a display means such as a liquid crystal display device. , There is a case where the dynamic display related to the entry is suspended up to a predetermined number. Then, when the running dynamic display ends, the execution of the held unexecuted dynamic display starts.

Further, as this type of gaming machine, there is a pachinko machine provided with a holding means for holding a ball launched in a gaming area. In this pachinko machine, the ball is held by the holding means, and the ball held by the holding means is released based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the operation of pressing the release button by the player), and the ball is moved to the downstream side. It is configured to enter the ball into the provided entrance, and is configured to give a predetermined gaming value to the player (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-95235)).

However, in the conventional gaming machine, the purpose is to improve the interest by directly imparting the gaming value of the gaming ball held by the holding means to the winning opening based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the gaming value is imparted. Therefore, a large number of gaming balls must be reserved, and as a result, the area where the retaining means is installed in the gaming area becomes large, and the degree of freedom in designing the board surface in the gaming area is reduced. Therefore, it is necessary to improve the degree of freedom in design from the conventional gaming machine, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The invention of the H group was made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine while improving the interest of the game by using the ball held by the holding means. The purpose is to provide a gaming machine.

A launching means (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) that launches a game ball toward the game area, and
A first ball entry means (for example, left side special figure winning opening 77a or right side special drawing winning opening 78a) on which a game ball launched by the launching means can enter.
An acquisition means (for example, a special figure winning opening switch) for acquiring lottery information (for example, a jackpot random number counter C1) due to the entry of a game ball into the first entry means.
A determination means (for example, S401 of the variation start process (S307)) that makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means.
Selection means (for example, variation) for selecting dynamic display of identification information (for example, variation effect of the third symbol) performed in the display means (for example, the third symbol display device 81) based on the determination result by the determination means. Type counter CS1) and
A dynamic display executing means (for example, a voice lamp control device 113) for executing the dynamic display selected by the selection means in the display means is provided.
In a gaming machine that gives a player a predetermined gaming value when specific identification information (for example, "big hit display") appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means.
A second ball entry means (for example, a dummy winning opening 75) different from the first ball entry means, which imparts a predetermined game value when the game ball launched by the launch means enters.
A holding means (for example, a holding device 73) capable of holding a game ball flowing down a first flow path provided on the upper side of the game area of the second ball entry means, and a holding device 73.
Equipped with
The holding means is
A storage unit (for example, a holding ball holding unit 73b) capable of storing the game ball of 1 and
A guide unit (for example, opening / closing of a holding device) that is connected to the storage unit and guides the game ball flowing down the first flow path to the storage unit side when the game ball is not stored in the storage unit. Board 73a) and
When the game ball is stored in the storage unit, the guide unit is changed from the guided state to a non-guided state in which the game ball is not guided to the storage unit (for example, the rotation shaft unit 73c).
When a game ball is stored in the storage unit, a movable means (for example, a holding unit lock unit 73e1) that can change between a storage state in which the game ball is stored in the storage unit and a release state in which the storage state is released is released. When,
A driving means (for example, a holding device solenoid 73f) for driving the movable means into the stored state and the released state, and
When the predetermined first condition is satisfied, the release means (for example, the holding device drive flag 203f) that changes the movable means from the storage state to the release state by the drive means.
A second flow path (for example, a board surface return port 74) that allows the game ball whose storage state has been released by the release means to flow down to the second entry means side.
When a game ball flowing down the second flow path enters the second ball entry means, a predetermined effect execution means (for example, a hold symbol that is a dummy hold display) that executes a predetermined effect related to the dynamic display. Display) and
It is characterized by comprising a re-guidance means (for example, an opening / closing plate extrusion portion 73e2) that changes the guide means to the guide state when the movable means is changed from the release state to the storage state. Amusement machine H0.

According to the gaming machine H0, the gaming ball is launched toward the gaming area by the launching means, and the gaming ball launched by the launching means can enter the first ball entry means. Then, lottery information is acquired due to the entry of the game ball into the first entry means, and the determination means makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. Further, based on the determination result by the determination means, the selection means selects the dynamic display of the identification information performed by the display means, and the dynamic display selected by the selection means is displayed by the dynamic display execution means. Performed by means. Then, when the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means, a predetermined game value is given to the player. Here, a predetermined game value is given to the second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means when the game ball launched by the launching means enters the ball, and the second ball entry means thereof. The game ball flowing down the first flow path provided on the upper side of the game area of the above is configured to be holdable by the holding means. Further, in the case where one game ball is configured to be able to be stored by the storage unit provided in the holding means, is connected to the storage unit, and the game ball is not stored in the storage unit, the guide unit is used. , The game ball flowing down the first flow path is guided to the storage unit side. Then, when the game ball is stored in the storage unit, the movable means can change the storage state in which the game ball is stored in the storage unit and the storage state in which the game ball is stored and the release state in which the game ball is released. Further, when the movable means is driven into the storage state and the release state by the drive means and the predetermined first condition is satisfied, the release means changes the movable means from the storage state to the release state by the drive means. The game ball whose storage state has been released by the release means is flowed down to the second ball entry means side by the second flow path. Then, when the game ball flowing down the second flow path enters the second ball entry means, the predetermined effect execution means executes a predetermined effect related to the dynamic display. Further, when the movable means is changed from the released state to the stored state by the re-guidance means, the guiding means is changed to the guiding state. That is, when one game ball stored in the holding means enters the second entering means, a predetermined game value is given, a predetermined effect is executed in the dynamic display, and further, the holding means is executed. After releasing the game ball stored in the storage unit, the game ball can be guided to the storage unit when the game ball can be stored again. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect by efficiently using the game ball stored in the holding means, and to improve the interest of the game using the game ball stored in the holding means. , Has the effect. In addition, since it is possible to give a player a hobby even if the holding means does not have a configuration in which a large amount of game balls are stored and a large amount of game value is given, the holding means can be used to improve the fun while installing the holding means. There is an effect that the area can be reduced and the degree of freedom in board design in the game area can be increased.

<Group I: Book hold display and decoration hold display>
Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game medium such as a ball enters the starting ball entry means while a dynamic display (variation effect) of a symbol or the like is performed by a display means such as a liquid crystal display device. , There is a case where the dynamic display related to the entry is suspended up to a predetermined number. Then, when the running dynamic display ends, the execution of the held unexecuted dynamic display starts.

In this dynamic display, as a part of the interest of the game, when a special result other than the specific display result that can cause a big hit appears, various effects are executed (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 1). 2015-134027 (Japanese Patent Publication No. 2015).

However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The inventions of Group I have been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the interest of a game.

Acquisition means for acquiring lottery information (for example, jackpot random number counter C1) when a predetermined start condition is satisfied (for example, left side special figure winning opening 77a or right side special drawing winning opening 78a).
A determination means (for example, S401 of the variation start process (S307)) that makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means.
Based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic display of the identification information (for example, the variation effect of the third symbol) performed in the first display means (for example, the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81) is executed. A dynamic display execution means (for example, a voice lamp control device 113) is provided.
In a gaming machine that imparts a predetermined gaming value to a player when specific identification information appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means.
A storage means (for example, a reserved ball storage area 203c) for storing the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number.
A second display means (for example, the cockpit display area Db) capable of displaying basic effect number information (for example, the present hold display) corresponding to the number of the lottery information stored in the storage means, and
In the second display means, decoration (or auxiliary; the same shall apply hereinafter) for decorating (or auxiliary display; the same shall apply) the basic effect number information (for example, dummy hold display) for displaying the effect number information (for example, dummy hold display). A display means (for example, a hold symbol which is a dummy hold display) is provided.
The dynamic display execution means is
In the dynamic display, a determination effect of whether or not the specific identification information appears or whether non-specific identification information different from the specific identification information (for example, "missing display" or a gassechance pattern) appears. (For example, when all symbols such as the effect element of "low speed fluctuation", the "pseudo-ream" effect, the "gase pseudo-ren" effect, or the effect element of "normal reach" are stopped), and the determination effect execution means.
A game characterized by comprising effect executing means (for example, a slump effect storage area 223h and a hold information storage area 223i) for executing the determination effect corresponding to the basic effect number information and the decoration effect number information. Machine I0.

According to the gaming machine I0, the acquisition means acquires the lottery information when the predetermined start condition is satisfied, and the determination means makes a determination based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means. Then, based on the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic display execution means executes the dynamic display of the identification information in the first display means. Then, when the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means, a predetermined game value is given to the player. Here, the storage means stores the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number, and the basic effect number information corresponding to the number of lottery information stored in the storage means is the second display means. Is displayed by. Then, the decoration display means displays the decoration effect number information for decorating the basic effect number information in the second display means. Here, whether or not the specific identification information appears or the non-specific identification information different from the specific identification information appears in the dynamic display by the determination effect executing means provided in the dynamic display execution means. The judgment effect is executed. Further, the effect executing means provided in the dynamic display executing means executes the determination effect corresponding to the basic effect number information and the decoration effect number information. As a result, the basic effect number information and the decoration effect number information are displayed or deleted so as to be linked with the determination effect in which the specific identification information or the non-specific identification information appears, and the basic effect number information and the decoration effect number information correspond to each other. By executing the determination staging, there is an effect that the player can be provided with a staging that does not feel uncomfortable and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine I0
The effect executing means is
Additional effect selection means (for example, variable setting) for selecting an additional effect (for example, "Gase pseudo-ream 2" in "slump effect") to be additionally executed when the decoration display number information is displayed by the decoration display means. S1413) of the process (S1213),
The decorative display means
Before executing the additional effect selected by the additional effect selection means, a ball is placed in the dummy winning opening 75 before the execution of the pre-execution display means (for example, "Gase pseudo-ren 2") for displaying the decoration effect number information. A gaming machine I1 characterized in that a holding symbol, which is a dummy hold display, is displayed by entering a ball).

According to the gaming machine I1, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the additional effect selection means provided in the effect executing means selects the additional effect to be additionally executed when the decoration display number information is displayed by the decoration display means. Then, the pre-execution display means provided in the decoration display means displays the decoration effect number information before executing the additional effect selected by the additional effect selection means. As a result, the decoration effect number information can be displayed before the additional effect to be additionally executed is executed. Therefore, for example, the decoration effect number information and the basic effect number information are not displayed. It is possible to prevent the situation where the production is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved while providing a consistent production.

In the gaming machine I0 or I1
A launching means for launching a game ball (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) and
A first ball entry means (for example, left side special figure winning opening 77a or right side special drawing winning opening 78a) on which a game ball launched by the launching means can enter is provided.
The acquisition means
The lottery information is acquired due to the entry of the game ball into the first entry means, and the lottery information is acquired.
The pseudo display means is
A gaming machine I2 characterized in that information on the number of decorative effects is displayed due to the entry of a gaming ball into a second entry means different from the first entry means.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine I0 or I1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a game ball is launched by the launching means, and the ball launched by the launching means is configured to be able to enter the first ball entry means. Then, the lottery information is acquired by the acquisition means due to the entry into the first entry means. Here, the decoration display means displays the decoration effect number information due to the entry of the game ball into the second entry means different from the first entry means. As a result, it is possible to display information on the number of decorative effects related to the determination effect performed by the first display means due to the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means different from the first entry means. By entering the first ball entry means, it is possible to give the player the illusion as if the effect number information was displayed. As a result, while displaying the decoration effect number information based on the entry into the second ball entry means, even when the effect is performed based on the decoration effect number information, the player is provided with a natural effect. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine I2
The second ball entry means is
The gaming machine I3, characterized in that it is arranged in the vicinity of the first ball entry means.

According to the gaming machine I3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I2. That is, the second ball entry means is arranged in the vicinity of the first ball entry means. This makes it difficult to recognize whether the game ball that has flowed down in the vicinity of the first ball entry means has entered the first ball entry means or the second ball entry means, thereby making it difficult to recognize whether the game ball has entered the second ball entry means. Even when the decoration effect number information is displayed based on the ball entry, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the effect number information is displayed by entering the first ball entry means. As a result, even if the information on the number of decorative effects is displayed based on the entry into the second ball entry means and the pseudo effect is performed based on the information on the number of decorative effects, the player does not feel uncomfortable. It has the effect of being able to provide and improve the interest of the game.

The term "neighborhood of the first ball entry means" means, for example, an area adjacent to the first ball entry means or, in the case of having a plurality of first ball entry means, an area between the first ball entry means. Alternatively, a position where both the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means can be visually recognized at the same time is exemplified.

In the gaming machine I2 or I3
A holding means (for example, a holding device 73) that can be changed into a holding state for holding a game ball launched by the launching means and a release state for releasing the held game ball based on the establishment of a predetermined release condition. Equipped with
The second ball entry means is
The gaming machine I4, characterized in that the gaming ball released from the holding means is arranged at a position where the ball can enter.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines I2 or I3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the holding means is configured so as to be changeable between a holding state in which the game ball launched by the launching means is held and a release state in which the held game ball is released based on the establishment of a predetermined release condition. The second ball entry means is arranged at a position where the game ball released from the ball can enter. As a result, the game ball held by the holding means can be put into the second ball entering means based on the establishment of the predetermined release condition, and the decoration effect number information can be displayed. As a result, the reserved game ball can be immediately entered into the second ball entry means, and the decoration effect number information is displayed while displaying the decoration effect number information based on the ball entry into the second ball entry means. Even when the production is performed based on the above, there is an effect that the player can be provided with a natural production and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine I4
The effect executing means is
When the additional effect is selected by the additional effect selection means, a counting means (for example, a holding device drive timer 203 g) for counting whether or not it is time to display the decoration effect number information corresponding to the additional effect. , Equipped with
The holding means is
A release means (for example, a holding device solenoid 73f) for releasing the game ball held by the holding means when it is time to display the decoration effect number information according to the counting result by the counting means is provided. A game machine I5 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine I4, the following effects are played. That is, when the additional effect is selected by the additional effect selection means by the counting means provided in the effect executing means, it is counted whether or not it is the timing to display the decoration effect number information corresponding to the additional effect. .. Then, when it is time to display the decoration effect number information based on the counting result by the counting means by the releasing means provided in the holding means, the game ball held by the holding means is released. Thereby, the timing of entering the game ball into the second ball entry means and the timing of displaying the decoration effect number information corresponding to the additional effect can be associated with each other. As a result, while displaying the decoration effect number information based on the entry into the second ball entry means, even when the effect is performed based on the decoration effect number information, the player is provided with a natural effect. It has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine I5
The effect executing means is
A hold determination means (for example, a hold ball detection switch 73 g) for determining whether or not a game ball is held in the hold means, and
When it is time to display the decoration effect number information based on the counting result by the counting means, and the holding determination means determines that the game ball is not held by the holding means, the additional effect is added. The gaming machine I6 is provided with an effect changing means (for example, an effect conversion flag 223k) for changing the basic effect number information or the decorative effect number information into a non-digestive effect that is not digested.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, whether or not the game ball is held by the holding means is determined by the holding determination means provided in the effect executing means. Then, when it is time to display the decoration effect number information based on the counting result by the counting means by the effect changing means also provided in the effect executing means, the game ball is not held in the hold means by the hold determination means. When it is determined that, the additional effect is changed to a non-digestive effect that does not digest the basic effect number information or the decorative effect number information. As a result, when the game ball to be entered into the second ball entry means is not held by the holding means, the number of decoration effects information is not displayed, and the number of effects executed by the first display means and the second effect. It is possible to maintain consistency with the basic effect number information and the decorative effect number information displayed by the ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be provided with a natural effect and the player can be prevented from awakening the game.

In the game machine I6
A storage determination means (for example, a hold display setting process (S1208)) for determining whether or not the dynamic display that displays the specific identification information is included in the lottery information stored in the storage means.
A display changing means (for example, a hold change counter 223d) that changes the display mode of the basic effect number information and / or the decorative effect number information based on the determination result by the storage determination means is provided.
The effect changing means is
When the additional effect is changed to the non-digestive effect, the change-time changing means (for example, a hold rank-up command) that changes the display mode of the basic effect number information and / and the decorative effect number information by the display changing means. A game machine I7 characterized by being equipped with.

According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the memory discriminating means determines whether or not there is a dynamic display in which the specific identification information appears in the lottery information stored in the storage means, and the display changing means is based on the discriminating result by the storage discriminating means. Therefore, the display mode of the basic effect number information and / or the decorative effect number information is changed. Here, when the additional effect is changed to the non-digestive effect by the change-time changing means provided in the effect changing means, the display mode of the basic effect number information and / or the decorative effect number information is changed by the display changing means. .. As a result, even when the additional effect is changed to the non-digested effect because the game ball is not held in the holding means, the player can change the display mode of the basic effect number information and / or the decorative effect number information. By amplifying the expectation for the specific identification information, there is an effect that the variation of the production can be enriched and the fun of the game can be improved.

For any of the configurations of the gaming machines A0 to A9, the gaming machines B0 to B10, C0 to C10, D0 to D7, E0 to E9, F0 to F10, G0 to G8, H0, I0 to I7. The configuration limited to any one may be applied.

Further, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines B0 to B10, the gaming machines A0 to A9, C0 to C10, D0 to D7, E0 to E9, F0 to F10, G0 to G8, H0, I0 to I7 The configuration limited to any one may be applied.

Further, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines C0 to C10, the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B10, D0 to D7, E0 to E9, F0 to F10, G0 to G8, H0, I0 to I7 The configuration limited to any one may be applied.

Further, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines D0 to D7, the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B10, C0 to C10, E0 to E9, F0 to F10, G0 to G8, H0, I0 to I7 The configuration limited to any one may be applied.

Further, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines E0 to E9, the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B10, C0 to C10, D0 to D7, F0 to F10, G0 to G8, H0, I0 to I7. The configuration limited to any one may be applied.

Further, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines F0 to F10, the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B10, C0 to C10, D0 to D7, E0 to E9, G0 to G8, H0, I0 to I7. The configuration limited to any one may be applied.

Further, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines G0 to G8, the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B10, C0 to C10, D0 to D7, E0 to E9, F0 to F10, H0, I0 to I7 The configuration limited to any one may be applied.

Further, with respect to the configuration of the gaming machine H0, any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B10, C0 to C10, D0 to D7, E0 to E9, F0 to F10, G0 to G8, and I0 to I7. The configuration limited in the above may be applied.

Further, with respect to the configuration of the gaming machines I0 to I7, any one of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B10, C0 to C10, D0 to D7, E0 to E9, F0 to F10, G0 to G8, and H0 is used. The configuration limited in the above may be applied.

In these cases, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

In any of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B10, C0 to C10, D0 to D7, E0 to E9, F0 to F10, G0 to G8, H0, I0 to I7, the gaming machine is a slot machine. The featured gaming machine Z1. Among them, as a basic configuration of a slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and an operation means for starting (for example, an operation lever) can be operated. Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B10, C0 to C10, D0 to D7, E0 to E9, F0 to F10, G0 to G8, H0, I0 to I7, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. The gaming machine Z2 featuring. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. The identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time, provided that the prize is won (or passed through the operating port). Further, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (large winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the gaming machines A0 to A9, B0 to B10, C0 to C10, D0 to D7, E0 to E9, F0 to F10, G0 to G8, H0, I0 to I7, the gaming machines are pachinko gaming machines and slot machines. The gaming machine Z3, which is characterized by being a fusion of and. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "

It should be noted that the "ball entry" into the "special drawing winning openings 77a, 78a" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "predetermined starting condition" in the claims, and the "counters C1 to C3" described in the above embodiment. , CS1 value "corresponds to the" lottery information "acquired by the" acquisition means "in the claims, and the" third symbol "described in the above embodiment is the" identification information "described in the claims. Corresponding to, the "variation effect" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "dynamic display of identification information" described in the claims, and the "big hit display" described in the above embodiment is in the claims. Corresponding to the described "specific identification information", the "big hit" described in the above embodiment corresponds to the "predetermined game value" described in the claims.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
66 Out port (part of the second flow path)
72 Distribution ball inlet (part of the first flow path)
73 Holding device (part of holding means)
73a Holding device opening / closing plate (part of the guide)
73b Reservation ball holding part (part of storage part)
73c Rotating shaft (part of changing means)
73e1 Holding part Lock part (part of movable means)
73e2 Open / close plate extrusion (part of re-guidance means)
73f Hold device solenoid (part of release means, part of drive means)
73g Hold ball detection switch (part of hold determination means)
74 Board surface return port (part of the second flow path)
75 Dummy winning opening (part of the second ball entry means, part of the second increasing means)
76 Sorting device (part of sorting means)
77a Left side special drawing winning opening (part of acquisition means, part of first increasing means, part of predetermined first ball entry means)
78a Right side special drawing winning opening (part of acquisition means, part of first increase means, part of specific first ball entry means)
81 Third symbol display device (part of display means, part of first display means)
110 Main control device (part of judgment means, part of main control means)
112a Ball launch unit (part of launch means)
113 Voice lamp control device (part of dynamic display execution means, part of sub-control means)
203c Hold ball storage area (part of storage means)
203f Holding device drive flag (part of release means)
223d Hold change counter (part of storage discrimination means)
203e Main slump counter (part of execution determination means)
203g Holding device drive timer (part of counting means)
223c Dummy reserved ball count counter (part of related manifestation means)
223d Hold change counter (part of display change means)
223f Subslump flag (part of execution determination means)
223g Slump effect timer (part of total time execution means)
223h Slump effect storage area (part of specific effect execution means, part of second half selection means, part of residual selection means, part of total number of effect execution means, part of effect execution means)
223i Hold information storage area (part of total number of staging execution means, part of staging execution means)
223k effect conversion flag (part of effect change means)
C1 jackpot random number counter (part of lottery information)
C3 Stop pattern selection counter (part of the previous stage selection means)
CS1 variable type counter (part of selection means, part of time selection means, part of standard selection means)
Db cockpit display area (part of the second display means, part of the pseudo display means, part of the decorative display means)
Dm main display area (part of the first display means)
S101 External output processing (part of notification means)
S401 (part of judgment means)
S1117 Variable staging process (part of dynamic display execution means)
S1208 Hold display setting process (part of memory determination means)
S1213 (part of pattern selection means)
S1401 (part of time acquisition means)
S1405 (part of the execution means at the time of loss)
S1406 (Part of time selection means, part of extension time selection means, part of addition time selection means)
S1409 (part of the residual summing means)
S1411 (Part of the elapsed time setting means)
S1413 (Part of the total setting means, part of the additional effect selection means, part of the elapsed time setting means)
S1419 (part of timing determination means)
S1420 (part of special effect setting means, part of addition / deduction setting means)
S1421 (Part of special effect setting means, part of elapsed time counting means)
S1422 (part of special effect setting means)
S1708 (part of the staging element selection means)
Z1 to Z3 Left symbol row, middle symbol row, right symbol row (part of individual area change means)

Claims (1)

A launching means to launch a game ball,
The first ball entry means on which the game ball launched by the launch means can enter,
A second ball entering means, which is capable of entering a game ball launched by the launching means and is different from the first ball entering means,
At least an acquisition means capable of acquiring lottery information by entering the first ball entry means,
A determination means that can be determined based on the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means, and a determination means that can be determined.
A dynamic display executing means capable of executing a dynamic display of identification information performed in the first display means based on a determination result by the determination means is provided.
In a gaming machine capable of imparting a predetermined gaming value to a player when specific identification information appears in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means.
A storage means that can store the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number, and a storage means that can store the lottery information.
A second display means capable of displaying the first effect number information corresponding to the number of the lottery information stored in the storage means, and a second display means.
The second display means is provided with a second effect number information display means capable of displaying a second effect number information different from the first effect number information by entering the second ball entry means.
The dynamic display execution means is
When all the identification information changed with the start of the dynamic display is stopped in the first display means , the specific identification information appears or the predetermined game is different from the specific identification information. The number of times the determination effect of whether or not the non-specific identification information that cannot give value and whose aspect may change after the appearance appears corresponds to the total number of the first effect number information and the second effect number information. Feasible and
The gaming machine is
An execution time selection means capable of selecting the execution time of the dynamic display based on the lottery information stored in the storage means, and an execution time selection means.
After the lapse of the execution time selected by the execution time selection means, the mode of the non-specific identification information that has appeared can be changed after the lapse of time in a situation where the lottery information is not stored in the storage means. A gaming machine characterized by having means.

Images